T-M
TRANSPORTATION-MARKINGS
DATABASE: RAILWAY SIGNALS,
SIGNS, MARKS & MARKERS
2nd Edition
Brian Clearman
MOllnt Angel Abbey
2009
TRANSPORTATION-MARKINGS
DATABASE:
RAILWAY SIGNALS, SIGNS,
MARKS, MARKERS
TRANSPORTATION-MARKINGS
DATABASE:
RAILWAY SIGNALS, SIGNS,
MARKS, MARKERS
Part Iiii, Second Edition
Volume III, Additional Studies
Transportation-Markings: A Study in
Communication Monograph Series
Brian Clearman
Mount Angel Abbey
2009
TRANSPORTATION-MARKINGS A STUDY IN COMMUNICATION
MONOGRAPH SERIES
Alternate Series Title: An Inter-modal Study of Safety Aids
Alternate T-M Titles: Transport ration] Mark [ing]s/Transport Marks/Waymarks
T-M Foundations, 5th edition, 2008 (Part A, Volume I, First Studies in T-M) (2nd
ed, 1991; 3rd ed, 1999, 4th ed, 2005)
A First Study in T-M' The US, 2nd ed, 1993 (part B, Vol I)
International Marine Aids to Navigation, 2nd ed, 1988 (Parts C & D, Vol I)
[Unified 1st Edition ofParts A-D, 1981, University Press ofAmerica]
International Traffic Control Devices, 2nd ed, 2004 (part E, Vol II, Further
Studies in T-M) (lst ed, 1984)
International Railway Signals, 1991 (part F, Vol II)
International Aero Navigation, 1994 (part G, Vol II)
T-M General Classification, 2nd ed, 2003 (Part H, Vol II)
(lst ed, 1995, [3rd ed, Projected])
Transportation-Markings Database:
Marine, 2nd ed, 2007 (part Ii, Vol III, Additional Studies in T-M)
(1 st ed, 1997)
TCD, 2nd ed, 2008 (Part Iii, Vol III) (lst ed, 1998)
Railway, 2nd ed, 2009 (part Iiii, Vol III) (lst ed, 2000)
Aero, 1st ed, 2001 (part Iiv) (2nd ed, Projected)
Composite Categories Classification & Index, 1st ed, 2006 (Part Iv, Vol III)
(2nd ed, Projected)
Transportation-Markings: A Historical Survey, 1750-2000,2002 (Part J, Vol IV,
Final Studies in T-M)
A Truly Integrative Transportation-Markings [Alternate Title: Transportation
Markings as an Information System; Second Alternate Title: Transportation
Markings as a Communication System (part K, Vol IV, Projected)
Transportation-Markings General Table ofContents with Index, 6th ed, 2008
(lst ed, 2002; 2nd edition, 2003; 3rd ed, 2004, 4th ed, 2005, 5th ed, 2006)
Dedicated to my Grandparel1ts:
Catherine Abbie Brady Sauers, 1878-1919
Frederick William Sauers, 1869-1944
Annie Donaldson Clearman, 1879-1966
Frederick William Des Coudres Clearman, 1871-1968
Copyright (c) Mount Angel Abbey, 2008
All Rights Reserved
Library of Congress Cataloguing in Publication Data [1st ed]
Clearman, Brian
Database of transportation-marking phenomena: additional studies
/Brian Clearman.
p. cm. -- (Transportation-markings: v. 3 = pt. 1)
"Monograph series."
Includes indexes.
Contents: i. Marine -- ii. TCD -- iii. Rail-- iv. Aero
1. Transportation-markings--Databases. I. Title. II. Series:
Clearman, Brian.
Transportation-Markings: v. 3.
TA 1245. C56 1984 vol. 3.
629.04'5 a
[629.04'5]--DC21
97-25496
CIP
4
TRANSPORTATION-MARKINGS DATABASE:
RAILWAYSIGNALS, SIGNS, MARKS, MARKERS
PREFACE
ABBREVIAnONS
CHAPTER ONE
GENERAL RAILWAY SIGNAL TERMS
12
15
A Indexes
1 Categories 17
2 Alphabetical 41
B General Railway Signal Terms
1 Overarching Terms
a) Signal Terms 63
b) FixedlLinesidelRailway-RailroadlWayside Signal Terms 65
c) Other Overarching Terms 69
2 Possible Partial Overarching Terms
a) Energy & Technology-Related Terms 72
b) Physical-Morphological Overlapping Terms 75
c) Possible Overarching Terms-Miscellaneous 76
3 Primary Overarching Terms in Other Languages 78
4 Signal Components 82
5 Signal ConfIrmation 86
C Messages: Aspects & Indications
General Note
1 Basic Terms & Colors
a) Terms 88
b) Colors
1) Basic Colors 89
2) Color Combinations 90
3) Specialized Colors 91
4) Spatial ConfIgurations 92
5
5) Variant Color Combinations & Miscellaneous Color Uses 93
2 Aspects
a) Single-Aspect Terms 94
b) Two-Aspect Terms 94
c) Three-Aspect Terms 96
d) Four-Aspect Terms 97
e) Five-Aspect Terms 98
f) Other Aspects 98
3 Indications
a) Primary Forms 99
b) Specialized Forms 101
D Morphological Terms
General Note 105
1 Running Signal Terms
a) Overarching Signal Terms 106
b) Core Terms: Stop, Distant & Related Signal Terms
1) Stop Signal Terms 108
2) Starting Signal Terms 110
3) Distant Signal Terms 111
c) System Terms 113
d) Route & Junction Signal/Indicator Terms
1) Basic Terms 116
2) Other Route & Junction Terms 117
e) Other Signal Terms Pertaining to Running Operations 119
2 Subsidiary Signal Terms
a) Overarching Terms 123
b) Switch Indicator/Signals & Points Indicators/Signals 124
c) Shunt Signal/Indicator Terms
1) Overarching Shunting Terms 126
2) Physical Shunting Terms 127
3) Function-Related Shunting Signal Terms 128
d) Siding, Train Yard & Other Signals 131
3 Message-Related Signal Terms 133
4 Miscellaneous Signal Terms 133
E Systems (or Methods of Control)
6
----------------
1 Block Systems Terms
a) Block System Overarching Terms 136
b) Manual Block Signal Systems 139
c) Controlled Manual Block Systems 139
d) Automatic Block Systems 141
e) AbsolutelPermissive Systems 145
f) Other Block Terms 147
2 Interlocking Terms 149
3 Train Control Terms
a) Overarching Terms 154
b) Forms of Train Control 158
c) Subdivisions of Train Control
1) Train Stop 159
2) Speed Control 161
3) Traffic Control 162
4) CTC 162
d) Specific Named Systems 163
e) Miscellaneous Terms 169
CHAPTER TWO
ALL-LIGHTED SIGNALS
A Indexes
1 Categories Index 172
2 Alphabetical Index 180
B Overarching, Color Light, & Other All-Lighted Signal Forms
1 Overarching Terms 190
2 Color Light Signal Terms
a) Principal Forms
1) Basic Forms 191
2) Limited-Variant Forms 192
3) Variant Forms 193
4) Signalling Forms 195
b) Other Color Light Signal Forms
7
1) Distance Terms 196
2) Lens Arrangement Terms 197
3) Morphology & Other Terms 197
3 Searchlight Signal Forms 201
4 Other All-Lighted Terms
a) Single Lens Units [Frequently Morphological Dimension]
1) Terms Slightly More Morphological Than Physical 205
2) Somewhat More Morphological Than Physical 206
b) Dwarf Signals [Frequently Multiple Lens] 206
c) Undifferentiated Physical Forms 207
C Position Light, Color-Position Light & Symbolic (Alphabetic
Graphic, Geometric) Forms
1 Position Light Signal Terms 211
2 Color-Position Light Signal Terms 216
3 Symbolic Forms
General Note 218
a) Multi-Lamp/Theatre Indicators 218
b) Stencil Indicators 219
c) Other Forms 220
D Cab Signalling
1 Major Cab Signal Forms 221
2 Forms (Operational) of Cab Signals 224
3 Partly Morphological Terms 226
4 Other Cab Signal Forms 227
5 Cab Signals with Sound Dimension 228
CHAPTER THREE
PARTIALLY-LIGHTED SIGNALS
A Indexes
1 Categories Index
2 Alphabetical Index
B Semaphore Signal Forms
1 Overarching Terms
8
230
240
250
2 Specific Forms
a) Lower Quadrant & Upper Quadrant Signal Forms 252
b) Somersault Signals 254
3 Methods of Operation 255
4 Morphology-Related Terms 258
5 System-Related Terms 260
6 Other Forms 261
C Signal Boards, Disc Signals & Other Forms
1 Signal Boards
a) Overarching Terms & Terms in Other Languages 265
b) Specific Board Terms 267
2 Disc Signals
General Note
a) Disc Signals [Containing the Word Disc] 269
b) Banner Signals [Exposed Disc Forms Under the Banner Name] 273
3 Morphological-Related Terms
General Note 276
a) Switch Terms 276
b) Point Indicators 276
c) Route Indicators 276
d) Miscellaneous Forms 276
4 Other Forms
a) Crossbar Signals 281
b) Flag Signals 282
c) Lighted Signs & Boards 283
d) Track Indicators 283
e) Other Forms 284
CHAPTER FOUR
UNLIGHTED, AUDIO & RADIO SIGNS, SIGNALS, MARKERS,
MOVABLE & TIME INTERVAL & TRAIN ORDER FORMS
A Indexes
1 Categories
9
287
2 Alphabetical
B Unlighted Fixed Forms
General Note
1 Overarching Terms
2 Location Signs
3 Transportation Signs
a) Speed Control Signs
b) Location Signs
1) Advance Location Signs
2) Limits & Location Signs
3) Territory Limits Signs
4 Maintenance of Way Signs
5 Safety Signs
6 Marks & Markers
7 Boards & Posts
8 Plates & Flags Forms
9 Other Forms with Constant Messages
a) Blue Flag Forms
b) Electric Traction Forms
c) Miscellaneous Signs
10 Targets [with Changeable Messages]
General Note
a) Overarching Terms
b) Morphological-Related Terms
1) Shape
2) Color & Position
3) Terms Related to Railroad Functions
c) Other Terms
d) Switch Stand Forms
C Acoustical & Radio Signals
1 Acoustical Signals
a) Overaching Terms
b) Explosive Signals
c) Level Crossing/Grade Crossing Sound Signals
d) Cab Signal & Train Control Sound Signals
10
313
339
340
341
342
347
348
348
350
352
353
357
366
369
370
370
371
371
372
374
375
375
376
378
378
382
386
e) Other Forms 388
2 Radio Signal Terms 389
D Staff, Ticket, Token, Tablet, Train Order & Time Interval Terms
1 Staff Forms 393
2 Staff & Ticket Forms 397
3 Token Forms 399
4 Tablet & Tablet & Token Forms 400
5 Tokenless Forms 406
6 Train Order Forms 407
7 Time Interval Forms 411
8 Other Forms 412
E LeveVGrade Crossing Signs, Signals, Gates, Barriers & Related Devices
General Note 414
1 Integrative Level Crossing & Grade Crossing Terms 414
2 Lighted Level Crossing & Grade Crossing Signals
a) Free-Standing Signals 418
b) Signals Attached to Other Devices 422
3 Barriers & Gates
General Note 423
a) Overarching Terms 423
b) Barriers, Full Barriers & Gates
1) Automatic Barriers 423
2) "Manned" & Manually Operated Barriers 425
c) Half Barriers & Gates 426
4 Open Crossings 428
5 Sound Signals 428
6 Signs & Boards 429
7 Other Forms 432
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1 Books, Journals, Letters, Reports
11 Trade Literature
111 Signal Code Materials
11
434
448
450
PREFACE
The T-M Database (Parts Ii, Iii, Iiii, Iiv, Iv) draws together the several dimensions
ofTransportation-Markings. It shares this drawing together function with the
General Classification (Part H). Perhaps paradoxically both Parts draw together
by focussing on the individual T-M entity. The Database displays the unity and
commonality ofT-M by presenting each element in its separate state. Yet in that
process the full panopoly of T-M is unfolded including that shared and connected
state.
There are thousands of Transportation-Markings. In addition there are many
variant forms, alternate names, untold permutations. The sheer number of forms
may obscure the common thread of T-M that interweaves the multifoliated
multiplicity. Yet ultimately the multiplicity leads to the basic unit of safety of
whatever kind. The variety and diversity points to a restricted system ofmessages
serving one essential purpose: the promotion of safety. The perennial condundrum
of the one and the many is found here in T-M. But the one and the many also
intereact and explain one another.
The Database examines the four modes of rail, road, aero, marine T-M safety aids
in separate studies that remain components of the T-M Database. The amount of
labor required to prepare the Database precluded assembling all the modes ofT-M
in a single volume. A hoped-form composite edition may not be feasible since the
T-M Database covers well over 1,000 pages. The initial study examined Marine
Aids to Navigation while the second focussed on Traffic Control Devices. Both of
those studies have now appeared in a second edition. This segment is the second
edition of Railway Signals. This aspect lacks an overarching term though Signals
often includes other form of railway safety aids. Signs, Marks, Markers have been
added to Signal in order to form a more complete title. A second edition for Aero
Navigation Aids is projected.
A fifth unit for the T-M Database has been added in the form of a Composite
Classification and Index of terms appearing in the four earlier modal studies. That
unit will also require a second edition. It is possible that the Composite study will
12
be part of an infonnal troika that includes the integrating elements of one
additonal edition of the General Classification, and the hoped for final study of T-
M as a communication system.
There has been some confusion over the meaning of Transportation-Markings.
Some users have interpreted the tenn as constituting a virtual synonym for
Pavement Markings. This is not the case. T-M is a general, overarching tenn for
all types of safety aids. This perspective is reflected by the Library of Congress
which employs T-M as a general heading in its Subject Headings (albeit
somewhat implied for some fonns). The Library of Congress inclusion of various
kinds ofT-M includes that of Pavement Markings.
In order to reduce confusion a hyphen has been added that conjoins Transpor-
tation and Markings: Transportation-Markings instead of Transportation
Markings. The use of the hyphen results in an ofT-M as a single and unified
concept thereby reducing misunderstanding over the meaning of the tenn and
especially of mistaking T-M with one of its consititutent elements. The end results
is an overarching tenn that encompasses all fonns of safety aids including those
that incorporate Mark, Marker, or Marking in their names.
Frederick Crewes notes in his Random House Handbook that new compound
nouns are often hyphenated. New compound nouns require the hyphen in order to
signal to users that the resulting tenn is aunit not two independent words that exist
side by side which can be split apart without significant damage to the meaning..
Developed compound nouns may retain the hyphen, become one word or simply
drop the hyphen without losing its character. But a compound noun in its earlier
stage requires the hyphen. Regretably, only after a dozen years did it become
apparent how much confusion was generated by T M without the hyphen.
Hopefully a clearer and more emphatic Transportation-Markings can result.
Classification has been a vital part of T-M from the beginning of these studies. In
fact, the General Classification, Part H, is little more than a collection of classifi-
cations. It was originally intended that the Database would employ the
classification system of Part H extensively. This was regarded as a reasonable
expectation since the classification was heavily influenced by the primary studies.
13
But the use ofthe classification for the Database has proven to be problematical.
Various T-M forms and classification numbers are not always reflected in the
Database. And, conversely, terms of signficance in the Database are not always
reflected in the classification.
A major reason for this situation has been caused by the classification: the
classification employed largely official sources though sometimes retaining T-M
forms that were passing away. The reverse is also true: the amalgam of sources in
the Database may include forms little noticed in the classification and its sources.
The problem of sources and classifications was especially pronounced in Part Ii
though less so in Part Iii. It is quite pronounced with this segment, Part Iiii.
Sources are very decentralized and authors have been quite inventive in creating
variant forms for many terms.
It is now quite apparent that a reworking of the classification is needed that will
reflect both core sources and the many fragmented sources of the Database. This
is not possible at this time. Some limited alterations are included in the Database
but a more extensive revision will have to await another time. Taxonomies, of
course, are never finished; each variant form requires changes even before the
previous form has been implemented. Over the yers the classifications ofT-M
have been "revisted" many times. Now a further Classification Revisited Redux is
required.
The railway portion ofthe Database has four segments. The first segment includes
overarching terms, messages (a dimension of morphology), an second
morphology segment--that brings together functions and signal forms, and a
system dimensions. The second to the fourth segments take up all-lighted,
partially lighted, and unlighted and radio forms.
The Acknowledgements for this second edition are those of the first edition.
14
AARSC 1965
AARSM 1987
AREA 1929, 1987-88
ARSPAP-H, -SS,-D
ANR
ATT
AZD
B & 01927
B&O
B&M1981
Canada
CRIP
ERS
FRA-1, -2, -3
FRA-RAR
GFR
Gt Peninsula
K&T1988
K & W 1963, 1978
KNR
ABBREVIATIONS
Association ofAmerican Railroads Standard Code
Association ofAmerican Railraods Signal Manual
American Railway Engineering Association
-SAl, -SAl, -LSLSL, -MEMI, -I, -PES
American Railway Signal Principles & Practices:
History; Semaphore Signals; DefInitions; Symbols,
Aspects & Indications; Interlockings; Light Signals
& Lighted Signal Lamps; Mechanical &
Electro-Mechanical Interlocking, Principals &
Economics of Signaling
Australian National Railways: See Australia, South
Australia
Atlantic Track and Turnout
Czechoslovakia, Routing Interlocking
Baltimore and Ohio Catalogue
United States, Baltimore and Ohio Railway
Brigano & McCullough
UCOOR, Uniform Code of Operating Rules
Chicago, Rhode Island & PacifIc Railroad
-H, -C, -P, -V, -L, -M European Railway
Signallings:
Hotchkiss, Vilder, Catrain, Vallez, Pore,
Middelraud, Lindenberg
Federal Railroad Administration, Evaluation of
Signal/Control Systems, Tasks 1, 2, 3
Federal Railroad Administration Rules &
Regulation
German Federal Railways
India, Great Peninsular General Rules
Kuebler and Tarbox
Kitchenside & Williams
Korean, Korean National Railways
15
M&H
NSWR
NTL/TRT
Queensland R
REMC 1948
RGS 1981
RENFE 1978
RSD 1911
RONT
SA GA
SA BBB
SA SSS
SA TWR
SAR
UAR
UIC LGTF
DIC-COST
UK Military
UN 1954
URO
Victoria R
VGR
Western Australia R
McKensie & Holland
Australia, New South Wales Railways:
SI, SI-SL, ST. 1., Signalling
National Transportation Library/Transportation
Research Thesaurus
Australia, Queensland Railways, FS, SS-EL, SS
Railway Engineering & Maintenance Cyclopedia
Portugal
Spanish, Signal Codes
Railway Signal Dictionary
Railway Object Name Thesaurus
South Africa, General Appendix
South Africa, Basic Building Blocks of
Mechanical Signalling
South Africa, Signalling Standards
South Africa, Train Working Regulations
Australia, South Australian Railways
Union ofAfrican Railways, Draft International ...
Union Internationale des Chemins de fer,
Lexique General des Terms
UIC, Collection of Signal Terms
UK Military, Military Engineering
United Nations Technical Assistance Organization
United Railway Organization
Australia, Victoria Railways
Australia, Victoria Government Railways
Australia, Western Australia Railways
16
CHAPTER ONE
GENERAL RAILWAY SIGNAL TERMS
IA Indexes: Categories & Alphabetical
IAI Categories Index
General Railway Signal Terms (lB)
Overarching Signal Terms (lBI)
Signal Terms (lB I a) )
Signaling/Signalling
General Notes I, II
Signal
Signal Apparatus
Signal Appliance
Signal Device/Signalling Device
Signal System/Signalling System/Signalling System
Signal System, Device, or Appliance
Signal Implement
FixedlLinesidelRailway-RailroadlWayside Signal Terms (IBI b))
Fixed Signals
Fixed Railroad Signals
Fixed Signaling
Fixed Signal System/Fixed-Signal System
Fixed Trackside Signal
Fixed Wayside Signal/Fixed Wayside Systems
Line Signalling System
Lineside Equipment/Lineside Signal/Line-Side Signal/Lineside Signalling/
Lineside Visual Signal/Lineside Fixed Signal/Line-Side Signaling
Line-side Signal/Line-side Signaling
Rail Signals
Railroad Visual Signals
Railway Fixed Signals
Railway SignallRailroad Signal
17
General Note
Railway Signaling/Railway Signalling/Railroad Signaling
Railway Signaling & Control Systems/Railway Signaling & Control
Railway Signaling, Control & Communications Systems
Railroad Signaling System/Railway Signal System/Railroad Signal System/
Railway-Signal System/Railway Signalling System
Visual Lineside Signal
Wayside SignaVWayside Signal System/Wayside Signals &
Controls/Way-side Signals
Wayside Signaling
Other Overarching Terms (1 B1 c) )
Automatic or Remotely Operated Signals
Fixed Trackside SignallFixed Trackside Color Light Signal
Immovable Signals
Mechanical Automatic Signals
Mobile Signals
Motion Signals
Night Signal/Night Signaling
Nocturnal Signals
Optical Signals/Optical Signs & Signals
Patent Signals
Rail Signals
Railway Visual Signals
Roadway Signals
Stationary & Fixed Signals
Trackside Signalling/Trackside Signals/Track-Side Signals/Track Side
Signals/Trackside Railroad Signals/Trackside Railroad Signaling/Track
Side Signalling System
Track Signaling
Trackside Visual Signalling
Train Light Signals
Visual Lineside Signals
Visual SignalsNisual SignallingNisual Signalling System
Warning System
PossiblelPartial Overarching Terms (1B2) )
18
Energy & Technology-Related Terms (lB2 a) )
General Note
A.C. Signaling System
All-Electric Power Signalling
Electric Light Signal
Electric SignallElectric Signal System/Electric SignalinglElectric Signalling/
Electrically-Operated SignalslElectrically Operated Signals
Electro-Gas Signal
Electro-Mechanical Ground SignallElectro-Mechanical Signal
Electro-Mechanical System
Electro-Pneumatic SignallElectro-Pneumatic Signalling
Low-Pressure Electro-Pneumatic Signalling
Manually Operated Fixed Wayside Signals/Manually Operated Signals/
Manual Signals/Manual Signalling
Mechanical Signals/Mechanical Signalling
Mechanically Operated Signals
Motor-Operated Distant Signals
Power Operated SignalslPower-Operated SignalslPower Signalling/
Power-SignallinglPower-Worked Signals
Physical-Morphological Overlapping Terms (lB2 b) )
General Note
Main Route Signals
Main Signal/Main Line Signals/Mainline Signal/Mainline Signaling &
Control
Primary Signal
"Universal" Signal
Symbol Information Processing
Possible Overarching Terms-Miscellaneous (lB2 c) )
Functional Signal System
Rail Aids
Railroad Traffic Control Devices
Safe Working/Safeworking/Safe-Working/Safeworking Appliances
Safety Aids
Safety Signals
Signal-&-Control Systems/Signal & Control Systems
19
Signal & Switch Systems
Signalling Devices
Trackside Devices
Trackside Railway Visual Signalling Systems/Trackside Visual Signalling
Trackside Warning Signals
Train Protection Equipment
Train Signals & Controls
Visual & Audible Signals
Wayside Devices
Primary Overarching Terms in Other Languages (lB3)
[Terms in other languages follow the English-language terms listed below]
General Note
Signal
Signaling/Signalling
Fixed Signal
Light Signal
Lineside Signal
Mechanical Signal
Semaphore Signal
Shunting Signal
Signal Board
Switch Signal
Visual (Or Visible) Signal
Signal Components (lB4)
General Note
Bracket Mast
Bracket Post
Bracket Signal
Bracket Structure
Bridge Mast
Bridge Structure
Cantilever Branch Post
Cantilever Structure
Doll
Doll PolelDoll Post
20
21
Doll Signal
Finials/Signal Finials (Flat Cap/Parachute Type/Pinacles
Fresnel Marine Type Lens
Gantry/Signal Gantry
Ground Signal Lamp
Lamp
Lattice Post Bracket Signal/Lattice Post Signal
Left-Hand Bracket Signal
Lens
Mast
Mechanism Cover
Pivot Light
Roundel
Signal Bracket
Signal Bridge
Signal Dolls
Signal Equipment
Signal Glass
Signal Glassware
Signal Head
Signal Lamp
Signal Lenses
Signal Mast
Signal Mechanism
Signal Post Cap/Signal Post Finial
Tubular Steel Bracket Signal
Visual Display Unit
Signal ConfIrmation (lB5)
General Note
Arm Repeater
Lamp Out Repeator
Light Indicator
On/Off Indicator
Repeator
Signal Repeator-Electric
-Electric Semaphore Repeator
-Signal Arm Repeator
-Slot Repeator
Messages: Aspects & Indications Terms (l C)
General Notes, I, II, III, IV
Basic Terms & Colors (ICI)
Terms (lCI a) )
Aspect I
Aspect II
Aspect Sequences
Aspect, Signal/Signal Aspect
Indications
Signal Indication
Signal Code
Colors (lCI b) )
Basic Colors (l C2 b) I) )
General Note
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Combinations (lCI b) 2) )
GreenlYellow//Yellow/Green
YellowlRed, GreenlRed, Red/Green
Specialized Colors (lCI b) 3) )
General Note
Blue
White
Amber
Yellow-Orange
Orange
Purple & Violet
Lunar White
Spatial Configurations (lCI b) 4) )
22
Variant Color Configurations & Miscellaneous Color Uses (ICI b) 5) )
General Note
Restricted Red
Traffic Red
Intermediate Yellow
Intermediate Green
Signal Blue
Nels Yellow
Kerosene Pink
Double Red
Double Amber
Double Yellow
Double-Yellow Signal
Flashing Yellow Aspect
Flashing Signal Yellow Aspect
Flashing Double Yellow Aspect
Selenium Ruby Glass
Double Yoke (Double Yellow)
Frosted White
Ginger 'Un (Distant Signal with Caution Indication)
"Lightly-Tinted"
Lunar-White Lamp/Lunar White Marker Lamp, King
Red Eye
Yellow Eye (Double Yellow)
Yellow-Tinted Lenses
Aspects (lC2)
General Note
Single-Aspect Terms (lC2 a)) (8 Forms)
Two Aspects Terms (lC2 b) (35 Forms)
Three Aspect Terms (l C2 c) (46 Forms)
Four Aspect Terms (lC2 d) (22 Forms)
Five Aspect Terms (lC2 e)) (5 Forms)
Other Aspect Terms (lC2 f) )
Automatic Colour Light
Multi Aspect (lO Forms)
23
Cab Signal Aspect
Day & Night Aspect
Flashing Aspect
Luminous Aspect
Position Light Aspects/Position-Light Signals
Stop-&-Proceed Aspect
APB Signal with 3 & 4 Aspects
ThreelFour Aspects
Three/-Four Aspect Signal Systems
Indications (lC3)
General Note
Primary Forms (lC3 a) )
Clear Signal
Line Clear
Proceed Signal
Caution Signal
Approach Signal
Stop Aspect/Stop Signal
DangerlDanger Signal
Preliminary Caution Signal
Specialized Forms (l C3 b) )
Limited Clear SignallLimited-ClearlMedium ClearlMedium Clear Signal/
Slow-Clear/Slow Clear Signal
Limited Approach SignallMedium Approach Signal/Medium Clear/
Medium Advance Approach Signal [US only]lMedium Approach Slow
Signal[US only]/Slow Approach SignallRestricting SignallRestricting
AspectlRestricting Indication
Approach Limited!Approach Limited SignaVApproach Medium!Approach
Medium SignaVApproach Slow Signal/Advance Approach Medium Signal!
Advanced Approach Signal
Stop & Proceed Signal!Stop-&-Proceed! Grade Signal/Station Protection
SignallTake (Or Leave) Siding Signal
Medium Signal
Caution, Low-Speed Signal
Caution, Medium-Speed Signal
24
Clear, Medium-Speed Signal
Caution Normal Speed Indication
Normal Speed Signal
Clear, Normal-Speed Signal
CCOOR:
Stop
Stop & Proceed
Permissive Take Siding
Approach
Clear
Approach Diverging Route
Approach Medium
Clear-Diverging
Restricting
Spring Switch
Slow-Clear
UCOOR:
Clear
Advance Approach
Diverging
Approach Medium
Approach Diverging Approach Medium
Approach Diverging
Diverging Approach
Low
Stop & Proceed
Stop
Aspect, False RestrictivelFalse Restrictive Aspect
Aspect, Phantom SignallPhantom Signal
False ClearlFalse-Clear SignallFalse Proceed
Potential False Proceed Condition (PFPC)
Morphological Terms (lD)
General Note I, II
Running Signal Terms (lDl)
General Note
25
Overarching Signal Tenns (lD1 a) )
General Notes
Running Signals
Primary Signals
Running Line Signals
Color Light Running Signals
Main Signals
Main Line Signals/Main-Line Signals
Mainline Signals
Main Line Running Signals
Main Running Stop Signals
Core Tenns: Stop, Distant & Related Signal Tenns (lD 1 b) )
Stop Signal Tenns (lD1 b) 1) )
Advance Signals
Advanced Signals
Buffer Stop Signals
Coligny-Welch Signal Lamp
Dead Signal
Fixed Stop Signal
Home Signal/Home-Signal
Inner Home/Outer Home
Intennediate Block Home Signal
Rear Home Signal
Red BoardlRed Eye
Signal, Home
Outer Home SignallInner Home SignallIntennediate Home Signal
Second Home Signal/Third Home Signal/Home No. 1/Home No.2
Splitting Home Signal
Splitting Semaphore
Splitting Signal
Stop Signal
Color Light Stop Signal/Automatic Stop Signal/Semaphore Stop Signal/
A.P. Pennissive Stop Signal
Up, Down Distant, Home Starter, Advance Starter
Starting Signal Tenns (1D1 b) 2) )
26
Starting Signal
Starter Signal
Advanced Starter/Advanced Starting Signal!Advanced Starting Signal
Outer Advance Signal
Section Signal
Starter Semaphore/Advanced Starter Semaphore
Distant Signal Terms (lDl b) 3) )
Auxiliary Signal
Distant Signal
Distant Semaphore Signal
Distant (Warning) Signal
Fishtail
Fixed Distant/Fixed Distant Signal
Hall Distant Signal
Signal DistantlDistant-Signal
Warner Signal
Warning Signal
Outer Distant Signal/Inner Distant Signal/Intermediate Distant Signal/Second
Distant Signal
Power-Operated Distant Signals/Semaphore Distant/Distant Signal Color
Light/Color Light Distant Signal
Advance Signal
Approach Signal
Unworked Distant Signal
Signal, Distant
Splitting Distant Signal/Splitting Distant
System Terms (lDl c) )
Absolute Signal
Advanced Section Signal
Automatic Block Signals
Automatic Signals
Block Signal
Block & Interlocking Signals
Controlled Signals
Holding Signals
27
Interlocking Dwarf Signals
Intermediate Block Signals
Intermediate Signal
Interlocking Signals/Signals, Interlocking
Permissive Signal
Semi-Automatic Interlocking Signals
Semi-Automatic Signals
Route & Junction Indicators/Signals (1D1 d) )
Basic Terms (lD1 d) 1) )
Directing Signal
Direction Indicator
Entry (Route) SignallEntry (Route) Light Signal
FeathersIHorns
Junction Indicator/Junction Signal
Route Signal
Route Indicator
Routing Signals
Turnout Signal
Other Route & Junction Terms (lD1 d) 2) )
General Note
,Arbour LightsIHarbour Lights
Banjo
Five-Light Junction Indicator
Four-Way Shunting Signal
Junction Semaphore
Lunar Lights
Position Light Junction Indicator
Right-Hand Junction Indicator
Stencil Indicator/Stencil Route IndicatorlRoute Indicator Stencil Light
Directional Route Indicator
Low Speed Route Indicator
Shunt Route Indicator
Theatre-Type Route Indicator/Theatre-Type Route Indicator/Theatre
Multi LamplRoute Indicator
Multi-Lam Route-IndicatorlMulti Lamp Route Indicator
28
Toton Route Indicator
Two-Way Junction Indicator
Two-Way Stencil Indicator
Other Signal Tenns Pertaining to Running Operations (lDl e) )
AB Entry Signal
Backing Signal
Non-Stop Permissive Automatic Signal
Wrong Road SignaVWrong-Road Signal
Station Signals
Station Protection Signals
Platfonn Signals
Platfonn Starting Signals
Precaution Signals
Protecting Signals
Repeating Signal
Repeater Signal
Repeat Signal
Semaphore Repeater
Banner Repeater Signal
Banner-Repeating Signal
Electric Repeater Signal
Fog Signal Repeater
Signal Repeater
Tunnel Signal
Tunnel Junction Signal/Tunnel Repeater Signal
Tonnage Signal
Grade Signal
Co-Acting Signal
Co-Acting Arms
Protection Signal
Yellow Ground Disc
Tenns in Combination:
General Note
Wamer&Home
Warner Home & Starter
29
~~~----------
Warner Home Starter & Advance Starter
Outer Homer & Starter
Outer Home Warner Starter & Advanced Starter
Subsidiary Signals (lD2)
Overarching Term (lD2) a) )
Subsidiary Signal
Switch Indicators/Signals & Points Indicator/Signals (lD2 b))
Catchpoint Indicators/Runway Catchpoint IndicatorslIndicators for
Runaway Catchpoints/Catchpoint Discs
Colour Light Points Indicator
Electric Catchpoints Indicator
Electric Point Indicator
Facing Points Indicator
Mechanical Points Indicator
Points & Indicators
Points Indicator
Points Signals/Signal Points Indicator
Points Indicator--Chevron TypelPoints Indicator--Arrow Type
Switch Indicator
Trap Points Indicator
Shunt SignallIndicator Terms (lD2 c) )
General Note
Overarching Shunting Terms (lD2 c) 1) )
General Note
Shunt Indicator
Shunt Signal/Shunting Signal
Signal for Shunting/Signals for Shunting Movements
Switching Signal
Physical Shunting Terms (lD2 c) 2) )
General Note
Disc Shunt/Disc Shunting Signal/Shunting Disc Signal
Ground Shunt Signal/Shunting Ground Disc
Mechanical Shunting Signal
Position Light ShuntIPosition Light Shunt Signal/Shunt Position Light!
Shunt Signal (Position Light)
30
Power-Operated Shunt Signal
Dwarf Shunt/Shunt Dwarf
Shunt Light/Shunting Light
Functioning-Related Shunting Signal Terms (lD2 c) 3) )
Backing Signal
Calling-On Signal
Close-Up Signal
Draw-Ahead ShuntJDraw-Ahead Signal/Draw-Ahead Position-Light
Subsidiary Signal
Elevated Shunting Signals
Facing Shunt Signal
High Shunting Signal
Humping SignallHump Shunt Signal
Independent Shunt Signal
Limits of Shunt Signal
Main/Shunt Signal
Miniature Arm Shunting SignallMiniature Arm Shunt Signal
Route Indicating Signal
Running Shunt Signal
Running Subsidiary Shunt Signal
Set-Back Signal
Shot Shunting Signal
Shunt Ahead Signal/Shunt-Ahead Signal
Shunt Route Indicator
Ground Signal
Sub-Shunting Signal
Subsidiary Shunting Signal
Siding Shunt Signal
Warning Signal
Yellow Shunt Signal
Siding, Train Yard & Other Signals (lD2 d) )
Closing-Up Signal
Goods or Siding Signal
Hump Signal/Humping Signal
Leave Siding Indicator
31
Marshalling Yard Signal
Outlet Signal
Siding Signal
Taking Siding Signal/Take Siding Indicator
Yard Exit Signals
Dead-End Signals
Directing Signals
Terminal Signal
Message-Related Signal Terms (lD3)
General Note
Absolute Signal
All Right Signal
Caution Signal
Cautionary Signal
Permissive Signal
Permissive Stop Signal
Proceed Signal
Miscellaneous Signal Terms (lD4)
Accept Signal/Accepting Signal
Appendant Signal
Arrival Signal
Deceleration Signal
Dragging Equipment Signal
Intermediate Signal
Outer Signalling
Platform Line Signal
Reversible Road Warning
Snow Shed Territory with Color Lights
Slide Detector Fence
Station Departure Color-Light Signal
Subsidiary Signal
Temporary Signal
Track Occupancy or Departure Signal
Trolley Line Signal
Yard Track Signal
32
Systems (Alternate Title: Methods of Control) (lE)
General Note
Block System Tenns (lEI)
Block Overarching Tenns (lEI a) )
General Notes, I, II, III
Block Signal System
Block Signaling/Block Signalling
Block System of Signals
Block System Working
System, Block Signal
Block System
Block Working/Block-Working
Block
Block or Space Interval/Space or Block System
Blocking Signal
Fixed Block Signal SystemlFixed BlocklFixed-BlocklFixed-Block System
Advanced Fixed Block/Advanced Fixed-Block
Closed Block System
Electro-Pneumatic Block Signal System
Manual Block Signal Systems (lEI b))
Block-Manual
Computer-Assisted Manual Block System/Computer-Aided Block System
Manual BlocklManual Block System
Manual Block-Remote Control
Manual Block Signaling/Manual Block Signalling
Manual Block Signal System
Manual Block Signal System-Space Interval
Manual Blocking
Manual Signalling
Controlled Manual Block System (lEI c))
Controlled Manual Block/Controlled Manual Block System/Controlled
Manual Block Signal System/System, Controlled Manual Block/
Controlled-Manual Block-Signalling/CMBS
Lock-&-Block System/Lock & Block System/Lock & BlockIBlock Locking
33
Sykes Lock & Block!Sykes Lock & Block SystemlSiemens-&-Halske Lock-
& Block System
Automatic Block Terms (lEI d) )
ABS SystemlABSS/ABS
Automatic Block!Automatic Block SystemlAutomatic Block Signal System
Automatic Block Signalling
Automatic Block Signalling on Double Track
Automatic Block Signalling on Single Track
Automatic Electric Block System
Automatic Signalling
Auto-Manual Block System
Block with Centralized Equipment/Centralized Automatic Block
Code Track Automatic Block!Coded Current Automatic Block
Continuous Automatic Block Signaling
Control System for Single-Track Signaling
Double-Track Block Signalling
Multiple-Block Signaling
Non-Centralized Automatic Block
Roadway Automatic Block Signal System
Route with Automatic Working
Semi-Automatic Block Signalling
2/3/4 Block Signaling/2-, 3-, 4-Block Signaling
Three-Block Signaling
3-,4-, 5-Indication Signaling
3-Block Signaling
Two-Block Automatic Signalling/Two-Block Automatic SystemlThree-Block
Automatic Signalling/Three Block Automatic SystemlSingle-Track
Automatic SystemlSingle-Track Automatic Signalling/Single-Track
Automatic Signal SystemlAPB Single-Track Signaling
AbsolutelPermissive Terms (lEI e) )
Absolute Block!Absolute Block System
Absolute Block Working
Absolute Blocking
Absolute Permissive Block!Absolute Permissive Block Signalling/Absolute-
Permissive Block!Absolute Permissive Block System
34
A.P. Block System
A.P.B. Scheme of Signaling/Absolute-Permissive-Block Scheme of
Signaling/A.P.B. Control Systems
Absolute & Permissive Signaling on Double Track
Permissive BlocklPermissive Block SystemlPermissive System
Permissive Block Working
Permissive Manual Block
Permissive Working
Supplementary Absolute Block
System, Absolute Permissive Block/Systems, APB
Other Block Terms (lEI t) )
APB, Automatic Permissive Block
Block Instrument
Double Line Block/Single Line Block
Kingsman Block System
Moving Block Signalling
Moving BlockIMoving-BlockIMoving Block Signal/Moving Block System
Nachod Signal System
Overlap Block Signal System
Overlap Scheme of Signaling
Radio Block/Radio Block System
Radio Control Equipment
Single Line Block Instrument
Telegraph BlocklTelephone Block
Interlockings (lE2)
Interlockings
Interlocking Signalling
All-Electric Interlocking
All-Mechanical Interlocking
Approach Locking
Automatic Interlocking
Cabin Interlocking
Computer Interlocking
Electric InterlockinglElectrical InterlockinglElectrical Signal Interlocking
Electro-Mechanical Interlocking
35
Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking
Geographical Circuitry Interlocking
Interlockings, Relay Type
Interlocking Traffic Control System
Key Interlocking Signalling
Manual Interlocking
Mechanically-Interlocked Points & Signals
Mechanical Interlocking
MicroloklMicrolok II
Power Interlocking
Relay InterlockinglRelay Interlocking System/All-Relay Interlocking
Remote Control Interlockings
Route Control InterlockinglRoute-Control Interlocking
Route Interlocking
Satellite Interlocking
Sequence-Switch Interlocking
Signal/Point Interlocking
SSI Systems
Spoorplan Interlocking
Train Control Terms (lE3)
Overarching Terms (lE3 a) )
Automatic Train Control
General Note
Automatic Train Control System/Automatic Train-Control System
Automatic Train Operation!Automatic Train Operation System
Automatic Train Protection
Automatic Train Supervision
Automatic Train Protection & Control
ATP/ATC
BRATP
Communication (s)-Based Train Control/Transmission-Based Signaling
(TBS)
Continuous Transmission Systems/Intermittent System
Control System
Intermittent Contact System ofTrain Control
36
Safety Control System/Train Operation Safety Control System
System, ATC
Train ControllTrain-ControllTrain Control SystemlTrain-Control System
Signal & Control System
Telephone Train Control
Train Control System
Train Control Devices/Train-Control Devices
Train Control Equipment
Forms of Train Control (lE3 b) )
Continuous Train Control System
European Train Control System
Intermittent Control
Continuous-Induction System
Miller Train Control
Intermittent Inductive Train Control
Continuous Automatic Train Control (CATC)
Continuous Train Control
Inductive Train Control
Train Control Systems, Devices & Appliances
Subdivisions of Train Control (lE3 c) )
Train Stop (l E3 c) 1)
Mechanical Roadside Trip Type Stop/Trip Arm System
Coded-Continuous Train Stop System
Train Stop Devices
Trip-Stop Device/Automatic Trip Stop Device
Automatic Stop/Automatic Stop System
Train Stop/Train Stop System
Automatic Stop
Automatic Stop Equipment
Electro-Pneumatic Train Stop
Automatic Train Stop/Automatic Train-Stop/Automatic Train Stop System
Automatic Train-Stop Devices
Intermittent Inductive Train Stop
Motor-Operated Automatic Stop
Speed Control (lE3 c) 2) )
37
General Note
Speed Control/Speed Control Devices
Speed Supervision-TVM
Automatic Speed Supervision (ASR)
Traffic Control (IE3 c) 3) )
Control/Train or Traffic Control
CTC (IE3 c) 4) )
Electronic CTC/CTC & Remote Control System/Block & Electronic CTC
Coded CTC
Centralized Traffic Control (CTC)/CTC Systems
CTC Railway Signaling System
Way Interface System
Specific Named Systems (IE3 d) )
Train Location System
Train Situation Indicator (TSI)
Advanced Train Control System (ATCS)
Automatische Trein Beinvloeding (ATB)
Rail Operation Control System
Transmission Voie Machine, TVM
Linien Zug Beein Flusoung, LZB
Transmission Beacon Locomotive, TBL
Coded Track Circuit Automatic Block, BACC
Ebicab/Control De Viesse A Balise, KVB
INDUSI (Induktive Zugsicheeving)
AATC - Advanced Automatic Train Control
ACSES - Advanced Civil Speed Enforcement System
ASFA
ASR, Automatic Route Setting
ATB/PLP
ATIS, Advance Traffic Information System
ATLAS
COMTRAlCOSMOS/SNIIS
EPLRS
Flexiblok System
ICTC Systems
38
Incremental Train Control System
Incremental Train Control System (ITCS)
Microblok
MicrolokiMicrolok II
Positive Train ControlfPositive Train Control System/PTC
PTS= Positive Train Separation
RIT, Train Management System
SELTRAC
SIGNUM
SNCF Signalling System for VHSNHS System of Signalling & Signalling
System for High Speed
Crocodile
Automatic Warning System/BRAWS
Combined Train Control
(ARES) Advanced Railroad Electronic System
Identra
On-Board Speed Control System
Phar
Ultrablok
Miscellaneous Terms (lE3 e) )
Driver Warning System
Micro Processor-Based Signalling System
Normal Danger System
Occupation Protection Equipment (5)
Electric Occupation Key
Engine Shunting Voucher
Engineering Token
Lockout System Equipment
Patrolman's Lockout Device
Signalling Systems for Other Staff (6)
Signals from Platform Staff To:
Driver/Guard
Passengers
Signalman
39
Station Staff Warning Systems
Trackside Staff Warning Systems
TBS, Transmission-Based Signalling
TOPS Equipment
Tracker Ball (IECC)
Trackside Staff Warning Systems!Trackside Staff Warning Systems!
Train Operated Warning System
Train-Operated Points System
40
1A2 Alphabetical Index
AATC-Advance Automatic Train Control
AB Entry Signals
ABS SystemlABSS/ABS
Absolute & Permissive Signaling on Double Track
Absolute Signal
Absolute Block!Absolute Block System
Absolute Block Working
Absolute Working
AbsolutelPermissive Terms
Absolute Permissive Block!Absolute Permissive Block Signalingl
Absolute-Permissive Block!Absolute Permissive Block System
Accept Signal!Accepting Signal
A.C. Signaling System
ACSES, Advance Civil Speed Enforcement System
Advance Signals
Advanced Approach Signal: Approach Limited
Advanced Starter!Advanced Starting Signal!Advance Starting
Signal
Advanced Signal
Advanced Fixed Block!Advanced Fixed-Block
Advanced Section Signal
Advanced Train Control System (ATCS)
Amber
All-Electric Interlocking
All-Electric Power Signalling
All-Mechanical Interlocking
All Right Signal
A.P. Block System
Appendant Signal
APB, Automatic Permissive Block
A.P.B. Scheme of SignalinglAbsolute-Permissive-Block Scheme
ofSignaling/A.P.B. Control Systems
APB Signal with 3 & 4 Aspects
41
165
119
141-42
146
114, 133
144
144
145
145
14546
133
72
165-66
108, 113
102
111
108
138
114
164
91
150
72-73
150
133
146
134
147
146
99
Approach Limited!Approach Limited Signal/Approach Medium!
Approach Medium Signal/Approach Slow Signal/Advanced
Approach Medium Signal[US]/Advance Approach Signal
[Also US only]
Approach Signal
Approach Locking
,Arbour Lights/Harbour Lights
(ARES) Advanced Railroad Electronic System
Arm Repeater
Arrival Signal
ARS, Automatic Route Setting
ASFA
Aspect
Aspect I, II
Aspects & Indications
Aspect, False Restrictive/False Restrictive Aspect
Aspect, Phantom SignallPhantom Aspect
Aspects, Sequence
Aspect, Signal/Signal Aspect
ATLAS
ATB/PLP
ATIS, Advance Traffic Information System
ATP/ATC
Auto-Manual Block System
Automatic Block!Automatic Block System!Automatic Block
Signal System
Automatic Block Signals
Automatic Block Signaling
Automatic Block Signalling on Double Track
Automatic Block Signalling on Single Track
Automatic Block Terms
Automatic Colour Light
Automatic Electric Block System
Automatic Interlocking
Automatic or Remotely Operated Signals
42
102
100, 113
150
117
169
86
134
166
166
94,97
88-89
88
104
104
89
89
166
166
166
155
142-43
142
114
142
142
142
141
98
142
150
69
Automatic Signal 114
Automatic Signalling 142
Automatic Speed Regulation (ASR) 162
Automatic Stop 160
Automatic Stop/Automatic Stop System 160
Automatic Stop Equipment 160
Automatic Train Control 154
Automatic Train Control Equipment 154
Automatic Train Control System!Automatic Train-Control System 154
Automatic Train Operation/Automatic Train Operation System 154-55
Automatic Train Protection 155
Automatic Train Protection & Control 155
Automatic Train Stop/Automatic Train-Stop/Automatic Train
Stop System 161
Automatic Train-Stop Devices 161
Automatic Train Supervision 155
Automatic Warning SystemIBRAWS 168
Automatische Trein Beiinvloeding, ATB 164
Auxiliary Signal 111
Backing Signal
Banjo
Banner Repeater Signal
Banner Repeating Signal
Basic Terms & Colors
Block
Block & Interlocking Signal
Block Instrument
Block-Manual
Block or Space Interval/Space or Block System
Block Overarching Terms
Block Signal/Signal, Block
Block Signal System
Block Signalling/Block Signaling
Block System of Signals
43
120, 127
117
121
121
88
138
114
147
139
138
136
114
137
137
137
Block System
Block System Terms
Block System Working
Blocking Signals
Block with Centralized Equipment/Centralized Automatic Block
Block Working/Block-Working
Blue
BRATP
Bracket Mast
Bracket Post
Bracket Signal
Bracket Structure
Bridge Mast
Bridge Structure
Buffer Stop Signal
Cab Signal Aspect
Cabin Interlocking
Calling-On Signal
Cantilever Branch Post
Cantilever Structure
Catchpoint IndicatorlRunway Catch Point IndicatorlIndicator for
Runaway Catchpoints/Catchpoint Discs
Caution, Low-Speed Signal
Caution, Medium-Speed Signal
Caution Normal Speed Signal
Caution Signal (2)
Cautionary Signal
Centralized Traffic Control (CTC)/CTC Systems
Clear Signal
Clear, Medium-Speed Signal
Clear, Normal-Speed Signal
Close-Up Signal
Closed Block System
Closing-up Signal
44
137
136
137
138
143
137-138
91
155
82
82
82
82
82
87
108
99
150
128
83
83
124
102
102-03
103
100, 133
133
163
99-100
103
103
128
138-39
131
Co-Acting Arms
Co-Acting Arm Signal
Co-Acting Signal
Code Track Automatic Block/Coded Current Automatic Block
Coded-Continuous Train Stop System
CodedCTC
Coded Track Circuit Automatic Block, BACC
Coligny-Welch Signal Lamp
Colors
Color Light Running Signals
Color Light Stop Signal!Automatic Stop Signal/Semaphore Stop
Signal/A.P. Permissive Stop Signal
Colour Lights Point Indicator
Combined Train Control
Communication (s)-Based Train Control!Transmission-Based
Signaling (TBS)
Computer-Assisted Manual Block System/Computer-Aided
Block System
Computer Interlocking
ComtraiCosmos/Smis
Consolidated Code of Operating Rules (11 Forms)
Continuous Automatic Block System
Continuous Automatic Train Control (CATC)
Continuous-Induction System
Continuous Train Control
Continuous Train Control System
Continuous Transmission SystemlIntermittent Systems
Control System
Control System for Single-Track Signalling
Control/Train or Traffic Control
Continuous Manual Block System Terms
Controlled Manual Block System
Controlled Manual Block/Controlled Manual Signal System/
System, Controlled Manual Block/Controlled-Manual Block-
45
122
123
122
143
159-60
162-63
165
108
88,89,91
93
107
110
124
169
155-56
139
150
166
103
143
159
158
159
158
156
156
143
162
140
1409
Signalling/CMBS
Controlled Signal
Crocodile
CTC
CTC Railway Signalling System
DangerlDanger Signal
Day & Night Aspects
Dead-End Signal
Dead Signal
Decceleration Signal
Directing Signals
Direction Indicator
Directional Route Indicator
Disc ShuntlDisc Shunting SignaVShunting Disc Signal
Distant Signal Terms
Distant Signal
Distant Semaphore Signal
Distant (Warning) Signal
Doll
Doll PolelDoll Post
Doll Signal
Double Amber
Double Line Block/Single Line Block
Double Red
Double-Track Block Signalling
Double Yellow
Double-Yellow Signal
Double Yoke (Double Yellow)
Dragging Equipment Signal
Draw-Ahead ShuntlDraw-Ahead SignaVDraw-Ahead
Position-Light Subsidiary Signal
Driver Warning System
Dwarf Shunt/Shunt Dwarf
EBICAB/Control De Vitesse A Balise, KVB
46
140-41
114
168
162
163
101
99
132
108
134
116,132
116
118
127
111
111-112
112
112
83
83
83
93
147
93
143
93
93
94
134
128
169-70
128
165
Electric Catchpoint Indicator 124
Electric Light Signal 73
Electric Repeater Signal 121
Electric Semaphore Repeater 87
Electric Signal/Electric Signal SystemlElectric SignalinglElectric
SignallinglElectrically-Operated Signals/Electrically Operated
Signal 73
Electric InterlockinglElectrical InterlockinglElectrical Signal
Interlocking 150-151
Electro-Gas Signal
Electro":Mechanical Ground Signal/Electro-Mechanical
Signal
Electro-Mechanical Interlocking
Electro-Mechanical System
Electro-Pneumatic Interlocking
Electro-Pneumatic SignallElectro-Pneumatic Signalling
Electro-Pneumatical Train Stop
Electro-Pneumatic Block Signal System
Electronic CTC/CTC & Remote Control System/Block &
Electronic CTC
Elevated Shunting Signal
Energy & Technology-Related Terms
Entry (Route) SignallEntry (Route) Light Signal
EPLRS
European Train Control System
Facing Points Indicator
Facing Shunt Signal
False ClearlFalse-Clear SignallFalse Proceed
FeatherslHoms
Finials/Signal Finial
Flat Cap/Parachute Type/Pinacles
Fishtail
Five Aspect Terms (5 Forms)
47
73
73
151
73
151
74
161
139
162
128-29
72
116
166
158
124
129
104
116
83
112
98
Five-Light Junction Indicator 117
Fixed Block Signal System/Fixed BlocklFixed-BlocklFixed-Block
System
Fixed DistantlFixed Distant Signal
FixediLinesidelRailway-RailroadIWayside Signal Terms
Fixed Railroad Signals
Fixed Signal
Fixed Signal System/Fixed-Signal System
Fixed Signaling
Fixed Stop Signal
Fixed Trackside Signal
Fixed Trackside SignallFixed Trackside Color Light Signal
Fixed Wayside SignallFixed Wayside System
Flashing Aspect
Flashing Double Yellow Aspect
Flashing Yellow Aspect
Flashing Single Yellow Aspect
Flexiblok System
Fog Signal Repeater
Four Aspect Terms (22 Forms)
Four-Way Shunting Signal
Fresnel Marine Type Lenses
Frosted White
Function-Related Shunting Signal Terms
Functional Signal System
Gantry/Signal Gantry
Geographical Circuitry Interlocking
Ginger 'un
Goods or Siding Signal
Grade Signal
Green
GreenlYellow, Yellow/Green
Ground Shunt Signal/Shunting Ground Disc
Ground Signal Lamp
48
138
112
65
66
65, 79
66
66
108
66
69
66
99
94
94
94
167
121-22
97-98
118
84
94
128
76
84
151
94
131
122
90
90-91
127
84
Ground Signal
Hall Distant Signal
High Shunting Signal
Holding Signal
Home Signal/Home-Signal
Hump Signal/Humping Signal
Humping Signal/Hump Shunt Signal
ITCSlIncremental Train Control System (ITCS)
Immovable Signals
Identra
Incremental Train Control System (ITCS)
Independent Shunt Signal
Indication
Inductive Train Control
INDUSI
Inner Home/Outer Home
Interlocking Dwarf Signal
Interlocking Signals/Signals, Interlocking
Interlockings
Interlocking Terms
Interlockings, Relay Type
Interlocking Signalling
Interlocking Traffic Control System
Intermediate Block Home Signal
Intermediate Block Signal (IBS)
Intermediate Signal (2)
Intermittent Contact System of Train Control
Intermittent Control
Intermittent Green
Intermittent Yellow
Intermittent Inductive Train Control
Intermittent Inductive Train Stop
49
130
112
129
115
108-09
131
129
167
69-70
169
167
129
89,99, 128
159
165
109, 168
115
115
149
149
151
149
151
109
115
115, 134
156
158
93
93
158-59
161
Junction Indicator/Junction Signal
Junction Semaphore
Kerosene Pink
Key Interlocking Signalling
Kingsman Block System
Lamp
Lamp Indicator
Lamp Out Indicator
Lattice Post Bracket SignallLattice Post Signal
Leave Siding Indicator
Lens
Light Indicator
L-H Bracket Signal
Light Signal
"Lightly-Tinted"
Limited Approach Signal/Medium Approach SignallMedium
ClearlMedium Advance Approach [US only]lMedium
Approach Slow Signal [US only]/Slow Approach Signal/
Restricting Signal/Restricting AspectlRestriction Indication
Limited Clear SignallLimited-ClearlMedium ClearlMedium Clear
Signal/Slow-Clear/Slow Clear Signal
Limits of Shunt Signal
Line Clear
Lineside Equipment/Lineside Signals/Line-Side Signal/Lineside
Signalling/Line-Side SignalinglLineside Visual Signal/
Lineside Fixed Signal
Lineside Signal
Line-Side Signal/Line-Side Signaling
Line Signalling System
Linien Zug Berein Flusoung, LZB
Lock-&-Block SystemILock & Block SystemILock & Block!
Block Locking
Low-Pressure Electro-Pneumatic Signalling
50
116
118
93
151
147-48
84
87
87
84
131-32
84
87
84
80
94
101-102
101
129
100
66-67
80
67
66
164-65
141
74
Low Speed Route Indicator
Luminous Aspect
Lunar Lights
Lunar White
Lunar-White LamplLunar White Marker Light
Main Signals
Main Line Running Signals
Main Route Signals
Main Running Stop Signal
Mainline Signals
Main Line SignallMain-Line Signal
Main SignalslMainline SignalslMain Line SignallMainline
Signaling & Control
Main/Shunt Signal
Manual BlocklManual Block System
Manual Block Systems
Manual-Block-Remote Control
Manual Block Signal Systems
Manual Block Signal Systems--Space Interval
Manual Block SignalinglManual Block Signalling
Manual Blocking
Manual Interlocking
Manual Signalling
Manually Operated Fixed Wayside SignalslManually Operated
SignalslManual Signals/Manual Signalling
Marshalling Yard Signal
Mast
Mechanical Automatic Signals
Mechanical Interlocking
Mechanically-Interlocking Points & Signals
Mechanical Points Indicator
Mechanical Roadside Trip Type Stop/Trip Arm System
Mechanical Shunting Signal
Mechanical Signals
51
118-19.
99
118
92
94
107
108
75
107-08
107
107
75
129
139
139
139
140
140
140
140
152
140
74
132
84
70
152
152
124
159
127
80
Mechanical Signals/Mechanical Signalling
Mechanically Operated Signals
Mechanism Cover
Medium Signal
Messages
Message-Related Signal Terms
Microblok
MicroloklMicrolok II
Micro Processor-Based Signalling System
Miller Train Control
Miniature Ann Shunting Signal/Miniature Arm Shunt Signal
Miscellaneous Signal Terms
Miscellaneous Terms
Mobile Signals
Morphological Terms
Motion Signals
Motor-Operated Automatic Stop
Motor-Operated Distant Signals
Moving Block Signalling
Moving BlockIMoving-BlockIMoving Block SignallMoving
Block System
Multi-Lamp Route IndicatorlMulti Lamp Route Indicator
Multi Aspects: Other Aspects (15 Forms)
Multiple-Block Signaling
Nachod Signal System
Nels Yellow
Night SignallNight Signaling
Nocturnal Signals
Non-Centralized Automatic Block System
Non-Stop Permissive Automatic Signals
Normal Danger System
Normal-Speed Indication
Normal Speed Signal
52
74
74
84
102
88
133
167
152, 167
170
158
129
133
169
70
105
70
161
75
148
148
119
98-99
143-44
148
93
70
70
144
120
170
103
103
Overarching Terms 123
Overarching Signal Terms 106
Overarching Terms 123
Occupation Protection Equipment
Electric Occupation Key/Engine Shunting Voucher/
Engine TokenILockout System Equipment/Patrolma's
Lockout Device 170
On-Board Speed Control System 169
On/Off Indicator 86
Optical Signals/Optical Signs & Signals 70
Orange 92
Other Aspects (26 Forms) 98-99
Other Block Terms 147
Other Routes & Junctions 117
Other Signal Terms ... 119
Outer Advanced Starter 111
Outer Distant Signal/Inner Distant SignallIntermediate Distant
Signals/2nd Distant Signals , 113
Outer Home Signal/Inner Home SignallIntermediate Home
Signals 109
Outer Home & Starter 123
Outer Home Warner Starter & Advanced Starter 123
Outer Signalling 134
Outlet Signal 132
Overarching Signal Terms 106
Overarching Terms 123
Overarching Shunting Terms 126
Overlap Block Signal System 148
Overlap Scheme of Signaling 148
Patent Signals 70-71
Permanent Working 147
Permissive BlocklPermissive Block SystemlPermissive System 146
Permisive Block Working 146
Permissive Manual Block 146
53
Permissive Signal
Permissive Stop Signal,
PHAR
Physical-Morphological Overlapping Terms
Physical Shunting Terms
Pivot
Platform Line Signal
Platform Signals
Platform Starting Signals
Points & Indicators
Points Indicator
Points Indicator-ChevronIPoints Indicator-Arrow
Points SignaVSignal Points Indicator
PossiblelPartial Overarching Terms
Position Light AspectsIPosition-Light Signals
Position Light Junction Indicator
Position Light ShuntIPosition Light Shunt Signals/Shunt Position
Light/Shunt Signal (Position-Light)
Positive Train ControVPositive Train Control System/PTC
Possible Overarching Terms-Miscellaneous
Potential False Proceed Condition (PFPC)
Power Interlocking
Power-Operated SignalsIPower-Operated Signals/Power
SignallingIPower-SignallinglPower-Worked Signals
Power-Operated Distant Signal/Semaphore Distant/Distant
Signal Color Light/Color Light Distant Signal
Power-Operated Shunt Signal
Precaution Signal
Preliminary Caution Signal
Primary Signals
Primary Overarching Terms in Other Languages
Proceed Signal
Protection Signal
Protecting Signal
PTS, Positive Train Separation
54
115, 133
133
169
75
127
85
134
120
120
124-25
125
125
124-25
72
99
118
127
167
76
104
152
75
113
127
120
101
76,99
78
100, 105, 133
123
120
167-68
Purple & Violet
Radio BlocklRadio Block System
Radio Control Equipment
Rail Aids
Rail Operation Control System
Rail Signals
Railroad Signaling System/Railway Signal System/Railroad
Signal System/Railway-Signal System/Railway Signalling
System/Railway Signaling System
Railroad Traffic Control Devices
Railroad Visual Signals
Railway Fixed Signals
Railway Signal/Railroad Signal
Railway SignalinglRailway Signalling/Railroad Signaling
Railway Signaling & Control System/Railway Signaling &
Control
Railway Signaling, Control & Communication System
Rear Home Signal
Red
Red BoardlRed Eye
Red Eye
Relay InterlockinglRelay Interlocking System/All-Relay
Interlocking
Remote Control Interlocking
Repeat Signal
Repeater
Repeater Signal
Repeating Signal
Restricted Red
Reversible Road Warning
Right-Hand Junction Indicator
RIT, Train Management System
Roadway Automatic Block System
Roadway Signals
55
92
148-49
149
76
164
67
68
76
67
67
67-68
68
68
68
109
90
109
94
152
153
121
86
121
121
93
134
118
168
146
70
Roundels
Route & Junction Indicator/Signals
Route Control InterlockinglRoute-Control Interlocking
Route Indicating Signals
Route Indicator
Route Interlocking
Route Signal
Route with Automatic Working
Routing Signal
Running Line Signals
Running Shunt Signal
Running Subsidiary Shunt Signal
Running Signals
Running Signal Terms
Safe Working/Safeworking/Safe-Working/Safe Working
Appliances
Safety Aids
Safety Control System/Train Operation Safety Control System
Safety Signals
Satellite Interlocking
Second Home/Third Home Signal/Home No. l/Home No.2
Section Signal
Selenium Ruby Glass
SELTRAC
Semaphore Repeater
Semaphore Signal
Semi-Automatic Block Signaling
Semi-Automatic Interlocking Signal
Semi-Automatic Signal
Sequence-Switch Interlocking
Set-Back Signal
Shot Shunting Signal
Shunt Ahead Signal/Shunt-Ahead Signal
Shunt Indicator
56
85
116
153
129
117
153
116
146
117
106-07
130
130
106
106
77
77
156
77
153
109-110
111
94
168
121
80
144
115
115-116
153
130
130
130
126
Shunt Light/Shunting Light
Shunt Route Indicator
Shunt SignallIndicator
Shunt Signal/Shunting Signal
Shunting Signal
Siding Shunt Signal
Siding Signal
Siding, Train Yard & Other Signals
Signal
Signal & Switch Systems
Signaling/Signalling
Signal & Control SystemlSignal-&-Control Systems
Signal & Control Systems
Signal Appliance
Signal Apparatus
Signal Arm Repeater
Signal Board
Signal Blue
Signal Bracket
Signal Bridge
Signal Code
Signal Components
Signal ConfIrmation
Signal Device/Signalling Device
Signalling Device
Signal, Distant
Signal DistantlDistant Signal
Signal Dolls
Signal Equipment
Signal Gantry: See Gantry
Signal Glass
Signal Glassware
Signal Head
Signal, Home
Signal Implement
57
128
119, 130
125
126
81
131
132
131
64, 79
77
63, 79
77
157
64
64
87
81
93
85
85
89
82
86
64-65
77
113
112
85
85
85
86
86
109
65
Signal Indication
Signal Lamp
Signal Lenses
Signal Mast
Signal Mechanism
Signal/Point Interlocking
Signal Post Cap/Signal Post Cap Finial
Signal Repeater
Signaling/Signalling
Signalling Devices
Signal System/Signaling System/Signalling System
Signal System, Device or Appliance
Signals for Shunting/Signals for Shunting Movements
Signalling Systems for Other Staff
Signals from Platform Staff to
Driver/Guard!/Passengers//Signalman
Station Staff Warning Systems
Trackside Staff Warning Systems
SIGNUM
Single-Aspect Terms (8 Forms)
Single Line Block Instrument
SlideDetector Fence
Slot Repeater
SNCF Signalling System for VHSNHS System of Signalling
& Signalling System for High Speed
Snow Shed Territory with Color Light Signals
Spatial Configurations
Specialized Colors
Specific Named Systems
Speed Control Forms
Speed Control/Speed Control Devices
Speed Supervision System-TVM
Splitting Distant Signal/Splitting Distant
Splitting Home Signal
Splitting Semaphore
58
89
86
86
86
86
153
85
87, 122
63
77
65
65
126
170
168
94
149
135
87
168
134
92
91
163
161-162
162
162
114
110
110
Splitting Signal
Spoorplan Interlocking
SSI Systems
Starter Semaphore/Advanced Starter Semaphore
Starter Signal
Starting Signal
Starting Signal Terms
Station Departure Color-Light Signal
Station Protection Signal
Stationary & Fixed Signals
Stencil Indicator/Stencil Route Indicator/Route Indicator
Stencil Lights
Stop-&-Proceed Aspect
Stop Aspect/Stop Signal
Stop, Distant & Related Signals
Stop Signals (2)
Stop Signal Terms
Stop & Proceed Signal/Stop-&-Proceed Grade Signal/Station
Protection Signal/Take (Or Leave) Siding Signal Medium
Signal
Sub-Shunting Indicator
Sub-Shunting Signal
Subsidiary Shunting Signals
Subsidiary Signals
Subsidiary Signal Terms
Supplementary Absolute Block
Switch Indicator
Switch Indicator/Signals & Points Indicator/Signals
Switch Signal
Switching Signals
Sykes Lock & Block/Sykes Lock & Block System/Siemens &
Halske Lock-&-Block System
Symbol Information Processing
Systems,
59
110
154
153
111
111
111
111-112
135
120
71
118
99
100-101
108
108, 110
108
102
131
130
131
135
123
147
125
124
81
126-27
141
76
136
System, Absolute Permissive Block/System APB
System, ATC
System, Block Signal
System Terms
Take Siding Indicator/Take Siding Signal
TBS, Transmission-Based Signalling
Telegraph Block/Telephone Block
Telephone Train Control
Temporary Signal
Terminal Signal
Theatre Type Route Indicator/Theatre-Type Route Indicator/
Theatre Multilamp Route Indicator
Three-Block Signaling
Three/-Four Aspect Signal System
ThreeIFour Aspect
3-/4-/5-Indication Signaling
Three Aspect Terms (45 Forms)
Tonnage Signal
TOPS Equipment
Toton Route Indicator
Track Occupancy or Departure Signal
Track Signaling
Tracker Ball
Trackside Devices
Trackside Railway Visual Signalling Systems/Trackside Visual
Signalling
Trackside Staff Warning Systems/Trackside Staff Warning
Systems/Train Operated Warning System
Trackside Railroad Signaling/Track Side Signalling/Trackside
Signalling/Trackside Signals/Track-Side Signals/Track Side
Signals/Trackside Railroad Signals
Trackside Warning Signals
Traffic Red
Train Control
60
147
156
137
113
132
170-71
149
157
135
133
119
145
99
99
144-45
96-97
122
171
119
135
71
171
78
78
171
67
78
93
158, 159, 162
Train Control System
Train Control Terms
Train Control/Train-Control/Train Control System/Train-Control
System
Train Control Devices/Train-Control Devices
Train Control Equipment
Train Control Systems, Devices & Appliances
Train Light Signals
Train Location System
Train-Operated Points System
Train Protection Equipment
Train Signals & Controls
Train Situation Indicator (TSI)
Train Stop
Train Stop Devices
Train-Stop/Train Stop System
Transmission Beacon Locomotive, TBL
Transmission Voie Machine, TVM
Trap Points Indicator
Tripcock Arm/Trip Arm Lever
Trip-Stop Devices/Automatic Trip Stop Devices
Trolley Line Signal
Tubular Steel Bracket Signal
Tunnel Signal
Tunnel Junction SignallTunnel Repeating Signal
Turnout Signal
Two Aspect Terms (35 Forms)
2/3/4 Block System/2-/3-/4-Block Signaling
Two-Block Automatic Signalling/Two-Block Automatic System/
Three-Block Automatic SignallinglThree-Block Automatic
System/Single-Track Automatic Signalling/Single-Track
Automatic Signal System/APB Single-Track Signalling
Two-Way Junction Indicator
Two-Way Stencil Indicator
61
157
154
156-57
157
157
159
72
163-64
171
78
78
164
159
160
160
165
164
125
160
160
135
86
122
122
117
94-95
144
145
119
119
Ultrablok
Uniform Code of Operating Rules (10 Forms)
Up, Down Distant, Home Starter, Advanced Starter
"Universal" Signal
Unworked Distant Signal
Visual & Audible Signals
Visual Display Unit
Visual (Or Visible) Signals
Visual Lineside Signals
Visual SignalsNisual SignallingNisual Signalling System
Warner & Home
Warner Home & Starter
Warner Home Starter & Advance Starter
Warner Signal
Warning Signal (2)
Warning System
Way Interface System (wrS)
Wayside Devices
Wayside Signal/Wayside Signal System/Wayside Signals &
Controls/Way-Side Signals
Wayside Signaling
White
Wrong Road Signal/Wrong-Road Signal
Yard Exit Signals
Yard Track Signal
Yellow Disc Signal/Ground Disc Signal
Yellow
Yellow Eye
Yellow-Orange
Yellow/Red, GreenlRed & Red/Green
Yellow Shunt Signal
Yellow-Tinted Lenses
62
169
103-104
110
76
113
78
86
82
69
72
123
123
123
112
72, 112, 131
72
163
78
69
69
90,91
120
132
135
123
90
94
92
91
131
94
1B General Railway Signal Terms
1B1 Overarching Terms
a) Signal Terms
SIGNALING/SIGNALLING. General Note 1. Specific Railway/Railroad Signal
terms are often defined or in some way described. However, more general terms
are rarely defmed. Terms are not infrequently interchanged as if they were
synonyms when that may not be the case (at least in standard dictionaries). A
significant problem is the term Signaling/Signalling (1 "L" in US English; 2 in
British). Dictionaries may allow for the word Signal to have either a noun or verb
function while adding -ing or -ling is seemingly a verb form only. That does not
appear to be the case with rail practioners. The term -- when standing alone --
may be a verb though that is open to question. But the term employed in
conjunction with railway/railroad/wayside, etc. often appears to be a noun. As
noted above, defmitions are rarely included. The various Signaling/Signalling
terms will be listed and described as nouns though exceptions exist. And it is
recognized that recourse to various dictionaries may not cohere with the practice
here.
General Note II. Signaling/Signalling is often an encompassing term: neither
physical apparatus nor the act of conveying information but both and perhaps the
totality of signal and control functions represented by signals and their operations
as well. The term Marine Aids to Navigation encompasses that field in physical
and communication aspects. More specific terms such as beaconage, buoyage,
signage are also encompassing in nature. But in the railway/railroad realm the
term signal mayor may not cover the spectrum of roles. Signaling/Signalling is
seemingly employed for that role even if dictionaries do not recognize that
function; though they may accept buoyage and beaconage and, less often, signage.
SIGNAL. The various Signal terms constitute nearly half of all terms in surveyed
literature in the 1st ed. About 20% of the references are to the single term Signal.
Few defmitions of this term in a rail context are available though AAR offers
many defmitions relating to specific forms of Signals. These defmitions
63
frequently include physical apparatus and the message function but the Signal
definition seems to be more in a verb form and focusses on the message function:
"a means of conveying information". By contrast FRA-1, -2, -3 offers a
satisfactory definition: "An appliance which conveys information governing train
movements." The word appliance appears in the definition and refers to the
physical apparatus. Older dictionary definitions seem to lean toward appliance as
an apparatus, devices of some complexity and which are connected to other
devices. While more modem definitions often refer to a free-standing object
powered by one or other energy sources such as household appliances. FRA
seems to hearken back to an older form of appliance.
References: FRA-1 1978, -2, and -3, 1979, ARSAP-D 1965
SIGNAL APPARATUS. This term may seem too general a term to be included. It
is occasionally used in railroad literature especially in older sources. It may
occupy a position between a general usage term and a specific technical term. One
source employs it as an overarching term that includes systems, cab signalling and
staff/tablet/ticket working and presumably specific signals within systems.
Reference: Fraser 1919 (NSW)
SIGNAL APPLIANCE. A term found most often in the US. It is yet another term
that is often used without definition. The usage of the term suggests electrical,
mechanical, electro-mechanical devices that are closely allied with the operation
of Signals. It is possible that a Signal in itself is a component of Signal Appliance.
Camp includes a section on "Switching Apparatus and Appliances" that includes
Switch Lamps, Switch Stands, switches of all kinds, frogs, crossings, turnouts,
and whatever refers to the switching process and allied Safety Aids. Nock
includes the term but without an definition. Perhaps it is viewed as self-
explanatory.
References: Camp 1903, Nock 1962; see also FRA-RAR
SIGNAL DEVICE/SIGNALLING DEVICE. Yet another term that hovers
between a general and largely non-technical term, and a term with technical
significance. A small number of sources in South Africa, UK and US have
included the term. US FRA RAR includes the phrases (mostly from US Code)
that describes Signals and control systems and associated appliances, devices,
64
methods of systems. It is a stock phrase relating to Signals and instruments
associated with Signals.
References: SA BBB 1974, FRA RAR 1984, Blythe 1951
SIGNAL SYSTEM/SIGNALLING SYSTEM/SIGNALING SYSTEM. These
terms are nearly self-explanatory. They refer to integrated signal operations and
can refer to signals, messages, block, interlocking and other methods of
operations. The terms are used somewhat infrequently.
References: Fraser 1919, Wooley (Australia) 1958, FRA RAR 1984, Greenfield
1998, Harrigan 1962, Romania Raises 1980, Zoetardt 1994, Excursion to ... 1965
SIGNAL SYSTEM, DEVICE, OR APPLIANCE. FRA RAR employs this term as
an umbrella term. See also individual terms.
Reference: FRA RAR 1984
SIGNAL IMPLEMENT. A rare term found in Swedish practice. It is a component
of Signal Appliance which includes Fixed, Signals, Signal Implements and Signal
Signs. Implement is not further described. It is included here because it is
prefaced with the core term of Signal.
Reference: Nock 1962
1BIb) FixedlLinesidelRailway-Railroad/Wayside Signal Terms
FIXED SIGNAL. The Signal, as the names indicates, is on a fixed physical site. It
does not refer to an unchanging signal aspect and indication. The term is also used
without definition. It is often employed to distinguish this form of Signal from
non-fixed forms such as human arm signals. Nearly all references are in books
with few journal citations. It is a common term in codes. In US parlance it
includes any fixed safety aid whose message affects train operations including
signs; a similar practice holds true in South Africa. Slightly over ten-per-cent of
surveyed sources include the term; that is a more frequent usage than seemingly
common terms such as Lineside, Railway, and Wayside Signals.
References: Blythe 1951, Mashour 1974, Ellis 1966, Phillips 1942
FIXED RAILROAD SIGNALS. Only a single surveyed sources includes the
65
term. It offers greater specificity than the term Fixed Signals.
Reference: B & M 1981
FIXED SIGNAL SYSTEMIFIXED-SIGNAL SYSTEM. FRA's use of this term
which refers to original Signals ofa fixed position (1832). REMC adds a
hyphenated version.
Reference: FRA-3 1979, REMC 1948
FIXED SIGNALING. Term refers to a group of signals providing coverage over a
specific territory. The previous term seemingly has the same meaning.
Reference: Grafton 1896
FIXED TRACKSIDE SIGNAL. A variant term of marked specificity.
Reference: Kanner 1992
FIXED WAYSIDE SIGNALSIFIXED WAYSIDE SYSTEMS. Only FRA
includes these terms. Specificity is increased by combining three of the four most
used terms.
Reference: FRA-2 1979
LINE SIGNALLING SYSTEM. This is an overarching term for Lineside Signals;
it is not a term for a specific system.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
LINESIDE EQUIPMENTILINESIDE SIGNALSILINE-SIDE SIGNAL/
LINESIDE SIGNALLING/ LINE-SIDE SIGNALINGILINESIDE VISUAL
SIGNALILINESIDE FIXED SIGNALS. Lineside Signals, unlike a variety of
terms, is formally defined: "signals of fixed or variable aspect permanently fixed
along the track or in stations or yards." (VIC CST). The various lineside terms are
largely UK in origin and usage. However, less than 5% of surveyed terms are
found under this heading for the first edition. The terms can include Signs and
Markers. Lavallee adds Fixed to the basic term, and K & W adds Visual. GEC
speaks ofLineside Equipment which can have two possible meanings: Trackside
Signals, and a broader meaning that includes cables, conduits, pathways in
addition to Signals. Signaling can have meaning of verb though very often it is a
66
noun in railway publictions. Signaling can refer to an integrated system of signals
though Signal may have a similar meaning.
References: Lavallee 1953, K & W 1963, GEC 1974, Solomon 2003 (hyphen
forms)
LINE-SIDE SIGNAL/LINE-SIDE SIGNALING. Variant terms for Wayside
Signal/-Signalling.
Reference: Solomon 2003
RAIL SIGNALS. A more terse version of basic term of Railway Signal.
Reference: Varms 1997
RAILROAD SIGNALING SYSTEM/RAILWAY SIGNAL SYSTEM!
RAILROAD SIGNAL SYSTEMIRAILWAY SIGNALING SYSTEM!
RAILWAY-SIGNAL SYSTEM/RAILWAY SIGNALLING SYSTEM. These
terms make explicit the meaning of Railway and Railroad Signaling/Signaling as
a system of Signals.
References: FRA-3 1979 (lst term), Mashour 1974 (2nd), Greenfield 1998 (3rd),
With Fast .... 1998 (4th), REMC 1948 (5th), Tans1ey 1985 (6th).
RAILROAD VISUAL SIGNALS. The contributor has Visual Signals as well.
This may be a more explicit version.
Reference: Tansley 1985
RAILWAY FIXED SIGNALS. A possible alternate to Fixed Railroad Signals. It
suggests British English though in a US source.
Reference: Calvert 2004
RAILWAY SIGNALSIRAILROAD SIGNALS. General Note: Railway and
Railroad are background terms that require explanation. AAR employs both
terms: railway in reference to Signals and railroad in reference to organizations.
This is also true of Phillips 1942. Railway seems to be an older usage in the US
which continues into the present. Railway is exclusive, or nearly so, in UK though
seemingly railroad was in use at an earlier time. Railway Signals and Railroad
Signals appear to be synonyms.
67
Railway and Railroad Signals are not often defmed. They represent terms similar
to the core term of Signal though with greater specificity and which explicitly
place Signal within a rail context. Railroad Signal would appear to be a basic term
yet few US sources employ it. Signal and Fixed Signals are far more common.
Classification: #51
Form ofDevice: Railway all-lighted Signals
Operation: An all-lighted Device that displays alternating messages according to
agreed-upon patterns.
Comments:Railway Signal is employed in T-M monographs titles and employed
for two-digit designations in the classification for lighted, partially-lighted,
unlighted and sound devices. It can be viewed as an encompassing term for all
other terms. Signals can be single or multiple-lens color light, single- color in a
semaphore arm, or mult--color semaphore arm mechanisms.
References: ARSPAP-D 1965, Phillips 1942, K & W 1963 among many sources
RAILWAY SIGNALINGIRAILWAY SIGNALLINGIRAILROAD
SIGNALING. These terms are apparently meant as nouns, and refer to a system
of Signals that includes the physical apparatus and the message dimension. These
terms often lack defmitions. The word System is absent though it seems to imply
suggest systems of integrated signals working together. Signaling is the preferred
US spelling though Signalling is sometimes used (and it appears secondarily in
various dictionaries). Signalling is exclusively used where British English is
preferred.
References: US&S 1984 (lst term), Sterner 1978 (2nd), B & M 1981 (3rd term)
RAILWAY SIGNALING & CONTROL SYSTEMSIRAILWAY SIGNALING &
CONTROL. Possible overarching terms that encompass all Signals and related
means of control.
References: US&S 1986 RA (lst term), Cunliffe 1968 (2nd term)
RAILWAY SIGNALING, CONTROL & COMMUNICAnON SYSTEMS. A
more encompassing term that partially refers to Signals and their use.
Reference: GE Cites US&S ... 10-1991 RA
68
VISUAL LINESIDE SIGNAL. The term is a more explicit form of the basic
term. It may have been coined to distinguish it from other signal forms; possibly
it is a fully-lighted Signal in contrast to a semaphore form.
Reference: Vanns 1997
WAYSIDE SIGNALS/WAYSIDE SIGNAL SYSTEMS/WAYSIDE SIGNALS
& CONTROLS/WAY-SIDE SIGNALS. A variety of references are made to these
terms yet definitions are rare. FRA employs the term in its publications though it
does not define it. Wayside Signal System suggests a group of interconnected
signals rather than a single unit. The third term is a broader term encompassing
Signals and control mechanisms. Wayside forms are relatively common yet less
than 10% of surveyed sources for the first edition include these terms. A
discussion in one website includes Way-Side Signal. This term seemingly does
not appear elsewhere though it remains plausible.
References: FRA-1 1978, -3 1979, US&S 1984, Gaum 1992, Yamanouchi 1992,
Trainorders.com.
WAYSIDE SIGNALING. Term appears in an article about electronic systems. It
may provide an explicit distinction between electronic and on-site Aids.
Reference: Vantuomo 1993
1B1 c) Other Overarching Terms
AUTOMATIC OR REMOTELY OPERATED SIGNALS. A descriptive phrase
rather than a formal name. It refers primarily to electrically powered devices.
Term added here because of an overarching appearance.
Reference: Calvert 2004
FIXED TRACKSIDE SIGNAL/FIXED TRACKSIDE COLOR LIGHT
SIGNALS. Kanner offers a variant of singular forms. The second term, from
Chapter 2B, is included here because of the prefatory term.
Reference: Kanner 1992
IMMOVABLE SIGNALS. This term is a translation from a French source. It is
69
not known if the translator selected immovable instead of fixed, or whether the
writer selected the French form of immovable rather than fixed. Both terms are
similar in meaning.
Reference: Daumas 1970
MECHANICAL AUTOMATIC SIGNALS. A term of Calvert referring mostly to
treadle-operated Signals from the 19th c. It is included here because of its
overarching appearance.
Reference: Calvert 2004
MOBILE SIGNALS. A term from Calvert for non-fixed Signals. Hand-operated
acoustical devices (such as flares) and hand signals with flags and lamps are
included. It is included here since it has at least a partially overarching character.
Reference: Calvert 2004
MOTION SIGNALS. Term for Signals involving physical movement. Wig-wag
Signal is a major example.
Reference: Calvert 2004
NIGHT SIGNALSINIGHT SIGNALING. Both terms are from the 1890s. They
refer to the development of appropriate colors and quality for Semaphore Signals
at night.
References: Grafton 1896 (No. 1), Breckenridge 1967 (No.2)
NOCTURNAL SIGNALS. A early 19th c. term in UK publication. It refers to
Night Signals in general.
Reference: Calvert 2004
OPTICAL SIGNALS/OPTICAL SIGNS & SIGNALS. A possible overarching
terms though rarely employed. It is an atypical term in a work of psychological
study ofvisual messages and human perception ofmessages. It may be an overly
inclusive term unless placed within a railway context.
Reference: Mashour 1974
PATENT SIGNALS. Calvert's Signal studies relied heavily on patents. These
70
Signals ranged from mid-19th c. to later times. Apparently none of this category
of Signals actually saw regular service and only a few had exposure to rail
operations.
Reference: Calvert 2004
ROADWAY SIGNALS. Seemingly only FRA publications include this term
among surveyed sources. The term is also found in a federal review of rail Signals
rules and practices. Roadway Signals appears to be a synonym of unknown
parentage. It suggests street and road Signals more than railroad counterparts.
References: FRA-3 1979, FRA RAR 1984
STATIONARY & FIXED SIGNALS. This is a 19th c. US term. Stationary Signal
had the meaning now ascribed to Fixed Signals. Fixed then referred to signals
attached or fixed to trains.
Reference: New System-RG 1884
TRACKSIDE SIGNALLINGfTRACKSIDE SIGNALS/TRACK-SIDE
SIGNALS/TRACK SIDE SIGNALS/TRACKSIDE RAILROAD SIGNALS/
TRACKSIDE RAILROAD SIGNALING/TRACK SIDE SIGNALLING
SYSTEM. The basic term is a plausible overarching term yet only infrequently
used. It can be viewed as the equivalent of Wayside Signals.
Classification: #511
Form of Device: All-lighted mainline Signal
Operation: An all-lighted device that displays alternating messages according to
color and position of lenses.
Comments: The basic term has been employed in the classification to designate
primary or mainline Signals.
References: Challenge .. , 1983 (lst and 2nd terms), Encyclopedia of Thailand
(#2), Zoetardt 1994 (#3), Kanner 1992 (#5), Kanner 1992 (#6), Whitehouse (#7),
TRACK SIGNALING. A variant form that is seemingly similar in meaning to the
basic term.
Reference: FRA-1 1978
71
TRACKSIDE VISUAL SIGNALLING. Term can be a more explicit version of
the basic term. It may possibly distinguish from Signals that are not of a visual
nature.
Reference: Tansley 1985
TRAIN LIGHT SIGNALS. A singular alternative to Railway Signals.
Reference: Jia-lin 1981
VISUAL SIGNALSNISUAL SIGNALLINGNISUAL SIGNALLING
SYSTEM. A plausible overarching terms but possibly overly inclusive (unless
placed in the context of Railroad Signals). Most references are UK in origin. It is
not employed often by itself; rather it is used to differentiate between Signals with
lights from other forms including AWS, electric telegraphy, hand signals. Tansley
adds system to the basic term.
References: Ellis 1996, Blythe 1951, Nock 1962, GEC 1974, Allen 1962, Tansley
1985
WARNING SYSTEM. This is a Level/Grade term since it has the appearance of
an overarching term; it is retained here as a cross reference.
Reference: Miller 1997 RA
IB2 PossiblelPartial Overarching Terms
IB2 a) Energy & Technology-Related Terms
General Note. A variety of terms include mention of the energy source that
provides power for a Signal or the form of technology employed. Some or many
of these terms refer to a restricted range of Signal forms. Yet these terms often
project an image of broad usage; and are therefore included here.
A.C. SIGNALING SYSTEM. This term includes the power source though briefly.
Reference: REMC 1948
ALL-ELECTRIC POWER SIGNALLING. A UK term from late 19th c.learly
20th c. Possibly coined to distinguish a power source that was entirely electric
72
from forms combining electricity and other sources such as pneumatic action.
Reference: Vanns 1991
ELECTRIC LIGHT SIGNAL. Term may have been used to distinguish it from
older oil lamp powered Signals.
Reference: Solomon 2003
ELECTRIC SIGNALIELECTRIC SIGNAL SYSTEM/ELECTRIC SIGNALING/
ELECTRICAL SIGNALLINGIELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SIGNALS/
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED SIGNALS. These terms may suggest all-lighted
forms of Signals in contrast to mechanical forms such as Semaphore Signals. Yet
they can also denote Signals ofa wide range that are powered by electricity. For
example, Queensland Railway explicitly refers to both Color-Light and
Semaphore Signals under the heading ofElectric Signals.
References: Queensland R FS, Turkey, B & M 1981, Starkey 1944, Wikinfo 2005
ELECTRO-GAS SIGNAL. This term refers to a UK Semaphore Signal
employing carbonic acid gas activated by an electric valve. Signals employing gas
were also used in the US though a specific term does not appear in the surveyed
literature. While the term refers to Semaphore Signals it can project a broader
image of Signals powered by this form of propulsion. Hence the inclusion of the
term here.
Reference: Nock 1962
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL GROUND SIGNALIELECTRO-MECHANICAL
SIGNAL. Both Signals activated by electric motor or solenoid.
Reference: RONT 2001
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL SYSTEM. A term employed by few sources. It is a
possible overarching term that can encompass a variety of Signals operating from
mechanical systems powered by electricity. AAR uses the term for the obsolete
Banner or Clockwise Signal. UN 1954 seemingly employs it in a more general
way. Probably all less than fully-lighted Signals could be included. It may be
overly inclusive unless placed in a railroad context.
73
References: ARSPAP-H 1953, UN 1954
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC SIGNAL/ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC SIGNALLING.
The first term from ARSPAP describes a Semaphore Signal that employs an
electrically activated pneumatic mechanism. The term, as with the previous term,
is restricted in use yet projects a broader image and is included with possible
overarching terms. The second term refers more to systems of Signals though it is
likely that a single Signal is also integrated with other Signals.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953, Vanns 1997
LOW-PRESSURE ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC SIGNALLING. Vanns includes the
specifics of process within the title or perhaps the title is descriptive rather than
formal.
Reference: Vanns 1997
MANUALLY OPERATED FIXED WAYSIDE SIGNALS/MANUALLY
OPERATED SIGNALS/MANUAL SIGNALS/MANUAL SIGNALLING. These
terms refer to Signals operated directly by human efforts. They are in contrast to
Power-Operated Signals.
References: FRA-3 1979, ARSPAP-H 1953, Phillips 1942, Blythe 1951
MECHANICAL SIGNAL/MECHANICAL SIGNALLING. These terms are often
synonyms for the Semaphore Signal. They also include other less than fully-
lighted forms including Disc & Crossbar, and Ball Signals. Mechanical Signals
have lighted aspects but mechanical processes are directly involved in the
production and emission of messages. In some instances Mechanical Signal
appears to refer to older Signal forms that are manually operated as opposed to
Electric Signals that provide automatic operations.
References: UN 1954, UAR 1983, South Korea (Korea), Turkey
MECHANICALLY OPERATED SIGNALS. This term has specific reference to
manually operated Semaphore Signal though it has the appearance of a general
term. The source included Electrically Operated Signals as well.
Reference: Wikinfo 2005
74
MOTOR-OPERATED DISTANT SIGNALS. A partially morphological tenn
attached to a non-differentiated energy source.
Reference: Vanns 1997
POWER OPERATED SIGNALS/POWER-OPERATED SIGNALS/POWER
SIGNALLING/POWER-SIGNALLING/POWER-WORKED SIGNALS. These
tenns refer to Signals operated by various energy fonns: compressed air,
hydraulics, electricity.
References: Jackson 1991, NSW Signalling, Harrigan 1962 VR, ARSPAP-H
1953, -SS 1948, ANR 1947
1B2 b) Physical-Morphological Overlapping Tenns
General Note. Some tenns seem to belong to both of these categories or are
poorly defined or ambiguous in character. This segment includes those tenns
including an attempt at description and definition. At least some tenns need
further coverage in the morphological part ofthe chapter.
MAIN ROUTE SIGNALS. This tenn is equivalent to Main or Main Line Signals.
Reference: Vanns 1997
MAIN SIGNALS/MAIN LINE SIGNALSIMAINLINE SIGNALSIMAINLINE
SIGNALING & CONTROL. These tenns appear to occupy both the physical and
morphological dimensions. For US&S the tenn Mainline Signal largely refers to
equipment (though the fonns of the equipment and location frame the message
possibilities and are shaped by it). The other tenns are similar though possibly
more morphological. ERS sees Main Signal as a synonym for Running Signals
and therefore tending toward the morphological. Primary Signals may be similar
though tending more toward the physical.
References: US&S 1982, US&S 1984, ERS-B 1995
PRIMARY SIGNALS. This tenn from Mashour is rarely employed though
included for his psychological studies. Primary is placed in a context ofWayside
Signals. Wayside may tend toward the physical while Primary is more
morphological.
75
Reference: Mashour 1974
"llNIVERSAL SIGNAL". An attempt was made in early 20th c. Belgium to
create an "Universal Signal" that would encompass all Aspects and Indications. It
is more of a morphological term than a physical one; yet some measure of the
physical may be present.
Reference: Nock 1962
SYMBOL INFORMATION PROCESSING. This term is more of an abstract
concept than an operational term. It describes what takes place in a Signal that
creates and emits messages. It more morphological than the physical dimension
though the physical Signal is implied.
Reference: Mashour 1974
1B2 c) Possible Overarching Terms - Miscellaneous
FUNCTIONAL SIGNAL SYSTEM. This may not constitute an actual term. FRA
employs the designation for charts comparing types of Signal and related Systems
for US railroads that run Amtrak trains.
Reference: FRA-2 1979
RAIL AIDS. Possibly coined by compiler. It is employed in a reference to the full
spectrum of T-M forms.
Reference: Part J
RAILROAD TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES. Transportation Research
Thesaurus (TRT) employs this as a basic category. However, TCD has
represented safety devices for roads over a span of 70 or more years. And that
specific meaning has become embedded in the term. Other sources also
occasionally use the term in that broader sense. TCD could have achieved general
use yet instead the more restricted term has dominated. And it can be questioned
whether the meaning can become more encompassing. A brief internet search
(June 2008) reveals few specific references ofTCD to railroads. There are
references to roads and rails which are often limited to road-rail crosssings.
Reference: NTL/TRT 1997
76
SAFE WORKING/SAFEWORKING/SAFE-WORKING/SAFEWORKING
APPLIANCES. This collection of terms is from Australia. Actual definitions ae
very much in short supply. The core term seems to mean either all methods for the
safe operation (working) of trains whether full-scale signals, staff and tickets,
methods of interlocking, etc. Or it refers to all safety-related devices and methods
other than Signals. Victoria Railways refers to their safety operations department
under the title of Office of Safeworking Department. Only one reference adds the
word appliance to Safeworking.
Reference: VGR 1932, Bird 1972
SAFETY AIDS. Specific references are to track circuits and interlocking.
Possibly a general term that includes Signals.
Reference: Chandrika 1998
SAFETY SIGNALS. Term distinguishes between Signals for train control and
nearby lights that could be confused with railroad Signals.
Reference: Grafton 1896
SIGNAL-&-CONTROL SYSTEMS/SIGNAL & CONTROL SYSTEMS. With an
increase of control systems which, in themselves, do not produce and exhibit
signal messages there is an increase in dual terms for Signals and Controls. Many
ofthe control terms are integrated with the Signal function and thereby part of
that role. This is a plausible overarching term for IE.
References: Welty 10-1986, Armstrong 1981
SIGNAL & SWITCH SYSTEMS. This term is an early reference for interlocking.
It may be a partial overarching term since it includes all forms of Signals in an
area. The term projects a broader significance even if the actual usage of the term
is more limited, more specific.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
SIGNALLING DEVICES. Cunliffe uses this term to encompass a broad range of
railroad safety aids: traditional signals and other entities that control train
operations and related functions.
Reference: Cunliffe 1968
77
General Note. An attempt has been made in this study to include major terms in
languages other than English. Most of these terms are from Indo-European
languages though a limited number of terms from two Ural-Altaic languages
(Hungarian, Finnish) are included. A variety of terms are not represented in some
languages. In some cases very general terms are not employed by a given signal
agency. Specific terms are favored by some agencies though this varies greatly. A
few terms are included that are morphological in character. They are included
since they also represent a physical apparatus as well.
SIGNAL
Signaux: Algeria, Ivory Coast
Signal: Norway, Denmark, Sweden
Jel, Jeladus, Jelzec: Hungary
Sygnal: Poland
SIGNALLING/SIGNALING
Signalisation Lumineuse: Belgium
Signalisation Lumineuse: France, Ivory Coast/Upper Volta
Signalisation Mecanique: France, Ivory Coast/Upper Volta
Signalering: Norway
FIXED SIGNAL
Signaux Fixes: Belgium
Senal Fija: Spain, Argentina, Uruguay, Colombia, Bolivia, UIC-CST 1972
Sinais Fixos: Portugal
Ortsfestes Signal: Germany, UIC-CST 1972
Segnale Fisso: Italy, UIC-CST 1972
'everst, utvrden, stalan, (Serbo-Croatian language)
79
TRACKSIDE DEVICES. Term for interlocking equipment as well as Signals.
This term and Wayside Devices suggest a broad usage yet specific contents are
frequently unclear.
References: Sterner, ud
TRACKSIDE RAILWAY VISUAL SIGNALLING SYSTEMS/TRACKSIDE
VISUAL SIGNALLING. Terms may provide a contrast with non-visual forms.
Reference: Tansley 1985
TRACKSIDE WARNING SIGNALS. A term of restricted use though it projects
broader meaning. It refers to lighted and audible systems that warn track repair
crews of the approach of trains. Older US practices included a variety of similar
systems.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
TRAIN PROTECTION EQUIPMENT. Systems for preventing two trains in one
section at one time. Includes ATP, Block System Working, Emergency Detection
Equipment
Reference: RONT 2001
TRAIN SIGNALS & CONTROLS. This term seemingly refers to Railwayl
Railroad Signals rather than train-based communications.
Reference: US&S
VISUAL & AUDIBLE SIGNALS. A rarely employed term that encompasses the
full range of Signals.
Reference: B & M 1981
WAYSIDE DEVICES. Term for variety of railway equipment including switches,
crossing equipment and Signals. Possibly a general-use term that includes
trackside Signals.
Reference: Welty 5-88, C & S ... 1996
1B3 Primary Overarching Terms in Other Languages
78
LIGHT SIGNAL
Senales Luminosa: Spain, Columbia
Segnale Luminosi: Italy
Segnale Lumineux: Algeria
Semnale Luminoase: Rumania
Sinais Luminosa: Brazil, Portugal
Signaux Fixes-Lumineux: UAR
Lichtsignal: Germany, Austria
Licht Sein: Netherlands
Senales Luminosas Fijas: Chile
Valo-Opastimien: Finland
LINESIDE SIGNAL
Signalisation laterale: France
Segnali di Linea: Italy
MECHANICAL SIGNAL (This term, though broader in meaning than
Semaphores, also includes Semaphores)
Signal Mecanique: France, Algeria
Formsignal: Germany, URO
Segnale Meccanico: Italy
Senal Mecanica: Spain
Mechanisch Sein: The Netherlands
Semnale Mecanice: Rumania
SEMAPHORE SIGNAL
Semaphore: Algeria
80
Semaforo: Mexico, Bolivia
Semaforul: Ftumana
Segnali Semaforica: Italy
Semaphora: Spain
Armsein: The Netherlands
Seinpaal: The Netherlands
Semafor: Norway, Denmark, Sweden
Szemafor: lIungary
Opticki brzajar, (Serbo-Croatian language)
Siipiopastinten: Finland
Semaforach: Poland
SlIUNTING SIGNALS (Physiology and Morphology Terms)
Signal de Manoeuvre: France
Ftangiersignal: Germany, UFtO
Segnale di Manovra: Italy
Senal de Maniobra: Spain, Argentina, Colombia, Chile
Ftangeersein: The Netherlands
Signal Lumineux de Manoeuvres: France
Sinais de Manobras: Portugal
(Most terms are from UIC)
SIGNAL BOARDS
Senales Pantella: Spain
Klapboard: The Netherlands
SWlTCII SIGNALS
Weichensignale: Austria, Germany, Switzerland
Signaux d' Aiguilles: Switzerland
81
VISUAL (or VISIBLE) SIGNAL
Signal Optique: France
Optisches Signal: Germany
Segnale Ottico: Italy
Senal Optica: Spain
Optisch Sein: The Netherlands
(All terms from UIC)
1B4 Signal Components
General Note. Many terms refer to parts of Signals. Many of these deal with
Semaphore Signals. However, unless a specific reference is made to that form of
Signal they are included in General Terms.
BRACKET POST. A structural means of supporting at least two adjoining
Signals on one foundation.
Reference: King 1921
BRACKET MAST. A mast affixed to a Bracket Post.
Reference: King 1921
BRACKET SIGNAL. A Signal whose foundation is a Bracket Mast.
Reference: King 1921
BRACKET STRUCTURE. A single mast topped by a two-arm bracket with two
Signals.
Reference: Kanner 1992
BRIDGE MAST. An upright mast atop a Signal Bridge.
Reference: King 1921
82
BRIDGE STRUCTURE. Structure with at least two vertical supports built over
multiple tracks. It forms a structure for multiple signals.
Reference: Kanner 1992
CANTILEVER BRANCH POST. A form ofBracket Post so positioned that a
Signal mast on post is in alignment with the relevant track.
Reference: King 1921
CANTILEVER STRUCTURE. Mast adjoined by single bracket.
Reference: Kanner 1992
DOLL. A short post for a Signal that serves as a Bracket Mast.Reference:
Reference: King 1921
DOLL POLEIDOLL POST. Both terms refer to a short doll or post atop a Signal
Bracket. In this instance they lacked a Semaphore arm but included a lamp.. The
unit indicated the presence of track between Signal and the track to which a
regular Signal referred.
Reference: King 1921
DOLL SIGNAL. This is a Signal rather than a component though the support unit
is part of the term. It is a Marker Light affixed to mast of another Signal. It
indicates of a track without Signals positioned between track with Signals.
Reference: Kanner 1992
FINIAL/SIGNAL FINIAL. A cover that affords protection for an otherwise
uncovered post top.The second term is more precise. RONT speaks of these caps
as an "ornate embellishment" which describes many Victorian era decorative
tops. Ront 2001, A & W 1991
A & W offers two variant terms:
FLAT CAP. A accurate description ofa plain, flat cover.
PARACHUTE TYPE. That form is contrasted with this version. A &W notes
that M & H supplied this ornament. Though a M & H ca. 1900 catalogue
speaks of
PINACLES not Parachute forms. Pinaces are very much an ornamental design.
83
-----------------
FRESNEL MARlNE TYPE LENSES. A cylindrical-shape lens that can provide
360 degree illumination. This contrasts with many railroad lenses and roundels
that have narrow coverage for a few degrees.
Reference: REMC 1948
GANTRY/SIGNAL GANTRY. Structure forming a foundation for Fixed Signals,
Reference: RaNT 2001, King 1921, Jackson 1991
GROUND SIGNAL LAMP. NT within Signal Lamp. Refers to paraffin lamp
employed in Lighted Ground Signals. It was a removable unit.
Reference: RaNT 2001
LAMP. Individual light apparatus for one aspect. A Signal may have several such
units.
Reference: Vanns 1997
LATTICE POST BRACKET SIGNAL/LATTICE POST SIGNAL. A & W
includes a discussion of materials employed for Signals and supports. Lattice
work steel structures were a common structural means for UK.
Reference: A & W 1991
LENS. A Lens is a specially designed glasswork that draws together light rays
and arranges them in a specific pattern (beam). A reflector may augment the lens.
See Also: Roundel
Reference: REMC 1948
LEFT-HAND BRACKET SIGNAL. A Semaphore Signal that is mounted upon a
lattice-work bracket fashioned in tum to a a vertical mast.
Reference: A & W 1991
MAST. Upright to which a Signal apparatus is attached.
Reference: King 1921
MECHANISM COVER. Housing for Signal apparatus.
84
Reference: King 1921
PIVOT LIGHT. NT [Narrower Term] within Signal Lamp category. Term refers
to Light employed used in Position Light Signals for on and off aspects.
Reference: RaNT 2001
ROUNDELS. A glass device in lens assembly that spreads light beams into a
designed pattern. See Also: Lens
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965.
SIGNAL BRACKET. A bracket that was offset from a post for supporting
Signals.
Reference: King 1921
SIGNAL DOLL. A term that may be a more precise form ofthe basic term Doll.
A & W makes specific reference to a Signal Doll as a mast atop a Signal Bridge.
Reference: A & W 1997
SIGNAL EQUIPMENT. Materials and equipment needed for Railway Signal
System.
Reference: RaNT 2001
SIGNAL POST CAP/SIGNAL POST FINIAL. Two variant terms for Finials..
RaNT describes the former as as a "Protective cap." and the latter as
"Decorative protective cap."
Reference: RaNT 2001
SIGNAL BRIDGE. A structure built over multiple tracks and which provided a
foundation for Signals.
Reference: REMC 1948.
SIGNAL GLASS. Glass designed and manufactured for Signal use.
85
Reference: REMC 1948
SIGNAL GLASSWARE. Term from Corning ad in REMC. It refers to designed
and manufactured glass products from Signa11ense to Lantern globes.
Reference: REMC 1948
SIGNAL HEAD A device (mechanical or electrical) with apparatus for
producing/deploying Signal aspects.
Reference: Kanner 1992
SIGNAL LAMP. A Lamp that is positioned behind spectacle.
Reference: RONT 2001, A &W, 1991
SIGNAL LENSES. A more specific term than the general term Lenses.
Reference: REMC 1948
SIGNAL MAST. Portion of a Signal that supports the operating apparatus.
Reference: King 1921
SIGNAL MECHANISM. Signal apparatus that regulates changing of aspects in a
power Signal.
Reference: King 1921
TUBULAR STEEL BRACKET SIGNAL. Steel mast of a tubular shape. Other
elements of the unit were ofprefabricated parts.
Reference: A & W 1991
VISUAL DISPLAY UNIT. A Screen for displaying various forms of information.
Reference: RONT 2001
1B5 Signal Confirmation
General Note. RONT includes a segment of Signal Confirmattion devices known
either as Indicators or Repeaters. Some are in a Semaphore form and these are
cross-references.
86
SIGNAL CONFIRMATION. These are "remote indicators" confirming Signal
aspects or operation of Signal.
Reference: RONT 2001
ARM REPEATER. Displays arm position to Signal staff.
Reference: RONT 2001
LAMP OUT INDICATOR. Electric indicator that notes Signal lamp fault.
Reference: RONT 2001
LIGHT INDICATOR. No information given by RONT.
Reference: RONT 2001
ON/OFF ThTDICATOR. Signalbox instrument that indicates signal arm position.
Reference: RONT 2001
REPEATER. Signalbox indicator gives position of Semaphore arms when not
seen from box.
Reference: RONT 2001
SIGNAL REPEATER.
ELECTRIC SEMAPHORE REPEATER. Electric powered indicator of Signal
arms position in signalbox.
SIGNAL ARM REPEATER. Signalbox instrument giving Signal arm
position.
SLOT REPEATER. Mechanical or electric indication of position of home and
distant Signal slot interlocking.
Reference: RONT 2001
87
IC Messages: Aspects & Indications
General Note I. Messages are a very complex subject. Terms, colors, arrangement
of colors, alternate configurations, the many railway systems conspire to defeat
any brief (or not so brief) coverage of the subject. Since the Database is not
intended to be a compendium ofmessages this coverage is restricted. The primary
concern of this study are terms and definitions. Nonetheless, an effort has been to
include colors and other message components for basic messages and their
meanings. The actual railway signal codes would be needed in order to gain a
fuller understanding of all of the permutations for any system.
General Note II. There are three segments for this sub-chapter: a) an examination
of basic terms and colors in use; b) a review of aspects. Aspects refer to the
visual appearance of a signal. Often the aspects ofa signal apparatus are attached
to the basic term Signal thereby generating many additional terms; c) Finally,
indications which refer to the meanings ofthe aspects (messages) are included.
General Note III. This coverage is of a general nature. It is more focussed on fully
lighted signals especially for running operations. Partially-lighted and unlighted
signals, signs, markers are included only to a limited degree. Entries for those
forms will include messages. Radio and sound devices also include messages.
Special forms of all lighted signals (e.g., rows of lights, special arrangement of
lenses, etc.) are noted in entries for physical forms. Color information is also
included.
General Note IV. Morphology includes terms that refer to functions of signals in
a system (e.g. Block Signals, Interlocking Signals) as well as specialized
functions (e.g. Route Indicators). Messages are also part of morphological
considerations though reviewed separately.
ICI Basic Terms and Colors
a) Terms
ASPECT I. For North America this means the visual appearance of the signal but
88
not the meaning ascribed to the appearance. .
References: AAR SC 1965, UCOOR (US) 1968
ASPECT II. For ERS this has two meanings: either the visual appearance, or the
meaning ascribed to it. ERS merges two separate meanings or perhaps it can be
seen as bringing together two closely interrelated roles.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
ASPECT SEQUENCES. This term refers to the forms that Signal aspects can
take: fixed or flashing, horizontally or vertically arranged, etc. Various systems
may refer to, one/two/three, etc. aspects but all forms can be retained within the
term Aspect.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
ASPECT, SIGNAL/SIGNAL ASPECT. These terms are more explicit versions of
the basic term.
References: AAR SC 1965, ARSPAP-D 1965, FRA-3 1979
INDICATIONS. For North America this refers to the meaning ascribed to the
visual appearance or aspect.
Reference: Henry 1942
SIGNAL INDICATION. This term is a further explication of the core term
Indication.
Reference: AAR SC 1965
SIGNAL CODE. The book of rules governing the use of signals for a railway
system.
Reference: See Part F for references to Signal Code.
b) Colors
(l) Basic Colors
89
General Note. Basic colors can be termed the Primary Signal Colors. White is
somewhat uncertain among categories of colors. It is seemingly not a primary
color for Breckinridge though it is beyond the a secondary level of usage for
railways.
Reference: Breckenridge 1964, 1967
RED. This is a long-enduring color with a consistent message of danger with the
meaning of stop as a necessary corollary.
Reference: Armstrong 1957, K & W 1978
GREEN. This color has a nearly universal meaning of Go or Proceed. However, it
was only in the early 20th c. that it gained that meaning though green was
sometimes used as a proceed signal before the mid-19th century. Green was long
known as a caution signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953, Bronson (DEP) 1993, Mashour 1974, Nock 1978
YELLOW. This color fmds considerable usage as a caution signal though not
until the early 20th c. because of inadequacies in color science and manufacturing
capabilities.
References: Allen 1952, Mashour 1974
WHITE. This color is considered among the less-used or specialized colors
though it fmds considerable usage and can be regarded as a fourth basic color in
some situations.
References: New System RG 1884, Jia-lin 1981
2) Color Combinations
GREEN/YELLOW/IYELLOW GREEN. This is the most common color
combination; it is included by nearly half of the systems surveyed in Part F. And
it also the most common combination in Europe. It is an economical fourth aspect
since both colors are already in used. It can be employed for a somewhat
restrictive indicator though within the proceed mode. Examples of that usage
include Austria (40 kmIh speed limit with Gly), URO (40 kmIh in that manner
with flashing lights, GFFY a change from 40 to 120 kmIh can be signified). GN
90
is less restrictive in North America than Y/G. This is less the case in Europe.
Reference: ERS-H 1995, AAR SC 1984, ARSPAP A & 11956, Canada, UCOOR
1961, URO 1962
YELLOWIRED, GREENIRED, RED/GREEN are other important combinations.
though less than a quarter of the systems reviewed in Part F employed these
combinations. In North American practice some combinations are less restrictive
(or more) according to order of colors.
Other combinations include basic colors with a less used color.White is more
often employed than other colors. (e.g., The Netherlands uses white but not
yellow). Another combination is white and red which fmds use for shunting
purposes in a number of railway systems.
References: Part F, ERS-H 1995, NS SR 1975
(3) Specialized Colors
General Note: Less employed colors include White, Blue, Purple, and Lunar
White; Breckenridge refers to the last three colors as Secondary Signal Colors.
Breckenridge seemingly does not include white in Primary or in Secondary
though he does include white in signal colors.
BLUE. A color of relatively limited use. Some European nations have employed
it. Portugal has used it for permissive stops and directional indications. Spain uses
blue for Directional Signals. Blue flags and lights are used in the US for workers
in close proximity to rolling stock. It has also been used for Vane Signals.
Reference: Calvert 2004, CP 1981, McKnight 1990, RENFE 1978
WHITE. This is a frequently used color. It is often used for points indicators and
position lights including route and junction indicators on running lines. As noted
above it is conjoined with a major color for various uses. See Also Basic Colors.
Reference: PartF, ARSPAP-H 1953
AMBER. A term of confusion. Some sources see this as a less saturated yellow
employed in railway signals. Some references seem to suggest it is a modified
yellow color employed in US position light signals among other uses.
91
References: Part F with references to other sources, Swiss Railways 1981
YELLOW-ORANGE. This color employed in Vietnam may also be within the
yellow spectrum.
Reference: UN 1954 - Viet-nam
ORANGE. Swiss Railways employs what they call Orange; they also include
yellow. Possibly the Orange hue is within the yellow spectrum.
Reference: Swiss Railways 1981
PURPLE & VIOLET. Seemingly these are the same colors. Violet is preferred in
Europe. This color (s) fmds more specialized use in shunt and switch roles. Such
colors may be employed to avoid confusion with signals for running movements.
Spain employs Violet with permissive stops.
Reference: RENFE 1978
LUNAR WHITE. This can also be seen as Blue-White. It is relatively common in
UK and lJK-influenced systems. It is used with Points Indicators and Route
Signals. Color-position Signals in the US also employ the color. Portugal uses it
along with standard color for some running movement signals. Netherlands
includes a color known as "Melkwit" or milk-white which may also be Lunar
White.
Reference: Netherlands 1975 SR, RGS 1981
4) Spatial Configurations
ERS takes notes of difference in spatial configurations: signals can be arranged
horizontally, vertically or at an incline. Inclines could be from lower-left to upper-
right or lower-right to upper-left. In the case of the double yellow (preliminary
caution) all four versions are employed. Part F viewed spatial configurations
differently. That study divided configurations into categories of basic, modified-
basic and complex; the complex was further sub-divided. The basic version
displayed two or more light units in a vertical pattern that was straight-line. The
modified version included basic forms in horizontal or triangular shapes.
92
Complex forms included standard-shaped head (basic geometric form) but with an
irregular lamp arrangement; in some instances the lamps appear to be "scattered"
over the surface. A second complex version displayed irregular-shaped signal
heads and lamps. A third version included more than one type of symbol.
One other element is the use of flashing lights. Uses and meanings of Flashing
Lights are diverse and decentralized in the extreme. URO employed such lights
extensively and as an integral element. European systems use flashing lights
extensively though meanings are diverse.
Green flashing lights include proceed at reduced speeds. Yellow encompasses
cautionary messages while Red messages include stopping on sight. Users outside
Europe include Brazil who employs flashing red as a permissive stop. For Canada
flashing red is used for TakelLeave Siding Signals.
References: URO 1962, ERS-H 1995, Brazil 1960, Canada UCOOR 1961; see
also Holmes 1971
5) Variant Color Combinations & Miscellaneous Color Uses
General Note. Specific hues and uses of color may result in qualifying names
attached to basic colors. Colors may be attached to other factors. Some of these
terms also include colloquialisms and alternate configurations.
RESTRICTED RED, Breckenridge 1964
TRAFFIC RED, Homes 1971
INTERMEDIATE YELLOW, Breckenridge 1964
INTERMEDIATE GREEN, Breckenridge 1964
SIGNAL BLUE, Breckenridge 1964
NELS YELLOW (Historic), AERR
KEROSENE PINK, (DEP) Bronson 1983
DOUBLE RED, Armstrong 1957
DOUBLE AMBER, Allen 1952
DOUBLE YELLOW, Shackleton 1978, Nock 1978
DOUBLE-YELLOW SIGNAL, K & W 1963
93
FLASHING YELLOW ASPECT, Leach 1991
FLASHING SINGLE YELLOW ASPECT, Vann 1997
FLASHING DOUBLE YELLOW ASPECT, Vann 1997
SELENIUM RUBY GLASS, B & M 1981
DOUBLE YOKE (Double Yellow), Jackson 1992
FROSTED WHITE, (DEP) Bronson 1983
GINGER 'UN (Distant Signal with Caution Indication), Jackson 1992
"LIGHTLY-TINTED ... ", B & M 1981
LUNAR-WHITE LAMPILUNAR WHITE MARKER LAMP, King 1921,
REMC 1948
RED EYE, Jackson 1992
YELLOW EYE (Double Yellow), Jackson 1992
YELLOW-TINTED LENSES, King 1991
1C2 Aspects
General Note. Frequently the number of aspects (sometimes the term position is
employed though that was more common with Semaphore Signals) is attached to
the term Signal so that many Signal terms include the number of Aspects (or
Positions) as part of the actual title. The Database includes a listing of these terms
but with little explanation since they are largely self-explanatory in nature.
a) Single-Aspect Terms (none in notes but there are some)
ONE-WAY POINTS INDICATOR, SA-BBB 1974
SINGLE ASPECT COLOURLIGHT, WBS
SINGLE-ASPECT SHUNT, King 1921
SINGLE ASPECT SIGNAL, Queensland SS-E 1977
SINGLE ASPECT SUBSIDIARY COLOURLIGHT, A & W 1991
SINGLE/2/3/4 ASPECT, Signal Eq. 1981,
2-,3-, 4-ASPECT SIGNALLING, Leach 1991
2/3/4-ASPECt SIGNALLING SYSTEM, Cunliffe 1968
b) Two-Aspect Terms
94
LOWER QUADRANT TWO ASPECT SEMAPHORE TYPE, UN 1954 (Phil.)
TWO ASPECT COLOR LIGHT SIGNALS, Kenya
TWO-ASPECT COLOR-LIGHT SIGNALS, K & W 1963
TWO-ASPECT COLOR LIGHT REPEAT SIGNAL, Queensland SS-E 1977
TWO-ASPECT FIXED SIGNALS, Pakistan
TWO-ASPECT IN-CAB WARNING SYSTEM, FRA-1 1978
TWO ASPECT LOWER QUADRANT SIGNALS, India
TWO ASPECT MULTI-UNIT TYPE OF COLOUR LIGHT SIGNAL, A & W
1991
TWO ASPECT NIECHANICAL SEMAPHORES, Kenya
TWO-ASPECT SHORT RANGE SIGNALS, Starkey 1944
TWO-ASPECT SIGNALS, GEC 1974, Hammond 1964
TWO ASPECT SIGNALS, Queensland SS-E 1977
TWO ASPECT SYSTEM, ERS-H 1995
TWO-INDICATION SIGNAL, King 1921
TWO-LIGHT SIGNAL ASPECT, King 1921
TWO-POSITION AUTOMATIC SIGNALS, King 1921
TWO-POSITION BRACKET POST SIGNALS, King 1921
TWO-POSITION HOME SIGNAL, King 1921
TWO POSITION LQ BRACKET SIGNAL, King
TWO-POSITION SEMAPHORE SIGNALING, King
TWO-POSITION SIGNAL, ARSPAP-D 1965, AAR SM 1983, Victoria R
TWO-ARM, TWO POSITION, L.Q. SEMAPHORE PIPE CONNECTED
TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL, ARSPAP-H 1953
TWO-POSITION SEMAPHORE SIGNAL, K & W 1963
TWO-ARM STARTER SIGNAL, Queensland SS 1965
TWO-POSITION INSTRUMENTS, One 100 Years
TWO-POSITION LOWER LEFT-HAND QUADRANT SEMAPHORE,
Wooley 1958, VR
TWO-POSITION DISTANT SIGNAL, K& W 1963
TWO-POSITION LOWER QUADRANT SIGNALS, South Australia 1947
TWO-POSITION LQ TWO ARM, THREE-BLOCK SIGNAL, FRA-3 1979
TWO-POSITION HOME SIGNAL, Blythe 1951
TWO-POSITION UQ SIGNAL, Nock 1962
95
TWO-POSITION DISTANT SIGNAL, K & W 1963
TWO-STRIPPED SPEED INDICATOR (2 rows or strips), AZD
TWO-WAY POINTS INDICATOR, Starkey 1944, SA-BBB 1974
TWO-DOLL BRACKET SIGNAL, Starkey 1944
c) Three-Aspect Terms
AUTOMATIC BLOCK THREE-ASPECT SIGNAL, Calvert 2004
AUTOMATIC THREE-ASPECT SIGNAL, UN 1954
LOWER-QUADRANT THREE-ASPECT SIGNALS, Calvert 2004
THREE-ASPECT AUTOMATIC BLOCK LIGHT SIGNAL, AZD
THREE-ASPECT COLOR-LIGHT SIGNAL, K& W 1963
THREE-ASPECT COLOUR LIGHT SIGNAL, A & W 1991
THREE-ASPECT COLOURLIGHT CO-ACTING SIGNAL, A & W 1991
THREE-ASPECT LONG RANGE COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNAL, Starkey 1944
THREE-ASPECT JUNCTION SIGNAL, Nock 1980, K & W 1963
THREE-ASPECT MULTIPLE-LENS COLOURLIGHT, Vanns 1997
THREE-ASPECT MULTIPLE-UNIT LENS COLOURLIGHT SIGNAL, A & W
1991
THREE-ASPECT MlTLTIPLE-lJ]'UT OF COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNAL, Taylor
1949
THREE ASPECT SIGNAL, RONT 2001
THREE-ASPECT SYSTEM OF SIGNALLING, Zimbabwe 1987
THREE ASPECT SIGNAL/THREE-ASPECT SIGNAL, Queensland R SA-E
1977, SA G.A.l947
THREE-ASPECT T.S., Nock 1962
THREE-ASPECT, TWO-BLOCK AUTOMATIC SIGNALLING, A & W 1991
THREE-ASPECT, TWO-BLOCK SIGNALLING, REMC 1948
THREE-ASPECT, TWO-BLOCK SYSTEM, REMC 1948
THREE-ASPECT, TWO BLOCK SYSTEM OF SIGNALLING, REMC 1948
THREE-ASPECT UQ DOUBLE WIRE SIGNAL, UN 1954 (India, Burma)
THREE-BLOCK INDICATION, King 1921
THREE-COLOR SIGNAL SYSTEM, Tansley 1985
THREE INDICATION SIGNAL, King 1921
THREE-INDICATION TWO-BLOCK SIGNAL, Henry 1942
96
THREE-POSITION AUTOMATIC SIGNALLING, 100 Years
THREE-POSITION COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALS, A Century ... NZ 1964
THREE-POSITION COLOUR SIGNALLING, Queensland SS
THREE-POSITION ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC SEMAPHORE, Nock 1962
THREE-POSITION U Q DISC SIGNAL, Nock 1962
THREE-POSITION U-Q SEMAPHORE/THREE-POSITION, U-Q SIGNALS/
THREE-POSITION UQ SIGNALS, ARSPAP-H 1953 (1), A Century (2),
Shackleton 1976 (3) [2 and 3 add semaphore]
THREE-POSITION L-Q SEMAPHORE/THREE·POSITION LQ SIGNAL,
ARSPAP-H 1953 (1), King 1921 (2)
THREE-POSITION LQ SEMAPHORE SIGNAL, King 1921
THREE-POSITION SIGNAL, Corbin 1922
THREE POSITION SIGNALLING, Nock 1962
THREE-POSITION SEMAPHORE, Shackleton 1976
THREE-POSITION, UQ SIGNAL/THREE POSITION UQ SIGNAL, Nock
1962, K & W 1963 [No comma], REMC 1948
THREE-POSITION, THREE ASPECT SIGNAL, Blythe 1951
THREE POSITION UPPER RIGHT HAND QUADRANT SIGNAL, ARSPAP-H
1953
d) Four-Aspect Terms
FOUR ASPECT SIGNAL, RONT 2001
FOUR ASPECT SYSTEM, ERS-H 1995
FOUR-ASPECT SIGNALINGIFOUR-ASPECT SIGNALLING, India, FRA-1,
Nock 1980
FOUR-ASPECT CODED 100 HZ CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM, FRA-2 1979
FOUR-ASPECT COLOR-LIGHT SIGNALING, Vann 1997
FOUR-ASPECT COLOUR LIGHT SIGNAL, GEC
FOUR-ASPECT SHUNT TOTON SIGNALING, Tyer (Field & Grant)
FOUR ASPECT SIGNALIFOUR-ASPECTS SIGNALS, Queensland R SS-E
1977 (1), SA TWR 1962 (2)
FOUR-ASPECT COLOUR SIGNALS, Queensland R SS
FOUR-ASPECT, FOUR-SPEED CODED CONTINUOUS TCS, FRA-3
FOUR ASPECT COLOR LIGHT SYSTEM, Nock 1962
97
FOUR-ASPECT JUNCTION SIGNAL, Nock 1980
FOUR-ASPECT MULTIPLE UNIT SIGNAL, Taylor 1949
FOUR-ASPECT SEARCHLIGHT SIGNAL, A & W 1991
FOUR-ASPECT SEMI-AUTONOMOUS SEARCHLIGHT SIGNAL, A & W
1991
FOUR-ASPECT, 3-BLOCK AUTOMATIC WAYSIDE SIGNALING, A &W
1991
FOUR-ASPECT, THREE-BLOCK SIGNALING, REMC 1948
FOUR-INDICATION, THREE BLOCK SIGNAL, Henry 1942
FOUR-POSITION SIGNAL, AAR SM 1983
FOURTH ASPECT, Cardani 1979
e) Five-Aspect Terms
FIVE ASPECT SIGNAL, Nock 1962
FIVE ASPECT SYSTEM, ERS-H 1953
FIVE-INDICATION SIGNAL, Henry 1942
FIVE LIGHT JUNCTION ThTDICATOR, Queensland R SS-E 1977
FIVE SIGNAL (SPEED) ASPECTS, FRA-1 1978
f) Other Aspect Terms
AUTOMATIC COLOUR LIGHT, Barwell1983
MULTI ASPECT CAB SIGNALING, FRA-3 1979
MULTI-ASPECT COLOR-LIGHT SIGNALS, V. Brown 1984
MULTIPLE-ASPECT COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALLING, Allen 1962
MULTIPLE-ASPECT COLOUR-LIGHT SYSTEM, Barwell1983
MULTIPLE ASPECT SIGNALSIMULTIPLE-ASPECT SIGNAL, Nock 1962
(l), RONT (2)
MULTIPLE-ASPECT SIGNALLING, Barwell 1983
MULTLPLEASPECT SIGNALLING, A & W 1991
MULTI-ASPECT COLOUR SIGNALS, UN 1954
MULTI-ASPECT SIGNALLING, A & W 1997, UAR 1983
MULTI-ASPECT SIGNAL SYSTEM, FRA-11978
98
MULTI-ASPECT SIGNALING, Annstrong 1978/MULTI ASPECT
SIGNALLING, SA Multi-Aspect Signalling
MULTI-ASPECT SIGNALS WITH JUNCTION INDICATOR, ERS-B
MULTI-ASPECT UQ DOUBLE-WIRE SIGNALING, UN 1954
APB SIGNAL WITH 3 & 4 ASPECTS, FRA-3 1979
CAB SIGNAL ASPECT, FRA-1 1978
DAY & NIGHT ASPECTS, Farrington 1946
FLASHING ASPECT, LIRR 1991
LUMINOUS ASPECT, UIC CST 1972
POSITION LIGHT ASPECTS/POSITION-LIGHT SIGNALS, ERS-H,
Calvert 2004 (2nd term)
STOP-&-PROCEED ASPECT, Solomon 2003
THREEIFOUR ASPECT, K & W 1963
THREE/-FOURASPECT SIGNAL SYSTEM, FRA-11978
1C3 Indications
General Note. Some sources employ Signal to mean an Indication. Others so use
Aspect. Some employ the message without other terminology. The message with
or without other words is the core element.
a) Primary Forms
CLEAR SIGNAL. This is the most common name (or title) for the proceed
("Go") indication. In the English language it is employed by systems on every
continent (inhabited). The meaning of the indication is very often "Proceed." For
ERS a variety ofEuropean systems employ Line Clear instead of Protocol. While
there are alternative wordings the meaning remains the same. In some systems the
word Proceed is both title and meaning. For some systems a steady, single green
light is employed for the Clear Signal. However, multiple greens and
combinations ofcolors may be employed. When combinations of colors are
99
employed green has the topmost position. Clear Signal can have several
meanings: aspect, or indication, or physical apparatus.
References: ERS-H 1995, Blythe 1951
LINE CLEAR. This term is employed by some European systems. See also Clear
Signal.
Reference: ERS-H 1995, Vauns 1997
PROCEED SIGNAL. This term is an alternate for Clear Signal. For many
systems employing Clear Signal the word proceed is included as the meaning. For
ERS-H a: proceed indication "[i]s any aspect other than the most restrictive." For
other systems, including South Africa and ANR, proceed denotes next signal
either at proceed or at caution.
Reference: SA TWR 1964, ANR (SA 1947), ERS-H 1995, Leach 1992
CAUTION SIGNAL. This term is frequently employed for a signal denoting the
next signal is at stop. The description of the indication is very similar throughout
many systems: "Proceed, prepared to stop at next signal." (ANR). The wording
may vary to a degree (e.g., the word proceed may drop out; the indication may
indicate the next signal is actual at stop) but the meaning expressed is very
similar. A single steady yellow lens may denote the message though multiple
lenses and combinations of colors may be employed; if a combination of colors
are employed the yellow indication is uppermost.
References: ARSPAP SAl 1956, K & W 1963, ANR (SA 1947)
APPROACH SIGNAL. Caution is a nearly global term though for Canada and the
US Approach Signal is employed instead. However, the meaning and expression
of meaning is very similar to other nations. Multiple lenses may be present with
more than one color but yellow is in the top position.
References: ARSPAP SAl 1956 & SC 1965, Canada UCOOR 1961
STOP ASPECT/STOP SIGNAL. A nearly self-explanatory indication. Red,
unlike green and yellow, has had the meaning danger for a very extended period
of time. The indication or meaning of this signal is simply stop. Most systems
share that meaning. Pakistan has a variant of "Stop and Stay". A few systems may
100
offer explication with a phrase such as "Section is occupied" (NZ).
References: Pakistan Railways, New Zealand R 1974, REMC 1948
DANGER/DANGER SIGNAL. Some systems substitute Danger Signal for Stop
Signal but with the same meaning of stop. UK and Pakistan are two such systems.
In UK Home Signals are termed Stop Signals. Stop Signal have clear indications
in contrast to Distant Signals.
References: K & W 1963, Pakistan Railways, King 1921
PRELIMINARY CAUTION SIGNAL. UK and other systems often include a
Preliminary Caution Signal. UK employs a double yellow indication for this
purpose; some systems using a flashing yellow.
Reference: K & W 1963
b) Specialized Forms
US (ARSPAP, SAl 1956) and Canada (UCOOR 1961, CN RSIA) have three
additional forms of the Clear Signal:
LIMITED CLEAR SIGNALfLIMITED-CLEARJMEDIUM CLEARJMEDIUM
CLEAR SIGNAL/SLOW-CLEARJSLOW CLEAR SIGNAL. Each signal allows
a train to proceed through interlocking limits at the designated speed of limited,
clear or slow. Signal configurations and sign plates can vary between US and
Canada. Most of the signal aspects include both green and red lens units.
US and Canada have additional forms of the Approach Signal. They follow the
Approach form in allowing proceeding but the train crew is to be prepared to stop
at next signal. The qualifying word in the title indicates the speed the train is to
follow; most of these involve combinations of red and yellow. Flashing lights,
letter plates may be present:
LIMITED APPROACH SIGNAL/MEDIUM APPROACH SIGNALIMEDIUM-
CLEARIMEDIUM ADVANCE APPROACH SIGNAL [US ONLY]/MEDIUM
APPROACH SLOW SIGNAL [US only]/SLOW APPROACH SIGNAL/
RESTRICTING SIGNALIRESTRICTING ASPECTIRESTRICTING
101
INDICATION.
US and Canada include several indications in which Approach Signals are
followed by qualifying speed limit (in contrast to the previous group in which a
qualifying limited preceded Approach). This group includes solid yellow,
yellow/green and some yellow/green/red indications. There are three forms in
Canada and US and two found only in the US:
APPROACH LIMITED/APPROACH LIMITED SIGNAL/APPROACH
MEDIUM/APPROACH MEDIUM SIGNAL/APPROACH SLOW SIGNAL/
ADVANCE APPROACH MEDIUM SIGNAL [US only]/ADVANCED
APPROACH SIGNAL [Also US only].
Finally, US and Canada have several additional forms of the Stop Signal:
STOP & PROCEED SIGNAL/STOP-&-PROCEED/GRADE SIGNAL/
STATION PROTECTION SIGNAL/TAKE (OR LEAVE) SIDING SIGNAL. All
involve the single color of red; number and letter plates are usually present; the
Siding Signals includes a lighted "S".
Other Systems also include specialized forms ofIndications. These include:
MEDIUM SIGNAL. New South Wales includes this form. The meaning is
"Proceed; next signal at caution, but signal within braking distance at stop." It
displays a Green over Yellow indications.
New Zealand (also South Australia/ANR but adjustments in title wording may be
needed) has several added indications. These include:
CAUTION, LOW-SPEED SIGNAL. Proceed but at low speed; train to be
prepared for track occupied and ready to stop before construction. This Signal
indication is red accompanied by a low-speed lamp.
CAUTION, MEDIUM-SPEED SIGNAL. This calls for proceeding but at medium
speed. Signal displays red over yellow.
102
CLEAR, MEDIUM-SPEED SIGNAL. Proceed but at medium speed.
NZ has three "Normal-Speed Indications. These include:
CAUTION NORMAL SPEED SIGNAL. This allows moving at normal speed but
advance signal is either stop or requiring low speed response.
NORMAL SPEED SIGNAL. Normal speed is permitted but train required to be
prepared for medium speed at next signal.
CLEAR, NORMAL-SPEED SIGNAL. Train to proceed at normal signal. Next
signal either caution or clear at normal speed.
Kanner includes Aspect and Indications from several North American Codes that
overlap and diverge from AAR practice. These Codes and Aspects & Indications
include:
1) The Consolidated Code ofOperating Rules:
STOP
STOP & PROCEED
PERMISSIVE TAKING SIDING
APPROACH
CLEAR
APPROACH DIVERGING ROUTE
APPROACH MEDIUM
CLEAR-DIVERGING
RESTRICTING
SPRING SWITCH
SLOW-CLEAR
2) The Uniform Code of Operating Rules includes:
CLEAR
ADVANCE APPROACH
DIVERGING CLEAR
APPROACH MEDIUM
103
APPROACH DIVERGING APPROACH MEDIUM
APPROACH DIVERGING
DIVERGING APPROACH
LOW
STOP & PROCEED
STOP
Kanner notes that the General Code of Operating Rules have general rules but the
A & I display marked diversity from line to line though rules are general. These
are not available in Kanner.
Reference: Kanner 1992
Some miscellaneous terms include:
ASPECT, FALSE RESTRICTIVE/FALSE RESTRICTIVE ASPECT. Terms for
Signal aspect displaying an unintended excessive restrictive indication.
References: FRA-3, AAR SM 1983
ASPECT, PHANTOM SIGNALIPHANTOM SIGNAL. An unintended indication
created by reflection of extraneous light source off the signal's optic system.
References: FRA-RAR, AAR SM 1983
FALSE CLEAR/FALSE-CLEAR SIGNALIFALSE PROCEED. Signal
mechanism (system, device, appliance) that displays an inadequately restrictive
indication.
Reference: King 1921, K & T 1988
POTENTIAL FALSE PROCEED CONDITION (PFPC). Term describes a
situation in which a false proceed indication would be activated if a train entered
relevant section.
Reference: AAR SM 1983
104
ID Morphological Terms
General Note 1. Part F of Volume II focusses on Signals (the physical entity) and
their messages. Perhaps the same format should have been followed in the
Database but instead the decision was made to include terms relating to systems
(or methods of control) and morphological terms. The added coverage for !iii can
not be said to be definitive though it tends toward the comprehensive.
Morphological terms refer to functions of Signals. Such terms are included in the
Database when the function is attached to the word Signal. For example, a Block
Signal, a Siding Signal, a Shunt Signal. The term Signal means the physical
dimension and the morphological term indicates what purpose the Signal
performs. Such terms can relate to systems (e.g., a block indicates the purpose but
also tells the kind of system). It can refer to messages as well (e.g., a Caution
Signal indicates the message).
General Note II. There is a great welter of morphological terms. Not a few of
which are found in only a few railway systems or even a single system. Some
terms are obsolescent while others are fully archaic though they may be found in
railway treaties available in libraries and other collections.. It proves to be a
problem to include the vast scope of such terms and classify and arrange the
categories of those terms.
This coverage will offer a four-part classification (aided by Kitchenside and
Williams). The coverage divides Signals into Running and Subsidiary forms.
Running Signals include those affecting train movement on running or main lines.
Subsidiary forms include shunt operations and other movements though not part
of running operations. The term Running Signal is sometimes employed in the US
though not Subsidiary Signals. Nonetheless, it is a workable schema for many
forms of Signals. However, other Signals fit less well into running and subsidiary.
Two additional categories are required: Yard and Station terms refer to running
situations yet are apart from actual mainline operations. Admittedly, this is a point
that can be debated. There are also miscellaneous terms that prove difficult to
assign to any other category. Finally, there are message terms applied to Signals
which thereby become morphological. The line between messages and message-
morphological terms can be narrow and tentative.
105
1D1 Running Signal Terms
General Note. An abundant and diverse array of terms are employed for Running
Signals. Some are current, some obsolescent/obsolete. Sub-terms and
permutations of many forms are employed as well. This coverage includes many
terms with an emphasis on core terms. Sub-terms and variant forms will
frequently be attached to core terms. Definitions will be based on major practice;
references to more peripheral meanings will be included to some degree. The
coverage may be reasonably comprehensive though falling short of defmitive.
The phethora of core running terms can be assigned to a few categories. These
groups are not isolated monads but are instead often closely interrelated. These
groups include Stop, Starting, Distant forms (lD1 b) ). Home Signals are included
though not in the title.
ID1 a) Overarching Signal Terms
General Note. Some of the following terms are marginal at best. Possibly a
subdividing of the terms into overarching and sub- or near-overarching groups
may be in order though the number of terms and variants is limited and extensive
subdivisions are not feasible.
RUNNING SIGNALS. These are signals for train operations on running (or main)
lines. Such signals control, protect train movements of a through nature. K & W
views train operations as of two forms: running and siding operations. The term is
common in UK and UK-influenced systems. It is also found on the European
continent and in some non-European systems though rare in North America.
Reference: K & W 1963, ERS-H 1995
PRIMARY SIGNALS. This term is a translation of a German term into English.
It is seemingly a synonym for Running or Main Signals. Such Signals control
main operations.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
RUNNING LINE SIGNALS. This variant form is found in South Africa. It is a
106
more explicit version of the basic form by adding the word Line. That word also
appears in Lineside and is a synonym for Trackside. Line refers to Track.
Reference: SA GA 1947
COLOR LIGHT RUNNING SIGNALS. A term that all but explains itself. The
basic term is augmented by the physical type of signal that is employed.
Reference: K & W 1963
MAIN SIGNALS. This term has multiple meanings though it may appear to have
a simple meaning. For ERS it is simply a synonym for Running Signals. FRA
includes references to UK signals. It can mean Home or Block Signals but
apparently not Distant Signals. UIC-CST views it as having a clear indication
allowing a train to continue or recommence its journey. Apparently a Signal with
a caution or stop indication is not a Main Signal.
References: ERS-H 1995, FRA-3 1979, LITC-CST 1972
MAIN LINE SIGNALIMAIN-LINE SIGNAL. For K & W this is apparently a
synonym for Running Signals; a second source hyphenates the term.
Reference: K & W 1963, Taylor 1949
MAINLINE SIGNALS. This is both a physical and a morphological term. It
refers to Signals employed on main lines rather than to train yards and more
restricted operations.
Reference: US&S 1982
MAIN LINE RUNNING SIGNAL. For NSW this seems to mean Running
Signals on Main Lines, or Running Signals - a category - on main or primary
tracks. That may imply that Running Signal might conceivably be found on other
than main tracks.
Reference: NSW Railways Signalling
MAIN RUNNING STOP SIGNAL. This term refers to Main Signal as the major
or principal signal assemblage on a mast or gantry in which a second and different
assemblage is added. On the surface the term seems to suggest a Main Line or
Running Signal though with added emphasis.
107
Reference: K & W 1963
1D1 b) Core Terms: Stop, Distant & Related Signal Terms
1) Stop Signal Terms
ADVANCE SIGNAL. This Signal serves as a Home Signal but in advance mode.
It creates short blocks so the train does not obstruct operations in adjoining
sections. See Also: Advanced Signals.
Reference: King 1921
ADVANCED SIGNAL. This term from a historic source appears to refer to an
Outer Home Signal or equivalent. It allows for a mini-block within a regular
block thereby permitting the holding of train in block while main train operations
continue in that block.
Reference: RSD 1911
BUFFER STOP SIGNAL. Term for a Stop Signal not preceded by an Advance
Signal.
Reference: A & W 1991
COLIGNY-WELCH SIGNAL LAMP. A historic term. The lamp displayed
arrows that distinguished Distant Signal from other forms.
Reference: Jackson 1992
DEAD SIGNAL. This Signal is always at an Stop indication. The Signal crew
could approve proceeding after a stop is made.
Reference: Jackson 1992
FIXED STOP SIGNAL A Signal similar to the Fixed Distant Signal.
Reference:
HOME SIGNALIHOME-SIGNAL. This Signal is at the entrance to a block; it
governs movements in that block and along that route. Some UK and derivative
sources describe the Home Signal as the one attached to the first Signal box. The
108
Signal contains a stop message (as opposed to the UK form of Distant Signal
which has caution messages only). Home Signal not included in ERS (Home
Signal is part of Stop Signal which see; Stop Signal included in ERS). lITC-CST
gives the Home Signal a reduced role of control for yard, station entrances but
apparently not for block entrances. The hyphenated form is from UN 1954.
References: K & W 1963, ERS-H 1972, lITC-CST 1972, UN 1954, Allen 1952,
Armstrong 1957
INNER HOME/OUTER HOME. Abbreviated versions of basic terms.
Reference: Taylor 1949
INTERMEDIATE BLOCK HOME SIGNAL. Stop Signal at exit from
intermediate block to blocked section beyond intermediate block.
Reference: RONT 2001
REAR HOME SIGNAL. NY Muncipal Railway employed this signal in lieu of
Distant Signal of other railroads.
Reference: King 1921
RED BOARD/RED EYE. Colloquial terms for Stop Signal.
Reference: Jackson 1992
SIGNAL, HOME. AAR-SM 1983, ARSPAP-D places the universal before the
particular for a variety of terms including this one. The meaning is not thereby
altered.
Reference: AAR-SM 1983, ARSPAP-D 1965
OUTER HOME SIGNALIINNER HOME SIGNAL/INTERMEDIATE HOME
SIGNAL. "Sub-terms" employed where heavy traffic, or long blocks require
require more nuanced messages; in effect this creates sub-blocks.
Reference: SA SS 1936
SECOND HOME SIGNAL/THIRD HOME SIGNALIHOME No. 1IHOME No.
2. Some systems refer to multiple Home Signals by simple numeration instead of
word forms such as Outer and Inner.
~Og
References: K & W 1963, Queensland R FS, Western Australia R 1974
SPLITTING HOME SIGNAL. A Home Signal for denoting diverging routes.
This Signal may be more appropriate with Route and Junction Signals.
References: K & W 1963
SPLITTING SEMAPHORE. A variation of the basic term that includes the
physical apparatus.
Reference: Taylor 1949
SPLITTING SIGNAL. A junction of main and branch lines requires two Signals
termed Splitting Signals. Splitting Home Signal is one such form.
Reference: Taylor 1949
STOP SIGNAL. A term ofpossible confusion. Stop Signal can denote a stop
indication. But in some usages it refers to a Signal where indications contain a
stop message as well as a clear message. UK and derivative systems as well as
some continental European systems include this Signal. Seemingly, it is not
employed in the US. K & W includes two forms: Home and Starting Signals.
mC-CST gives more importance to Stop than Home Signals. The Signal controls
the entrance to a block.
References: K & W 1963, UIC-CST 1972, ERS-H 1995
COLOR LIGHT STOP SIGNAL/AUTOMATIC STOP SIGNAL/SEMAPHORE
STOP SIGNAL/A.P. PERMISSIVE STOP SIGNAL. These are variant terms for
the Stop Signal.
References: India R, K & W 1963 (3rd term)
UP, DOWN DISTANT, HOME STARTER, ADVANCED STARTER. UK lines
historically were often double track and complete Signaling was required for both
up line and down line.
Reference: Taylor 1949
2) Starting Signal Terms
110
STARTING SIGNAL. Various UK, Empire/Commonwealth, UK-derivative
systems have employed a second form of Stop Signal known as a Starting Signal.
While the Home Signal is the fIrst stop signal in a block, the Starting Signal is the
last Signal under control of a signal box.
Reference: Western Australia R 1974
STARTER SIGNAL. This is seemingly a synonym for Starting Signal.
Reference: Allen 1952
ADVANCED STARTERlADVANCED STARTING SIGNAL/ADVANCE
STARTING SIGNAL. Sub-terms employed where heavy traffIc or long blocks
require more nuanced messages; in effect they create sub-blocks allowing
additional train(s) to enter a block already occupied.
Reference: Victoria R Signals, SA-SS 1936, SA-BBB 1974
OUTER ADVANCED STARTER. A additional Starting Signal. It is "in advance
of an advanced starter."
Reference: RaNT 2001
SECTION SIGNAL. According to A & W this is an alternate name for Starting
Signal.
Reference: A & W 1991
STARTER SEMAPHORE/ADVANCED STARTER SEMAPHORE. Variant
terms of the same meaning.
Reference: Isaacs & Whitehead 1917.
3) Distant Signal terms
AUXILIARY SIGNAL. Old name for Distant Signal.
Reference: Jackson 1992
DISTANT SIGNAL. This Signal serves as an advance signal to Stop (& Home)
Signals. It is at the braking distance from the Stop Signal. UK & derivative
versions give a caution message only while UIC-CST states that it has the
111
messages of the Stop Signal. That is seemingly US practice as well.
Reference: UIC-CST 1972, K & W 1963, Starkey 1944
DISTANT SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. A variant form that incorporates the type of
Signal into the title.
Reference: King 1921
DISTANT (WARNING) SIGNAL. For UIC the Warning Signal is synonym for
Distant and perhaps applicable here.
Reference: Wehner 1981
FISHTAIL. An informal term for Distant Signal.
Reference: Jackson 1992
FIXED DISTANTIFIXED DISTANT SIGNAL. Refers to Distant Signal in fixed
danger position. Denotes speed or other change in train operations (passing loop,
passenger platform).
Reference: Jackson 1992
HALL DISTANT SIGNAL. A historic term that includes the manufacuter's name
in the title.
Reference: King 1921
SIGNAL DISTANT/DISTANT-SIGNAL. Variant form of the core term with the
same or similar meaning.
References: Alkmaar, AAR-SM 1983, K & W 1963
WARNER SIGNAL. A synonym for the Distant Signal. It is included in UN
1954, and employed in Pakistan. Origin of the term is unknown.
References: UN 1954, Pakistan Railways GASR
WARNING SIGNAL. Synonym for Distant Signal in UIC-CST (possibly also in
ERS). This term describes a form of Subsidiary Signal as well which see.
Reference: UIC-CST 1972
112
OUTER DISTANT SIGNALIINNERDISTANT SIGNALIINTERMEDIATE
DISTANT SIGNAL/SECOND DISTANT SIGNAL. Sub-terms employed where
heavy traffic, or long blocks, require more nuanced messages; in effect creating
sub-blocks to increase train movements in a given block. The final term is from
Taylor.
Reference: NSW R Signalling, Taylor 1949 (final term)
POWER-OPERATED DISTANT SIGNAL/SEMAPHORE DISTANTIDISTANT
SIGNAL COLOR LIGHT/COLOR LIGHT DISTANT SIGNAL. Distant Signal
terms with qualifying words attached to core term.
References: B & M 1981, K & W 1963
ADVANCE SIGNAL. A synonym for Distant Signal.
References: UIC-CST 1972, ERS-H 1995
APPROACH SIGNAL. A synonym for Distant Signal.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
UNWORKED DISTANT SIGNAL. This term refers to Distant Signals not in
operation or in an operation mode that is in a fixed, unvarying pattern. UK
Military speaks of large Warning Boards at unworked Distant Signals while K &
W speaks of Distant Signals fixed at a caution indication.
References: K & W 1963, UK Military 1955
SIGNAL, DISTANT. An application placed under heading of Signal. It may not
be accurate to speak ofthe Signal in that form though ARSPAP-D often places
the general before the particular.
Reference: AAR-SM 1983
SPLITTING DISTANT SIGNAL/SPLITTING DISTANT. A Signal denoting
divergent routes. It may be more appropriate if assigned to Route and Junction
Signals. A & W omits Signal from term.
References: K & W 1963, Nock 1980, A & W 1991
IDI c) System Terms
113
ABSOLUTE SIGNAL. Signal within Automatic Blocking Signaling. One train
permitted at a time in block.
Reference: King 1921
ADVANCED SECTION SIGNAL. An older name for what became Intermediate
Block Signal.
Reference: Vanns 1997
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNAL. See Automatic Signals.
Reference: King 1921
AUTOMATIC SIGNALS. These are Signals activated by train movements via
track circuit.
Reference: REMC 1948
BLOCK SIGNAL/SIGNAL, BLOCK. A Block System indicates a system of
interconnected Signals that include the physical Signal as well as messages and
control system. The term Block Signal denotes the Signal and its specific function
though the line between system and morphology is narrow. Signal, Block is from
ARSPAP-D. The definition is that of Signal, home (which see) in the same
publication except that the reference to route is deleted.
References: ARSPAP-D 1965, Bisset 1990, Ellis 1966
BLOCK & INTERLOCKING SIGNALS. In Canadian practice this term refers to
Aspects & Indications; that is, Signals as conveying units of information.
Canadian Signals (in both senses) are organized into block and interlocking
patterns.
Reference: Canada UCOOR 1961
CONTROLLED SIGNAL. A form of Absolute Signal which is operated by a
control operator. A term that originated with Chicago and North Western
Transportation Co.
Reference: Kanner 1992
114
HOLDING SIGNAL. Term for block entrance signal that governs train
movements entering, and operating in that block, route. It is the same as a Block
Signal except that it can refer to Holding Signals as well.
Reference: AAR-SM 1987
INTERLOCKING DWARF SIGNAL. The basic term is augmented by type of
function.
Reference: King 1921
INTERMEDIATE BLOCK SIGNAL (lBS). Term refers to Signals which create
shorter block sections by adding signals on long blocks. In effect, they offer
additional Advanced Starting Signals. Such signals lacked signalboxes and
functioned as Automatic Signals.
References: K& W 1963, FRA-3 1979, ERS-P 1995, Vanns 1997
INTERMEDIATE SIGNAL. In New Zealand practice these are. Signals that
divide a block into small segments. The Signals usually display "Stop and
Proceed" indications.
Reference: New Zealand R 1989
INTERLOCKING SIGNALS/SIGNALS, INTERLOCKING. These are Signals
governing train movements within the boundaries of an interlocking, or
operations into an interlocking.
Reference: FRA-3 1979, King 1921
PERMISSIVE SIGNAL. Additional trains permitted in block by this Signal. It is
part of Automatic Signaling. However, for Jackson this term is an old name for
Draw-up Signal which see.
References: King 1921, Jackson 1992
SEMI-AUTOMATIC INTERLOCKING SIGNAL. A Semi-Automatic Signal
placed in interlocking configuration.
Reference: King 1921
SEMI-AUTOMATIC SIGNALS. Signals activated both by control center and by
------------ --_.- ._-_. ---
trains and track circuits.
Reference: REMC 1948
ID1 d) Route & Junction Indicators/Signals
1) Basic Terms
DIRECTING SIGNAL. An alternate name for Junction Signal.
Reference: A & W 1991
DIRECTION INDICATOR. A synonym for Junction Indicator, Route Indicator.
Reference: Allen 1982
ENTRY (ROUTE) SIGNALIENTRY (ROUTE) LIGHT SIGNAL. Signals refer
to Soviet practice. Both forms are in context of Route Signals.
Reference: Khar10vich 1980
FEATHERS/HORNS. Colloquial term for Lunar Light (also employed for
crossed bars on unused Signal). Wikinfo views Feathers as a name for Position
Light Junction Indicator. And Horns is the equivalent "North of the border" which
may mean Scotland. If Feather employed lunar white lights then the variant
explanations may be linked. Jackson is presumably a British author.
Reference: Jackson 1992, Wikinfo 2005
JUNCTION INDICATOR/JUNCTION SIGNAL. The first term is seemingly a
synonym for Route Indicator, Direction Indicator which see. The second term is
probably similar in meaning. It denotes a divergent route from the mainline;
probably a synonym for Junction, Route, Directional Indicators as well.
References: UIC-CST 1972, Hammond 1964, K & W 1963, Nock 1980 (2nd
term)
ROUTE SIGNAL. This term refers to South African practice. It is the equivalent
of Route or Junction Indicator. The term is not to be confused with Route
Signalling.
Reference: SA-BBB 1974
116
ROUTE INDICATOR. An indicator at a Junction or Turnout Signal. Route
Indicators are attached to a Signal and multi-routes can be so covered by varying
the indicator message. Junction indicator is seemingly a synonym. Route/Junction
Indicators can be viewed as physical entities terms as well.
References: Allen 1952, Blythe 1951
ROUTING SIGNALS. Seemingly the equivalent of Route or Junction Indicators.
It is employed with Semaphore Signals in Queensland (though not of a
Semaphore form).
Reference: Queensland R FS
TURNOUT SIGNAL. Seemingly a variant term for Junction Signal. It denotes
divergent routes.
References: Queenslands R SS-E 1977, NSW R SI SL 1969
2) Other Route & Junction Terms
General Note. These are additional terms that refer to these entries. A variety of
the terms are from manufacturing concerns and probably closer to physical Signal
configurations than to morphology. However, since they manifest some
morphological dimensions they are included. Route Indicators is one such Signal
with a morphological name that also denotes a physical unit.
'ARBOUR LIGHTSIHARBOUR LIGHTS. Colloquial terms for Junction Route
Indicators.
Reference: Jackson 1992
BANJO. UK Shunt Signal that resembles a banjo.
Reference: Jackson 1992
5-LIGHT JUNCTION INDICATOR. Core term is supplemented by technical
details ofIndicator.
Reference: Nock 1980
117
FOUR-WAY SHUNTING SIGNAL. This term refers to a multi-route Signal. The
number of specific directions is incorporated into the name of the Signal.
Reference: A & W 1991
JUNCTION SEMAPHORE. A historic term tieing morphology to physical
apparatus.
Reference: REMC 1948
LUNAR LIGHTS. Informal term denoting Route Indicator combined with Color-
Light Signals. 'Arbour Lights can also refer to this.
Reference: Jackson 1992
POSITION LIGHT JUNCTION INDICATOR. This indicator consists of one or
more arms. At least some agencies employ lunar white lights for the lamps.
References: Western Australia R 1974, Westinghouse Brake & Signal (Aus),
Westinghouse Signal UK
RIGHT-HAND JUNCTION INDICATOR. Signal includes specific configuration
in title. It is possible that the specifics are a descriptive addition by the author.
Reference: A & W 1991
STENCIL INDICATOR/STENCIL ROUTE INDICATOR/ROUTE INDICATOR
STENCIL LIGHT. Indicators display stencils with appropriate alphanumeric
symbols. Often times the stencil is placed between a cover glass plate and
illuminating lamps.
References: Queensland R SS-E 1977, Westinghouse Signals UK, Westinghouse
Brake and Signal Australia, GEC 1979
DIRECTIONAL ROUTE INDICATOR. Seemingly a more specific term for an
Indicator that includes its physical configuration. It may also distinguish this form
from a Stencil Indicator.
Reference: GEC 1972
LOW SPEED ROUTE INDICATOR. A term that includes morphological and
physical aspects. It is in a Stencil Indicator form.
Reference: GEC 1972
SHUNT ROUTE INDICATOR. A tenn that includes morphological and physical
aspects. This specific brand is in a Stencil Indicator fonn.
Reference: GEC 1972
THEATRE TYPE ROUTE INDICATOR/THEATRE-TYPE ROUTE
INDICATOR/THEATRE MULTI LAMP ROUTE INDICATOR. An indicator
with alphanumeric symbols fonned by lamps. A plate in lunar white covers the
lamp display.
Reference: GEC 1972, A & W 1991
MULTI-LAMP ROUTE INDICATORIMULTI LAMP ROUTE INDICATOR.
This Indicator is similar or identical to a Theatre type unit.
Reference: A & W 1991, Westinghouse Signals UK
TOTON ROUTE INDICATOR. It is not clear if "Toton" is a brand name or has
some reference to a Signaling function. This Indicator is employed for shunting
and other low speed situations. Lenses usually red or white.
Reference: Tyer & Co.
TWO-WAY JUNCTION INDICATOR. Tenn refers to separate light units for
separate routes. It is probably the equivalent of a Directional Indicator.
Reference: A & W 1991
TWO-WAY STENCIL INDICATOR. Term refers to separate light units for
separate routes.
Reference: A & W 1991
1D1 e) Other Signal Tenns Pertaining to Running Operations
AB ENTRY SIGNAL. A Queensland Railways tenn. It is possibly the equivalent
of Home Signals in other block systems since it controls train moments into the
block.
Reference: Queensland R FS
119
----_._--------_._---_._-_..__._---------
BACKING SIGNAL. This is probably a historical tenn. It denotes a wrong-
direction train movement. It consists of a modified Semaphore.
Reference: Jackson 1992
NON-STOP PERMISSIVE AUTOMATIC SIGNAL. A fonn ofPennissive
Automatic Signal that is akin to a Grade Signal rather than a Stop-and-Proceed
thereby eliminating a stop.
Reference: REMC 1948
WRONG ROAD SIGNAL/WRONG-ROAD SIGNAL. A separate Signal or
supplementary indication warning a train crew they are on the wrong road. South
TWA offers a hyphenated version.
References: SASS 1936, SA TWA 1964, UIC-CST 1972
STATION PROTECTION SIGNALS. Signal with Stop & Proceed Indication.
Protects train on main track at stations, yards. Marker board (black on yellow)
displays letters SPS, attached to signal mast.
Reference: Canada UCOOR 1961
PLATFORM SIGNALS. Signal denotes whether or not a train "is to stop" at the
platfonn. It does not afford protection for a stopped train.
Reference: Queensland R FS
PLATFORM STARTING SIGNAL. Stop Signal located in proximity of station
platfonn departure end.
Reference: RONT 2001
PRECAUTION SIGNAL. Platfonn Line Signaling indication denotes platfonn
line is partially in use and early stop required when at danger.
Reference: Jackson 1992
PROTECTING SIGNALS. Signals provided at grade/level crossings.
Reference: Leach 1991
120
REPEATING SIGNAL. Seemingly a synonym for Repeater Signal. Two
surveyed sources include the term.
Reference: UK Military 1955, JNR
REPEATER SIGNAL. A Signal that repeats signal message when primary signal
is affected by restricted visibility.
Reference: UIC-COST 1972, Adam-Smith 1973
REPEAT SIGNAL. Queenslands employs this term for what is otherwise known
as Repeater Signals.
Reference: Queensland R FS
SEMAPHORE REPEATER. Instrument in signalbox giving Semaphore
positions.
Reference: RaNT 2001
BANNER REPEATER SIGNAL This term is of UK provenance. It consists of a
short arm in a glass-fronted case. It replicates regular Signal messages further
down the track.
Reference: K & W 1963
BANNER REPEATING SIGNAL. Signal repeats message at another Signal
when that Signal can't be seen by crew. See Also: Banner Repeater Signal.
Reference: RaNT 2001
ELECTRIC REPEATER SIGNAL. For Queensland this Signal is for signal cabin
crews in situations where the primary Signal cannot be seen from the cabin.
Repeaters in other situations are for train crews that can only be seen for a short
distance thereby requiring a repeater (known as Repeat Signals in Queensland
which see). Queensland Railways also has a Signal with Repeat Arm but this is
the equivalent of a Co-Acting Signal.
Reference: Queensland Railways FS
FOG SIGNAL REPEATER. It can be a high-powered Signal used in Fog. Or
second Signal used by maintenance staff in fog.
121
Reference: RaNT 2001
SIGNAL REPEATER. No definition. It includes Electric Semaphore Repeater,
Signal Arm Repeater, Slot Repeater.
Reference: RaNT 2001
TUNNEL SIGNAL. Quite simply, a Signal designed for tunnel usage. During the
era of Semaphore Signals, a variant form with moving spectacles (but without
blades) was devised for tunnels; darkness allowed colored lights to be seen at all
times even if the light source was weak.
Reference: Hammond 1964
TUNNEL JUNCTION SIGNAL/TUNNEL REPEATER SIGNAL. These terms
are from London Transport UK, a agency with many tunnels. These Signals are
for that specialized environment.
Reference: K & W 1963
TONNAGE SIGNAL. A Signal that stops a train of great weight except when a
"full clear indication" is present. The Signal prevents the train having to stop on a
steep grade.
Reference: NSW Railways Signalling
GRADE SIGNAL. A signal permitting heavily loaded trains to proceed under
"Stop and Proceed" indication. Number plate has "G" stamped on it.
Reference: Armstrong 1978
CO-ACTING SIGNAL. A term from UK and allied systems. Hard to see signals
may display double signal apparatus on one mast: one unit at low level, one much
higher. This practice was employed with Semaphore Signals. It can be regarded as
a form ofRepeater Signal which see.
Reference: K & W 1963
CO-ACTING ARMS. This term has meaning of Co-Acting Signal which see.
Reference: A & W 1991
122
CO-ACTING ARM SIGNAL. A Signal with second arm linked to main Signal.
Employed where sighting problems are present.
Reference: RONT 2001
PROTECTION SIGNAL. Term for a practice in some European systems in which
separate Yard Exit Signals are assigned to each track.
Reference: ERS-B 1995
YELLOW DISC SIGNAL/GROUND DISC SIGNAL. Two terms for seemingly
the same device. The disc displays a horizontal yellow stripe on black ground. It
is a form of Stop Signal marking siding exit at the entrance of the primary track. It
displays a light that is yellow or green at night.
Reference: A & W 1991
Terms in Combination:
General Note: Some forms of Signals are combined in some systems. The
following material is from UN 1954:
WARNER & HOME
WARNER HOME & STARTER
WARNER HOME STARTER & ADVANCE STARTER
OUTER HOME & STARTER
OUTER HOME WARNER STARTER & ADVANCED STARTER
1D2 Subsidiary Signal Terms
1D2 a) Overarching Terms
SUBSIDIARY SIGNAL. K & W 1963 divides all Signals into Running and
Subsidiary forms. The second form includes all Signals not part of running
operations; many ofwhich are shunt/switch types. This may constitute the sole
term encompassing non-mainline forms.
Reference: K & W 1963
123
1D2 b) Switch Indicators/Signals & Point Indicators/Signals
CATCHPOINT INDICATORSIRUNAWAY CATCHPOINT INDICATORS/
INDICATORS FOR RUNAWAY CATCHPOINTS/CATCHPOINT DISCS. For
NZ catchpoints are installed to block runaway cars. While Queensland apparently
sees the Catchpoint as denoting siding clearance points.
References: Western Australia 1974, New Zealand 1989, Queenslands R FS,
M&H
COLOUR LIGHT POINTS INDICATOR. The specific physical dimension is
included in the name. For WA a Points Indicator without a qualifier in the name
refers to Mechanical Points Indicator forms while the qualifier denotes all-lighted
versions. Other systems, including possibly NZ, may employ a similar name
without necessarily following that pattern.
References: Western Australia R 1974, NZ 1989
ELECTRIC CATCH POINT INDICATOR. This form is fully lighted. The term
may distinguish fully-lighted from partly lighted and mechanical versions.
Reference: NSW Railways SI SL 1989
FACING POINTS INDICATORS. Facing Points Indicator obviously denote
Facing Points and whether they are set for the principal line or a secondary one.
References: Blythe 1951, NZ 1989
MECHANICAL POINTS INDICATOR. This term describes Partly-Lighted
Indicators including lights, lighted arrows, painted targets. Some forms revolve
and are employed for several roles including catch-points, points, derails.
Reference: UIC LGTF 1975, NSW Signalling
POINTS & INDICATORS. These indicators (also termed signals) are Markings
for points and include a diverse group that numbers unlighted, partially- and fully-
lighted mechanisms. Most of these devices are Two-position Signals which
indicate whether the main or branch track adjacent to a main track is open. A
switching mechanism can so adjust points that a train can travel on the main track,
a siding, or other ancillary track.
124
--------------- _.
Reference: Part F, 1991
POINTS INDICATOR. Point Indicators indicate how points are set. The
Indicators are connected to the points they serve.
References: WA 1974, Queensland Railways FS
POINTS SIGNAL/SIGNAL POINTS INDICATOR. These terms from UIC-
LGTF are not defmed (LGTF is more of a word list than dictionary). It is
presumably a basic term for signals and indicators attached to a points and
indicating their state.
Reference DIC LGTF 1975
POINTS INDICATOR--CHEVRON TYPEIPOINTS INDICATOR--ARROW
TYPE. Both forms include the distinctive character of the message in the name.
The chevron form is lighted; the arrow form is unlighted but reflectorized.
Reference: Queensland Railways FS
SWITCH INDICATOR. An equivalent term for Points Indicator. It is employed
in the Americas and also on South Australia/Australian National Railways. Tall
Switch Indicators are known as Switch Stands for South Australia.
References: ANR (SA 1947)
TRAP POINTS INDICATOR. This term indicates the location of Trap Points
(Derailing Switches) thereby protecting the mainline.
Reference: NZ 1989
1D2 c) Shunt Signal/Indicator Terms
General Note. Shunt/Shunting Signals/Indicators constitute a fairly narrow scope
of operation. This results in an expansive General Note and individual entries that
are brief. These terms are largely found outside the Americas. A standard
dictionary speaks of shunt as having the meaning of changing or switching from
one track to another. But that could also mean running operations. Shunting refers
to low speed operations. These operations may take place in yards, on sidings,
between running lines or even on running tracks. ERS notes that running signals
125
keep trains apart while shunting brings trains together: adding train cars together,
rearranging trains and individual car configurations and related operations.
The bringing of rail cars together under low speed may be more important in
explaining shunting than where it takes place. Many forms of Signals may be
involved: signal lens on a running signal mast; independent Signals whether dwarf
or standard, obsolescent Signals as well as new forms. North American switching
operations at low speeds constitutes shunting type operations even if not by that
name. A possible point of confusion is the use of Switch Signals or indicators in
place ofpoints indicator in North ~erica. Yet the word switching attached to
Signal or Indicator is the North American term for many shunting operations.
Shunting terms are divided into overarching terms, physical terms, and function
and sub-function terms.
1) Overarching Shunting Terms
SHUNT INDICATOR. This may constitute a sub-overarching term since most
shunt aids employ the term Signal. There may not be a hard and fast rule between
indicator and signal. A Signal, even ifvery small, allows various messages, while
indicators may be restrictive in what messages can be conveyed. That is an
uncertain distinction since some Points Indicators are modem Color Light
Signals. Though in those case only a restricted range is possible. This term is a
rare usage though it seems plausible as an overarching and general term.
Reference: Westinghouse Brake and Signal (Aus)
SHUNT SIGNALS/SHUNTING SIGNALS. These terms are seemingly
interchangeable. The terms appear in UK, Australia and other English-language
publications.
References: ERS-H 1995, UAR 1983, UN 1954.
SIGNALS FOR SHUNTING/SIGNALS FOR SHUNTING MOVEMENTS.
These more formal terms are interchangeable with basic shunting terms.
References: Great Peninsula Railway, NSW Signalling
SWITCHING SIGNAL. A translation from the German in FRA-3. This reflects
126
North American practice; Shunting Signal would be more accurate for Germany.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
2) Physical Shunting Terms
General Note. When a physical term (type of light, size of unit, motive power,
etc.) is attached to Shunt Signal then that Signal is included here. The term
remains morphological through the use of the word shunt though the qualifier is a
physical signal term.
DISC SHUNT/DISC SHUNTING SIGNAL/SHUNTING DISC SIGNAL. A
nearly self-explanatory term. Disc though can have two forms: a disc whose face
turns, or a disc that revolves. To some degree revolving signals, displaying discs
or other message arrangements can be referred to as a mechanical shunting signal.
References: Pakistan Railways Diagrams, NSW Railways Signalling, K & W
1963, A & W 1991
GROUND SHUNT SIGNAL/SHUNTING GROlThTD DISC. A Signal built low
to the ground. It could be termed Dwarf as well.
References: ERS-H 1995, K & W 1963
MECHANICAL SHUNTING SIGNAL. A Signal with moving parts in its
message displaying dimensions. Very often the entire unit revolves.
References: K & W 1963
POSITION LIGHT SHUNTIPOSITION LIGHT SHUNT SIGNALS/SHUNT
POSITION LIGHT/SHUNT SIGNAL (POSITION-LIGHT). All of these terms
speak of the physical light apparatus. To be sure it also affects the morphology of
the entity though the physical remains prominent.
References: ERS-H, K & W 1963, Westinghouse Signals UK, UAR 1983
POWER-OPERATED SHUNT SIGNAL. An all-lighted Signal displaying
messages by fixed lights only.
Reference: K & W 1963
127
DWARF SHUNT/SHUNT DWARF. These are seemingly general terms though
few of the surveyed sources employ them. They take the form of a miniature
semaphore signal.
References: Pakistan Railways Diagrams (lst term), Taylor 1949 (2nd term)
SHUNT LIGHT/SHUNTING LIGHT. These are variant forms of the basic term
of Shunt Signal.
Reference: Queensland Railways SS-E 1977
3) Function-related Shunting Signal Terms
BACKING SIGNAL. This is a Shunt Signal allowing shunting in the wrong
direction.
Reference: K & W 1963
CALLING-ON SIGNAL. A Shunt Signal that permits a train to enter occupied
platform as far as the track is unoccupied. Signal shares mast with home signal.
When caution light is lit then train can proceed.
Reference: K & W 1963, NSW Signalling
CLOSE-UP SIGNAL. For NSW this refers to a Subsidiary Signal for shunting. It
indicates movement allowed to next stop only (when signal at clear).
Reference: NSW Signalling
DRAW-AHEAD SHUNT/DRAW-AHEAD SIGNAL/DRAW-AHEAD
POSITION-LIGHT SUBSIDIARY SIGNAL. Draw-Ahead Signal is a Shunt
Signal that is attached to a Starting Signal. It denotes approval for moving
engines, cars from platform to platform or to sidings. A & W regards the Signal as
another name for Calling-on Signal. The final form is usually darkened except
when needed for operations. Limit of Shunt Signal indicates boundaries for
shunting operations on wrong roads (incoming line when shunting is outward
bound). Set-back Signal needed for "setting back into the platform."
References: Nock 1980, A & W 1991, Taylor 1949
ELEVATED SHUNTING SIGNALS. This is a Signal mounted on a mast. It
128
Controls shunt operations from running line to siding and vice versa.
Reference: A & W 1991
FACING SHUNT SIGNAL. This term indicates limits of necessary shunting on
incoming track.
Reference: Nock 1980
HIGH SHUNTING SIGNAL. This refers to an Italian signal on a relatively tall
mast without Running Signal attached.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
HUMPING SIGNAL/HUMP SHUNT SIGNAL. Terms for Signals that control
train speed for passing over shunt humps in train yards.
Reference: K & W 1963
INDEPENDENT SHUNT SIGNAL. A free-standing unit as opposed to a Shunt
Signal attached to the mast of a Running Signal.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
LIMITS OF SHUNT SIGNAL. Signal indicates boundaries for shunting
operations on wrong roads (incoming line when shunting is outward bound).
References: Nock 1980, A & W 1991
MAIN/SHUNT SIGNAL. Apparently Main and Shunt Signals are combined
within a form of electronic signaling control.
Reference: NS Samples 1983
MINIATURE ARM SHUNTING SIGNALIMINIATURE ARM SHUNT
SIGNAL. Terms refer to Signals employing small Semaphores for shunting
operations.
Reference: A & W 1991
ROUTE INDICATING SIGNAL. A Signal with two or more running routes "and
is capable of displaying an indication of route."
Reference: RONT 2001
129
RUNNING SHUNT SIGNAL. A Spanish Signal listed in ERS though with little
explanation. It is possibly a Shunt Signal mounted on running lines for shunting
needs.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
RUNNING SUBSIDIARY SHUNT SIGNAL. Signal may be similar to
Subsidiary Shunting Signal which see.
Reference: A & W 1991
SET-BACK SIGNAL. Term describes Signal needed for "setting back into the
platform."
Reference: Nock 1980
SHOT SHUNTING SIGNAL. This signal displays a Stop or Proceed message for
shunt or train movements. Train movements require a departure indication along
with proceed message.
Reference: UIC-CST 1972
SHUNT AHEAD SIGNAL/SHUNT-AHEAD SIGNAL. Subsidiary Signal for
Shunting; it allows passage of Stop Signal for Shunting.
References: NSW R Signalling, Queensland R
SHUNT ROUTE INDICATOR. A cross-reference with Route/Junction
Indicators. It is, obviously, a Route Indicator dedicated to shunting operations.
Reference: GEC 1972
GROUND SIGNAL. Any Signal at ground level. Used for sidings and shunting
operations.
Reference: RONT 2001
SUB-SHUNTING SIGNAL. This Signal is attached to a Shunting Signal. It
displays a flashing light and indicates that a small engine can move forward just
far enough to clear points or to attach itself to another engine.
Reference: NSW R Signalling
130
SUBSIDIARY SHUNTING SIGNALS. In NSW this refers to a Shunting Signal
attached to a signal mast of a Running Signal. The Shunt Signal is subsidiary to
that other entity.
References: NSW R SI-SL 1969
SIDING SHUNT SIGNAL. A Spanish Signal illustrated in ERS but with little
explanation; possibly a Shunt Signal to a siding mounted on a running line.
Ref: ERS-H 1995
WARNING SIGNAL. A form of Shunt Signal at least in UK. Shunting permitted
in occupied area upon giving ofwarning of situation.
Reference: K & W 1963
YELLOW SHUNT SIGNAL. Signal that is followed "only to movements in the
direction to which the signal can be cleared ...." Also a Ground Position Light
Signal with yellow light.
Reference: RONT 2001
1D2 d) Siding, Train Yard & Other Signals
CLOSING-UP SIGNAL. A Signal near approach to station that optimizes head-
ways; it can also give earlier clearance for junctions.
Reference: RONT 2001
GOODS OR SIDING SIGNAL. Term from South Mrica practice. It is a Signal
denoting freight line or siding. When of semaphore form the blade is altered in
order to be easily distinguished from Running Signals.
Reference: SA-TWR 1964
HUMP SIGNALIHUMPING SIGNAL. Signals that control train speed for
passing over shunt humps in train yards.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965, AAR SM 1987, UIC-CST 1972
LEAVE SIDING INDICATOR. This is the counterpart of Takes Siding Indicator.
131
The perspective is from the siding and the Indicator indicates clearance onto the
main line.
Reference: AAR SM 1983
MARSHALLING YARD SIGNALS. Term from AZD, a Signal maker in the
Czech Republic. These are Signals that control, direct train operations in a
marshalling (or train) yard.
Ref: AZD
OUTLET SIGNAL. A Signal that controls exit from siding, goods loop.
Reference: A & W 1991
SIDING SIGNAL. Signal controlling movements involving sidings: sidings to
main tracks, main to siding, in sidings, between running lines. This specific signal
form is found in NSW. Queensland has a more restricted version for main to
siding only.
References: NSW Railways S, Queensland R SS 1965
TAKING SIDING SIGNAL/TAKE SIDING INDICATOR. AAR SM 1983
describes the first term as an Indicator displaying a message to a train on mainline
to move to siding. The second term is seemingly a synonym for the first term.
References: AAR SM 1987, ARSPAP-H 1953
YARD EXIT SIGNALS. Terms is of UK provenance. Semaphore Signal denoting
this function has special appearance (ring on semaphore blade). Signal employed
on some goods lines as well.
Reference: K & W 1963
DEAD~END SIGNAL. This is a form of Shunting Signal. It is affixed to the
Running Signal post. It controls train movements to yard or dead-end siding.
Reference: NSW R Signalling
DIRECTING SIGNAL. A Train Yard Signal which provides direction to points in
the yard (platform, sidings, etc). In some instances these Signals are Shunting
Signals.
132
References: Western Australian R 1974, New Zealand R 1989
TERMINAL SIGNAL. Seemingly Train Yard Signals for caution, low speed
operations both shunting and other forms.
Reference: Nock 1962
ID3 Message-Related Signal Terms
General Note. Messages (more correctly, Indications) are occasionally added to
the term Signal. Signal may refer to the Physical Signal or to semiotic/
communications meanings. This coverage lists Signals with attached messages
without adding meaning (which is reviewed are in Ch IE).
ABSOLUTE SIGNAL
ALL RIGHT SIGNAL
CAUTION SIGNAL
CAUTIONARY SIGNAL
PERMISSIVE SIGNAL
PERMISSIVE STOP SIGNAL
PROCEED SIGNAL
ID4 Miscellaneous Signal Terms
ACCEPT SIGNAL/ACCEPTING SIGNAL. Term for an exit end Signal in an
automatic signalling block.
Reference: NSW R Signal
133
APPENDANT SIGNAL. A form of Subsidiary Signal in Japan. It includes Route
Indicator and Advance Route Indicator. It possibly belongs to Route/Junction
segment except for its designation as Subsidiary. Appendant has the meaning of
appendage; possibly auxiliary or subsidiary.
References: UN 1952, JNR
ARRIVAL SIGNAL. Terms refer to Automatic signals at entrance to crossing
stations. They are found outside crossing loop points.
References: Western Australia R 1989, New Zealand R1989
DECELERATION SIGNAL. A Signal within the French high speed system. It
refers to Signal ordering a lowering of speed.
Reference: Allen 1983
DRAGGING EQUIPMENT SIGNAL. This is actually a Sign attached to Signal
Mast. It displays the letter "E" and indicates crew to check for dragging
equipment.
Reference: B & 0 1953
INTERMEDIATE SIGNAL. For B & 0 this refers to an Automatic Block Signal
accompanied by Marker Board. It is possibly the equivalent ofIntermediate Block
Signal.
Reference: B & 0 1953
OUTER SIGNALLING. Term refers to Outer Distant and Outer Home Signals in
South Africa.
Reference: Starkey 1944
PLATFORM LINE SIGNAL. Little information given in A & W for this term.
Reference: A & W 1991.
REVERSIBLE ROAD WARNING. Older name for Bi-Directional Signalling.
Reference: A & W 1991
SNOW SHED TERRITORY WITH C.L. SIGNALS. This is not a Signal term; it
134
is a mechanism that activates Signals.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
SLIDE DETECTOR FENCE. Term refers to Activated Signal circuits rather than
a Signal in itself.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
STATION DEPARTURE COLOR-LIGHT SIGNAL. Presumably it denotes safe
passage from station to departure to mainline.
Reference: REMC 1948
SUBSIDIARY SIGNAL. UK and UK-derivative, influence systems include this
Signal. It includes Shunting and other movements of a non-running nature
(including such functions on running lines). It is a kind of overarching term for
non-running signal terms.
References: K & W 1963
TEMPORARY SIGNAL. Signals employed to protect railway line during
construction or other temporary situation. Signals may include Semaphores, flags.
Reference: Great Indian Peninsula Railway
TRACK OCCUPANCY OR DEPARTURE SIGNAL. Swiss Railways include a
third form of signal aspect indicating that track is occupied; it also includes a
calling-on function.
References: Swiss Railways 1981
TROLLEY LINE SIGNAL. Historic term for signals operated by an electric
trolley electric wire contacts. One major brand, Nachod is known as a Nachod
Signal which see.
Reference: B & M 1981
YARD TRACK SIGNAL. Signal denotes train assignment to track.
Reference:REMC 1948
135
IE Systems (Alternate Title: Methods of Control)
General Note. The Database is about Signals, Signs, Markers. Systems are
included when they have direct and immediate connections to Signals. Topics not
having that degree of connection are not included. Topics of a more marginal
nature may be included though in a more cursory manner. General Notes within
the segment of this sub-chapter may explicate this statement more thoroughly.
lEI Block System Terms
a) Block Overarching Terms
General Note I. The Database is concerned with terms relating directly to the
forms of Transportation-Markings. However, there are terms closely associated
with T-M forms even if not strictly so. Many such terms are found in Railway
Signals. The various systems that arrange and operate groups of Signals are a
close component of Signals and therefore terms relating to systems are included.
General Note II. Block Systems have been part of Railway Signals since early in
the history of rail transportation and a plethora of terms have grown up that refer
to Block systems. Many variant and local terms do not easily fit into the major
categories of Block systems. The structured and rational outline of Block terms in
this coverage may belie the messy and even uncertain character of many terms.
An attempt has been made to respect the uneven and sometimes unclear nature of
theses terms, though an impression ofmore system than actual exists may persist.
General Note III. Many systems terms are united with Signal terms. That raises a
question whether the term is part of a system or is a morphological terms. Signal
terms united to a simple, unemcumbered term (e.g. Block Signal) probably
constitutes a morphological term. But Signal terms associated with a specific
system term in a plural form -- even if lacking a word such as System -- may be a
system more than a morphology term; the boundary between them is often
uncertain. For example, Manual Block Signaling may be a system term rather
than a morphological term. Manual Block Signal, a yet more uncertain case, may
tend more toward the morphological.
136
BLOCK SIGNAL SYSTEM. A term for a means of train operation in, or into,
one or more blocks by use of Signals. The Signals can be Block Signals, Cab
Signals or both.
Reference: FRA-1 1978
BLOCK SIGNALING/BLOCK SIGNALLING. These terms seem more akin to
Block System or Block Signal system than to the morphological term of Block
Signal. Signaling/Signalling suggests groups of integrated Signals. Blythe refers
to Block Signal System and Block Signalling and these two usages strongly
overlap if not identical. Armstrong refers to Block Signalling and Signal Systems
together and the meanings seem interchangeable.
Reference: Armstrong 1978, Blythe 1951
BLOCK SYSTEM OF SIGNALS. Seemingly unique to Allen. It is the equivalent
ofBlock Systems and similar terms.
Reference: Allen 1952
BLOCK SYSTEM WORKING. Signal arrangement in which track divided into
block sections with one train per section.
Reference: RaNT 2001
SYSTEM, BLOCK SIGNAL. Some US sources begin with general terms and
then move to the particular. The meaning of this term is that of Block Signal
System.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
BLOCK SYSTEM. A variant form ofBlock Signal System and a more
abbreviated one. But it does include Signals.
References: ERS-V 1995, UIC-CST 1972
BLOCK WORKING/BLOCK-WORKING. This term is seemingly confined to
UK and derivative systems. It is an overarching term that encompasses the
working of blocks or train operations by Signals and other means. Instead of
Block System or Block Signal System the expression Block Working is
137
employed. Block Working, like Block System, has to do with separating and
moving trains through Signals.
References: Blythe 1951, Nock 1962, Corbin 1922
BLOCK. This term can refer to the physical entity of a section of track within
prescribed limits and may contain track circuits. But a variety of sources regard
train operations on that track controlled by Block Signals (and sometimes Cab
Signals) as within the definition of Block.
References: Phillips 1942, AAR SM 1983, AAR Standard Code 1965
BLOCK OR SPACE INTERVAL SYSTEM/SPACE OR BLOCK SYSTEM. A
few sources in referring to Block System add the basic form underlying the
Block: Space or Space Interval to Block. Space Interval will be considered in
overarching terms for Railway Signals, and Block Systems will be considered
under that title.
References: Blythe 1951, Phillips 1942, B & M 1981
BLOCKING SIGNALS. Seemingly a variant form of Block Signals. Therefore a
morphological term. But it is included as a cross reference since it is based in
Block Signal terminology.
Reference: AAR-USSR 1960
FIXED BLOCK SIGNAL SYSTEMIFIXED BLOCK/FIXED-BLOCKIFIXED-
BLOCK SYSTEM. Fixed Block represents a simple distinguishing of
conventional blocks (fixed) from newer "moving blocks." The second and third
terms listed above are variant forms.
References: Cab Signalling 1991, Pracht 1992, Vantuono 1993, Com ... Based ...
1995
ADVANCED FIXED BLOCKlADVANCED FIXED-BLOCK. A term referring
to digital track circuts without Wayside Signals and centering on Traffic Control
meanings. This term is distinguished from the conventional Fixed-Block.
References: Vantuono 1993, Pracht 1992
CLOSED BLOCK SYSTEM. This term refers to Signals kept at danger until train
138
approaches and may refer to manual block rather than Automatic Block Signaling.
Reference: Vanns 1997
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC BLOCK SIGNAL SYSTEM. Occasionally terms
include the motive power or principle of operations for Signals. This is one such
term. Electric motors and generators were not available in an earlier part of the
19th c. This resulted in the creation of electromagnetic and compressed air
Signals.
Reference: B & M 1981
b) Manual Block Systems
BLOCK-MANUAL. A term similar to Manual Block System. The means of
communication occurs in some form between dispatchers though the form is not
specified.
Ref: FRA
COMPUTER-ASSISTED MANUAL BLOCK SYSTEM/COMPUTER-AIDED
BLOCK SYSTEM. The first term refers to a component of a modular and micro-
processor-based ATCS ofRAC/AAR. The use of computers moves MBS away
from a traditional form of that system. The second term refers to a similar system;
that system began before ATCS. CMBS adds computer checks on train operation
movements thereby ending (or reducing) human dispatching errors. It replaces the
Train Order System.
Reference: Armstrong 1986, Geddis 1987
MANUAL BLOCKIMANUAL BLOCK SYSTEM. A series of blocks whose use
is controlled (governed) by signals under manual operation. Information for
signals supplied via telephone, telegraph or other communications means. UIC-
CST refers to it as train operation system in which block instruments and Fixed
Signal are manually operated ("operated by hand").
Reference: UIC CST, Phillips 1942, AAR Standard Code 1965
MANUAL BLOCK-REMOTE CONTROL. A limited use system for single- track
lines with moderate traffic. A relatively short-line system that employs CTC type
139
control mechanisms. It employs two-position Signals.
Reference: REMC 1948
MANUAL BLOCK SIGNALING/MANUAL BLOCK SIGNALLING. This term
is the equivalent of MBS. Signaling refers to a group of integrated Signals rather
than a MB Signal which has more of a morphological character.
References: Armstrong 1978 (lst term), B & M 1981 (2nd term)
MANUAL BLOCK SIGNAL SYSTEM. Manual Block System is the basic term,
with Manual Block as a common form. Some sources add Signal which adds to
specificity.
Referenc: ARSPAP-D 1953
MANUAL BLOCK SIGNAL SYSTEM-SPACE INTERVAL. A few sources in
referring to Block Systems add the basic form of Signaling that underlays the
Block System which is a Space Interval form. One source takes that approach
with MBS as well. Space Interval is included with overarching terms which see.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
MANUAL BLOCKING. A USSR term via AAR. It is seemingly the equivalent
ofMBS.
Reference: AAR-USSR 1960
MANUAL SIGNALLING. An alternate name for MBS. It is possible that UK
sources are more likely to omit Block in terms though they include Block
Systems.
Reference: Vanns 1997
c) Controlled Manual Block Systems
CONTROLLED MANUAL BLOCK/CONTROLLED MANUAL BLOCK
SYSTEM/CONTROLLED MANUAL BLOCK SIGNAL SYSTEM/SYSTEM,
CONTROLLED MANUAL BLOCK/CONTROLLED-MANUAL BLOCK-
SIGNALLING/CMBS. Terms refer to a group or series of adjoining blocks under
the aegis of continuous track cricuits. Operations under manual control are based
140
on information via telegraph, telephone, etc. System is so arranged that it requires
agreement of Signal crews at both ends of the block. The term Controlled Manual
Block Signal System is sometimes employed by ARSPAP-H though CMBS is
more common. ARSPAP-D places system fIrst; hence the form, System, CMB.
CMB can differ from MB in several ways. A key difference are the electric locks
on the signal controls in CM. This requires release of Signals by the Signal
operators at the block station at the opposite end ofthe block. Continuous track
circuits in the block stop passage of trains from opposite directions. Automatic
Signals are also possible.
References: Phillips 1942, RSD 1911, AAR SM 1983, ARSPAP-D 1965,-H
1953, King 1921 (with hyphen).
LOCK-&-BLOCK SYSTEM/LOCK & BLOCK SYSTEMILOCK & BLOCK!
BLOCK LOCKING. AAR SM 1983 labels the basic term as a historic term for
Controlled Manual Block. It is more of UK provenance than US though employed
in US. This system began before track circuits. It is seemingly automatic since
trains that activated treadles in turn activated Signal box equipment. K & W
includes Block Locking which is an overarching terms for various ways of
interlocking of Signals, block instruments, tracks as a unit. References: K & W
1963, AAR SM 1987, Shackleton 1976, Nock 1962
SYKES LOCK & BLOCK/SYKES LOCK & BLOCK SYSTEM/SIEMENS &
HALSKE LOCK-&-BLOCK SYSTEM. In Sykes L & B a Signal in a block is
released electrically at the next block; the next box cannot release Signal until
train has passed Signal. A train activated treadle indicates it is beyond Signal;
track circuit is sometimes substituted for treadle. The second term is a form of
Lock-&-Block produced by Siemens & Halske. A version in the Netherlands
adopted clear indications as the basic indication while the German form placed
Signals at danger.
References: K & W 1963, Nock 1962, Shackleton 1976
d) Automatic Block Terms
ABS SYSTEM/ABSS/ABS. These acronyms have a measure of independent
usage. See Automatic Block System, Automatic Block Signal System.
141
References: AAR SM 1983, ARSPAP-H 1953 , FRA-2 1979
AUTOMATIC BLOCKJAUTOMATIC BLOCK SYSTEM/AUTOMATIC
BLOCK SIGNAL SYSTEM. Train operation system in which movement of trains
triggers signal indications. No manual operator for signals. Phillips notes that AB
encompasses series of adjoining blocks. Sources employ basic term of AB while
others are more explicit and add System or Signal System.
Refernces: UIC-CST 1972, FRA-3 1979, Phillips 1942
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNALING. FRA and other sources omit the word
System but the meaning remains that of ABSS. Signaling suggests an integrated
series of Signals. The slightly different Automatic Block Signals would appear to
have a more morphological meanining (function applied to Signal rather than the
suggestion of a system of Signals with accompanying messages).
Reference: FRA-1 1978
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNALLING ON DOUBLE TRACKS. This term
differentiates the basic by adding the number of tracks. This is not a minor
distinction: Signals are for trains all going in one direction per track.
Reference: King 1921
AUTOMATIC BLOCK ON SIGNALING ON SINGLE TRACK. Term for
Signals for direction of train operations are on one track.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC BLOCK SYSTEM. In this term the "motive power"
is added to basic term. This may have been added since it was the first all electric
Signal system of this type. This system dates back to 1866.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
AUTOMATIC SIGNALLING. Alternate name for Automatic Block Signaling
that omits the word Block.
Reference: Vanns 1997
AUTO-MANUAL BLOCK SYSTEM. Also known as Semi-Automatic System.
142
Signals in this formulation follow the Manual or Lock & Block pattern. However,
Signals return to danger by train action which is automatic.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
BLOCK WITH CENTRALIZED EQUIPMENT/CENTRALIZED AUTOMATIC
BLOCK. A form ofABS in which control equipment is kept in an adjoining
signal box. ERS-V refers to this as Centralized Automatic Block. The German
form of the term is Zentralblock.
References: UIC-CST 1972, ERS-V 1995
CODE TRACK AUTOMATIC BLOCK/CODED CURRENT AUTOMATIC
BLOCK. This form ofAB uses coded currents for a variety ofmessages.
Messages for Signal indication can be conveyed by using different frequencies or
current can be de-energized or de-coded by a "code transmitter." In this case the
number of interruptions in the current constitutes the specific code. There are
several forms including older forms as well as more recent variants.
References: ERS-V 1995, Phillips 1942, Henry 1941
CONTINUOUS AUTOMATIC BLOCK SYSTEM. A term from Calvert that
refers to first full ABS system in 1870s. AAR refers to an earlier system as the
first ABS but notes of improvements in 1870s. Possibly this is the original system
that is complete.
References: Calvert 2004, ARSPAP-H 1953
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR SINGLE-TRACK SIGNALING. For REMC this is a
category with Automatic Block Signaling. It describes details of that form of
operation.
Reference: REMC 1948
DOUBLE-TRACK BLOCK SIGNALLING. Terms for Signals for one direction
on each track.
Reference: King 1921
MULTIPLE -BLOCK SIGNALING. Automatic block operation in which Signals
cover three or more blocks. System combines safety (stopping distance) and
143
short-block flexibility.
Reference: REMC 1948
NON-CENTRALIZED AUTOMATIC BLOCK. SYSTEM. A block system in
which one train permitted in block at one time. Signals so arranged that the stop
indication blocks the entrance of other trains. Short term has same meaning
though less explicit than form with word system attached to it.
References: Phillips 1942, K & W 1963, Allen 1982
ROADWAY AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNAL SYSTEM. FRA employs
Roadway instead of Wayside (or Trackside or Lineside) in a number of instances.
This rather lengtWy term seemingly appears only in FRA RAR. It is more explicit
in meaning than a simpler ABSS though, admittedly, roadway can be ambiguous.
Reference: FRA RAR 1984
ROUTE WITH AUTOMATIC WORKING. This term from UIC-CST
presumably refers to European practice. This form of route includes Signals that
operate on automatic during the time the route exists. This suggests a non-
permanent route. CST describes a route as set up for a given movement and fixed
in place for that movement. That too suggests a non-permanent situation.
Reference: UIC-CST 1972
SEMI-AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNALING. AAR-USSR describes various
forms of Manual Block Signalling. Certain forms involving electric
communication and telephone communications are classified as semi-automatic.
They are not fully manual(or by hand) but appear to be closer to manual than
train-activated forms.
Reference: AAR-USSR 1960
2/3/4 BLOCK SYSTEMl2-, 3-, 4-BLOCK SIGNALING. Short automatic blocks
include Distant Signals that indicated the situation in the following block (Known
as 2 Block System). 3 & 4 Block Systems gave indications for additional blocks.
Reference: FRA-3 1979, REMC 1948
3-,4-, 5-INDICATION SIGNALING. Variant configuration of Multi-Block
144
Signaling.
Reference: REMC 1948
3-BLOCK SIGNALING. Another formulation of Multi-Block Signaling.
Reference: REMC 1948
TWO-BLOCK AUTOMATIC SIGNALLING/TWO-BLOCK AUTOMATIC
SYSTEM/THREE-BLOCK AUTOMATIC SIGNALLING/THREE BLOCK
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM/SINGLE-TRACK AUTOMATIC SYSTEM/SINGLE-
TRACK AUTOMATIC SIGNALLING/SINGLE-TRACK AUTOMATIC
SIGNAL SYSTEM/APB SINGLE-TRACK SIGNALING. These terms represent
permutations of the basic Automatic Signaling patterns which see.
Reference: Phillips 1942
e) AbsolutelPermissive Terms
ABSOLUTE BLOCK/ABSOLUTE BLOCK SYSTEM. A block system in which
one train permitted in block at one time. Signals so arranged that the stop
indication blocks the entrance of other trains. Short term has the same meaning
though less explicit, than a form with the word systems attached to it.
Reference: Phillips 1942, K & W 1963, Allen 1982
ABSOLUTE BLOCK WORKING. Variant form of basic term. UK in
provenance. Signals set to admit one train into a block at one time.
Reference: Allen 1952
ABSOLUTE BLOCKING. Alternate term for Absolute Block System. It appears
in ARSPAP-H but in quote marks. Possibly a historic term and not current.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
ABSOLUTE PERMISSIVE BLOCK/ABSOLUTE PERMISSIVE BLOCK
SIGNALLING/ABSOLUTE-PERMISSIVE BLOCK/ABSOLUTE PERMISSIVE
BLOCK SYSTEM. A system for train operations in opposing directions. Signals
.when absolute in one direction permit trains to follow previous train in the
opposite direction according to restrictive signal aspects.
145
References: Starkey 1944, FRA-3 1979, AAR SM 1983, K & T 1988, VGR 1932,
Nock 1962, Armstrong 1982
AP. BLOCK SYSTEM. A partially abbreviated form of the basic term.
Reference: King 1921
AP.B. SCHEME OF SIGNALING/ABSOLUTE-PERMISSIVE-BLOCK
SCHEME OF SIGNALING/AP.B. CONTROL SYSTEMS. Possibly informal
and descriptive variants of official and formal terminology.
Reference: REMC 1948
ABSOLUTE & PERMISSIVE SIGNALING ON DOUBLE TRACK. Frequently
absolute denotes stop and stay while permissive indicates stop and proceed. This
may be a variant for basic Absolute Permissive Block Signal term.
Reference: REMC 1948
PERMISSIVE BLOCKIPERNIISSNE BLOCK SYSTEMIPERMISSIVE
SYSTEM. Trains allowed to follow an earlier train into a block. This excludes
passanger trains. According to AAR SM 1983, Permissive Block is found in MBS
and CMBS forms. Phillips 1942 has a slightly different meaning: more than one
train permitted in a given block. The meaning may be the same though the
phrasing is different. Permissive System is the equivalent ofPBS though more
truncated.
Reference: AAR SM 1983, Phillips 1942
PERMISSIVE BLOCK WORKING. A variant form of Permissive Block
Working terminology. This term is primarily of UK provenance. Permissive
denotes a system allowing trains to following another train into a block per Signal
indication. Working is a common British expression for system.
Reference: Blythe 1951
PERMISSIVE MANUAL BLOCK. Only REMC among surveyed sources
included this variant form which adds explication.
Reference: REMC 1948
146
PERMISSIVE WORKING. Jackson includes both Permissive Block, and
Permissive Working. Is there a difference? Possibly working requires visual
sighting by trains and only low speeds permitted.
Reference: Jackson 1992
SUPPLEMENTARY ABSOLUTE BLOCK. Term included by A & W with few
details.
Reference: A & W 1991
SYSTEM, ABSOLUTE PERMISSIVE BLOCK/SYSTEM, APB. A system for
train operations in opposing directions. Signals when absolute in one direction
permit trains to follow in the opposite direction according to restrictive Signal
aspects. APB, or APB System are (is) the core term and this is an alternate form.
Reference: FRA-3 1979, ARSPAP-D 1965
f) Other Block Terms
APB, AUTOMATIC PERMISSIVE BLOCK. Has Breen conflated Absolute
Permissive System with Permissive within Automatic Block System or is this a
separate variant form? (Breen also attaches Wayside to Interlocking System).
APB usually refers to Absolute Permissive Block.
Reference: Breen 1980
BLOCK INSTRUMENT. Instrument indicates occupation of block.
Reference: RONT 2001
DOUBLE LINE BLOCK/SINGLE LINE BLOCK. These are UIC terms
presumably describing European practices. Single Line Blocks is a system for
train operations in which block instruments limit a single section to one train at a
time. Double Line Block assigns separate tracks for one direction. This Block
System is not concerned with the spacing of trains but to assigning tracks to
opposing direction oftracks.
Reference: UIC-CST 1972
KINGSMAN BLOCK SYSTEM. A 'brand name" system with the same focus as
147
Nachod but instead employs D.C. current and track circuits.
Reference: RSD 1911
MOVING BLOCK SIGNALLING. This term, from Gaum, is the equivalent of
Moving-Block or Moving-Block System. Signalling is akin to System in meaning
rather than constituting a morphological term.
Reference: Gaum 1992
MOVING BLOCK/MOVING-BLOCK/MOVING BLOCK SIGNALIMOVING
BLOCK SYSTEM. A complex term that presents an obstacle to terse, succinct
description. Moving-Block may be a misnomer to some degree. It refers to Train
Control Systems without track circuits. M-B Systems employ some form of
"vehicle-to-vehicle and/or vehicle-to-wayside or central office communication
links to control trains with minimum headway while maintaining positive
separation and safe braking distance." It has been described as a "phantom block"
between trains. The phantom or shadow grows or shrinks according to
requirements.
References: FRA-3 1979, ERS-H 1995, Gaum 1992
NACHOD SIGNAL SYSTEM. A "Brand name" and historic term. It is a system
of signals of ABS form designed for electric railways on single track. It employed
contact relays rather than track circuits for activation.
Reference: RSD 1911
OVERLAP BLOCK SIGNAL SYSTEM. A situation in which distance of control
by one signal enters into a section where another signal has control. This results in
opposing Signals displaying stop aspect.
Refemce: REMC 1948
OVERLAP SCHEME OF SIGNALING. Signals arranged so that approach trains
on track will each encounter a Signal at stop.
Reference: REMC 1948
RADIO BLOCKJRADIO BLOCK SYSTEM. A tokenless block system that uses
radio between signal station and thereby eliminates wires. Radio Block can
148
suggest a communication system which may include Radio Tokenless block but
possibly confined to that function. This entry is more appropriate for Ch. 4 but
retained because of block character.
References: Signal Equipment 1981, Brown 1984
RADIO CONTROL EQUIPMENT. Radio communication equipment in Block
Working System.
References: RONT 2001
SINGLE LINE BLOCK INSTRUMENTS. Telegraphic device controlling train
operations on a single line section.
Reference: RONT 2001
TELEGRAPH BLOCK/TELEPHONE BLOCK. A block system in which
communications for signal operations are transmitted via telegraph. The second
term is a system in which Signals are activated manually after consultation by
telephone between Signal crews.
Reference: Nock 1962, ERS-V 1995
1E2 Interlocking Terms
INTERLOCKINGS. The Standard Code of AAR offers a frequently employed
description: "An arrangement of signals and signal appliances so interconnected
that their movement must succeed each other in proper sequence and for which
interlocking rules in effect." Interlockings may be manual or automatic in
operation. The term encompasses the station, interlocking machine, switches,
Signals, connections, other apparatus.
Reference: AAR SC 1965
INTERLOCKING SIGNALLING. For Phillips 1942, Interlocking Signalling is
the overarching term for all forms ofInterlocking Systems. This is also appears in
UN 1954. Interlocking refers to arrangement of switches, locks, points, Signals,
control mechanisms. Interlocking Signalling has a possibly slightly altered
meaning yet it can serve as an overarching term.
Reference: Phillips 1942, UN 1954
149
ALL-ELECTRIC INTERLOCKING. Henry appears to use this term to
distinguish forms fully powered by electricity from partially or fully non-electric.
Phillips includes both All-Electric and All-Relay forms but does not distinguish
between them or define the term.
References: Henry 1942, Phillips 1942
ALL-MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING. This term appears to be the equivalent
ofMechanical Interlockings and may be a fuller term for that form. It may also
represent a way of differentiation from forms not fully mechanical.
Reference: ERS-L 1995
APPROACH LOCKING. Possibly a form of Electric Interlocking. System
prevents changes to interlocking setup while train movement is in progress.
Reference: Jackson 1991
AUTOMATIC INTERLOCKINGS. Train-activated interlockings were begun in
the early 20th c. Circuits were triggered by trains rather than by manual
operations from signal station. Automatic Interlockings requires movement of
switches and Signals in correct sequence as is the case with other forms of
interlockings.
References: ARSPAP-I 1952, -H 1953
CABIN INTERLOCKINGS. Term refers to Indian Railway practice. Interlocking
presumably controlled by operators at signal cabin.
Reference: UN 1954
COMPUTER INTERLOCKING. A virtually self-explanatory term.
Microprocessors serve as control and energizing role that replaces large, complex
electric relays and cable arrangements.
Reference: ERS-L 1995
ELECTRIC INTERLOCKINGIELECTRICAL INTERLOCKINGIELECTRICAL
SIGNAL INTERLOCKING. These terms appear to be very general terms for
interlocking powered by electricity (often termed Relay Interlockings because of
150
the use of electric relays). However, these tenns are in the context of Chinese
Railways which refers to interlockings in railway classifications yards especially
to a new fonn that eliminates manually operated points.
Reference: Jia-lin 1981
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING. A fonn of interlocking that
relied on mechanical apparatus for operating switches and facing point locks but
in which Signals were electrically operated. The entire assemblage was so
interconnected so that Signals and switches perfonned in correct sequence.
References: ARSPAP-I 1952, Annstrong 1957
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC INTERLOCKING. A system employing use of air for
activating switches and signals with electricity as an integral element.
References: ARSPAP-I 1952, Phillips 1942, Annstrong 1957
GEOGRAPHICAL CIRCUITRY INTERLOCKING. A fonn ofRelay
Interlocking for large scale operations. Tenn associated with European practice.
Geography apparently refers to arrangement of buttons, switches on control panel.
Reference: ERS-L 1995
INTERLOCKINGS, RELAY TYPE. A variant form of Relay Interlockings.
Signals interconnected through electric circuits incorporating relays so arranged
that signal processes follow in a desired sequence.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
INTERLOCKING TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEM. This may not refer to
interlocking in a strict sense. Instead it may denote a Traffic Control system of an
interlocking character (which a TC system would have over a large area in any
case).
Reference: FRA-3 1979
KEY INTERLOCKING SIGNALLING. A fonn ofInterlocking on Indian
Railways. Interlocking of points and signals accomplished through keys.
Reference: UN 1954
151
MANUAL INTERLOCKINGS. These are interlockings, of whatever operational
means, that are operated from an interlocking machine rather than from train-
activated means
Reference: ARSPAP-I 1952
NIECHANICALLY-INTERLOCKED POINTS & SIGNALS. A descriptive name
rather than a formal name for interlocking encompassing switches and Signals.
Reference: Robbins 1967
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKINGS. A term that refers to an older form that was
entirely mechanical in nature. A complex system of levers controlled movement
of switches and signals through a framework of pipelines connected the entire
system.
References: Armstrong 1957, ARSPAP-MEMI 1947
MICROLOKIMICROLOK II. The original term is a form of interlocking and
should be assigned to this location. However, the second form -- while based on
the first form -- has been updated with computer technology and displays a
broader range of activities. The full entry is in Train Control terms: Specific
Named Systems since they are linked.
References: Chandrika 1998, US&S [www.switch.com]
POWER INTERLOCKING. This term refers to systems involving power
(electricity) more than direct mechanical action. Electro-pneumatic included in
this category. Some versions rely on electrical circuits while others contained a
mechanical locking arrangement.
Reference: ARSPAP I 1952
RELAY INTERLOCKING/RELAY INTERLOCKING SYSTEM/ALL-RELAY
INTERLOCKING. An interlocking system that is entirely electric in operation.
The system is based on electric relays and allied means of control. FRA-3 adds
the word System to the basic term thereby adding precision to the term. All-Relay
Interlocking is an alternative name.
References: ARSPAP-H 1963, Armstrong 1957, FRA-3 1979
152
REMOTE CONTROL INTERLOCKING. A type ofPower Interlocking whose
controls are some distance from the installation. It is in contrast to manual
operation of switches.
Reference: REMC 1948
ROUTE CONTROL TI\TTERLOCKINGIROUTE-CONTROL INTERLOCKING.
These terms are alternate names for Route Interlocking.
References: Henry 1942, Phillips 1942
ROUTE INTERLOCKINGS. Term for an all-relay system for complex trackage
and signal situations. The system can produce a route for a given train thereby
activating stop indications for other routes interwoven with the approved route.
Controls for the signal processes are set rather than setting individual levers
provided consolidated control requiring less direct human control. Henry explains
it as an entrance-exit system; setting of first and last points over a given route
fixes entire set of points and other appliances.
References: Armstrong 1957, Phillips 1942, Henry 1942
SATELLITE WTERLOCKING. A form of interlocking in which controls are at a
central signal box that is unattended. Actual control is by remote control.
Reference: UIC-CST 1972
SEQUENCE-SWITCH INTERLOCKING. A UK system of mechanical nature
that sets routes over multiple routes.
Reference: A & W 1991
SIGNALIPOINT INTERLOCKINGS. A system for ensuring points are fixed in
position upon clearing of corresponding Signal.
Reference: UIC-CST 1972
SSI SYSTEMS. Term refers to Sold State Interlocking. An Automatic Control
system for interlocking and automatic block system. It employs computer
technology and is of a centralized nature in contrast to relay interlocking. See
also: ATBLlPLP
Reference: Chandrika 1998
153
SPOORPLAN INTERLOCKING. Short form of GCI (Geographic Circuitry
Interlocking Systems). Circuitry has foundation in track and point layout. UIC-
CST has alternate spelling, Spurplanschaltung.
Reference: ERS-L 1995, Leach 1991
1E3 Train Control Terms
a) Overarching Terms
AUTOMATIC TRAIN CONTROL. General Note. This term is seemingly
interchangeable with Train Control. Both older and new sources employ
Automatic Train Control (hereafter ATC) and Traffic Control (hereafter TC). TC
has found increased usage in recent journal articles though ATC continues in use.
The meaning of ATC can vary greatly. UIC offers a narrow a definition that
involves speed regulation and automatic braking. DIC has a second definition that
centers on speed monitoring. FRA (which includes international studies) sees it as
a broader term that controls movements of trains, enforces safety and direct train
operations. US sources also perceive ATC as a umbrella term encompassing ATP,
ATS, and ATO which are precisely defined subdivisions. Those terms can also
have a variety of definitions some broader, some more narrow in meaning.
References: FRA-3 1979, ERS-H 1995, UIC-COST 1972, K & W 1963, Blythe
1951
AUTOMATIC TRAIN CONTROL EQUIPMENT. RONT has a focus on Objects
and therefore many terms end in equipment. It somewhat alters the meaning since
it is centered on the physical dimension and little of the message produced aspect
appears.
Reference: RONT 2001
AUTOMATIC TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM/AUTOMATIC TRAIN-
CONTROL SYSTEM. The first is a more explicit version of the basic term.
REMC adds hyphen and control in the second term.
Reference: Sterner 1968, REMC 1948
AUTOMATIC TRAIN OPERATION/AUTOMATIC TRAIN OPERATION
154
SYSTEM.. A system that oversees on-board operations involving regulation of
speed, braking, various adjustments. System added to the basic term probably
does not alter the meaning.
References: FRA-3 1979, ERS-C 1995, Chandrika 1998 (2nd term)
AUTOMATIC TRAIN PROTECTION. UIC speaks of speed regulation for ATP.
While FRA includes a broad range of safety concerns including "train detection,
train separation, interlocking."
Reference: ERS-C 1995, FRA-3 1979
AUTOMATIC TRAIN SUPERVISION. A component of ATC. ATS monitors
and controls train operations in order to maintain effective traffic patterns and
reduce train delays.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
AUTOMATIC TRAIN PROTECTION & CONTROL. A term(s) of confusion.
Some sources, including FRA 1979, use ATP as a technical term for one
subdivision within ATC. ERS 1995 coins an overarching term for all forms of
processes that include train protection (automatic braking when speeding or
ignoring Signal indication) to various means of control. ATPC can be seen as a
unitary term in this meaning.
Reference: ERS-C 1995
ATPIATC. This term is a kind of overarching term for Indian Railways for
various systems.
Reference: Chandrika 1998
BR ATP. ATP system as developed for British Rail. It is an intermittent system.
Reference: Leach 1992
COMMUNICATION [S]-BASED TRAIN CONTROLITRANSMISSION-
BASED SIGNALING (TBS). Terms for encompassing control system employing
computer and radio communications. An early manifestation ofCMTC was the 1st
International Conference on C-B TC in 1995. A variety of systems can be placed
under the term with varying components. ATP, ATO, ATS functions are included
155
in C-B TC. Systems can be based on radio, rail, and loop computer systems.
References: Communication-Based .... 1995 (lst term), Rumsey 1998 (2nd)
CONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS/INTERMITTENT SYSTEMS.
One source views these terms as sub-divisions within ATP.
Reference: Leach 1991
CONTROL SYSTEM. A very general term that encompasses TC and also other
electronic systems applied to railroads (e.g. dispatching). Railroad electronics
appear to be moving to a broad, encompassing system that includes direct safety
systems (including Signals in some instances).
Refernce: ATCS 1989
INTERMITTENT CONTACT SYSTEM OF TRAIN CONTROL. One form of
intermittent Control System. The specific form is ofthe ramp type electrically-
activated type.
Reference: REMC 1948
SAFETY CONTROL SYSTEM/TRAIN OPERATION SAFETY CONTROL
SYSTEM. Both are general, descriptive terms that refer to a variety of control
ideas including ATP, ATO, ATC
Reference: Xishi 1994
SYSTEM, ATC. Alternate term for of ATC System that places the general term
category before the particular.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
TRAIN CONTROLITRAIN-CONTROL/TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM/TRAIN-
CONTROL SYSTEM. Train Control is a somewhat ambiguous term which is
accompanied by variant forms here. It can have a precise technical meaning
which includes various subsystems. It can also have a limited meaning consisting
of a single somewhat simple device (often a Train stop). There are also
divergencies between US and European practice.
A core meaning ofTC might be object(s) and processes outside of the train that
156
can effect changes in train movement. Control of actions (and not merely hoped-
for changes [e.g. obeying signal indications]) can be an encompassing process and
practice that affects all phases of train operations and is not confined to
Signalling. TC can also have a restricted meaning. Terms adding system add
explication to the basic term. Hyphens are sometimes added that more clearly
conjoin keywords.
References: Thomas 1993, ATCS 1989, Nock 1962, Phillips 1942
SIGNAL & CONTROL SYSTEMS. With an increase of control systems which --
in themselves do not produce and exhibit Signal messages -- there is an increase
in dual terms of Signals and Controls. Many of the control terms are integrated
with and are thereby part ofthe Signal role. See Also General Overarching entry.
Reference: Armstrong 1981
TELEPHONE TRAIN CONTROL. A possibly confusing term. It is part of
telecommunications rather than Signaling in UN 1954. It has more to do with
train crew controls than Signaling control (or Signal crew communications).
Reference: UN 1954
TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM. US term for train movements system controlled
by signals lacking train orders. A second description describes the system as a
Block Signal System in which Block Signal indications take precedence over train
superiority for movements on a single track (both directions).
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
TRAIN CONTROL DEVICESITRAIN-CONTROL DEVICES. A term of
uncertain meaning. It is included by only two surveyed sources. Devices was
formerly a common designation for various forms of machines, implements,
mechanisms, apparatus, appliances. Traffic Control Devices may be a general
term for safety aids in railroads or, more narrowly, non-visual aids such as Train
Stops.
References: Henry 1942, FRA-RAR 1984
TRAIN CONTROL EQUIPMENT. Employed by Jane's as a product category
title. It is more of an overarching term for the range of equipment employed in TC
157
than a specific TC term.
Reference: Jane's 1987-88
b) Forms of Train Control
CONTINUOUS TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM. This is a general term in
ARSPAP-H encompassing all forms of continuous TC systems in early
developments. It is a specific, precisely defined term despite appearance.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
EUROPEAN TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM. A concept in Europe of creating a
common system and also integrating the many existing systems. It consists of
three elements: Euro-Balise, a transponder beacon; Euro-Cab, the on-train
equipment which receives data from the beacons (and can transcribe system data),
and Euro-Radio, transmiting ATP and ATC information.
Reference: ERS-C 1995, ETSC ... 9-93 (IRJ)
INTEMITTENT CONTROL. A system in which control mechanism is located
only at specific points. Such systems can include Cab Signals, TC.
Reference: AAR SM 1983
CONTINUOUS-INDUCATION SYSTEM. Intermittent systems are only found
in certain locations (at Signals) while Continuous systems provide ongoing data
and not just at Signals. A break in the track anywhere in the block will be
indicated.
Reference: Henry 1942
MILLER TRAIN CONTROL. A historic term. It refers to a system involving an
inductive electric contact process. The system is a train stop operation which is
within the sphere ofTrain Control.
Reference: ARPSPAP-H 1995
ThTTERMITTENT INDUCTIVE TRAIN CONTROL. A form of TC in which
magnets and track circuits are installed in the tracks. The magnets (linked to track
circuits) portray track circuit conditions (as do Signals). If the TC data causes
158
system to manifest stop then the magnet will generate electric currents through the
induction process. And the locomotive apparatus receives the track data and
brakes will be applied if crew does not respond to signal.
Reference: Henry 1942
CONTINUOUS AUTOMATIC TRAIN CONTROL (CATC). This refers to Cab
Signaling. It involves two-way communication (Train-wayside), involves
collection of data as well as encoding, decoding functions.
Reference: FRA-l 1978, -2 1979, -3 1979
CONTINUOUS TRAIN CONTROL. A general term for systems providing
ongoing information, control as opposed to intermittent forms that provide data
only at intervals.
Reference: UIC-COST 1972, B & M 1981
INDUCTIVE TRAIN CONTROL. This term, though giving appearance of a
general term, refers to Indusi, in this instance. However, the term can encompass
all systems employing magnets and electro-magnets.
Refernce: FRA-1 1978
TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEMS, DEVICES & APPLIANCES. A very general
term from FRA-RAR encompassing all aspects ofTC operations.
Reference: UN 1954
c) Subdivisions of Train Control
1) Train Stop
MECHANICAL ROADSIDE TRIP TYPE STOP/TRIP ARM SYSTEM.
Alternate names for the Automatic Trip Stop, and ultimately, the Automatic Train
Stop.
References: B & M 1981, K & W 1963
CODED-CONTINUOUS TRAIN STOP SYSTEM. A brief historical reference in
FRA-3 of a change on Perm Railway from CCTS to CC Cab Signals. No details
159
on process followed by CCTS.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
TRAIN STOP DEVICES. This term is close to Train Stop in meaning. It may
refer to physical apparatus more than total Train Stop System (equipment
functioning in TS role).
Reference: FRA-3 1979
TRIPCOCK ARM! TRIP ARM LEVER. No definition for either term. Broader
term is Mechanical Brake Tripping Device.
Reference: RONT 2001
TRIP-STOP DEVICE/AUTOMATIC TRIP STOP DEVICE. Phillips offers
alternate names for the mechanical ATS systems. Trip-Stop is a more accurate
name for the Train Stop process since many forms use a trip arm.
Reference: Phillips 1942
AUTOMATIC STOP/AUTOMATIC STOP SYSTEM. These terms are similar to
(and possibly identical to) Automatic Train Stop System. AAR SM offers a
somewhat vague definition that can include ATS but may encompass other safety
aids with similar functions. Shackleton 1976 seemingly separates Automatic Stop
from Automatic Train Stop.
References: AAR SM 1987, Shackleton 1976
TRAIN STOP/TRAIN STOP SYSTEM. Terms that are shorter forms of
Automatic Stop System. The meaning appears to be the same.
References: Blythe 1951, Nock 1962, AAR SM 1987
AUTOMATIC STOP. King omits the term train from what is apparently a Train
Stop of conventional formulation.
Reference: King 1921
AUTOMATIC STOP EQUIPMENT. This term from Jane's refers to a product
category title. It refers to apparatus employed in Automatic Stop.
Reference: Jane's 1987-88
160
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC TRAIN STOP. This form of Train Stop utilized E-P
processes that also included electro-pneumatic interlockings and automatic
signals.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
AUTOMATIC TRAIN STOP/AUTOMATIC TRAIN-STOP/AUTOMATIC
TRAIN STOP SYSTEM. Terms for a series of devices which, made in many
instances, brings about physical contact with a train passing a danger signal.
Contact between a trip arm and receiving apparatus on the locomotive would
cause the brakes to activate. There are many terms describing the same or similar
process. The word "stop" is central to most of these. The word "train" is often
attached to Stop (and trip may also be employed). ATC has meant ATS though
ATS is arestricted form of control and perhaps it is not control in a strict sense.
Automatic Stop may be a synonym yet AS may be a broader notion. Shackleton,
for example, seems to distinguish betwen ATS and ASD.
References: Allen 1982, ARSPAP-H 1953, FRA-3 1979
AUTOMATIC TRAIN-STOP DEVICES. For REMC this refers to individual
devices rather than to Train-Stop System.
Reference: REMC 1948
INTERMITTENT INDUCTIVE TRAIN STOP. Many forms of ATS employed
mechanical means. This form approximates track/road based devices. A magnet
mounted on the locomotive achieved close proximity to an inductor on the
wayside. The train magnet was activated by the inductor (unless electromagnetic
action nullified activation). Only clear Signals brought about energizing of
magnet.
Reference: Armstrong 1978
MOTOR-OPERATED AUTOMATIC STOP. A form of Automatic Stop for
King. The specific form was employed by NY Municipal Railway.
Reference: King 1921
2) Speed Control
161
GENERAL NOTE. Terms such as Speed Control System, Automatic Speed
Control, Automatic Speed Control Systems, Train Speed Control are less
independent systems than a dimension or function of other Cab Signalling and/or
ATC systems. Speed Supervision is a core (or the core) focus of ATC.
SPEED CONTROL/SPEED CONTROL DEVICES. These terms are seemingly
alternates or synonyms for Train Control and Train Control Devices respectively.
Reference: REMC 1948
SPEED SUPERVISION SYSTEM - TVM. A category ofERS that includes more
encompassing (i.e., exercises greater control) than ATC systems.
Reference: ERS-C 1979
AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATION (AR). Included by a single surveyed
source. It is a dimension or subdivision of ATC. ASR function is to maintain
ongoing speed regulation.
Reference: Breen 1980
3) Traffic Control
CONTROL/TRAIN OR TRAFFIC CONTROL. For Jackson this is separate from
ATC. It is a system for organizing train operations in a very broad sense; Signals
are apparently involved though they are only one element. At least one US
description at variance with Jackson which see.
Reference: Jackson 1991
4) CTC
ELECTRONIC CTC/CTC & REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEMIBLOCK &
ELECTRONIC CTC. These are products category titles from Jane's.
Reference: Jane's 1987-88
CODED CTC. Sophisticated communications require transmission of data over
long distance economically. CTC includes (over its development) one of several
162
code systems:
Time Code- Employs short or long impulses, moderate speed, moderate
number of stations.
Circuit Code- Three-wire not Two-wire, faster transmissions, more
stations.
Polarity Code- Pulses of same length; arranged sequentially.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
CENTRALIZED TRAFFIC CONTROL (CTC)/CTC SYSTEMS. A system of
railroad operations in which train movements are under the direction of Signals
controlled at a central location which may be well removed from Signal locations.
Signals, switches, other appliances function as a whole. No train orders for trains
of superiority were included as operating principle.
Central control requires complete track circuits, clarity regarding special/peculiar
aspects of signals. Territory may be small though often very large It is frequently
single track. CTC, according to Nock 1962, is a "coded remote control system."
Traffic Control System is a synonym for CTC. CTC includes or combines
Automatic Signalling and power interlocking.
References include: Phillips 1942, Armstrong 1957, 1978, Henry 1942, K & W
1963, Nock 1962, ARSPAP-H 1953, AAR SM 1983, Thomas 1993
CTC RAILWAY SIGNALLING SYSTEM. This term presumably refers to a
more explicit version of the term CTC.
Reference: Wunderlich-Siemens
WAY INTERFACE SYSTEM. This Advanced Railroad Electronic System
(ARES) can monitor, control all Wayside Devices. Signals not specifically
mentioned in Welty though presumably included.
Reference: Welty, 5-88
d) Specific Named Systems
TRAIN LOCATION SYSTEM. This may seem rather afield for the Database.
The system receives location and speed data from GPS or track-based
163
transponders. It is also part of ARES, and therefore a safety aid at least in part.
Reference: Welty 5-88
TRAIN SITUATION INDICATOR (TSI). This unit is an "On-board Display
System" for ARES displaying a "color CRT display" unit. It is used for receiving
all data need for train operations. Seemingly some portion of the system replaces
signal-based messages.
References: Welty, 5-88
ADVANCED TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM (ATCS). This is not to be confused
with Automatic Train Control. ATCS is a complete control system for train
operations. It is heavily impregnated with computer technology. And it is based
on central control of safety and virtually all other elements of train management.
Whatever traditional Signaling might remain would be an integral component of
ATCS.
References: Armstrong 1986, Welty, 10-86
AUTOMATISCHE TREIN BEIINVLOEDING, ATB. A speed protection system.
Both Cab and Lineside Signals are included. Audible Signals of several forms are
included: gong for changes in speed information, bell for speeding without
breaking response, buzzer for not braking or 40 km/h speed limit.
Reference: ERS-C 1995
RAIL OPERATION CONTROL SYSTEM. A broad-spectrum system that
includes speed information. Also part of ARES (Advanced Railroad Electronic
System).
Reference: Welty, 5-88
TRANSMISSION VOlE MACHINE, TVM ("Track to train transmission"). A
decentralized system of a continuous nature. Equipment is attached to central
equipment. It is employed on VHS lines. No Lineside Signals are in use.
Reference: ERS-C 1995
LINIEN ZUG BEEIN FLUSOUNG, LZB. This terms refers to a continuous
system and is centralized. It offers continuous train monitoring. LZB is based on
164
computer technology. Lineside signals are reduced or eliminated.
Reference: ERS-C 1995
TRANSMISSION BEACON LOCOMOTIVE, TBL. This is a "speed supervision
system" which transmits a broader range ofdata. One version (TB 1) provides
automatic braking function if stop signal ignored. It also provides on-board
information. A TB2 adds a further range ofdata. Information emanates from a
transponder beacon. TBL is an intermittent form.
Reference: ERS-C 1995
CODED TRACK CIRCUIT AUTOMATIC BLOCK, BACC. A decentralized,
continuous system. It is essentially a Cab Signaling system. Speed control aspect
added to high speed lines.
Reference: ERS-C 1995
EBICAB/CONTROL DE VITESSE A BALISES, KVB. A transponder beacon
based ATC system. It is sophisticated system that offers many functions including
speed supervision, warning of speeding, braking activation. Cab Signals in the
Netherlands, KVB in France.
Reference: ERS-C 1995
INDUSI (INDUKTIVE ZUCSICHEERING). This is a contactless system
employing transponders. It monitors crew's observance of signals and also
includes some speed control. Messages are given for signals and for special.
Brakes activated if crew acts incorrectly unless response made to INDUSI
messages. A newer version of INDUSI offers a greater range of messages.
References: INDUSI, ERS-C 1995
AATC = ADVANCED AUTOMATIC TRAIN CONTROL. An adaption of
EPLRS (see entry on next page).
Reference: Communication-Based 1995
ACSES. Advance Civil Speed Enforcement System. It employs transponders that
provides five miles per hour increments notices for high speed trains. It also
supplies a variety of data on locations, grades, and speed restriction distances.
165
Reference: Greenfield 1995
ASFA. This Spanish system is intermittent, contactless, inductive. It functions are
identical to Indusi. Crew can respond to message before brakes activated.
Reference: ERS-C 1995
ARS, AUTOMATIC ROUTE SETTING. Centralized Route Setting adjustments
without Signal crews.
Reference: Vanns 1997
ATBIPLP. A system ofGEC Alsthom ACEC. It is also known as SSI-ATC. SSI
(Solid State Interlocking) provides automatic control for Interlocking and
Automatic Block systems that computerized. ATC offers trains supervision.
Reference: Zoetardt 1994
ATIS, ADVANCE TRAFFIC INFORMATION SYSTEM. The source gives few
details on what appears to be at most a marginal Signaling system.
Reference: Jackson 1991
ATLAS. This acronym has the meaning ofAdvance Train Location &
Supervision. A consortium has developed this system. It is part of the
communication-based technology developments and employs a "speed-spectrum
radio signals."
Reference: Communication-Based 1995
COMTRAC/COSMOS/SMIS. Terms are part ofhigh speed system for Shinkasen
(Japan) railroads. Comtrac comes from Computer-aided Traffic Control. SMIS
stands for Shinkasen Management Information System. COSMOS= Control
Management System. Unclear to what degree signals are involved. Cosmos
includes train operation dimension.
Reference: Seko 1979, Shouji and OtsOO 1997
EPLRS. This is an acronym for Hughes Enhanced Positive Location and
Reporting System. It is a form of Communication-Based Train Control.
Reference: Communication-Based 1995
166
FLEXIBLOK SYSTEM. Spread-spectrum radio signals have become
commonplace for rail usage. That form of sign! has a wider bandwith thereby
reducing possible interference. This system is one such approach employing that
form of radio technology.
Reference: Communication-Based 1995
ICTC SYSTEMS, INCREMENTAL TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM. Few details
are available in one source that gives the term. Possibly comparable to ETCS.
Reference: Chandrika 1998
INCREMENTAL TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM (ITCS). A communication-
based system that employs traditional signals or "virtual signals." It provides a
wide-range of information including enforcement practices. The system increases
track capacity and safety.
References: Communication-Based 1995, GE Transportation 2008
MICROBLOK. Terms refers to a form oftrain control technology. The system is
older and information is limited.
Reference: US&S in Communication-Based 1995
MICROLOK/MICROLOK II. The first version of this system was an interlocking
system and more appropriately placed in interlocking. The second is based on the
older system but employs computer technology and has broader usage. It is
regarded as a Wayside Control System.
References: Chandrika 1998, US&S [www.switch.com]
POSITIVE TRAIN CONTROL/POSTIVE TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEMIPTC.
Terms for a variety of systems that provide control and monitor functions for
railways. Radio and GPS systems supply information. Train-based equipment
enforces information received. These systems include Incremental Train Control,
Electronic Train Movements, Advanced Enforcement Systems.
Reference: Greenfield 1998, Wikipedia 2008
PTS = POSITIVE TRAIN SEPARATION. A mechanism intended to be an
overlayment on wayside signaling. This radio-based system includes seveal
167
features that increase safety, trackage usage and movement efficiency
Reference: Communication-Based 1995
RIT, TRAIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM. Tenri for a Dutch system. This system
includes location (GPS) capability among several features. The purpose of TIT is
primarily for more economical train operation. Signalling is an indirect
dimension.
Reference: Train Manager ... DR 1997
SELTRAC. Term for Moving Block developed by Standard Electrick Lorenz AG
(SEL).
Reference: Communication-Based 1995
SIGNUM. This system bears a resemblance to Crocodile and AWS. Though it
lacks a clear signal message. It is intermittent in character and of the contactless
form.
Reference: ERC-C 1995
SNCF SIGNALLING SYSTEM FOR VHSNHS SYSTEM OF SIGNALLING &
SIGNALLING SYSTEM FOR HIGH SPEEDS. First terms is of descriptive
rather than a formal term. It includes automatic block, track circuits, cab-based
equipment and Signals. Second term is an alternate title.
Reference: Weber 1980
CROCODILE. A European system for monitoring observance of signals by the
train crew. Devices convey sound and visual data indicating whether clear or
restrictive conditions. Crew must acknowledge message or brakes applied. The
Crocodile is a metal object attached to electric current that interacts with a brush
that interacts with the Crocodile. The Crocodile is of intermittent operations.
Reference: ERS-C 1995
AUTOMATIC WARNING SYSTEM/BRAWS. A British Rail system similar to
Crocodile. It employs magnets on the track (one activates apparatus, one sends
data). Audo and visual messages are received in the locomotive.
References: K & W 1963, ERS-C, Whitehouse 1985
168
COMBINED TRAIN CONTROL. This term refers to Italian State Railways
processes which provides a TC system that offers intermittent control,
conventional continuous control, and a continuous ATP system for high speed
use. Trains so equipped can cope with any ofthe control forms.
Reference: FRA-2 1979
(ARES) ADVANCED RAILROAD ELECTRONIC SYSTEM. This system is
from Rockwell International. It encompasses many forms ofelectronic and
control system including safety information and sometimes Signals.
Reference: ATCS 1991, Welty 5-1988
IDENTRA. Systems in which inert coils for information passage are on
locomotive while track-bed equipment requires a power source. Contrasted with
more frequently employed Indusi system with reverse arrangement.
Reference: Barwell 1983
ON-BOARD SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM. Descriptive term rather than formal
name. Describes Cab Signal operation with some ATO functions. Cross-reference
with Cab Signals.
Reference: Savarzeiz 1981
PHAR. Communication system in Sweden employing Doppler radio transmitter
and passive beacons. A variety of information is given to train crews including
speed and upcoming data changes.
Reference: Barwell1983
ULTRABLOK. UltraBlock is a form ofITCS or a variant form for passenger train
applications.
Reference: Communication-Based 1995
e) Miscellaneous Terms
DRIVER WARNING SYSTEM. System for engineer that indicates in advance a
speed restriction. Brakes applied if indication ignored.
169
Reference: RONT 2001
MICROPROCESSOR-BASED SIGNALLING SYSTEM. A descriptive term that
can describe SSI.
Reference: Vanns 1997
NORMAL DANGER SYSTEM. This refers to train operation in which Signals at
danger until train requires clear indication.
Reference: Jackson 1992
OCCUPATION PROTECTION EQUIPMENT. Protecting equipment for
engineering and other activities in railway work. It has several components:
ELECTRIC OCCUPATION KEY. Key for gaining access to protection
equipment.
ENGINE SHUNTING VOUCHER. RONT does not include defInition.
ENGINEERING TOKEN. Electronic Token that allows engineering staff
control of section of line.
LOCKOUT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. A system that restricts, prevents
train movements in order to create safety for user of system.
PATROLMAN'S LOCKOUT DEVICE. Device that turns Signs to danger
so workcrew is safe when no nearby refuge.
Reference: RONT 2001
SIGNALLING SYSTEMS FOR OTHER STAFF. No defInition is given in
RONT but this term or component terms. The components include:
SIGNALS FROM PLATFORM STAFF TO:
DRIVER/GUARD
PASSENGERS
SIGNALMAN
STATION STAFF WARNING SYSTEMS
TRACKSIDE STAFF WARNING SYSTEMS
Reference: RONT 2001
TBS, TRANSMISSION-BASED SIGNALLING. Jackson includes this term
which links on-board computer with central computer. Data supplied includes
170
location and speed.
Reference: Jackson 1992
TOPS EQUIPMENT. T.O.P.S.: Total Operations Processing System. A train
movement operation employing computers.
Reference: RONT 2001
TRACKER BALL (lECC). IECC: Integrated Electronic Control Centre
Component. Device employed for controlling points and Signals.
Reference: RONT 2001
TRACKSIDE STAFF WARNING SYSTEMS/TRACKSIDE STAFF WARNING
SYSTEMS/TRAIN OPERATED WARNING SYSTEM. RONT does not give a
deftnition of the ftrst term. The second term is a narrower term under the ftrst. It is
an audible warning of approaching train intended for trackside staff. Signal
system activates alarm.
Reference: RONT 2001
TRAIN-OPERATED POINTS SYSTEM. A system whereby points in rural areas
are activated by wheel flanges on hydraulic switch mechanisms.
Reference: Leach 1991
171
CHAPTER TWO
ALL-LIGHTED SIGNALS
2A Indexes: Categories & Alphabetical
2Al Categories Index
Overarching, Color Light & Other All-Lighted Signals (2B)
Overarching Terms (2Bl)
Illuminated Signal
Light Signal
Railway Signal Lights
Signal, Light
Signal Light
Visual Signal Light
Color Light Signal Terms (2B2)
Principal Forms (2B2 a) )
Basic Forms (2B2 a) 1) )
Color Light Signal/Color-Light Signal/Colour Light Signal/Colour-Light
Signal/Colourlight Signal
Color Light Type/Color-Light Type/Color-Light Type Signals/Color-Light
Type of Signal
Color-Light Signaling
Color Light Terms: Other Than English
Limited-Variant Forms (2B2 a) 2) )
Signal, Color Light
. Colour Light/Colourlight/Colour-Light/Colorlight/Color Light
Color Signal/Colour Signal
Coloured Lights
Variant Forms (2B2 a) 3) )
Automatic Colour-Light Signal
Colour Light Running Signals/Colour-Light Running Signals
Colour-Light Signals MUltiple-Aspect Vertical
Multiple-Lens Colour Light SignallMultiple-Lens Colour-Light Signal/
172
IMulti-Lens Four-Aspect Colour-Light Signal
Multi-Colored Light Signal
Multi-Unit Colour Light Signal
Multiple-Head Color-Light Signal/Single-Head Color-Light Head Color-
Light Signal/Three-Head Color-Light Signal
Spreadlight Colour Light Signal/Long Range Spread Light Colour Light
Signal/Spreadlite Colour Light Signal
Signaling Forms (2B2 a) 4) )
Automatic Colour-Light Signalling
Color Light Signaling/Colour Light Signalling/Colour-Light Signalling/
Color-Light Signalling (Taiwan)
Colour Signalling
Electric Automatic Colour-Light Signals
Other Color Light Signal Forms (2B2 b)
Distance Terms (2B2 b) 1) )
General Note
Color-Light Type Signal (SR)/Short Range Signals
Medium Range Color Light Signals/Medium Range Color Signals
Long Range Colored Light Signals
Long-Range Color-Light Signals
Long Range Colour Light Signal
Long Range Daylight Signal
Long Range Signal
Long Range Type
Long Range Daylight Type Color Light Signal
Short Range Color Light Signals/Short-Range Color Light/Short Range
Colour Light Signals
Short-Range Color-Light Signals (Vertical Type, Subway Type)
Lens Arrangement Terms (2B2 b) 2) )
Long Range Color Light Signals, Vertically Arranged/Type D Long Range
Color Light Signals, Vertically Arranged/Type D (Vertical)/Color-Light
Signals/Type-D Color Light
Horizontally Arranged Long Range Color Light Signals/Long Range Color
Light Signals, Horizontally Arranged/Type E (Horizontal) Color Light
Signals/Horizontal Color-Light Signals/Horizontally
173
Orientated Color-Light
Triangular Arrangement Color Light Automatic Block Signals/Color Light
Signals Arranged in a Triangle/Type G (Triangular) Color-Light Signals
Triangular Color-LightiTriangular-Pattern Color-Light Signal/Color-Light
with Triangular Light Pattern
Cluster Type Signals/Cluster Type Four-Aspect Signals/Cluster Colour Light
Signals
Colour-Light Signals Multi-Aspect-Cluster
Morphology & Other Terms (2B2 b) 3) )
Approach-Lit Colour Light System/Approach-Lit Mechanical Colour-Light
Signals
Christmas Tree
Color-Light Automatic Block Signals/Color-Light Block Signals/Color Light
Interlocking & ABS Signals
Colour-Light Route Indicator
Colourlight Signal-Underground Style
Colour Light Shunt (Humping)
Colour Light Shunt Signal
Day Colour-Light Signal
Double Light Signal
Fairyland
Mechanical Color-Light Signals
Miniature Colour-Light Signals/Miniature Colour Light Signals
Three-Aspect Day-Time Colour-Light Signal
Searchlight Signal Forms (2B3)
General Note
Searchlight
Searchlight Signal
Search-Light Signal
Searchlight Type
Searchlight Type Signal
Search Light Type Signal
Search Light Signal
Searchlight Color Light Signal
Searchlight Type of Colorlight Signal/Searchlight Type Colorlight Signal
174
Searchlight Type Colour-light Signals
Searchlight-Type of Color-Light Signals
Searchlight Type of Single-Lens Colour-Light
Colour Searchlight Signals
Color-Light Signal, Searchlight Type
Dwarf Searchlight Signal
Colorlight High Signal, Searchlight Type/Color Light Dwarf Signal,
Searchlight Type
Hall-Type Colour-Light Signal
LED Searchlight Signal
Long-Range Searchlight/Short-Range Searchlight
Right-Hand Searchlight
Single-Head/Two-Head Searchlight SignaVTwin Head Searchlight Signal/
Twin-Head Searchlight Signal
Single Lens Searchlight Signal
Single Light Signal
Other All-Lighted Terms (2B4)
Single Lens Units [Frequently Morphological Dimension Present] (2B4 a) )
Terms Slightly More Morphological Than Physical (2B4 a) 1) )
Marker
Marker Lamp
Marker Light
Terms Somewhat More Morphological Than Physical (2B4 a) 2) )
Automatic "A" Signal/"A" Light/Illuminated "A" Light
"L" Light
Multiple-Aspect Light Signal
Dwarf Signals (Frequently Multiple Lens) (2B4 b) )
Dwarf Signal
Signal, Dwarf
Dwarf Type Signal
Dwarf Signal-Electrical
Dwarf Searchlight SignaVDwarf Colourlight Signal
Colour Light Dwarf SignaVColor Light Dwarf Signal
Dwarf Colourlight Shunt Signal
Undifferentiated Physical Forms (2B4 c) )
175
Auxiliary Signals
Back Light I
Back Light II
Back-Light/Backlight
Side Light
Flasher Lights
Flashing, Light (Signal)/Flashing Light Signal/Flashing Lights
Flashing Signal
Signal, Flashing Light
Revolving Light Signal
Fixed-Focus Signal
High Signal
Light Strip
Modular Unit
Multiple Unit Signal
Multiunit
Signal Lamp
LED Signals, Dorman (8 Forms)
Position Light, Color-Position Light, & Alphanumeric, Graphic,
Geometric Signal Forms (2C)
Position Light Signal Terms (2CI)
Position Light SignallPosition-Light Signal
General Notes I, II, III
Position LightIPosition-Light
Position-Light System
Position-Light Type Wayside Signal
Beam-Light Signal/Beam Light Signal
Signal, Position Light
Daylight Position Light Signal
Position Light Dwarf Signal/Dwarf Position Light/Dwarf Position Signal!
Dwarf Light
Position Light Ground Signal
Ground Position Light Signal
Position Light Signal (LR)
176
Position Light ShuntIPosition-Light Shunt Signal
Position Light Humping Signal/Position Light Humping Speed Signal
Ground Position Light Shunt Signal
Hump Shunting Signal
Position Light Junction Indicator
Position Light Automatic Type
Position Light Speed Signal/Toton Position Light Speed Signal
Position Light Subsidiary Signal
Pattern Indicator
Pedestal Signal
Subsidiary Signal
Position Color-Lights
Wing Lights
Color Position Light Terms (2C2)
Color Position Light Signal
General Note
Color-Position Signal
Color-Position-Light Signal
Color-Position-Light High Signal/Color-Position-Light Dwarf Signal
Signal, Color Position
Colour Position Light Signal
Color Position Light Dwarf Signal
Position-Color Light Signal
Color & Position Signal
Symbolic Signal Forms (2C3)
General Note
Multi-Lamp/Theatre Indicators (2C3 a) )
Multi Lamp Route Indicator/Multi-Lamp Route Indicator/Multi-Lamp
Seven-Way Route Indicator/Three-Way Theatre Route Indicator
Theatre Indicator
Theatre Multi Lamp Route Indicator
Theatre-Type Route Indicator/Theatre Type Route Indicator
Theatre Type Indicator
Theatre-Sign Type Indicator
Stencil Indicators (2C3 b) )
177
Stencil Indicator/Stencil Type Indicator/Stencil-Type Indicator/Stencil
Route Indicator/Stencil Type Route Indicator/Stencil, Number or Letter
Type/Stencil [Type]
Route Stencil
Other Forms (2C3 b) )
Arrow Indicator/Single Arrow IndicatorlDouble Arrow Indicator
Alphanumeric Route Indicator
Fibre-Optic Route Indicator
IndicatorlIndicator (Stencil)
Moving Slide Type Route Indicator
Preliminary Routing Indicator
Projector Type Route Indicator/Projector Type
Cab Signaling (2D)
Major Cab Signal Forms (2Dl)
Cab Signal
General Note I, II, III
Cab-Signal
Automatic Cab Signal/Automatic Cab Signal System/Automatic Cab Signal
System (ACS)/System, Automatic Cab Signal
Automatic Cab-Signal System Continuously Controlled
Signal, Cab
Cab Signal System
Cab Signaling/Cab Signalling/Cab-Signalling/Cab Signalling System
General Note I, II
Forms (Operational) of Cab Signals (2D2)
Cabmatic
A-C.ID-C. Cab Signals/A-C.ID.C. Coded Cab Signal System
CATC Cab Signals
Coded Continuous Cab Signal System/Coded Continuous Cab Signaling
Continuous Cab Signaling System
Continuous Cab Signaling/Continuous Cab Signalling
Conductive Inductive Cab Signal
Continuous System of Cab Signalling/Continuousl Controlled Cab Signal!
Continuous Controlled Cab Signal/Continuous Controlled Cab Signal
System
178
Four-Aspect Coded 100 Hz Cab Signal SystemIFour-Indication Code
Continuous Inductive Cab SignalinglFour-Indication Code Continuous
Cab Signal System
Intermittent Cab Signaling/Intermittent Cab Signal System
Multiple-Indication Coded Cab Signals
Three-Speed Train Control Cab Signals
Two-Indication Non-Code System [Cab Signal]lThree-Indication Non-Code
Track & Loop System [Cab Signal]
TVM 430 Cab Signalling System
Partly Morphological Terms (2D3)
General Note
Four-Aspect Cab Signaling
Four-Aspect Cab Signal System
Four-Aspect Coded 100Hz Cab Signal System
Four-Indication Cab Signal
Four-Indication Cab Signal System
Five-Aspect Cab Signal
Five-Aspect Cab Signaling
Multiple Aspect Cab Signal
Three-Indication Cab Signal
Two-Aspect Cab Signaling
Two-Aspect Continuous Inductive Cab Signal
Two-Aspect, Three-Aspect Cab Signal System
Two-Indication Cab Signal
Other Cab Signal Forms (2D4)
ACSES Cab Signal
Cab Lights
Cab Signal Indicator
Cab Signal Subsystem
Domestic Cab Signal Indicator
Enforced Cab Signaling
System of Cab Indicators
Visual Cab Signals
Wayside Cab Signal Equipment
On-Board Cab Signal Equipment
179
Visualizer
Cab Signals with Sound Dimension (2D5)
Indicator, Cab, Audible
Cab Indicators [Audible, Visual]
Cab Signal with Whistle & Acknowledger/Coded Cab Signals with Whistle
& Acknowledger
2A2 Alphabetical Index
A-C.ID-C. Cab Signal!A-C.ID-C. Coded Cab Signal System
ACSES Cab Signals
Alphanumeric Route Indicator·
Approach-Lit Color-Light System/Approach-Lit Mechanical
Colour-Light Signals
Arrow Indicator/Single Arrow IndicatorlDouble Arrow Indicator
Automatic "A" Signal/"A" LightlIlluminated "A" Signal
Automatic Cab Signal/Automatic Cab Signal System/Automatic
Cab-Signal System (ACS)/System, Automatic Cab Signal
Automatic Cab-Signal Systems Continuously Controlled
Automatic Colour-Light Signal
Automatic Colour-Light Signalling
Auxiliary Signal
Back Light, I
Back Light, II
Back-Light/Backlight
Beam-Light Signal/Beam Light Signal
Cab Indicators
Cab Indicators [Audible, Visual]
Cab Lights
Cabmatic
Cab Signals
Cab-Signals
Cab Signal Indicator
180
224
227
220
199
220
206
222
223
193
195
208
208
208
208
213
229
229
227
223
221-222
222
227
Cab Signal Subsystem
Cab Signal Systems
Cab Signals with Sound Dimension
Cab Signals with Whistle & Acknowledger/Coded Continuous
Cab Signals with Whistle & Acknowledger
Cab Signaling
Cab Signaling/Cab Signaling/Cab-Signalling/Cab Signalling/
Cab Signalling System
CATC Cab Signals
Christmas Tree
Cluster Type Signal/Cluster Type Four-Aspect Signals/Cluster
Colour-Light Signals
Coded Continuous Cab Signaling/Coded Continuous Cab
Signal System
Color & Position Signal
Color-Light Automatic Block Signals/Color-Light Block
Signals/Color Light Interlocking and ABS Signals
Color Light Signal Terms
Color Light Terms
Color Light Terms Other Than English
Color Light Signal/Color-Light Signal/Colour Light
Signal/Colour-Light Signal/Colourlight Signal
Color-Light Signal, Searchlight Type
Color-Light Signaling
ColorLight Signaling/Color-Light Signaling/Color-Light
Signalling (Taiwan)/Colour Light Signalling/Colour-Light
Signalling
Color-Light Type/Color-Light Type Signal/Color Light Type/
Color-Light Type of Signal
Color-Light Type Signal (SR)/Short Range Signal
Colorlight High Signal, Searchlight Type/Color Light Dwarf
Signal, Searchlight Type
Color Position Light Signal
Color Position Light Dwarf Signal
Color-Position-Light High Signal/Color-Position-Light
181
227
223
228
229
221
223-24
224
199
198-99
224-25
217
199
191
192
191-92
204
192
195
192
196
204
216
217
----------------------
Dwarf Signal
Color-Position-Light Signal
Color Position Light Signal Forms
Color-Position Signal
Color Signal/Colour Signal
Colour Light Dwarf Signal/Color Light Dwarf Signal
Colour Light Route Indicator
Colour Light Running Signals/Colour-Light Running Signals
Colour Light Shunt Signal
Colour Light Signal/Colour-Light Signal/Colourlight Signal/
Color Light Signal/Color-Light Signal
Colour-Light Signals, Multi-Aspect-Vertical
Colour Light Signal (Humping)
Colourlight Signal-Underground Style
Colour-Light System, Multi-Aspect-Cluster
Coloured Lights
Colour Light/Colourlight/Colour-Light/Colorlight/Color Light
Colour Position Light Signal
Colour Searchlight Signal
Colour Signalling
Continuous Cab Signaling/Continuous Cab Signalling
Continuous Cab Signal System
Continuous Inductive Cab Signal
Continuous System of Cab Signalling/Continuous Controlled
Cab Signal/Continuously Controlled Cab Signal/Continuous
Controlled Cab Signal System
Day Colour-Light Signal
Daylight Position Light Signal
Distance Terms
Domestic Cab Signal Indicators
Double Light Signal
Dwarf Colourlight Shunting Signal
Dwarf Searchlight Signal/Dwarf Colourlight Signal
Dwarf Searchlight Type
182
217
217
216
216
193
207
199
193-94
200
191
194
200
199-200
199
193
193
216
204
195
225
225
225
225
200
213
196
227
200
207
207
204
Dwarf Signal
Dwarf Signal-Electrical
Dwarf Type Signal
Electric Automatic Colour-Light Signalling
Enforced Cab Signaling
Fairyland
Fibre-Optic Route Indicator
Five-Aspect Cab Signal
Five-Aspect Cab Signaling
Fixed-Focus Signal
Flasher Lights
Flashing Signals
Flashing Signals (Signals)/Flashing Light/Flashing, Light
(Signal)/Flashing Light Signal
Forms (Operational) of Cab Signals
Four-Aspect Cab Signaling
Four-Aspect Cab Signal System
Four-Aspect Coded 100 Hz Cab Signal SystemIFour-Indication
Coded Continuous Cab Signal SystemIFour-Indication Coded
Continuous Inductive Cab Signaling
Four-Indication Cab Signal
Four-Indication Cab Signal System
Ground Position Light Signal
Ground Position Light Shunt Signal
Hall-Type Colour-Light Signal
High Signal
Horizontally Arranged Long Range Color Light SignallLong
Range Color Light Signals, Horizontally Arranged/Type E
(Horizontal) Color Light Signals/Horizontal Color-Light
Signals/Horizontally Orientated Color-Light Signals
Hump Shunting Signal
183
206-07
207
207
195
228
200
220
227
227
209
208-09
209:·
209
224
226-27
227
225
227
227
213
214
204
209
197-98
214
-----------
Illuminated Signal
Indicator, Cab, Audible
Indicator/Indicator (Stencil)
Intermittent Cab SignalinglIntermittent Cab Signal System
"L" Light
LED Colour Light SignallLED Ground Position SignalILED
Miniature Tunnel SignallLED Junction Route IndicatorlLED
Stencil IndicatorlLED Theatre SignalILED Level Crossing
'Wig-Wag' SignallLED Banner Repeater Signal
LED Searchlight Signal
Lens Arrangement Terms
Light Signal
Light Strip
Limited-Variant Forms
Long Range Color Light Signals, Vertically Arranged/Type D
Long Range Color Light Signals, Vertically Arranged/Type D
(Vertical) Color-Light Signals/Type-D Color Light
Long-Range Color-Light Signal
Long Range Colored Light Signals
Long Range Colour Light Signals
Long Range Daylight Signals
Long Range Daylight Type Color Light Signal
Long-Range Searchlight/Short-Range Searchlight
Long Range Signals
Long Range Type
Major Cab Signal Forms
Marker
Marker Lamp
Marker Light
Mechanical Color-Light Signal
Medium Range Color Light Signals/Medium Range
Color Signals
184
190
228-29
220
225-26
206
210
204
197
190
209
192
197-98
196
196
196
196-97
197
204
197
197
221
205-06
206
206
200
196
Miniature Colour-Light Signal/Miniature Colour Light Signal
Modular Unit
Morphology & Other Terms
Moving Slide Type Route Indicator
Multi-Colored Light Signal
Multiple Aspect Cab Signals
Multiple-Aspect Light Signals
Multiple-Head Color-Light Signal/Single-Head Color-Light
Signal/Three-Head Color-Light Signal
Multiple-Indication Coded Cab Signals
Multi-Lamp/Theatre Indicators
Multilamp Route IndicatorlMulti-Lamp Route Indicator/
Multi-Lamp
Multiple-Lens Colour Light Signal/Multiple-Lens Colour
Light SignallMulti-Unit Four-Aspect Colour-Light Signal
Multiple Unit Signal
Multi-Unit Colour Light Signal
Multiunit
On-Board Cab Signal Equipment
Other All-Lighted Terms
Other Cab Signals
Other Color Light Signal Forms
Other Forms
Overarching, Color Light & Other All-Lighted Signals
Partly Morphological Terms
Pattern Indicators
Pedestal Signal
Position Light Automatic Type
Position Color-Lights
Position-Color Light Signals
Position Light/Position-Light
Position Light, Color Position Forms & Alphanumeric,
Graphic, Geometric Signal Forms
185
200
210
199
220-21
194
227
206
194
226
218
218
194
210
194
210
228
205
227
196
220
190
226
215
215
214
215
217
212
210
Position Light Dwarf Signal/Dwarf Position Light/Dwarf
Position Signal/Dwarf Light
Position Light Ground Signal
Position Light Humping SignallPosition Light Humping Speed
Signals
Position Light Junction Indicator
Position Light Shunt Signal/Position-Light Shunt Signal
Position Light SignallPosition-Light Signal
Position Light Signal
Position Light Signal (LR)
Position Light Speed Signal/Toton Position Light Speed Signal
Position Light Subsidiary Signal
Position-Light System
Position-Light Type Wayside Signal
Preliminary Routing Indicator
Projector Type Route IndicatorlProjector Type
Railway Signal Lights
Revolving Light Signal
Right-Hand Searchlight
Route Stencil
Searchlight
Searchlight Color Light Signal
Searchlight Signal Forms
Search Light Signal
Search-Light Signal
Searchlight Signal
Searchlight Type Signal
Searchlight Type
Searchlight Type Colour-Light Signal/
Searchlight Typel Colour Light Signal
Searchlight Type of Colorlight Signal/Searchlight Type
Colorlight Signal
Searchlight Type of Color-Light Signal
186
213
213
214
214
214
198
211
214
215
215
212
213
221
221
190
209
204-05
220
201
203
201
202
202
201-02
202
202
203
203
203
Searchlight Type of Single-Lens Colour-Light
Searchlight Type Signal
Search Light Type Signal
Searchlight-Type of Color-Light Signal
Seven-Way Route Indicator//Three-Way Theatre Route Indicator
Short Range Color Light Signals/Short-Range Color Light!
Short Range Colour Light Signal
Short-Range Color-Light Signals (Vertical Type, Subway Type)
Side Light
Signal, Cab
Signal, Color Light
Signal, Color Position
Signal, Dwarf
Signal, Flashing Light
Signal Lamp
Signal Light
Signal, Light
Signaling Forms
Single-Head/Two-Head Searchlight Signal/Twin Head
Searchlight Signal/Twin-Head Searchlight Signal
Single, Position Light
Single Lens Searchlight Signal
Single Lens Units
Single Light Signal
Spreadlight Colour Light Signals/Long Range Spreadlight
Colour Light SignaVSpreadlite Colour Light Signals
Stencil Indicators
Stencil Indicator/Stencil Type Indicator/Stencil Type-Indicator/
Stencil Route Indicators/Stencil Type Route Indicators/
Stencil, Number or Letter Type/Stencil [Type]
Subsidiary Signal
Symbol Signals
Symbolic Signal Forms
System of Cab Indicators
Target Signals
187
203
202
202
203
218
197
197
208
223
192-93
216
207
209
210
190
190
195
205
213
205
205
205
194-195
218
219-220
215
218
218
228
205
Theatre Indicator
Theatre Multi Lamp Route Indicator
Theatre Type Indicator
Theatre-Type Route Indicator/Theatre Type Route Indicator
Theatre-Sign Type Indicator
Three-Aspect Day-Time Colour-Light Signal
Three-Indication Cab Signals
Three-Speed Train Control Cab Signals
Triangular Arrangement, Color Light Automatic Block Signals/
Color Light Signals Arranged in a Triangle/Type G
(Triangular) Color-Light Signals
Triangular Color-Light/Triangular Pattern Color-Light Signal!
Color-Light With Triangular Light Pattern
Two-Aspect Cab Signaling
Two-Aspect Continuous Inductive Cab Signal
Two-Aspect, Three-Aspect Cab Signal System
Two-Indication Cab Signals
Two-Indication Non-Code System [Cab Signal]/
Three-Indication Non-Code Track & Loop System [Cab Signal]
TVM 430 Cab Signalling System
Undifferentiated Physical Signal Forms
Variant Forms
Visual Cab Signals
Visual Signal Lights
Visualizer
Wayside Cab Signal Equipment
Wing Lights
188
218-219
219
217-218
219
219
201
227
226
198
198
227
227
227
227
226
226
207
193
228
190-91
228
228
216
189
2B Overarching, Color Light & Other All-Lighted Signals
2B 1 Overarching Terms
ILLUMINATED SIGNAL. This term apparently refers to the development in the
19th c. of Signals for night time use. Illuminated Signals originally meant
Semaphore signals. An early form of illumination outlined the blade. This was
followed by the creating of a lens unit attached to the blade. This term is more of
an overarching (or sub-arching) term than an all-lighted term though it may have
a place here.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
LIGHT SIGNAL. An encompassing term for all forms of fully-lighted railroad
Signals. Though it lacks specificity unless placed in a railroad context. Only a
limited number of sources include this term.
References: VR Signals, SA-TWR 1964, ARSPAP-LSLSL 1949
RAILWAY SIGNAL LIGHTS. This term suggests a general overarching term
save for the addition oflight. It may be more appropriate here. Compare Visual
Signal Lights.
Reference: Tansley 1987
SIGNAL, LIGHT. An alternate form ofthe Light Siganl for some US sources; it
has the same meaning. It is a Signal (fixed) whose indications are given by color
and/or position lenses.
References: ARSPAP-D 1965, AAR SM 1987
SIGNAL LIGHT. A term found in only a few sources. It appears to be a general
term encompassing a broad range ofsignal forms. It suggests a general term for
many types of T-M lighted safety aids and not merely railroad Signals. Light
Signal is a more common term with Signal, Light as an alternate.
References: Shackleton 1976, US&S
VISUAL SIGNAL LIGHTS. This term suggests a general overarching term save
for the addition of light. It may be more appropriate here.
190
Reference: Tansley 1987
2B2 Color Light Signals
a) Principal Forms
1) Basic Terms
COLOUR LIGHT SIGNALS/COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALS/COLOURLIGHT
SIGNALS/COLOR LIGHT SIGNALS/COLOR-LIGHT SIGNALS.
General Note. This category encompasses a broad range of signal forms. The
terms are numerous though diversity within the category is somewhat limited.
Entries are limited since related terms are grouped together. Color Light Signal
terms can be divided into two basic groups: Primary forms and Other forms (and
further subdivided into Distance, Lens Arrangement, Morphology, and Other
Forms). Position & Color Position are considered separately though all-lighted.
Some sources include Position and Color Position within Colorlight Signals. Most
Color Light terms are two words divided about equally between hyphenated and
non-hyphenated forms. English-language terms, outside of the Americas,
generally follow British spelling (Colour rather than color). Colourlight as one
word is relatively rare and found mostly in Australia with a few "sightings" in
Asia. These signals emit messages by all-lighted means in color and by multiple
lenses. A form of Color Light, Searchlight, employs one optic unit and
changeable discs and is listed separately. REMC refers to Color-Light Signals
with light units in a vertical line. That may constitute a description of one form of
color-light more than a formal name or a variant signal form. This General Note is
for all of Chapter 2B2
Classification: #5110
Form of Device: Lighted Railway Signal
Operation: An all-lighted device that displays alternating messages according to
an agreed-upon pattern.
Comments: The classification speaks of Color-Light Multiple-lens which
constrasts with Color-Light: Searchlight-lens. Various other Color-Light Signals
including Dwarf forms are encompassed within this designation for this study.
191
References: Colour Light Signals: UIC COST 1972, WBS UK, I & W (Vic),
Mashour 1974
Colour-Light Signals: Ellis 1966, Rolt 1982, Allen 1982, Barwell
1983,Shac~cton1976
Colourlight Signals: WBS (Aus), QR-SS, Grisdale 1977
Color Light Signals: FRA-1978, FRA-2 and FRA-3, 1979
Color-Light Signals: Phillips 1942, Killigrew 1949, Kaufmann 1966
COLOR LIGHT TYPE/COLOR-LIGHT TYPE/COLOR-LIGHT TYPE
SIGNAL/COLOR-LIGHT TYPE OF SIGNAL. FRA-1 employs the first term
once; possibly it is an informal term. It is a reference to physical type of signal
apparatus employed. The second term is found in ARSPAP though probably only
in conjunction with the additional word of Short Range (SR); the term is possibly
employed only with that reference. See Also Color Light Type Signal (SR) for
cross-reference. REMC adds "of'to the third term.
References: FRA-1 1978, ARSPAP-H 1953, REMC 1948
COLOR-LIGHT SIGNALING. This term seemingly refers to a system of Color-
Light Signals rather than to a single Signal; though such references can refer to
groups. See Also: Color Light Signaling group on page 180.
Reference: Solomon 2003
COLOR LIGHT TERMS: OTHER THAN ENGLISH. UIC COST gives Colour
Light Signal for the English form of the term. The same publication includes
Signal Lumineuex in French for Color Light, Lichtsignal in German, and Segnale
Luminosa in Italian. However, UIC GD has alternate terms: Signal 'a feu de cou
luer in French, Fablicht Signal in German, Segnal a fuoco di colore in Italian,
Senal Luminos de colores in Spanish. Brazil and Portugal railways employ Sinais
Luminosos.
References: UIC COST 1952, UIC General Dictionary 1975
2) Limited-Variant Forms
SIGNAL, COLOR LIGHT. Placing the word "Signal" before Colorlight/Color
Light is rare except in the US where both AAR SM and ARSPAP-D both employ
192
it. Other Signal terms in those publications also place the general words before the
particular in a variety of instances.
References: AAR SM 1987, ARSPAP-D 1965
COLOUR-LIGHT/COLOURLIGHT/COLOUR LIGHT/COLORLIGHT/COLOR
LIGHT. Colourlight is possibly either a signal form or a reference to the means of
displaying information. The hyphenated form is from Allen. The single-word
forms appears in ERS but with little elucidation. Possibly there is no extant form
of the two-word form. The American English versions are found in one source.
Reference: ERS-B 1995, Allen 1962, Solomon 2003
COLOR SIGNAL/COLOUR SIGNAL. The first term is employed by B & O. It
possibly includes Signals other than fully lighted forms (e.g., Signals denoting
track) and is thereby more inclusive. Colour Signal appears in one Queensland
Railway source. That usage omits the commonly included word "light." But the
meaning is unchanged.
References: B & 0 1953, Queenslands Rlways-SS
COLOURED LIGHTS. An alternate form of Color Light Signal employed by a
historical sketch of South African railway signals. The use of Coloured instead of
colour/color is rare. The essay in question is in English and possible language
translations affected choice of terms. Australia also uses the term though the use
is rare there as well.
References: Official Inauguration 1975, AR Around Australia
3) Variant Forms
AUTOMATIC COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALS. Companion term to the term
Automatic Colour-Light Signalling. It denotes early stage of Color Light Signals
when automatic processes were becoming common (though not yet so) and
method of operation sometimes included in the term.
Reference: Shackleton 1978, Ellis 1966
COLOUR LIGHT RUNNING SIGNALS/COLOUR-LIGHT RUN1~ING
SIGNALS. These are UK terms encompassing all Signals except Subsidiary
193
Signals. They are not far removed from the term Color Light Signal which
encompasses all All-Lighted Signals. Color Light Running Signals include UK
Position Light Signals, Theatre & Stencil Indicators. These terms relate to
morphology and perhaps should be cross-references only in this segment.
Reference: K & W 1963
COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALS MULTI-ASPECT-VERTICAL. Vanns arranges
signal types under a general heading but the form is a definite and identifiable
form.
Reference: Vanns 1997
MULTIPLE-LENS COLOUR LIGHT SIGNALIMULTIPLE-LENS COLOUR-
LIGHT SIGNAL/MULTI-LENS FOUR-ASPECT COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALS.
The basic term is from Wooley, VR. It differentiates Colour Light Signals that
display multiple lenses from Colour Light Signals of the searchlight model. Vanns
offers a double-hyphenated variant that employs multi rather than multiple.
Reference: Wooley 1958 (Australia), A & W 1997, Vanns 1997, VGR 1932
MULTI-COLORED LIGHT SIGNAL. This distinguishes Color Light Signals
with multiple lenses from searchlight forms. It is somewhat similar to previous
term though without mention of lens.
Reference: South Korea (Korea)
MULTI-UNIT COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNAL. An alternate ofMultiple-Lens Colour
Light Signal.
Reference: A & W 1991
MULTIPLE-HEAD COLOR-LIGHT SIGNAL/SINGLE-HEAD COLOR-LIGHT
SIGNAL/THREE-HEAD COLOR-LIGHT SIGNAL. Solomon often refers to
Signal Head which is seemingly a rare practice. AAR 1949 refers to Signal Units
and that may offer a synonym for Solomon's terms. Head refers to the number of
Signal assemblages on a given mast.
Reference: Solomon 2003
SPREADLIGHT COLOUR LIGHT SIGNALSILONG RANGE SPREADLIGHT
194
COLOUR LIGHT SIGNALISPREADLITE COLOUR LIGHT SIGNALS. A
single surveyed source included this term though the type of lens appears in other
publications. The term "spreadlight" denotes a lens that spreads light over a wider
spectrum though the range is less. It is employed, among other places, on sharp
curves. Westinghouse Brake & Signal (UK) uses the term as two words, Spread-
Light. GRS in the 1920s coined a trademark of "Spreadlite." Wooley speaks of
"spreadlight lenses" employed for "subsidiary or shunting signals." Second and
third terms are alternatives.
References: WBS UK, GRS 1925, Wooley 1958 VR, Sig Eq. 1981
(4) Signaling Forms
AUTOMATIC COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALLING. A term that is nearly historic.
The inclusion ofthe word "automatic" occurred most likely when mechanical
processes dominated signaling; the addition of "automatic" indicates that
automatic processes were in an early state. The term refers to a system of Signals.
Reference: Shackleton 1976
COLOR LIGHT SIGNALING/COLOR-LIGHT SIGNALLn'J"G (TAIWAN)/
COLOUR LIGHT SIGNALLING/COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALLING. These
terms are rare in North America. Non-hyphenated forms are more common than
hyphenated. Taiwan includes a rare form of American English for Color and
British English for Signalling. These terms refer to systems of signals rather than
to individual signal units.
References: Canada (lst term); Taiwan (2nd term); Bangladesh, Zimbabwe (3rd
term); Alkmaar (4th term)
COLOUR SIGNALLING. One Queensland source drops "light" from Colour
Light Signals, and Colour Light Signalling but the meaning is unchanged.
Reference: Queensland Railways-SS
ELECTRIC AUTOMATIC COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALLING. A general term
that encompasses all Color/Colour Light signals but made more explicit by
including the energy source and character of operations.
Reference: Ellis 1958
195
b) Other Color Light Signal Fonns
1) Distance Tenns
General Note. These tenns refer to how far a Signal indication can be seen. Only
a limited number of tenns add a distance factor to the basic tenn. Most of the
sources are from US or ERS.
COLOR-LIGHT TYPE SIGNAL, SRISHORT RANGE SIGNALS. Originally the
first term was designed for 500 foot distance in 1904.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953, ERS-B 1995
MEDIUM RANGE COLOR LIGHT SIGNAL/MEDIUM RANGE COLOR
SIGNALS. Medium Range denotes 1500' viewing distance for ARSPAP-H.
Other sources suggest this distance for short range (SR and LR are often the only
distance categories). The term dates back to 1912 and may be of a historic nature.
Tans1ey includes a similar tenn though without inclusion of light.
References: ARSPAP-H 1995, B & M 1981
LONG RANGE COLORED LIGHT SIGNAL. It is uncertain whether this is an
actual Signal fonn, or a descriptive reference to a fonn of signal light apparatus.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
LONG-RANGE COLOR-LIGHT SIGNAL. This version with two hyphenated
tenns is from GRS. Range is detennined by wattage and voltage of lamp bulb.
Distance, because of those factors, can vary from 2500-3500 feet and often
reaches 4000-5000' with a maximum range of 5000-6000'.
Reference: GRS 1925
LONG RANGE COLOUR LIGHT SIGNAL. A variant fonn of the basic tenn.
Reference: GEC 1972
LONG RANGE DAYLIGHT SIGNAL. Another historic tenn that includes the
word "daylight." The distance for this fonn was 3500'.
196
Reference: B & M 1981
LONG RANGE SIGNAL. A more abbreviated term that refers to Color Light
Signals. It refers to Briish Rail and has a distance of 15OOm or ca 5000'.
Reference: ERS-B 1995
LONG RANGE TYPE. A category within color-light forms.
Reference: King 1921
LONG RANGE DAYLIGHT TYPE COLOR LIGHT SIGNAL. A historic term.
This can be seen by the inclusion of the word "daylight" in the title. Only an early
signal which could be seen in the daylight would include the word since
Transition terms often included words that established signals would omit.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
SHORT RANGE COLOR LIGHT SIGNAL/SHORT-RANGE COLOR LIGHT
SIGNAL/SHORT RANGE COLOUR LIGHT SIGNAL. A more explicit version
incorporating both Short Range and Color Light into the title. The second title is
from Starkey.
References: FRA-3 1979, ARSPAP-H 1953, B & M 1981, Starkey 1944
SHORT RANGE COLOR-LIGHT SIGNALS (VERTICAL TYPE; SUBWAY
TYPE). GRS adds further explication by including specific forms: conventional,
wayside version, and wayside type.
Reference: GRS 1925
2) Lens Arrangement Terms [Some terms are cross referenced with 1) Distance
Terms]
LONG RANGE COLOR LIGHT SIGNALS, VERTICALLY ARRANGED/
TYPE D LONG RANGE COLOR LIGHT SIGNALS, VERTICALLY
ARRANGED/TYPE D (VERTICAL) COLOR-LIGHT SIGNALS/TYPE-D
COLOR LIGHT This compiler has slightly altered terms that appear in ARSPAP-
H. The terms in question are tied to a manufacturer (GRS). It is important to
include the correct and precise terminology but it may be permissable to present a
197
more general version that is apart from the manufacturer's designation. The
vertical version is found in much ofthe world though not under this heading.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953, also GRS 1925, ARSPAP-LSLSL 1949
HORIZONTALLY ARRANGED LONG RANGE COLOR LIGHT SIGNALS/
LONG RANGE COLOR LIGHT SIGNALS, HORIZONTALLY ARRANGED/
TYPE E (HORIZONTAL) COLOR LIGHT SIGNALS/HORIZONTAL COLOR-
LIGHT SIGNALS/HORIZONTALLY ORIENTATED COLOR-LIGHT
SIGNALS. These are also exclusively US terms Gudging from a survey of the
literature). ARSPAP-H seemingly is largely dependent on GRS for the data on
these Signals. GRS refers to signal types by letters of alphabet. This form is
referred to as Type E. See also explanation with Long Range, Color Light Signals,
Vertically Arranged. The word "Horizontal" and "Horizontally" may be a
descriptive term rather than a part of the formal name. A new source, Solomon,
offers the [mal two terms.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953, GRS 1925, ARSPAP-LSLSL 1949, Solomon 2003
TRIANGULAR ARRANGEMENT COLOR LIGHT AUTOMATIC BLOCK
SIGNALS/COLOR LIGHTS SIGNALS ARRANGED IN A TRIANGLE/TYPE
G (TRIANGULAR) COLOR-LIGHT SIGNALS. These are terms found in a few
US publications produced by ARPSPAP-H and GRS 1925. Most of these (and
adjoining terms) are prefaced by GRS type designations. This Database will
include that version and also in a more generic form. The triangular form has one
lens in a lower position and two horizontal upper lenses forming a triangle with
one point downward.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953, GRS 1925
TRIANGULAR COLOR-LIGHT/TRIANGULAR-PATTERN COLOR-LIGHT
SIGNAL/COLOR-LIGHT WITH TRIANGULAR LIGHT PATTERN. These
variant forms may intertwine formal names with descriptive terms.
Reference: Solomon 2003
CLUSTER TYPE SIGNALS/CLUSTER TYPE FOUR-ASPECT SIGNALS/
CLUSTER COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALS. This Signal -- included in a few UK
references -- is a historical term from the earlier 20th c. The Signal has four lenses
198
units arranged in a cross or diamond pattern with two horizontal units in a middle
position and two vertical units intersecting the horizontal lenses. The vertical units
are yellow; the left horizontal is green, and the right horizontal is red. The Signal
provided a second yellow for preliminary caution.
References: Nock 1962, K & W 1963, Vanns 1997
COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALS MULTI-ASPECT-CLUSTER. Vanns arranges
signal types under heading of Color-Light but subdivisions represent a specific
form of Signal.
Reference: Vanns 1997
3) Morphology & Other Terms
APPROACH-LIT COLOUR-LIGHT SYSTEM/APPROACH-LIT
MECHANICAL COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNALS. Signals lighted only at approach
of trains. Methods of operation that is incorporated into the name of the Signal.
Reference: Vanns 1991
CHRISTMAS TREE. Colour lights positioned on a gantry. A colloquial term.
Reference: Jackson 1992
COLOR-LIGHT AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNALS/COLOR-LIGHT BLOCK
SIGNALS/COLOR LIGHT INTERLOCKING & ABS SIGNALS. One surveyed
source combines the light form with a morphological function.
Reference: Solomon 2003
COLOUR-LIGHT ROUTE INDICATOR. The color usage ofthis Signal
contrasts with many Route Indicators that display lunar white or other uni-color
patterns.
Reference: Taylor 1949
COLOURLIGHT SIGNAL-UNDERGROUND STYLE. A form of Signal
intended for tunnels where space is limited. Housings for lamp apparatus are
smaller than standard forms with simple lenses. Darkness requires less powerful
apparatus. A single source includes the location (underground) in the title.
199
Reference: WBS (Australia)
COLOUR LIGHT SIGNAL (HUMPING). Term refers to a Signal engaged in
shunting operations at freight yards. British spelling because of the source of the
publication. This term is also morphological in nature.
Reference: UN 1954
COLOUR LIGHT SHUNT SIGNAL. A curious term that may not actually exist.
Starkey speaks of Position Light Shunt as a satisfactory Signal for shunting but
notes that using a Colour Light Shunt Signal in lieu of a Position Light Shunt
might cause confusion since it would be similar to a Colour Light Running Signal.
Reference: Starkey 1944
DAY COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNAL. A term referring to earlier all-lighted Signals
that did not require non-lighted dimension during the day hours (as was the case
with Semaphore Signals).
Reference: Nock 1962
DOUBLE LIGHT SIGNAL. Older term for what is now known as Bi-Directional
Signaling.
Reference: King 1921
FAIRYLAND. Jackson includes colloquial terms in his treatise. Fairyland
designates Multi-aspect Colour Light Signals.
Reference: Jackson 1992
MECHANICAL COLOR~LIGHT SIGNALS. A curious Signal employing
Semaphore spectacles and lamps but without arms. The Signal thereby became a
Colour-Light Signal employed in several UK systems.
Reference: Vanns 1997
MINIATURE COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNAL/MINIATURE COLOUR LIGHT
SIGNALS. Seemingly a synonym for Dwarf Signals. Miniature is found in UK
practice; dwarfmore common North America.
Reference: K & W 1963
200
THREE-ASPECT DAY-TIME COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNAL. This term may
better fit in 1C but retained here because of unusual title. It refers to early Signals
which could be seen in day as well as at night. See Also Day Colour- Light
Signal.
Reference: Vauns 1997
2B3 Searchlight Signal Forms
General Note. There is a gradation of terms from Searchlight Signals to
Searchlight to Searchlight Color Lights to Color Light Searchlights. The various
terms fit into one of those categories. Do they represent different conception of
the Searchlight Signal? Or are they semantic differences which are not of great
signficance? Even if the categories are not significant they offer a way to consider
the various terms.
SEARCHLIGHT. This term is seemingly a short form for Searchlight Signal. For
one system, Zimbabwe, Color Light Signals are divided into Searchlight and
Multiunit Forms. Only a few surveyed sources include the term.
References: FRA-3 1979, Zimbabwe Railways
SEARCHLIGHT SIGNAL. The word "searchlight" suggests a powerful light,
narrowly focusses and very mobile in direction. The searchlight Signal for
railroads was perhaps coined to denote a focussed and powerful and single lamp
apparatus; it does not offer a choice in direction since it is fixed. The searchlight
Signal is a form of Colorlight Signal though with a single housing for 3-aspects.
Movable lenses (or at least movable color panels) provide a choice that is selected
by the operating system. This is the only relatively common term for the
Searchlight Signal. Queensland Railways speak: of the Searchlight as having one
(single) aspect but able to display several indications. It would seem more
accurate to speak: of three aspects though not at one time.
Saftetrans replaces electro-mechanical apparatus of the conventional Search-light
with light modules and fiber-optic cables that moves the desired color to the lens.
It is termed a "Unilens" and it is not considered to be a Searchlight Signal by
201
Safetrans. Yet it is in essence a SearcWight Signal because one color appears at a
time though other colors are capable of display.
Classification: #5111
Form of Aid: Lighted Railway Signal
Operation: An all-lighted device that displays alternating messages according to
an agreed upon pattern.
Comments: The Signal has a single multifaceted lens apparatus that alternates
lens as activated by instructions to the mechanism
Reference: Queenslands Railway, B & M 1981, AAR SM 1983, South Korea,
Canada 1962, Safetrans
SEARCH-LIGHT SIGNAL. A slightly variant fonn ofSearcWight Signal. Few
surveyed sources include this variation.
Reference: Kaufmann 1966, Queensland Railways FS
SEARCHLIGHT TYPE. A variant and shortened fonn of Searchlight Type
Signal.
References: ARSPAP-LSS 1949, ARSPAP-H 1953
SEARCHLIGHT TYPE SIGNAL. An alternate to SearcWight as an overarching ,
term for this fonn of Signal. The word "Type" is a component of numerous signal
terms which also include the word "SearcWight."
Reference: UIC CST 1972
SEARCH LIGHT TYPE SIGNAL. A variant of SearcWight Type Signal. A rare
example of Search and Light as two words in a Signal context. See Also: Search
Light Signal.
Reference: UN 1954
SEARCH LIGHT SIGNAL. Search and Light as two words is a rare practice in
Railroad Signals. This term is from South Korea. One other use is Search Light
Type Signal from UN 1954. Both uses are Asian and may represent regional uses
ofEnglish.
Reference: South Korea, UN 1954
202
SEARCHLIGHT COLOR LIGHT SIGNAL. The employment of both Searchlight
and Color Light raises questions that are not easily answered. Is there a
difference in meaning betwen a term beginning with Searchlight and followed by
Color Light, and one begun with Color or Color Light and followed by
Searchlight? Is this form a Color Light Signal prefaced by a specific form? While
the second term is a Color Light Signal incorporating a specific variation? Is a
Searchlight Signal minus Color Light closer to being an autonomous form?
Reference: Rapid Advances ... 1981
SEARCHLIGHT TYPE OF COLORLIGHT SIGNAL! SEARCHLIGHT TYPE
COLORLIGHT SIGNAL ARSPAP is the source for both terms. The first term is
from 1920 and may reflect the early stage of Searchlight when it was viewed as a
variant form of Color Light Signals. The second term -- from 1930 -- omits "of'
and that may suggest Searchlight as an established variant form.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
SEARCHLIGHT TYPE COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNAL. This variant term is from
the DIC "dictionary" (which lacks definitions and is more on the order of a word
list). A French form in UIC-CST, "Unite Limineuse A' Oculaire Mobile", may
suggest a moving lens is included in the title.
Reference: UIC LGDTF 1975, UIC-CST 1972
SEARCHLIGHT-TYPE OF COLOR-LIGHT SIGNAL. A variant form from a
single source that includes hyphens for Search and Light, and Color and Light.
Refemce: Kaufmann (lES) 1966
SEARCHLIGHT TYPE OF SINGLE-LENS COLOUR-LIGHT. A term unique to
New Zealand. It ties Searchlight directly to Color-Light thereby placing
Searchlight as a component of Color Light.
Reference: A Century ... NZ 1964
SEARCHLIGHT TYPE COLOUR LIGHT SIGNALS. Wooley has Colorlight as
two words; this constitutes a variant form.
Reference: Wooley 1958
203
COLOUR SEARCHLIGHT SIGNAL. A variant term. See comments on
Searchlight Colour Light Signal (GEC).
Reference: Wooley 1958
COLOR-LIGHT SIGNAL, SEARCHLIGHT TYPE. Term reflects a view of
Searchlight as a clear and explicit type of Colorlight. Terms that omit Colorlight
suggests Searchlight as a form in itself or at least not a clear variant of Colorlight.
Reference: GRS 1961
DWARF SEARCHLIGHT TYPE. Variant form of basic term and description.
The word Type is included though not the word Signal. The meaning of the term
is the same as terms containing Signal.
Reference: WBS (Australia)
COLOR LIGHT HIGH SIGNAL, SEARCHLIGHT TYPE/COLOR LIGHT
DWARF SIGNAL, SEARCHLIGHT TYPE. High refers to Signal mounted on
mast while Dwarf is bolted to a foundation of concrete or other substance.
Reference: ARSPAP-LSL SL 1949
HALL-TYPE COLOUR-LIGHT SIGNAL. Alternate name for Searchlight
Signals. Employed in UK in 1920s. Name refers to maker.
Reference: Varms 1997
LED SEARCHLIGHT SIGNAL. LED refers to light emitting diodes, a form of
solid state technology which produces lower cost light displays.
Reference: Tansley 1985
LONG-RANGE SEARCHLIGHT/SHORT-RANGE SEARCHLIGHT. The range
of Signals is discussed in Color-Light Signals.
Reference: Solomon 2003
RIGHT-HAND SEARCHLIGHT. Right-hand is more of a descriptive term than a
formal name. Location of Signal on right or left hand is based on national and/or
railway practice. Variation on those practices can occur in a given situation.
204
Reference: Solomon 2003
SINGLE-HEADrrWO-HEAD SEARCHLIGHT SIGNAL/TWIN HEAD
SEARCHLIGHT SIGNAL/TWIN-HEAD SEARCHLIGHT SIGNAL. Solomon
employs "Head" for Signal unit and often employs the term. Twin-Head refers to
two Searchlight units on one mast.
Reference: Solomon 2003
SINGLE LENS SEARCHLIGHT SIGNAL. This term may appear to be
redundant since Searchlight is a single, unified apparatus but K.& W/UK adds
"Single Lens" to distinguish a one unit, 3-aspect Signal from a 2-unit apparatus
displaying a fourth aspect. "Single lens" does not appear to be fully accurate since
Searchlight contains three lens though a single one is positioned at anyone time.
See Also: Searchlight Type of Single-lens Colour-Light.
Reference: K & W 1963
SINGLE LIGHT SIGNAL. This is not a Searchlight term. The term seemingly
refers to a Signal displaying one aspect at a time. The term is from NSW and
many Signals in NSW have double units and double-aspects. The term in question
refers to single units. The entry is also a cross-reference with morphology, Ch ID.
Reference: NSW SI-SL 1969
TARGET SIGNAL. A variant name for the Searchlight Signal.
Reference: Solomon 2003
2B4 Other All-Lighted Terms
a) Single Lens Units (These terms frequently have a morphological dimension)
1) Terms Slightly More Morphological Than Physical
MARKER. This term from India omits the term light; it is possibly not lighted or,
at least, not all forms are lighted. Messages are those ofMarker Lights.
Reference: Indian Railways
205
MARKER LAMP. This term is a possible synonym for Marker Lights though it
may also have a variant meaning. GRS speaks ofboth Marker Light and Marker
Lamp. Marker Light includes a morphology dimension while Marker Lamp refers
to physical apparatus. Western Australia refers to the broader term of Signal
Lamp in a manner that suggests Lamp means physical apparatus.
References: GRS 1925, Western Australia Railways 1974
MARKER LIGHT. This term is both physiological and morphological. Its core
purpose is to qualify main signal aspect and is thereby morphological. But it is
also a physical entity consisting of a single lens apparatus mounted on the signal
mast. See Also: Marker, Marker Lamp, the several "A" Light forms.
References: UIC-COST 1972, FRA-RAR 1984, K & W 1963, Western Australian
Railways 1974
2) Terms Somewhat More Morphological Than Physical
AUTOMATIC "A" LIGHT/"A" LIGHTIILLUMINATED "A" SIGNAL. These
terms are single lens units with the letter "A" embossed on the glass cover. They
are forms of Marker Lights. These terms along with Marker Lights are cross-
referenced with Morphological terms.
References: Queensland Railway SS-E 1977 (fust two terms), NSW SI-SL 1969
(3rd term)
"L" LIGHT. One unit Signal with letter "L" embossed on the lens cover. L stands
for Loop.
Reference: Western Australia Railways 1974
MULTIPLE-ASPECT LIGHT SIGNALS. This term is a cross-reference with the
term in Morphology, Chapter 1D
Reference: ERS-B 1995
b) Dwarf Signals (Frequently Multiple Lens)
DWARF SIGNAL. This form of Signal is small and may have no mast at all.
Often the Signal housing is attached to a foundation on the ground. This Signal
206
type is sometimes employed for mainline/running situations though more often it
is found in train yards and other situations where lines branch off. Not
infrequently the term has an undifferentiated title though many forms are in PL
form.
References: ERS-B 1995, Nock 1962, AAR SM 1987, ARSPAP-D 1965 and-H
1953
SIGNAL, DWARF. Alternate formulation for Dwarf Signal appearing in some
US sources.
References: FRA-3 1979, ARSPAP-D 1965
DWARF TYPE SIGNALS. A slightly altered form ofthe basic term.
Reference: Nock 1962
DWARF SIGNAL-ELECTRICAL. NSW distinguishes between mechanical and
electrical (the later with the meaning of all-lighted) by including appropriate term
in title.
Reference: NSW SI
DWARF SEARCHLIGHT SIGNALIDWARF COLOURLIGHT SIGNAL. Dwarf
Signal terms prefaced by the type of Signal (Searchlight, Position-Light, etc)
appear in those segments. Terms prefaced by Dwarf are listed here though
described in the appropriate place.
References: WBS (Australia)
COLOUR LIGHT DWARF SIGNAL/COLOR LIGHT DWARF SIGNAL. These
are variant forms. Possibly they should be placed in Color Light Signals since that
dimension precedes the dwarf dimension.
Reference: WBS (Australia), ARSPAP LS-LSS 1949
DWARF COLOURLIGHT SHUNTING SIGNAL. This term is primarily a
morphological term though it needs a cross-reference here.
Reference: NSW Signalling
c) Undifferentiated Physical Signal Forms
207
AUXILIARY SIGNAL. This is seemingly a very general term that could include
Marker Lights and other less than primary forms. Only FRA-3, of surveyed
sources, includes the term. The term seemingly refers only to Position Light
Signals. The term is retained here because of its more general character (at least
potentially).
Reference: FRA-3 1979
BACK LIGHT I. This term refers to a light created by opening in back side of
Signal emitting light from Signal Lamp denoting Signal is in operation. RSD
describes a complex form that indicated which message was displayed by the
main signal at a given time. GRS includes a mirror and lens system that projects
light from Signal apparatus to back of Signal. In Pakistan the Back Light indicates
that the signal is functioning and when in proceed mode ("on"). WA form
displays one of two messages: proceed or stop; and caution for distant Signal.
Reference: AAR SM 1987, GRS 1925, WA 1974, Pakistan Railways
BACK LIGHT II. AAR SM 1983 includes a second form ofBack Light with a
different meaning: This second form projects an auxiliary signal for a Grade
Crossing Signal thereby providing a Signal for a different direction (from the
main signal).
Reference: AAR SM 1987
BACK-LIGHTIBACKLIGHT. WBS (UK) offers two alternative variant forms.
They are in use for Position Light Shunt and Subsidiary Signals. Cross-reference:
Position Light Signals.
Reference: WBS (UK)
SIDE LIGHT. A synonym for Back Light. This may refer to second form for
grade crossings.
Reference: AAR SM 1987
FLASHER LIGHT. Undefined term in UIC. The term appears in close proximity
to fixed lights and therefore probably indicates a signal with flashing aspect(s).
Numerous European systems employ such aspects. They are less common
208
elsewhere though not altogether unknown. Messages are found in morphology.
Reference: UIC Code 1961
FLASHING LIGHTIFLASHING, LIGHT (SIGNAL)IFLASHING LIGHT
SIGNAL. These terms refer to crossing signals. They are included because of the
resemblance to railroad signals.
Reference: AAR SM 1983, Kanner 1992
FLASHING SIGNALS. Since this term appears in a discussion of signals and
human factors it may have more of a theoretical meaning than an applied one. In
other references it has a primarily concrete meaning.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
SIGNAL, FLASHING LIGHT. A term from ARSPAP that follows their usual
reverse order. It refers to a Grade Crossing Signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
REVOLVING LIGHT SIGNAL. A historical term from the late 19th c. It is not
clear whether or not the term is all-lighted but there is no mention of a daylight
dimension.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
FIXED-FOCUS SIGNAL. Term refers to a Signal which can not be adjusted.
This is probaby the case with many Railroad Signals. Adjustable forms are also in
use.
Reference: Easy Access Lineside Signal, IRJ 1996
HIGH SIGNAL. This denotes Signals mounted on a substantial mast which
distinguishes them from Dwarf Signals with little or no mast.
Reference: ARSPAP-LSLSL 1949
LIGHT STRIP. A strip or bar of small lights accompanying main lights. It is
employed in URO system and provides for further message possibilities. It is not
a form of Position Light.
Reference: URO 1962, MashoUf 1974
209
MODULAR lJNIT. This term refers to Signal component in a module form
which can be added to other similar units to form a Signal apparatus. The term is
from a manufacturing concern.
Reference: WBS (Australia)
MULTIPLE UNIT SIGNALS. Termed employed by Starkey (SA) in 1943. The
meaning is unclear. It may possibly indicate a Signal with multiple lenses or it
may refer to Signals with double lenses. Seemingly no other surveyed source
includes the term.
Reference: Starkey 1944
MULTIUNIT. A one-word term seemingly employed only by Zimbabwe. It refers
to Signals with multiple lens units. The other Signal form for Zimbabwe is the
Searchlight which see.
Reference: Zimbabwe Railways 1987
SIGNAL LAMP. Western Australia makes a reference to the lighting of Signal
Lamps. This may indicate a reference to physical apparatus. Signal Light, on the
other hand, speaks more ofmorphology or the "total package" ofapparatus and
messages produced and displayed.
Reference: Western Australia Railways 1974
LED COLOUR LIGHT SIGNAL/LED GROUND POSITION SIGNAL/LED
MINIATURE TUNNEL SIGNAL/JUNCTION ROUTE INDICATOR/STENCIL
INDICATORILED THEATRE SIGNALILED LEVEL CROSSING 'WIG-WAG'
SIGNALILED BANNER REPEATER SIGNAL. Dorman, a UK company,
produces standard Signals with LED components which also appear in the title.
The last named suggest Signals from the past.
Reference: Dorman
2C Position Light, Color-Position Light, & Alphanumeric, Graphic, Geometric
Signal forms
210
2Cl Position Light Signals
POSITION LIGHT SIGNALIPOSITION-LIGHT SIGNAL
General Note I. Position Light Signals create and display messages by position of
lights rather than by multiple colors (Argentina offers an interesting perspective in
describing this Signal form as Senales luminosas incoloras; incoloras means
colorless). Color is present but only in a single color. Position Light can suggest a
full-fledged Signal form since several American systems employ it in a full sense;
it dates back to 1915 on the Pennsylvania Railroad). The full form can display as
many aspects as mainline Signals such as Color Light Signals. However, many
systems outside the Americas employ Position Light in a different form.
The second form comes in two basic versions. One consists of an annes)
displaying 3-5 lunar white lights, and denotes a diverging route (which is a
morphological function). In some instances five and six arms may be present. It is
a true Position Light Signal with a specialized function; the light pattern is fixed.
All lights of a given arm are either on or off. The second version, often a Shunt
Signal, has, frequently, a triangular-shaped housing displaying two or three lamps.
In some instances some lamps may be lit at all times while in other cases all
lamps may be darkened according to system practice. There are 1-3 possible
messages with the second form of the Position Light Signal.
General Note II. Some so-called Position Light Signals include color so they are
in reality Color Position Light Signals. For that matter Conrail began adding red
lamps to Position Light Signals so even many regular Position Light Signals are
no longer true Position Light Signals. A section termed Pseudo-Position Light
Signals is included in Color Position Light Signals.
General Note III. For the Database Position Light Signals are divided into three
categories:
Position Light I are full signals (circular appearance)
Position Light II are specialized (usually with arms)
211
Position Light III are specialized with one of several forms and are not
mainline:
a) Most common form: triangular-shaped housing, 1-3 lamps
b) Less common forms include a circular housing with multiple
lamps though limited messages (There is also the "Merry
go round" with multiple lamps and limited messages).
The regular Position Light Signal displays messages of a semaphoric
configuration by one color and through rows of lights. The Position Light has nine
signal lamps positioned in a circular pattern with a circular backplate. The lamps
are connected to a central hub by pipe conduits. Auxiliary lamps or a marker lamp
can accompany the main signal thereby increasingly possible indications.
Classification: #5113
Type of Device: Lighted Railway Signal
Operation: Signal displays messages according to an established pattern. A single
color of light is employed and follows Semaphore arm configuration.
Comments: The Classification employs a hyphenated form. This entry
encompasses other forms and terms of Position Light Signals
References: Phillips 1942, Part F, ARSPAP-LSLSL 1949, FRA-3 1979, ERS-B
1995, Blythe 1951 (2nd term)
POSITION LIGHT/POSITION-LIGHT. This term is a shorter form that omits the
word "Signal". Meaning seemingly unchanged from more explicit forms. Term is
somewhat vague except when placed in context of Railroad Signals. Blythe 1951
includes both Position Light (no hyphen) and Position-Light Signals without a
change in meaning. UN 1954 lists Position Light under general heading of Light
Signals; Signal is thereby implicit in the title.
References: Blythe 1951, Signal Equipment 1984, FRA-3 1979, UN 1954
POSITION-LIGHT SYSTEM. "System" infrequently employed for Signals. It
may refer to the totality of a Position-Light Signals in a rail system rather than a
single Signal or even a group of interconnected Signals.
Reference: Solomon 2003
212
POSITION-LIGHT TYPE WAYSIDE SIGNALS. FRA-2 places Position Light
within category of Fixed Wayside Signal Systems which may explain adding
"Wayside Signals" to Position Light.
Reference: FRA-2 1979
BEAM-LIGHT SIGNAL/BEAM LIGHT SIGNAL. An alternate name for
Position Light Signal. A singular term appearing in a few historic sources.
Reference: King 1921, Nock 1962
SIGNAL, POSITION LIGHT. US sources (of an official nature) tend toward
placing the general term first then the particular. Meaning is probably that of the
core term of Position Light Signal. A variant form may be present if the term
Signal is the focus and Position Light acting as a permutation.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965, FRA-3 1979
DAYLIGHT POSITION LIGHT SIGNAL. UK historic term for Penn Railroad's
Position Light Signals. Employment of "Daylight" probably denotes an earlier era
that is on the boundary between separate indications for day and night, and single
indications with all-lighted aspects.
Reference: Nock 1962
POSITION LIGHT DWARF SIGNALIDWARF POSITION LIGHTIDWARF
POSITION SIGNAL/DWARF LIGHT. This Signal is a short range Signal with
four lamp units and usually mounted on the ground. The remaining terms are
variant forms.
Reference: ARSPAP-LSLSL 1949, Solomon 2003
POSITION LIGHT GROUND SIGNAL. RONT refers to term as "slang". Signal
is a Position Light Signal installed at a ground level location. UK meaning of
slang?
Reference: RONT 2001
GROUND POSITION LIGHT SIGNAL. Term for Position Light Signal installed
at ground level. See Also: previous term.
Reference: RONT 2001
213
POSITION LIGHT SIGNALS (LR). This term is the ARSPAP-H reference for
the earliest Position Light form which was long range in nature. Long range added
since long distance operation would not be implied for an early form.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
POSITION LIGHT SHUNT/POSITION-LIGHT SHUNT SIGNAL. These are
"Pseudo Position Light Signals." They have 3 lamps in two colors. The second
term is from K & W though identical to short form from Westinghouse-UK.
References: Westinghouse Brake & Signal-UK, K & W 1963
POSITION LIGHT HUMPING SIGNALS/POSITION LIGHT HUMPING
SPEED SIGNALS. Little explanation is given for the meaning of these terms.
They possibly resemble the Hump Shunting Signal of K & W 1963.
Reference: UN 1954
GROUND POSITION LIGHT SHUNT SIGNAL. The addition of "ground"
denotes the physical size, height of this signal and is included in the title.
Reference: A & W 1991
HUMP SHUNTING SIGNAL. This Sign is a "true" Position Light even though
there is no mention ofPosition Light in the title. It has multiple lamps in a circular
pattern that bears a strong resemblance to US forms though with a specialized
function.
Reference: K & W 1963
POSITION LIGHT JUNCTION INDICATOR. This form has arm(s) rather than
circular or triangular pattern. All lights are of one color which is lunar white.
Reference: K & W 1963
POSITION LIGHT AUTOMATIC TYPE. This refers to Swiss practice. The term
gives the appearance of a general term. However, it is in the context of Signals at
stations and is probably restricted in usage.
Reference: UN 1954
214
POSITION LIGHT SPEED SIGNALITOTON POSITION LIGHT SPEED
SIGNAL. Signals regulate merry-go-round freight loading/unloading operations.
Most signal lamps display white lights; two lamps in this Signal display red lamps
which is a variation of the original Position Light Signal. Westinghouse-UK
includes nine lights in a circle with the center light white and the remainder red or
white.
Reference: Leach 1991, Westinghouse Brake & Signal-UK
POSITION LIGHT SUBSIDIARY SIGNAL. For A & W this denotes a Signal on
a mainline that provides indicators for trains to move to one of several types of
subsidiary lines.
Reference: A & W 1991
PATTERN INDICATOR. Similar to Junction Indicator (Position Light in arm
form) but lights are mounted on a triangular-shaped backdrop. Similar in
appearance to those of Queensland Railways Junction Indicator (which is not
listed as Position Light).
Reference: K & W 1963
PEDESTAL SIGNAL. These refer to rectangular-shaped (long dimension
vertical) Signal intended for restricted locations. Two light units for indication
instead of three units as in circular form (though one source speaks of two or
more). It is referred to as high stand (mounted on a short mast or pedestal).
Reference: Conrail
POSITION COLOR-LIGHTS. Term refers to Pennsylvania Railroad Position-
Light Signals augmented with color-lights. The Signal is a development by
Amtrak on some former Pennsylvania tracks.
Reference: Solomon 2003
SUBSIDIARY SIGNAL. A term encompassing a variety of functions and Signal
forms. Westinghouse-UK presents a Position Light form with two lamp units in
one of several colors.
Reference: Westinghouse Brake & Signal-UK
215
WING LIGHTS. A form of Position Light Humping Signal. See Also: Position
Light Humping Signal.
Reference: UN 1954 (UK)
2C2 Color Position Light Signal Forms
COLOR POSITION LIGHT SIGNAL.
General Note. Color Position Light Signals are in two forms. One form, under the
Color Position title, is seemingly found only in the US. The second form, labeled
Position Light, frequently displays more than one color and is found outside the
US. Confusion is increased by adding red to the Position Light Signals maintained
by Conrail (purchased and split between two other railroads).
Color Position Light Signal is a fixed, all-lighted Signal whose indications are a
combination of position and color. At least two lamps are required per indication.
This is the most commonly employed term for this form of Signal. The Signal
usually consists of a main signal and marker light units.
Classification: #5114
Type of Device: Lighted Railway Signal
Operation: Signal presents messages according to an established pattern.
Comments: Messages are based on color and position of semaphore arms.
Classification employs a variant term, Color-Position Signal. A revision of the
Classification needs to include Light. Other' forms of these Signals including
Dwarf forms are encompassed under the designation number in this study.
References: ARSPAP-D 1965, ARSPAP-LSLSL 1949, ARSPAP-PES 1955,
B & 0 1953 (US)
COLOR-POSITION SIGNAL. A variant form that omits the word "Light" but
adds a hyphen. Fewer references to this term than to Color Position Light Signal.
Admittedly, only limited sources employ either term; nearly all, if not all, are of
US provenance.
References: B & M 1981, GRS 1925
216
COLOR-POSITION-LIGHT SIGNAL. B &M offers a double hyphen variant
form. Seemingly the meaning is unchanged from the primary term. GRS also
employs double hyphen though that version adds "High" and "Dwarf" to the basic
term.
References: B & M 1981, GRS 1925
COLOR-POSITION~LIGHT HIGH SIGNAL/COLOR-POSITION-LIGHT
DWARF SIGNAL. First term employs double hyphen and the basic term is
divided into High and Dwarf forms.
Reference: GRS 1925
COLOR & POSITION SIGNAL. This is a Semaphore Signal of an early form
that gave indications both by color and position of lights. The Signal is included
here as cross-reference because the title strongly suggests the all-lighted Color
Position Light Signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
COLOUR POSITION LIGHT SIGNAL. UN employs British English in referring
to US Color Position Light Signal.
Reference: UN 1954
COLOR POSITION LIGHT DWARF SIGNAL. This term refers to a small
Signal that is ground mounted. Light units and Marker light (s) can produce a full
range of aspects. This is in contrast to Position Light Dwarf Signal. See also:
Color-Position-Light Dwarf Signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-LSLSL 1949
POSITION-COLOR LIGHT SIGNAL. Seemingly this Signal is the regular Color
Position Light Signal though in a reverse version.
Reference: Henry 1942
SIGNAL, COLOR POSITION. This term follows a practice found in some US
publications of placing the general before the particular. Meaning unchanged
from more conventional word order.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
217
2C3 Symbolic Signal Forms
General Note. The Railway Signal monograph (Part F) included Graphic and
Alphanumeric forms. The General Classification substituted Symbol Signals
which is followed here. A altered term, Symbolic Forms, is employed in this
study. The symbolic encompasses the specific terms and perhaps is a more
adequate term for physical forms that include the physical aspects of messages.
The major components consist of theatre or multi-lamp Signals, stenciled Signals
and a miscellaneous category.
SYMBOL SIGNALS.
Classification: #5114
Type of Device: Lighted Railway Signals
Operation: Signals display lighted message arrnaged in alphanumeric and graphic
forms according to an agreed upon pattern.
Comments: The term comes from the Classification. Seemingly no actual Signal
appears in the literature.
Reference: Part H, General Classification
a) Multi-Lamp/Theatre Indicators
MULTI LAMP ROUTE INDICATORIMULTI-LAMP ROUTE INDICATOR!
MULTI-LAMP. These terms consist of numerous lamps arranged to spell out
letter(s) andlor number(s). They are seemingly interchangeable with terms that
include the word "Theatre" (British English employed because these devices are
in British English areas ).
Reference: Westinghouse Brake & Signal-UK
SEVEN-WAY ROUTE INDICATORITHREE-WAY THEATRE ROUTE
INDICATOR. The terms include the number of divisions in the Indicator as part
of the title.
Reference: A & W 1991
THEATRE INDICATOR. Specific term is of an alphanumeric type. It may be
218
physically part of main Signal since it is "used in conjunction" with that SignaL
Reference: RONT 2001
THEATRE MULTI LAMP ROUTE INDICATOR. A slightly different term that
refers to the core Signal form: a Signal displaying numerous small lamps arranged
to show letters or numbers. It is partly morphological in character though the
physical dimension remains prominent.
Reference: GEC 1972
THEATRE-TYPE ROUTE INDICATOR/THEATRE TYPE ROUTE
INDICATOR. These terms, partly physical, partly morphological, are of the
multi-lamp form. K & W includes both hyphenated and non-hyphenated forms.
References: K & W 1963, Allen 1952
THEATRE TYPE INDICATOR. A more succinct term that omits Route Indicator
from the title.
Reference: Vanns 1997
THEATRE-SIGN TYPE INDICATOR. A variant name from Allen 1952 that is
interchangeable with Theatre-type Route Indicator or Theatre Multi Lamp Route
Indicator.
Reference: Allen 1952
b) Stencil Indicators
STENCIL INDICATOR/STENCIL TYPE INDICATOR/STENCIL-TYPE
INDICATOR/STENCIL ROUTE INDICATOR/STENCIL TYPE ROUTE
INDICATOR/STENCIL, NUMBER OR LETTER TYPE/STENCIL [TYPE]. The
plethora of names refers to a single form. It displays one or more letter and/or
numbers. The characters are embossed on glass with illumination behind the
characters. Graphic representations, such as arrows can be present instead of
alphanumeric representations. Some of these terns include morphological
terminology but they also include the physical dimension which requires their
inclusion here. Many more more of the terms are UK, South African or Australian
in provenance. Some symbols may be graphic including arrows. Arrow Indicators
219
are included in the miscellaneous segment since they include both stencil and cut-
out forms.
References: WBS (Australia, UK), K & W 1963, NSW SI-SL, Leach 1991
ROUTE STENCIL. This form employs cut-out stencil for forming and displaying
messages.
Reference: RONT 2001
c) Other Forms
ARROW INDICATOR/SINGLE ARROW INDICATORIDOUBLE ARROW
INDICATOR. This may be more of a morphological term than physical. Yet it
maintains a physical aspect because of the visual appearance. Western Australia
includes such a form under the name Arrow Indicator. Other systems may include
such forms without the name. Stencil Indicators can include an arrow form. New
Zealand splits the term Arrow Indicator into single and double forms. Some
Arrow forms are not embossed on glass but are glass/metal graphic forms shaped
in the material itself. Various German SignalslIndicators are of this type.
References: Western Australia GA 1974, NZ SR 1989, GFR SB 1981
ALPHANUMERIC ROUTE INDICATOR. An Indicator employing
alphanumeric characters.
Reference: RONT 2001
FIBRE-OPTIC ROUTE INDICATOR. RONT includes type of cable in name of
device. No other details for the the Indicator.
Reference: RONT 2001
INDICATOR/INDICATOR (STENCIL). An alternate name from A & W.
Indicator can have a more general usage but here it refers to Stencil Indicator.
Reference: A & W 1991
MOVING SLIDE TYPE ROUTE INDICATOR. This Indicator may not be fully
lighted. The symbols are large and may be visible in the daylight without
.illumination. A moving slide activates symbols in and out ofposition.
220
Reference: NSW Signalling
PRELIMINARY ROUTING n~DICATOR. This Indicator gives advice about
route that is open at jUnction.
Reference: RONT 2001
PROJECTOR TYPE ROUTE INDICATORJPROJECT TYPE. Term appearing in
two sources. Few details are available. It is a long range rather than a short range
aid. Multi-lamp forms can be viewed as long range while Stencilled forms are
short range. The Projector form is comparable in function to Multi-lamp.
Reference: Nock 1962, Starkey 1944
2D Cab Signaling
2D1 Major Cab Signal Forms
CAB SIGNALS.
General Note 1. The terms of Cab Signals and Cab Signaling can present a
confusing and even contradictory picture. Cab Signal and Cab Signaling (British
English: Signalling) can have all but identical meanings and they can also have
distinctly variant meanings. Cab Signals constitutes a noun while Cab Signaling is
seemingly a verb (Signaling is a verb though adding Cab may muddy the matter).
Cab Signals is often an individual unit while Cab Signaling can often mean
conveying messages. But at times Cab Signal suggests an int~grated system of
signals and messages. And Cab Signaling can also be a system and therefore also
a noun. Whatever distinction exists between Cab Signals and Cab Signaling is a
less than clear and distinct one.
General Note II. For the Database the term Cab Signal will focus on them as
individual units though this does not deny a possibly broader meaning. Cab
Signaling will have the primary meaning of a system of integrated signals.
Several sources speak of Cab Signal System which may support the contention
that Cab Signal can have a broader meaning. However, at least one of those
sources indicates that Cab Signal System refers to the components making up a
Cab Signal apparatus for a locomotive. The other meaning remains a possibility.
221
System applied to Cab Signaling is less common. Perhaps because there is less
need to make explicit the meaning of Cab Signaling.
Reference: UN 1954
General Note III. Signals under the heading of Cab Signal are of several forms.
These are traditional color light forms in miniature. There are position light and
numerical forms as well. Digital forms with numbers and sometimes letter and
graphic forms are increasingly commonplace. Such focus on speed limit
messages. All of these forms are located on-board the train and receive impulses
from track circuits and other means including transponders. Frequently various
aspects of train control are added to cab signals (or cab signals become part of
train control). A sound dimension is also a common feature of Cab Signals. North
American forms are often of continuous operation though intermittent forms are
commonplace in Europe.
Classification: #512
Type of Device: Lighted Railway Signal
Operation: Messages of diverse forms are transmitted to locomotive cabs
according to an agreement upon pattern.
Comments: The Classification divides Cab Signals into several forms. Cab Signal
is a three-digit level with the specific forms under four-digits.
References include: GRS 1954, Savarzeix 1981, ARSPAP-D 1965
CAB-SIGNALS. A single surveyed source includes this hyphenated variant form.
The meaning is unchanged from the basic term.
Reference: Armstrong 1988
AUTOMATIC CAB SIGNAL/AUTOMATIC CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM!
AUTOMATIC CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM (ACS)/SYSTEM, AUTOMATIC CAB
SIGNAL. These terms are infrequently employed terms found in a few US
sources. It seemingly refers to Cab Signals designated as Automatic Cab Signals
that are within Automatic Cab Signaling segments. Details on operation and
relationship to Cab Signals not so designated are limited.
References: AAR SC 1965, ARSPAP-D 1965, FRA-RAR 1984
222
AUTOMATIC CAB-SIGNAL SYSTEMS CONTINUOUSLY CONTROLLED.
This term is similar to other such systems though REMC has added Automatic
indicating Cab Signal System is within Automatic Signalling operations.
Reference: REMC 1948
SIGNAL, CAB. A recurring US practice in a variety of official documents is to
place the general before the particular. Meaning is unchanged from core term of
Cab Signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965, FRA-RAR 1984, AAR SC 1965
CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM. Cab Signal may suggest an individual unit but it can
have a broader meaning made explicit in this term. All surveyed sources with this
term are US though one refers to USSR (but from the perspective of US ideas),
and two contain some international materials.
References: FRA-l 1978, FRA-3 1978, FRA-RAR 1984, AAR-USSR 1960,
Armstrong 1988, US&S RA 10-1986
CAB SIGNALING/CAB-SIGNALING/CAB SIGNALLING/CAB-
SIGNALLING/CAB SIGNALLING SYSTEM.
General Note I. These entities can be a conventional signal system though located
in the engine cab. They also can be found in tandem with wayside signals. In
addition, they can be integrated with some form of train control. However, with
newer and more encompassing train control systems they seem to be more often a
subsection of train control or a function of train control. The line between Cab
Signaling and train control (and the relationship of the same) is not always clear
and may be more than a little blurred. Train Control (as a message) is considered
in Ch. 1 while the physical aspect is included here.
General Note II. It may be farfetched to suggest that signaling may no longer
constitute signaling when a train control function "kicks in." However, when a
human operator fails to respond to a signal indication and automatic processes
take over then the signal indication and operator and their reaction is eliminated
and the signaling processing as such is abrogated. This suggests a semiotic
process at work since a message has to be received and then acted upon. When
that process is not occuring the physical operation of signaling falls short of what
223
signaling needs to be.
In contrast to most main signal terms, Cab Signal is seemingly mentioned less
often than terms describing a system of such Signals. Cab Signaling (along with
Cab Signalling, Cab-Signalling) have more references in the literature than Cab
Signals. The British form with double "L" is more common than the relatively
infrequent US form. The few references to the hyphenated form are largely from
British English.
Cab Signalling strongly suggests a system though rarely is the word system added
to the basic term. Three surveyed sources add system and all are European.
Meaning is presumably unchanged from basic form.
References: FRA-l 1978, -2 1979, ERS-P 1995, UN 1954
2D2 Forms (Operational) of Cab Signals
CABMATIC. GRS brand name for its continuous cab signaling as reported in
FRA-l.
Reference: FRA-l 1978, GRS 1954
A-C.ID-C. CAB SIGNALS/A-C.ID-C. CODED CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM. A
system developed by GRS that employs ACIDC operating on 60-cycle A.C. This
proves to be more workable and effective than A.C. or D.C. systems alone.
Reference: GRS 1954
CATC CAB SIGNALS. This refers to Cab Signals that are part of Continuous
Automatic Train Control (CATC). The signal panel is in a digital format with
speed indicators and alphabetical symbols rather than wayside format indicators.
References: FRA-3 1979
CODED CONTINUOUS CAB SIGNALING/CODED CONTINUOUS CAB
SIGNAL SYSTEM. These terms add operational characteristics to basic term.
Coded indicates interruptions in current that convey messages and continuously
denotes on-going flow of current allowing for on-going message indications.
REMC offers a variant term that lacks the term System.
224
References: Middleton 1941, REMC 1948
CONTINUOUS CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM. REMC adds System to the basic form
of the term.
Reference: REMC 1948
CONTINUOUS CAB SIGNALING/CONTINUOUS CAB SIGNALLING. Refers
to Cab Signaling in which energy is supplied by track circuits whose energy is
continuous as contrasted to the intermittent form wherein energy is supplied by
transponders at key points only. This is largely a US term.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953, B & M 1981, Armstrong 1957
CONTINUOUS INDUCTIVE CAB SIGNAL. This is a nearly historic term
(1913) of the basic Cab Signal term that incorporates means of energy/message
transmission in the title.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
CONTINUOUS SYSTEM OF CAB SIGNALLING/CONTINUOUS
CONTROLLED CAB SIGNAL/CONTINUOUS CONTROLLED CAB SIGNAL
SYSTEM. These are variant terms for Continuous Cab Signaling. System adds
specificity to the basic term though all forms would be a system.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953, FRA-2, and -3, 1979, Middleton 1941, REMC
1948
FOUR-ASPECT CODED 100 HZ CAB SIGNAL SYSTEMIFOUR-
INDICATION CODED CONTINUOUS INDUCTIVE CAB SIGNALING/
FOUR-INDICTION CODE CONTINUOUS CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM. Variant
terms adding message and operational informational to basic terms of Cab Signal
System, and Cab Signaling.
References: FRA-2 1979, ARSPAP-H 1953
INTERMITTENT CAB SIGNALING/INTERMITTENT CAB SIGNAL
SYSTEM. Cab Signals operating periodically on transponder at key points can be
referred to as intermittent in contrast to continuous forms that receive constant
energy from track circuits.
225
References: FRA-1 1978, -2 1979
MULTIPLE-INDICATION CODED CAB SIGNALS. A complex term that adds
message dimension and operating information to the basic Cab Signal terms.
Reference: GRS 1954
THREE-SPEED TRAIN CONTROL CAB SIGNALS. The meaning of this term
is not altogether clear. It appears to refer to standard Cab Signals operating in
train control territory in which Cab Signal messages required acknowledgement
of signals received.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
TWO-INDICATION NON-CODE SYSTEM [CAB SIGNAL]/THREE-
INDICATION NON-CODE TRACK & LOOP SYSTEM [CAB SIGNAL].
Coded systems for signal messages are much more common than non-code .
systems. These terms, however, refer to two Cab Signal systems lacking codes.
The first term refers to an arrangement wherein A.C. is added to the track circuit
for train-based equipment. The second form, for three indications, is more
complex. It consists of two circuits with separate train-based receivers for each
circuit.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
TVM 430 CAB SIGNALLING SYSTEM. A term for Cab Signals employed for
very high speed service on the Eurotunne1line. Digital display with numbers are
employed; numbers have a colored background. This term has a morphological
dimension.
Reference: Sophisticated Cab. Sig. 1994
2D3 Partly Morphological Terms
General Note. The following terms are both Cab Signal terms and message
(morphology) terms. This segment is primarily a word list since both dimensions
are considered in the appropriate segments of the study. Additional terms are
found in Operational and Other Forms sections.
FOUR-ASPECT CAB SIGNALING, Solomon 2003
226
FOUR-ASPECT CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM, FRA-2
FOUR-INDICATION CAB SIGNAL, Henry 1942
FOUR-INDICATION CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM, GRS 1954
FIVE-ASPECT CAB SIGNAL, FRA-2
FIVE-ASPECT CAB SIGNALING, FRA-2
MULTIPLE ASPECT CAB SIGNALS, FRA-3
THREE-INDICTION CAB SIGNALS, GRS 1954
TWO-ASPECT CAB SIGNALING, Solomon 2003
TWO-ASPECT CONTINUOUS INDUCTIVE CAB SIGNAL, Solomon 2003
TWO-ASPECT, THREE-ASPECT CAB SIGNAL SYSTEM, Solomon 2003
TWO-INDICATION CAB SIGNALS, GRS 1954
2D4 Other Cab Signals
ACSES CAB SIGNAL. Term refers to Cab Signal System employing ACSES
employed for high speed trains. ACSES is discussed in IE.
Reference: Solomon 2003
CAB LIGHTS. Allen employs a singular term for Cab Signals which is not found
in other surveyed sources. The meaning seems to be that of the primary term.
Reference: Allen 1952
CAB SIGNAL INDICATOR. Term refers to the unit of cab signal indications in
the locomotive cab. Some forms duplicate wayside Signal aspects.
Reference: Solomon 2003, FRA-3 1979
CAB SIGNAL SUBSYSTEM. The Cab Signal can become one component
within an all-encompassing train control systems. That trend can be seen in this
term.
Reference: Xishi & Bin 1994
DOMESTIC CAB SIGNAL INDICATORS. This may not be an actual Signal
term. Instead it distinguishes US from European Cab Signals displays iin
locomotives. US form replicates Wayside Signals.
Reference: FRA-3
227
ENFORCED CAB SIGNALING. This term denotes Cab Signal with automatic
brake control.
Reference: FRA-1 1978
ON-BOARD CAB SIGNAL EQUIPMENT. This term is seemingly only
employed by FRA-2. It provides greater specificity than other similar terms.
Reference: FRA-2 1979
SYSTEM OF CAB INDICATORS. This term is seemingly an informal synonym
for Cab Signals. It refers to an early 20th c. practice on one UK railway. It is not
clear ifit was visual and also audible or perhaps audible only.
Reference: Henry 1942
VISUAL CAB SIGNALS. An infrequently employed term. It distinguishes the
visual component from the "audible alarm" component.
Reference: FRA-1 1978
VISUALIZER. Source employs this term in lieu of Cab Signal or Cab Signal
Indicator. It has a digital appearance that focusses on speed as indicator of safe
operation of train. The units displays numbers rather than multi-colored lights. It
was employed for very high speed trains.
Reference: Weber 1980
WAYSIDE CAB SIGNAL EQUIPMENT. A perhaps puzzling term that
seemingly merges wayside and cab signal equipment. It may refer to electrical
power system that supplies power to rails that feed both wayside and cab signal
equipment.
Reference: FRA-2 1979
2D5 Cab Signals with Sound Dimension
INDICATOR, CAB, AUDIBLE. Audible Cab Indicator would be a more straight
forward arrangement of words. This audible indicator accompanies visual cab
signals and denotes changes in indication (and continues to do so until crew
228
acknowledges changes in indication). This ARSPAP-D term continues a practice
of placing a general term before the particular.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
CAB INDICATORS [AUDIBLE, VISUAL]. This term covers both light and
sound forms. The visual part is described as a signal while the audible part is
described as a "device."
Reference: AAR SM 1983
CAB SIGNAL WITH WHISTLE & ACKNOWLEDGERICODED
CONTINUOUS CAB SIGNALS WITH WHISTLE & ACKNOWLEDGER.
Sound signals can be an integral part of Cab Signals and hence their inclusion.
Cross-referenced with Railroad Sound Signals.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953 (lst term), FRA-3 1979 (2nd term)
229
CHAPTER THREE
PARTIALLY LIGHTED SIGNALS
3A Indexes: Categories & Alphabetical
3Al Categories Index
Semaphore Signal Forms (3B)
Overarching Terms (3Bl)
Semaphore Signals/Semaphore
General Notes I, II, III
Ancient Lights
Railway Semaphore Signals/Semaphore Railway Signals
Dwarf Semaphores/Dwarf Signals/Dwarf Type Signal
Fixed Semaphores/Fixed Semaphore Signal
Mechanical Signalling/Semaphore Mechanical Signalling
Mechanical Lower Quadrant
Semaphore Light
Semaphore Type
Signal, Semaphore
Specific Forms (3B2)
Lower Quadrant & Upper Quadrant Signal Forms (3B2 a))
General Note
Lower Quadrant/Upper QuadrantILower Quadrant Semaphore/Upper
Quadrant SemaphorelLower Quadrant Signal/Upper Quadrant Signal/
Upper-Quadrant Signal/Lower Quadrant Semaphore Signal/Upper
Quadrant Semaphore Signal
Lower-Quadrant SignallL-Q Semaphore
UQ Type Semaphore/U-Q Semaphore Type Signal
Left-Hand, L-Q Semaphore Signal/Left-Handed Upper-Quadrant Semaphore/
Left-Handed Semaphore
Modified LQ Signalling
Somersault Signals (3B2 b) )
Balance Arm Signal/Self-Balancing Somesault Signal/Somersault!
Somersault Pattern, Semaphore/Somersault LQ Semaphore/Somersault
230
Type Signal/Tumbler/Tumble Ann Signal/Semaphore Somersault
Signal/Somersault LQ/Somersault Semaphore/Somersault SignallU-Q
Somersault/Somesault Semaphore
Somersault Home Signal
Centrally Balanced Semaphore/Centre-Balance Signal
Methods of Operation (3B3)
General Note
All-Electric Semaphore Signal/All-Electric Semaphores
Electric Motor Semaphore Signal/Electric Motor SignallElectric-Motor
Driven Semaphore SignallElectrically-Operated Semaphore
Motor-Driven Semaphore Signal
Motor-Operated Semaphore
Motor Semaphore Signal
LQ Signal Electric OperatedILower-Quadrant All-Electric Semaphore
Electro-Gas Semaphore/Electrogas SignallElectro-Gas Signal
Electro-Pneumatic SemaphorelLQ E-P SemaphorelElectropneumatic
SemaphorelElectro-Pneumatic Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
Oil-Lit Semaphore Signal/Oil-Lit LQ Stop & Distant Signal
Power-Operated Signal
Mechanical Dwarf Signal
Mechanical Ground Signal
Mechanical Operated Semaphore Signal
Mechanical Semaphore
Mechanical Signal
Mechanical UQ Signals
Manually-Operated L-Q Semaphore Stop Signal
Manually-Operated Semaphore
Base-of-Mast MechanismlBase-of-Mast SemaphorelBase-of-Mechanism
Semaphore/Top-of-Mast Semaphore/Top-of-Mast MechanismiTop-of-
Mechanism Semaphore
Pneumatic Semaphore
Semaphore Left of Mast/Semaphore Right ofMast
Morphological-Related Terms (3B4)
General Note
Automatic Block Semaphore Signal/Automatic Block Semaphore
231
Two-Arm, Two Position Mechanism
One-Arm Three Position Mechanism
Three-Position Electro-Pneumatic Semaphore
Home Electro-Pneumatic Semaphore Signal
Distant Electro-Pneumatic Semaphore Signal
Distant Semaphore
Five-Arm Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
Home Semaphore
Limited Clear U-Q Signal
Lower-Quadrant Block Semaphore
L-Q Distant Signal
L-Q Stop Signal
One-Arm Two-Position Signal
One-Arm, Two-Position-LQ -- Signal
One-Arm, Two-Position UQ Dwarf Signal
One-Arm Signal
One-Arm Mechanical Ground Signal
One-Blade Lower Quadrant Signal
Pneumatic Block Signal
Semaphore Distant Signal
Semaphore Manual Block
Semaphore Stop Signal
Semaphore-Type Automatic Block Signal
Single-Arm Upper-Quadrant Semaphore
Stop Semaphore
Two-Arm Mechanical Ground Signal
Three-Position Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
Three-Position Slotted-Mast Semaphore
Three-Position Upper-Quadrant Semaphore/Three-Position Upper Quadrant!
Three-Position Upper Quadrant Type
Three-Position U-Q Semaphore Signal
Three-Position Upper Quadrant Signal
Three-Position Semaphore Signal
Two-Position Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
Two-Position Semaphore
232
UQ Splitting Signal
Upper Quadrant Two-Position
US&S Style-B Lower-Quadrant Block Signal
Three-Arm Signal
Three-Blade Semaphore/Three-Blade Upper-Quadrant Semaphore
Three-Aspect Semaphore
Two-Position Semaphore Upper Quadrant
Three-Position Semaphore Upper Quadrant
Twin-Arm Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
Two-Arm E-P Dwarf Signal
Two-Arm Signal
Two-Arm Two-Position Signal
Two-Arm Two Position LQ Signal
Two-Aspect Upper Quadrant
Multi-Aspect Upper Quadrant/Multiple-Aspect Upper Quadrant
Semaphore Distant
Semaphore Running Signal
Semaphore Shunt Signal
Three-Position Semaphore Block Signals
Systems-Related Terms (3B5)
General Note
Automatic Block Semaphore Signal
Automatic Motor-Operated Semaphore
Automatic Semaphore
Automatic Semaphore Signal
Automatic Three-Position Upper Left Hand Semaphore Signalling
Semaphore Automatic Block
Semi-Automatic Electro-Pneumatic Distant Semaphore
Upper Quadrant Automatic Signal
Other Forms (3B6)
BackLight
Backing Signal
Banner Repeater
Day Signal
Display Board
233
Double Arm Semaphore/Double Arm Station Semaphore
Electric Semaphore
Equal Balanced Bracket Signal/Balanced Bracket Signal/Three Doll
Balanced Bracket Signal/Two-Doll Balanced Bracket Signal
Co-Actors
GRS Model 2A Semaphore/GRS Model 2A Upper-QuadrantlGRS Model
2A Lower-QuadrantlGRS Model 2A Dwarf Semaphore/Model 2A Upper
Quadrant Semaphore
Hall Style-K Upper Quadrant Semaphore/Hall Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
Hudson Type of Semaphore
Illuminated Semaphore
Lartigue Signal
Miniature Semaphore Signal
Miniature Repeater Semaphore (Co-Acting)
Miniature Arm Signal/Miniature Semaphore Signal
Parabolic Semaphore Signal
Upper Left-Hand Quadrant Semaphore Signal
Repeater
Single Arm Semaphore
Slotted-Post Semaphore
Slotted Post
Smash Board
Station Semaphore/Station Semaphore Signal
UQ Pipe-Operated Dwarf Signal
US&S Style-S Semaphore/US&S Style-B Semaphore/US&S Style-B
Lower Quadant Semaphore/US&S Style-T Semaphore/US&S Style-S
Upper-Quadrant Semaphore/US&S Lower-Quadrant Signal/US&S Style-B
Lower Quadrant Semaphore/US&S Lower-Quadrant Semaphore/US&S
Style T-2/US&S Style-TUpper Quadrant/US&S Style-TUpper Quadrant
Signal/Style-B Signal
Wired-Operated Semaphores
Signal Boards, Disc Signals & Other Forms (3C)
Signal Boards (3Cl)
Overarching Terms & Terms in Other Languages (3Cl a))
General Note
234
Signal Board
Board
Board Signal
Formsignal
Klapbord
Pantella
Rotating Vane
Target Signal
Vane Signal
Specific Board Terms (3Cl b) )
Perforated Board SignalJPerforated Board
Pivoted BoardlPivoting Board Signal
Quarter-Rotating Chequer-Board/Chessboard
Revolving Board
Revolving Board & Lamps
Disc Signals (3C2)
General Note
Disc Signals Containing the Word Disc (3C2 a))
Automatic Enclosed Disc SignallEnclosed Disc Signal
Banjo
Bracketed Disc
C.l. Pillar Disc
Compound Ground Disc
DisclDisc Signal
Disc & CrossbarlDisc & Crossbar SignaIIDisc-&-Crossbar Signal
Disk Signal
Double DisclDouble Disc Signal/Double-Disc Signal
Double Disc & Crossbar Signal
Dwarf Signal/Three-Position Dwarf Signal/Two-Position Dwarf Signal
Enclosed DisclEnclosed Disc Signal
Exposed Disc Clockwork Type Signal
Floodlit DisclFloodlit Disc Signal/Floodlit Ground DisclFlood Lit Disc/
Flood-Lit Disc
Gallows Type of Signal (Disc)
Ground Disc/Ground Disc Signal
235
Ground-Level Dwarf Signal
Half-Open Disc Signal
Hall Disc SignallHall Disc/Hall's Enclosed DisclHall Signal
Independent Disc
Martin Disc Signal
Mechanical Disc
Mechanical Revolving Disc Signal
Pattern Ground Disc
Power-Operated Disc
Revolving Disc Signal/Revolving Disc
Tommy/Tommy Dodd
U.Q. Power Worked Dwarf Signal
Banner Signals [Exposed Disc Forms Under the Banner Name] (3C2 b))
Banner
Banner Signal
Banner Box Signal
Banner Box Type (Ireland Signal)
Banner Box Type Signal
Banner Clockwork Signal
Banner Clockwork Type
Banner Repeater Signal
Banner Type SignallBanner-Type Signal
Banner Type Train Order Signal
Box Type Train Order Signal
Clockwork Exposed Disc Signal
Clockwork Signal
Exposed Banner Clockwork Type Signal
Ireland Banner Box Type Signal
Revolving Banner Signal/Rotating Banner Signal
Top-of-Mast Exposed Banner Signal
Morphological-Related Terms (3C3)
General Note
Switch Terms (3C3 a))
Dodson Switch & Switch
Electric Switch Lamp/Electric-Light Switch Light
236
Electric Switch
Kerosene Switch Lamp
Lamp, Switch; Electric
Oil-Burning Switch Lamp
Oil-Lamp
Oil-Lighted Switch Lamp
Oil Switch Lamp
Reflecting Switch Lamp/Reflex Switch Lamp/Reflex Switch Lamp
Switch Dwarf Signal
Switch Indicator
Switch Lamp
Switch Light
Switch Signal
Switch Stands
Points Indicator (3C3 b))
Catch Point DisclPoints Disc
Catch Point Indicator
Ground Indicator
Mechanical Points Indicator: Arrow Type; Disc Type
Arrow Type
Disc Type
Points Indicator
Points Indicator - Arrow Type
Route Indicators (3C3 c))
Mechanical Route Indicator
Morse & Berry Type Route Indicator
Moving Slide Type -- Route Indicator
Miscellaneous Forms (3C3 d) )
Clockwork Automatic Block Signal
Clockwork Enclosed Disc Type Electric Automatic Signal
Clockwork Signal Exposed Disc Form & Automatic Block Signal
Gasset & Fisher Clockwork Exposed Banner Type of Automatic Block Signal
Disc Shunt
Disc Shunting Signal
Floodlit Disc Shunting Signal
237
Horne & Distant Banjo Type of Disc Signal
Other Forms (3C4)
Crossbar Signals (3C4 a))
Cross Bar & Lamp Signal
Crossbar Signal
Double Disc & Cross Bar
Flap Signal
Tilting Crossbar SignaVTilting (Crossbar) Signal
Wooden Crossbar
Flag Signals (3C4 b))
Automatic Flagman
Fantail Signal
Kite Signal
Flag Signal
General Note
Pivoted Flag
Lighted Signs & Boards (3C4 c))
General Note
Caution Board
End of Shunt Sign
Indication Board
Lineside Board
Marks & Markers for Japan [Selected Entries]
Shunting Limits Board
Temporary Speed-Reduction
Train-Order Board
Track Indicators (3C4 d) )
General Note
Block Indicators
Motor Car Indicators
Switch Indicators
Track Car Indicators
Track Occupancy Indicators
Track Indicators
Track Side Warning Indicators
238
Train Approach Indicators
Miscellaneous Forms (3C4 e) )
Ball Signal
Ball Signal: Station Signal, Junction Signal, Crossing Signal, Drawbridge
Signal
Basket Signal
Bezer Rotating Signal
Gate Signal
Ground Signal
Highball SignallHigh-Ball Signal
Indicator Lantern
Lamp
Pot Signal
Railroad Grade Crossing Targets
Smash/Smashboard Signal
Trip's Improved Railway Signal
Two-Colour Oil Lamp
239
3A2 Indexes: Alphabetical
All-Electric Semaphore Signal/All-Electric Semaphores
Ancient Lights
Automatic Block Semaphore Signal
Automatic Block Semaphore Signal/Automatic Block
Semaphore Signal
Automatic Enclosed Disc SignallEnclosed Disc Signal
Automatic Flagman
Automatic Motor-Operated Semaphore
Automatic Semaphore
Automatic Semaphore Signal
Automatic Three-Position Upper Left Hand Semaphore
Signalling
BackLight
Backing Light
Balance Arm Signal/Self-Balancing Somersault Signal/
Somersault/Somersault Pattern, Semaphore/Somersault
LQ Semaphore/Somersault Type Signal/Tumbler/Tumble
Arm Signal/Semaphore Somersault Signal/U-Q Somersault
Ball Signal: Station Signal, Junction Signal, Crossing Signal,
Drawbridge Signal
Banjo
Banner
Banner Box Signal
Banner Box Type Signal
Banner Box Type Signal (Ireland)
Banner Clockwork Signal
Banner Clockwork Type
Banner Repeater
Banner Repeater Signal
Banner Signal
240
255
251
260
258
269
282
260
260
261
261
261
261
254-55
284-85
269
273
274
274
274
274
274
261
274
273
Banner Type Signal/Banner-Type Signal
Banner Type Train Order Signal
Base-of-Mast MechanismlBase-of-Mast Semaphore/
Base-of-MechanismlTop-of-Mast Semaphore/Top-of-Mast
MechanismlTop-of-Mast Mechanism
Basket Signal
Bezer Rotating Signal
Block Indicators
Board
Board Signal
Box Type Train Order Signal
Bracketed Disc
Catch Point DisclPoints Disc
Catch Point Indicator
Caution Board
Centre Balance Stop Signal
Centrally Balanced Semaphore/Centre-Balance Signal
C.I. Pillar Disc
Clockwork Automatic Block Signal
Clockwork Enclosed Disc Type Electric Automatic Signal
Clockwork Exposed Disc Signal
Clockwork Signal Exposed Disc Form & Automatic Block
Signal
Clockwork Signal
Co-Actors
Compound Ground Disc
Cross Bar & Lamp Signal
Crossbar Signal
Day Signal
Disc Signal
Disc/Disc Signal
Disc & Crossbar/Disc & Crossbar Signal/Disc-&-Crossbar
241
274
2754
258
285
285
284
266,267
266
275
269
278
278
283
255
255
269
280
280
275
280
275
262
269-70
281
281
261
268-69
270
Signal
Disc Shunt
Disc Shunting Signal
Disk Signal
Display Board
Distant Semaphore
Distant Electro-Pneumatic Semaphore Signal
Dodson Switch & Switch Lamp
Double Arm SemaphorelDouble Arm Station Semaphore
Double DisclDouble Disc SignaVDouble-Disc Signal
Double Disc & Crossbar Signal .
Dwarf SemaphorelDwarf SignallDwarf Type Signal
Dwarf Signal/Three-Position Dwarf/Two-Position Dwarf
Signal
Electric Motor Semaphore SignallElectric Motor Signal!
Electric-Motor Driven Semaphore SignallElectrically-
Operated Semaphore
Electric Semaphore
Electric Switch LamplElectric-Light Switch Light
Electric Switch Light
Electro-Gas SemaphorelElectrogas Signal/Electro-Gas Signal
Electro-Pneumatic SemaphorelLQ Electro-Pneumatic
SemaphorelElectro-Pneumatic SemaphorelElectro-
Pneumatic Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
Enclosed DisclEnclosed Disc Signal
End of Shunt Sign
Equal Balanced Bracket SignallBalanced Bracket Signal/Three
Doll Balanced Bracket SignaVTwo-Doll Balanced Bracket
Signal
Exposed Banner Clockwork Type Signal
Exposed Disc Clockwork Type Signal
Fantail Signal
Five-Arm Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
242
270
280
280
270
261
259
259
276
261
270
270,281
251-52
271
255
262
276
276
256
256
269
283
262
275
271
282
259
Fixed Semaphore Signal/Fixed Semaphore
Flag Signal
Flap Signal
Floodlit Disc Shunting Signal
Floodlit Ground Disc/Flood Lit Disc/Flood-Lit Disc
Formsignal
Gallows Type of Signal (Disc)
Gasset & Fisher Clockwork Exposed Banner Type of
Automatic Block Signal
Gate Signal
Ground Disc/Ground Disc Signal
Ground Indicator
Ground-Level Dwarf Signal
Ground Signal
GRS Model 2A Semaphore/GRS Model 2A Upper-Quadrant/
GRS Model 2A Lower-Quadrant/GRS Model 2A Dwarf
SemaphorelModel 2A Upper Quadrant Semaphore
Hall Disc Signal/Hall Disc/Hall's Enclosed Disc/Hall Signal
Hall Style-K Upper Quadrant Semaphore/Hall Lower-Quadrant
Semaphore
Half-Open Disc Signal
Highball Signal/High-Ball Signal
Home Semaphore
Home & Distant Banjo Type of Disc Signal
Home Electro-Pneumatic Semaphore Signal
Hudson Type of Semaphore
Illuminated Semaphore
Independent Disc
Indication Board
Indicator Lantern
Ireland Banner Box Type Signal
243
252
282
281-82
280
271
266
271
280
285
271
279
271
285
262
272
262
272
285
259
280
259
262
262
272
283
285
275
Kerosene Switch Lamp
Kite Signal
Klapbord
Lamp
Lamp, Switch; Electric
Lartigue Signal
Left-Hand, L-Q Semaphore SignallLeft-Handed Upper-
Quadrant\Semaphore/Left-Handed Semaphore
Lighted Signs & Boards
Limited Clear U-Q Signal
Lineside Board
Lower QuadrantlUpper QuadrantILower Quadrant Semaphore
Upper Quadrant Semaphore/Lower Quadrant Signal/Upper
Quadrant SignallLower Quadrant Semaphore/Lower Quadrant
Semaphore Signal/Upper Quadrant Semaphore Signal
Lower-Quadrant & Upper Quadrant Signal Forms
Lower-Quadrant Block Semaphore
Lower-Quadrant Semaphore Signal/Lower-Quadrant Semaphoree
L-Q Distant Signal
L-Q Stop Signal
LQ Signal Electric Operated/Lower-Quadrant All-Electric
Semaphore/Electro-Pneumatic Semaphore
Manually-Operated L-Q Semaphore Stop Signal
Manually-Operated Semaphore
Marks & Markers for Japan
Martin Disc Signal
Mechanical Disc
Mechanical Lower Quadrant
Mechanical Revolving Disc Signal
Mechanical Dwarf Signal
Mechanical Ground Signal
Mechanical Operated Semaphore Signal
Mechanical Points Indicator: Arrow Type, Disc Type
244
276-77
282
266
285-86
277
263
254
283
259
283
253
252-53
259
253
259
259
256
258
258
283
272
272
252
272
257
257
257
279
Mechanical Route Indicator
Mechanical Semaphore
Mechanical Signal
Mechanical Signalling/Semaphore Mechanical Signalling
Mechanical UQ Signal
Methods of Operation
Miniature Arm SignallMiniature Semaphore Signal
Miniature Repeater Semaphore (Co-Acting)
Miniature Semaphore Signal
Miscellaneous Forms
Modified LQ Signalling
Morphological-Related Terms
Morphology-Related Terms
Morse & Berry Type Route Indicator
Motor Car Indicators
Motor-Driven Semaphore Signal
Motor-Operated Semaphore
Motor Semaphore Signal
Moving Slide Type - Route Indicator
Multiple-Aspect Upper Quadrant
Other Forms
Oil-Burning Switch Lamp
Oil-Lamp
Oil-Lighted Switch Lamp
Oil-Lit Semaphore Signal/Oil-Lit LQ Stop & Distant Signal
Oil Switch Lamp
One-Arm Mechanical Ground Signal
One-Arm Signal
One-Arm Three Position Mechanism
One-Arm, Two Position - LQ Signal
One-Arm Two-Position Signal
One Arm, Two Position UQ Dwarf Signal
One-Blade Lower Quadrant Signal
245
279
257
257
252
257-58
255
263
263
263
284
254
276
258
279
284
256
256
256
279
260
261,280,281
277
277
277
256-57
277
259
259
259
259
259
259
259
Pantella
Parabolic Semaphore Signal
Pattern Ground Disc
Perforated Board Signal/Perforated Board
Pivoted BoardlPivoting Board Signal
Pivoted Flag
Pneumatic Block Signal
Pneumatic Semaphore
Points Indicator
Points Indicator - Arrow Type
Pot Signal
Power-Operated Disc
Power-Operated Signal
Quarter-Rotating Chequer Board!
Railroad Crossing Targets
Railway Semaphore Signal/Semaphore Railway Signals
Reflecting Switch Lamp/Reflex Switch Lamp/Reflex
Switch Lamp
Repeater
Revolving Banner Signal/Rotating Banner Signal
Revolving Board
Revolving Boards & Lamps
Revolving Disc Signal/Revolving Disc
Rotating Vane
Route Indicator
Semaphore
Semaphore Automatic Block
Semaphore Distant
Semaphore Distant Signal
Semaphore-Left of Mast/Semaphore-Right of Mast
Semaphore Light
Semaphore Manual Block
246
266
263
272-73
267
267
267,282,283
259
258
278,279
279
285
272-73
257
267
286
251
277
263
275
267
268
273
266
279
250
260
260
259
258
252
259
Semaphore Mechanical Signalling: Mechanical Semaphore
Signalling
Semaphore Railway Signal: Railway Semaphore
Semaphore Running Signal
Semaphore Shunt
Semaphore Shunt Signal
Semaphore Signal/Semaphore
Semaphore Stop Signal
Semaphore Type
Semaphore-Type Automatic Block Signal
Semi-Automatic Electro-Pneumatic Distant Semaphore
Shunting Limits Board
Signal Board
Signal Boards, Disc Signals & Other Forms
Signal, Semaphore
Single Arm Semaphore
Single-Arm Upper Quadrant Semaphore
Slotted-Post Semaphore
Slotted Post
Smash Board
Smash/Smash Board Signal
Somersault: Balance Arm
Somersault Home Signal
Somersault LQ: Balance Arm
Somersault Semaphore
Somersault Signal
Station Semaphore/Station Semaphore Signal
Stop Semaphore
Switch Dwarf Signal
Switch Indicators
Switch Lamp
Switch Light
Switch Signal
Switch Stands
Switch Terms
247
252
251
260
260
260
250-51
259
252
259
261
283
264-266
264
252
263
259
263
264
264
286
254
255
254
254
254
264
259
277
277,284
277
277
278
278
276
System-Related Terms
Target Signal
Temporary Speed-Reduction Board
Three-Arm Signal
Three-Aspect Semaphore
Three-Position Electro-Pneumatic Semaphore
Three-Position Semaphore Block Signals
Three-Position Semaphore Upper Quadrant
Three-Position Semaphore Signal
Three-Position Slotted-Mast Semaphore
Three-Position Upper-Quadrant Semaphore/Three-Position
Upper Quadrant/Three-Position Upper Quadrant Signal!
Three Position Upper Quadrant Type
Three-Position Upper Quadrant
Three-Position Upper Quadrant Signal
Tilting Crossbar Signal/Tilting (Crossbar) Signal
Tommy/Tommy Dodd
Top-of-Mast Exposed Banner Signal
Track Car Indicators
Track Indicators
Track Occupancy Indicator
Track Side Warning Indicator
Train Approach Indicators
Train-Order Board
Trip's Improved Railway Signal
Twin-Arm Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
Two-Arm EP Dwarf Signal
Two-Arm Mechanical Ground Signal
Two-Arm, Two Position Mechanism
Two-Arm Two-Position LQ Signal
Two-Aspect Upper Quadrant
Two-Colour Oil Lamp
Two-Position Lower-Quadrant Semaphore
Two-Position Semaphore Signal
248
260
266-67
283
260
260
259
260
260
259
259
259
259
259
281
273
275
284
283,284
284
284
284
283
286
260
260
259
259
260
260
286
260
260
Two-Position Semaphore Upper Quadrant 260
Two Ann Signal 260
Upper Left-Hand Upper Quadrant Semaphore Signal 263
Upper Quadrant Automatic Signal 261
UQ Pipe-Operated Dwarf Signal Signal 264
U.Q. Power Worked Dwarf Signal 273
Upper-Quadrant Semaphore Type Signal: UQ Type Semaphore 253
Upper Quadrant Splitting Signal 260
Upper Quadrant Two Position 260
Upper Quadrant Type SemaphorelUpper-Quadrant
Semaphore Type Signal 253
US&S Style Semaphores (12) 264
US&S Style-B Lower-Quadrant Block Semaphore 260
Vane Signals 267
Wired-Operated Semaphore 264
Wooden Crossbar 281
249
3B Semaphores
3B1 Overarching Terms
SEMAPHORE SIGNAL/SEMAPHORE
General Note I. The word Semaphore is of Greek origins. It has been associated
with communication before railway usage. Chappe's optical telegraphs are
sometimes viewed as the source of railway Semaphore Signals. These devices
were developed in 18th century France and were employed as a communication
system across that country. However, Calvert notes that Depillon's coastal
telegraph (under the name Semaphore [French form of the term] is the source of
railway Semaphores. The coastal telegraph followed the coast line of France and
Algeria and constituted a communication system with ships at sea. The two
systems were linked by messenger and eventually by the modem telegraph.
(Calvert 2004). Railway usage began in mid-19th c. England. Semaphores
eventually became a dominant railway Signal form in much of the world. It was
marked by movable arms for day use and colored lights at night. The system is
now obsolete.
General Note II. The term Semaphore may suggest a clearly defined entity.
However, it represents instead a diverse safety aid. Semaphores on the European
continent -- and areas influenced by Europe -- are distinctly at variance with UK-
US forms. For example, Europeans generally separate arms from the lens
apparatus and many European forms have blades of an unvarying design both in
shape and color. While European forms are not uniform many follow what may
be termed the Germanic model. The word Semaphore appears in many languages
(with variant spellings). However, the term Formsignal replaces Semaphore in a
variety of systems (especially German language codes). Formsignal often refers to
all Signals less than fully lighted. It is therefore not altogether a synonym for
Semaphore.
General Note III. The Semaphore requires two systems for displaying messages: a
blade (arm) for day indications, and lamps at night. The lamp shine through lenses
in the blade for UK-US forms. As the blade moves the lamp shines through a
250
different lens; two or three aspects are thereby created. Other forms require multi-
ple lamps and lenses since they are independent of the blade/spectacle ensemble.
Semaphores are of two basic forms: upper quadrant, and lower quadrant.
Semaphore Signal is the most common term for this form of Signal. The
abbreviated form, Semaphore, is somewhat commonly used. Semaphore Railway
Signal may appear to be an overarching term but it is only infrequently employed.
Classification: #521
Type of Device: Partially-lighted Railway Signal
Operation: A device employing arms for day messages and lights at night.
Messages are presented according to previously established pattern.
Comments: An archaic Signal form of diverse forms. The Classification includes
a differentiation according to types of blades or arms and variations of same.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953, Calvert 2004, GFR 1981, K & W 1963, Solomon
2003
ANCIENT LIGHTS. This perhaps curious term refers to Semaphore Signals in an
era when Semaphores are largely unknown and seemingly of ancient history.
Reference: Jackson 1992
RAILWAY SEMAPHORE/SEMAPHORE RAILWAY SIGNAL. These terms
are variant forms of basic terms. Railway may have been placed before the basic
term in order to differentiate it from non-railway use of Semaphores. The second
term is an advertisement of Stevens & Sons for "Iron Semaphore Railway
Signals" reprinted in Shackleton.
References: B & M 1981, Shackleton 1976
DWARF SEMAPHOREIDWARF SIGNAL/DWARF TYPE SIGNAL. These
terms, obviously, refer to Signals that are notably short. They were mounted on
abbreviated masts and may have displayed apparatus of reduced size. Dwarf
Signals can refer to all forms of small railway Signals. For some sources it refers
specifically to Dwarf Semaphore Signals though without mention of Semaphore
and therefore included here.
251
References: K & T 1988, Raymond 1917, Fisher 1976
FIXED SEMAPHORE SIGNALIFIXED SEMAPHORES. An infrequently used
term. It refers to early stationary Signals at a time when flags held by train crews
were the common form of Signals. Solomon offers a second definition with Fixed
Semaphore. That term is contrasted with Ball Signals which are fixed in the
ground but whose Signal devices move.
Reference: Starkey 1944, Solomon 2003
MECHANICAL SEMAPHORE SIGNALLING/SEMAPHORE MECHANICAL
SIGNALLING. Both terms are from relatively new sources. The terms contrast
older signals with newer Signals and train control by coining terms that refer to
mechanical Signals (of which the Semaphore Signal was the primary form).
References: Intro. of Electrical ... 1995, Cardani 1979
MECHANICAL LOWER QUADRANT. A variant term for one form of
Semaphore.
Reference: Vanns 1997
SEMAPHORE LIGHT. FRA-3 divides Semaphore Signal into Semaphore and
Semaphore Light. The former term focusses on the physical while the latter is
concerned with the light part and colors (messages) of the semaphore arm.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
SEMAPHORE TYPE. Kanner divides Signals into Color Light and Semaphore
Types. Meaning unchanged from basic term.
Reference: Kanner 1992
SIGNAL, SEMAPHORE. This term continues a US practice of placing the
general term before the particular. Meaning unchanged from that of the core term.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
3B2 Specific Forms
a) Lower Quadrant & Upper Quadrant Signal Forms
252
General Note. The most basic subdivision within Semaphore Signals is that of
Quadrant. A quadrant is one-quarter of a circle (90 degrees). A Semaphore Signal
occupying one ofthe upper quadrants (left or right) is an Upper Quadrant (UQ)
Signal; if one of the lower quadrant then a Lower Quadrant Signal.
LOWERQUADRANTffiPPERQUADRANT~OWERQUADRANT
SEMAPHOREffiPPER QUADRANT SEMAPHORE~OWERQUADRAJ'J"T
SIGNALffiPPER QUADRANT SIGNAL/UPPER-QUADRANT SIGNAL!
LOWER QUADRANT SEMAPHORE SIGNALffiPPER QUADRANT
SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. Both LQ and UQ have a horzontal position (at juncture
ofupper and quadrant). UQ arm moves upward to 45 and 90 degrees for other
positions. Most LQ have only one other position (down to 45 degrees); 3-position
LQ Signals are rare.
Most LQ and UQ terms are in tandem: the words LQ (or UQ) and without
semaphore and/or signal. Some sources add Semaphore while others Signals add
both. Some infrequently used terms are also employed that may not exist in both
UQ and LQ forms. Signals are to right of track in some nations while to the left in
others. Left hand or Right hand may be added to some terms as a result. Terms
including position and other information in this Database are cross-referenced.
UQ and LQ are a basic component within the category of Semaphore Signals.
They were employed nearly as often as the basic term.
References: Many sources include Semaphore Signals. A small sampling
includes: Henry 1942, Simmons, 1986, Phillips 1942, Lavallee 1953, Ellis 1978,
Solomon 2003
LOWER-QUADRANT SIGNAL~-Q SEMAPHORE. One source adds a hyphen
to LQ though seemingly not to UQ. Hyphenated terms are relatively common
among T-M forms though relatively rare in LQ and UQ forms.
References: Raymond 1917 (lst), Taylor 1949 (2nd)
UQ TYPE SEMAPHOREffi-Q SEMAPHORE TYPE SIGNAL. These terms add
Type to the title though without a change in meaning.
Reference: Starkey 1944, Harrigan VR 1962
253
LEFT-HAND, L-Q SEMAPHORE SIGNAL/LEFT-HANDED UPPER-
QUADRANT SEMAPHORE/LEFT-HANDED SEMAPHORE. Left-hand may
describe the Signal and may not be part of the Signal title; though it is possible
that it is. Left-hand Signals were the norm in UK while right-hand dominated in
the US. The first term is historic and refers to a 19th c. railroad operation in the
US that employs left-hand forms. The second and third terms are variants from
Solomon.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953, Solomon 2003
MODIFIED LQ SIGNALLING. This term is seemingly exclusive to Indian
Railways. It includes more complex indications.
Reference: Indian Railways
3B2 b) Somersault Signals
BALANCE ARM SIGNAL/SELF-BALANCING SOMERSAULT SIGNAL/
SOMERSAULT/SOMERSAULT PATTERN, SEMAPHORE/SOMERSAULT
LQ SEMAPHORE/SONlERSAULT SEMAPHORE/SOMERSAULT LQ/
SOMERSAULT SIGNAL/SEMAPHORE SOMERSAULT SIGNAL/
SOMERSAULT TYPE SIGNAL/TUMBLER/TUMBLE-ARM SEMAPHORE/
TUMBLE ARM SIGNAL/ SEMAPHORE SOMERSAULT SIGNALIU-Q
SOMERSAULT. Early UK Semaphores were of the Slotted-Post form (arm
rested inside of the post). Ice and snow could block the movement of the arm
from leaving the post. This then led to a false proceed signal. To eliminate that
problem a new form of Semaphore was developed: linking the arm to the Signal
post by a connecting rod and free of direct connection to the post. The Signal was
balanced and if the rod was damaged the arm reverted (somersaulted) to a stop
position. The Signal was complex and expensive but became relatively common
in UK and even migrated to Australia. Before very long more conventional and
simpler Semaphore Signals were designed and installed. However, many of the
somersault forms long remained in service. This Signal blossomed into many
titles. Tumble Arm is apparently an Australian term for the Somersault. It also
appears in Solomon. Three of the titles include the key notion of the Signal:
Balancing Arm.
254
References: K & W 1963, Allen 1952, Blythe 1951, Philpot 1985, Nock 1962,
Shackleton 1976, Taylor 1949, Vanns 1997, Solomon 2003
SOMERSAULT HOME SIGNAL. Term refers to a specific Signal that
incorporates physical and morphological dimensions.
Reference: Vanns 1997
CENTRALLY BALANCED SEMAPHORE/CENTRE-BALANCE SIGNAL.
This refers to a Signal that has a center pivot. It is not a Somersault Signal.
Reference: Vanns 1997
CENTRE BALANCE STOP SIGNAL. A signal with central pivot point with a
more specific function.
Reference: RONT 2001
3B3 Methods of Operation
General Note. Most sources do not include methods of operation (i.e. how the
Signal is activated) in the title. Most sources that do so are ofDS provenance.
Though the terms are diverse most of the them refer to a few basic operational
means.
ALL-ELECTRIC SEMAPHORE SIGNAL/ALL-ELECTRIC SEMAPHORES.
This is an early term. It is possibly the earliest form after the Electro-Pneumatic. It
may distinguish electric-only forms from forms employing compressed air and
electricity. Solomon offers a slightly shorter version.
Reference: B & M 1981, Solomon 2003
ELECTRIC MOTOR SEMAPHORE SIGNALIELECTRIC MOTOR SIGNAL/
ELECTRIC-MOTOR-DRIVEN SEMAPHORE SIGNALIELECTRICALLY-
OPERATED SEMAPHORE. Additional terms that refer to electrical apparatus
employed in activating Semaphore Signals. Other terms center on motors though
without explicit reference to electricity. The last-named term from Vanns displays
variant terminology.
Reference: ARSPAP-SS 1948, Vanns 1997
255
MOTOR-DRIVEN SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. This form activated arms by electric
motor, gears, connecting rod and electromagnet. The early form was known as a
Base of Mechanism type. More modem forms became Top-of-Mast Mechanisms.
Reference: ARSPAP-SS 1948
MOTOR-OPERATED SEMAPHORE. This term is seemingly an alternative for
Motor-Driven Semaphore Signals (and related terms).
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
MOTOR SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. An historical term and synonym for other
forms that involved motors and electricity.
Reference: B & M 1981
LQ SIGNAL ELECTRIC OPERATEDILOWER-QUADRANT ALL-ELECTRIC
SEMAPHORE. An additional term that includes the means of operation in the
title. This term is made more specific by including the form of Semaphore Signal.
This second term is from Solomon and refers to the US.
Reference: QR-SS-EI1974, Solomon 2003
ELECTRO-GAS SEMAPHORE/ELECTROGAS SIGNALIELECTRO-GAS
SIGNAL. The first term refers to a Signal that is activated by liquid carbonic
control of an electric valve. The second type speaks of compressed carbonic acid
gas as the energizing force. Both Signals may be similar in operation.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953, Nock (2nd term), RSD 1911 (3rd term).
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC SEMAPHOREILQ E-P SEMAPHORE/ELECTRO-
PNEUMATICALLY-SEMAPHOREIELECTRO-PNEUMATIC LOWER-
QUADRANT SEMAPHORE. These terms refer to a Signal operating on
compressed air regulated by an electric valve. Nock adds the type of Signal (in
this case, LQ) to the basic term. The third term is from Solomon.
References: RSD 1911, B & M 1981, Nock 1962, Vanns 1997, Solomon 2003
OIL-LIT SEMAPHORE SIGNAL/OIL-LIT LQ STOP & DISTANT SIGNAL.
Seemingly only one source includes Signals with oil-lit as part of the name.
256
Reference: Vanns 1997
POWER-OPERATED SIGNAL. ARSPAP-SS speaks only ofelectric motor
driven models under this heading but presumably other versions were also power-
operated. ARSPAP-H includes electro-pneumatic and electro-gas forms.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953 and -SS 1948
MECHANICAL DWARF SIGNAL. This term is also part ofthe ARSPAP-SS
group of mechanical semaphores and thereby distinguished from power- operated
forms. Though to be sure all forms are mechanical and require propulsion in some
manner. The term mechanical seemingly refers to hand- operated andlor locally
operated.
Reference: ARSPAP-SS 1948
MECHANICAL GROUND SIGNAL. Term refers to a form of mechanically
operated Semaphore Signals. RSD views Ground Signals as those directly
attached to the ground. ARSPAP-SS refers to one and two-arm mechanical
Ground Signals; those forms are listed in morphological-related terms.
References: ARSPAP-SS 1948, RSD 1911
MECHANICAL OPERATED SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. This term refers directly
to a Semaphore Signal operated by crank. ARSPAP-SS restricts this term to forms
involving direct human activation.
Reference: ARSPAP-SS 1948
MECHANICAL SEMAPHORE. This term seemingly distinguished the term
Semaphore (a mechanical entity) from humans displaying signalas with a lamp.
Reference: Tuma 1979.
MECHANICAL SIGNAL. This may appear to be a near overarching term. Yet
for ARSPAP it refers only to mechanical operated Semaphore Signals.
Reference: ARSPAP-SS 1948
MECHANICAL UQ SIGNAL. This term is distinguished from rotating Discs and
color light Signals by inclusion of the word mechanical. Its mechanical nature is
257
the key difference rather than the means of propulsion.
Reference: UN 1954
MANUALLY-OPERATED L-Q SEMAPHORE STOP SIGNAL. A complex
term that includes both physical and morphological materials in the title.
Reference: Taylor 1949
MANUALLY-OPERATED SEMAPHORE. References to this term are
infrequent; in fact only two surveyed sources included it. They refer to an early
form introduced not long after adoption of French communication semaphores,
and in 1800 before means of propulsion was applied to the Semaphore Signal.
References: B & M 1981, Middleton 1941
BASE-OF-MAST MECHANISMIBASE-OF-MAST SEMAPHORE/TOP-OF-
MAST SEMAPHORE/TOP-OF-MAST MECHANISMIBASE-OF-
MECHANISM SEMAPHORE/TOP-OF-MECHANISM SEMAPHORE. Terms
refer to placement of operating mechanism in a housing either at the base of the
Signal mast, or attached to the mast near the top and adjacent to blade and
spectacle. Only rarely do these terms serve as labels for Signals.
Reference: ARSPAP-SS 1948, K & T 1981, Solomon 2003
PNEUMATIC SEMAPHORE. A single surveyed source includes this term for a
Signal fully pneumatic in operation.
Reference: Vanns 1997
SEMAPHORE-LEFT OF MAST/SEMAPHORE-RIGHT OF MAST. These terms
are doubtful. More likely they describe features of Semaphores but are not actual
names of Signals.
Reference: ARSPAP-SS 1948
3B4 Morphology-Related Terms
General Note. This group ofterms combines morphological (function) terms with
physiological (physical) terms. These terms are not described here since the
constituent elements are included in respective morphological andlor physical
258
segments.
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SEMAPHORES/AUTOMATIC BLOCK SEMAPHORE
SIGNAL, Solomon 2003 (1), E.L. 1936 (2)
TWO-ARM, TWO POSITION MECHANISM, ARSPAP-SS 1948
ONE-ARM THREE POSITION MECHANISM, ARSPAP-SS 1948
THREE-POSITION ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC SEMAPHORE, Nock 1962
HOME ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC SEMAPHORE SIGNAL, ARSPAP-H 1953
DISTANT ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC SEMAPHORE SIGNAL, ARSPAP-H
1953
DISTMTT SEMAPHORE, Blythe 1951
FIVE-ARM LOWER-QUADRANT SEMAPHORE, Solomon 2003
HOME SEMAPHORE, Blythe 1951
LIMITED CLEAR U-Q SIGNAL, Vanns 1997
LOWER QUADRANT BLOCK SEMAPHORE, Solomon 2003
LQ DISTAJ"lT SIGNAL, Taylor 1949
L-Q STOP SIGNAL, Taylor 1949
ONE-ARM TWO-POSITION SIGNAL, King 1921
ONE-ARM, TWO-POSITION LQ -- SIGNAL, King 1921
ONE-ARM, TWO-POSITION UQ DWARF SIGNAL, King 1921
ONE-ARM SIGNAL, Nock 1962
ONE-ARM MECHANICAL GROUND SIGNAL, ARSPAP-SS 1948
ONE-BLADE LOWER-QUADRANT SIGNALS, Solomon 2003
PNEUMATIC BLOCK SEMAPHORE, Solomon 2003
SEMAPHORE DISTANT SIGNAL, K & W 1963
SEMAPHORE MANUAL BLOCK, AAR-USSR 1960
SEMAPHORE STOP SIGNAL, K & W 1963
SEMAPHORE-TYPE AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNAL, K & T 1988
SINGLE-ARM UPPER-QUADRANT SEMAPHORE, Solomon 2003
STOP SEMAPHORE, Blythe 1951
TWO-ARM MECHANICAL GROUND SIGNAL, ARSPAP-SS 1948
THREE-POSITION LOWER-QUADRANT SEMAPHORE, Solomon 2003
THREE-POSITION SLOTTED-MAST SEMAPHORE, Solomon 2003
THREE-POSITION UPPER-QUADRANT SEMAPHORE/THREE-POSITION
UPPER QUADRANT/THREE-POSITION UPPER QUADRANT TYPE,
259
ARSPAP-SS 1948 (1), Corbin 1922 (2), Solomon 2003 (3)
THREE-POSITION U-Q SEMAPHORE SIGNALS, A Century ... 1964
THREE-POSITION UPPER QUADRANT SIGNAL, Corbin 1922
THREE-POSITION SEMAPHORE SIGNAL, Allen 1952
TWO-POSITION LOWER-QUADRANT SEMAPHORE, Solomon 2003
TWO-POSITION SEMAPHORE SIGNAL, K & T 1988, A & W 1963
UQ SPLITTING SIGNAL, Taylor 1949
UPPER QUADRANT TWO-POSTION, K & W 1963
US&S STYLE-B LOWER-QUADRANT BLOCK SIGNAL, Solomon 2003
THREE-ARM SIGNAL, King 1921
THREE-ASPECT SEMAPHORE, Henry 1942
THREE-BLADE SEMAPHORE/THREE-BLADE UPPER-QUADRANT
SEMAPHORE, Solomon 2003
TWO-POSITION SEMAPHORE UPPER QUADRANT,
THREE-POSITION SEMAPHORE UPPER QUADRANT
TWIN-ARM LOWER-QUADRANT SEMAPHORE, Solomon 2003
TWO-ARM E-P DWARF SIGNAL, King 1921
TWO-ARM SIGNAL, King 1921
TWO-ARM TWO-POSITION SIGNAL, King 1921
TWO-ARM TWO POSITION LQ SIGNAL, King 1921
TWO-ASPECT UPPER QUADRANT
MULTIPLE-ASPECT UPPER QUADRANT, Bangladesh
SEMAPHORE DISTANT, B & M 1981, K & W 1963
SEMAPHORE RUNNING SIGNAL, K & W 1963
SEMAPHORE SHUNT SIGNAL, SA-BBB 1974
THREE-POSITION SEMAPHORE BLOCK SIGNALS, Train Shed 1972
3B5 System-Related Terms
General Note. These terms refer to Automatic Block and Semi-Automatic Block
terms. They are defined in appropriate segments.
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SEMAPHORE SIGNAL, E.L. 1936
AUTOMATIC MOTOR-OPERATED SEMAPHORE, Henry 1942
AUTOMATIC SEMAPHORE, Vanns 1997
260
AUTOMATIC SEMAPHORE SIGNAL, K & W 1963
AUTOMATIC THREE-POSITION UPPER LEFT HAND SEMAPHORE
SIGNALLING, Harrigan VR 1962
SEMAPHORE AUTOMATIC BLOCK, E.L. 1936
SEMI-AUTOMATIC ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC DISTANT SEMAPHORE,
ARSPAP-H 1953
UPPER QUADRANT AUTOMATIC SIGNAL, Queensland SS-E 1977
3B6 Other Forms
BACK LIGHT. Term for a feature of Semaphore Signals. The Light allows train
crews to determine if Signal is off or on, and lit. See also second form in Ch. 2.
Reference: Jackson 1992
BACKING SIGNAL. Term for Semaphore-related Signal. It controls wrong-
direction operations in station areas.
Reference: Jackson 1992
BANNER REPEATER. Term is labelled as Semaphore though described as a bar
moving within case.
Reference: Jackson 1992
DAY SIGNAL. Calvert remarks that the semaphore is a "day signal." By that is
meant the blade of a Semaphore Signal. But such a Signal is both day and night in
operation unless the term is used narrowly.
Reference: Calvert 2004
DISPLAY BOARD. A Semaphore-enhancing device consisting'ofa board
painted white and mounted behind Semaphore SignaL
Reference: Jackson 1992
DOUBLE ARM SEMAPHOREIDOUBLE ARM STATION SEMAPHORE.
These Signals serve as a Station Semaphore.
Reference: Varms 1997
261
ELECTRIC SEMAPHORE. This term distinguished early electric-powered forms
from electro-pneumatic and manual forms.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
EQUAL BALANCED BRACKET SIGNALIBALANCED BRACKET SIGNAL/
THREE DOLL BALANCED BRACKET SIGNAL/TWO-DOLL BALANCED
BRACKET SIGNAL. Equal Balanced does not refer to Somersault Signals.
Instead it refers to a single post mounted bracket upon which two or more dolls
are evenly spaced.
Reference: A & W 1991
CO-ACTORS. A Semaphore Signal that serves as a Repeater.
Reference: Taylor 1949
GRS MODEL 2A SEMAPHORE/GRS MODEL 2A UPPER-QUADRANT/
GRS MODEL 2A LOWER-QUADRANT/GRS MODEL 2A DWARF
SEMAPHOREIMODEL 2A UPPER QUADRANT SEMAPHORE. General
Railway Signal introduced this model in 1908. It was a versatile device that could
be employed in mulitple configurations: base or top of mast, LQ and UQ and left
or right-hand.
Reference: Solomon 2003, ARSPAP SS-1948, ARSPAP- H 1953
HALL STYLE-K UPPER QUADRANT SEMAPHORE/HALL LOWER-
QUADRANT SEMAPHORE. Terms for Semaphore Signals prefaced by the
manufacturer's name.
Reference: Solomon 2003
HUDSON TYPE OF SEMAPHORE. In this form of Signal a shield hid the arm
thereby creating a clear indication. It is a historic form.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
ILLUMINATED SEMAPHORE. This Signal included arms that displayed prism
reflectors.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
262
LARTIGUE SIGNAL. A French Semaphore Signal designed by Charles Lartigue.
Reference: Jackson 1992
MINIATURE SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. A Repeater Signal provided for fog
signal crew.
Reference: Taylor 1949
MTI'ilATURE REPEATER SEMAPHORE (CO-ACTING). Few details are
available on this Signal. It may suggest the Miniature Semaphore Signal.
Reference: Vanns 1997
MINIATURE ARM SIGNALIMINIATURE SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. These are
employed for subsidiary functions including shunt, outlet roles.
Reference: A & W 1991
PARABOLIC SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. A Signal displaying arms illuminated by
light of an appropriate color instead of spectacles displaying colors.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
UPPER LEFT-HAND QUADRANT SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. Placement of
Signal is incorporated in the title.
Reference: King 1921
REPEATER. This is a Co-acting Signal on single mast.
Reference: Jackson 1992
SINGLE ARM SEMAPHORE. A term that seemingly distinguishes Station
Semaphore (double arm) from other forms which were single arms.
Reference: Vann 1997
SLOTTED-POST SEMAPHORE. Early if not the earliest form of the Semaphore.
The arm was set within a slotted post and extended outward according to
indication. Snow and ice could freeze arm within the post and give false positive
indication. Other forms of Semaphores replaced this form.
References: Blythe 1951, Hammond 1964, K & W 1963
263
SLOTTED POST. A shorter version of basic term of Slotted-Post Semaphore.
Reference: Jackson 1991
SMASH BOARD. A term for the Semaphore Signal.
Reference: Jackson 1991
STATION SEMAPHORE/STATION SEMAPHORE SIGNAL. These Signals,
positioned at a station, serve as Home, Stop Signals.
Reference: Vanns 1997
UQ PIPE-OPERATED DWARF SIGNAL. The method of operation is included
in the title.
Reference: King 1921
US&S STYLE-S SEMAPHOREIUS&S STYLE-B SEMAPHOREIUS&S
STYLE-B LOWER QUADRANT SEMAPHOREIUS&S STYLE-T
SEMAPHOREIUS&S STYLE-S UPPER-QUADRANT SEMAPHOREIUS&S
STYLE-B LOWER QUADRANT SEMAPHOREIUS&S LOWER-QUADRANT
SEMAPHOREIUS&S LOWER-QUADRANT SIGNALIUS&S STYLE T-2/
US&S STYLE-T UPPER-QUADRANTIUS&S STYLE-TUPPER QUADRANT
SIGNALISTYLE-B SIGNALS. US&S employed designations under Style
followed by a letter. Style-B were two-arm and two-position models. Style-S
allowed for three-position UQ forms. Style T forms were for top-of-mast Signals.
Solomon at times designates Signals by company without further designations.
References: Solomon 2003, ARSPAP SS 1948, ARSPAP-H 1953
WIRED-OPERATED SEMAPHORES. Calvert discusses the operation ofthe
Semaphore Signal under the heading of this term. Various forms of motive power
could be coupled with this Semaphore or so it seems.
Reference: Calvert 2004
3C Signals Boards, Disc Signals & Other Forms
3C1 Signal Boards
264
a) Overarching Terms & Terms in Other Languages
General Note. Railway Signals (full-size, full scale, mainline) may appear to be
divided into light (fully), and Semaphore forms and nothing more. However, there
is a third component: geometric-shaped Signals on pivots (or spindles) or hinges.
These are older Signals. They are only infrequently gathered together under an
overarching term and hence, a terminology problems. Two contenders for that
overarching term are Signal Board and Board Signal. They are discussed below.
Board is a third possibility though it is an inclusive form that includes Marker
Boards and some Signs, Discs and Banner Signals are considered separately.
Many of these do no move (that is, the apparatus) or if there is movement it is
often the target aspect since those Signals have a clear identity in themselves and
are included together. Calvert suggests Target Signals and Vane Signals for these
devices. Seemingly he prefers the Target form for UK and Vane for for US
(Calvert 2004).
SIGNAL BOARD. Some dictionaries include this term though not as a Signal in
itself. It refers instead to a list of Signals (such as in an elevator) or of impulses of
one form or another. There are also other terms that seem analogous to Signal
Board: Signpost (which often includes a Sign and not merely a post to which a
Sign can be affixed) and Sign Board (which includes messages and not only a
board on which messages may be placed). This writer adapted Signal Board to
encompass movable geometric boards that served as Signals for Part G (Aero Nav
Aids). Spain employs Pantella for this form of Signal. The Netherlands uses
Klapbord in the same manner. Other terms such as Figura in Portugal and
Formsignal in German language codes refer to all less than fully-lighted Signals.
Other systems may have specific Signal forms without an accompanying general
(full or partial) terms. See Also: Board Signals.
Classification: #522
Type ofDevice: Partially-Lighted Railway Signal
Operation: Board in various shapes accompanied by lights display messages
according to agreed-upon patterns.
Comments: Board Signals can also be known as Signal Boards and Vane Signals.
265
This classification and terms represent Dwarf and other Signals in the
Classification.
References: GFR 1981, RENFE 1978, RCS 1981
BOARD. This term may refer to a Pivoted Board. One source includes a form that
is attached to a spindle which presumably refers to the same action as a pivot.
This is a possible overarching term though perhaps overly inclusive.
References: Blythe 1951, Hammond 1964
BOARD SIGNAL. This term appears in two surveyed source. It can be an
overarching term and rivals Signal Board for that role. It places the particular
before the general and thereby conforms to such basic terms as Light Signal and
Semaphore Signal in that configuration of words. See Also: Signal Board, Board.
Reference: Blythe 1951
FORMSIGNAL. This can be viewed as a partially overarching term in the
German "school" of Signals. It refers to alliess-than-fully-lighted Signals of
which Signal Boards are a component.
Reference GFR 1981
KLAPBORD. The Netherlands employs this term for geometric-shaped Signals.
Klap is variously defined as reversible, spring, flap, leaf. This form is hinged
rather than mounted on a spindle.
Reference: Armseinen 1985
PANTELLA. This is the Spanish railway term for the same form of Signal. It can
be defined as a screen.
Reference: RENFE 1978
ROTATING VANE. Calvert apparently uses this variant form to distinguish
rotating Vane Signals from non-rotating Semaphore Signals. It refers to French
Signals.
Reference: Calvert 2004
TARGET SIGNALS. Calvert employs this an alternative for Vane Signals. It
266
refers to full-scale Signals rather than smaller devices at switches. See Also: Vane
Signals.
Reference: Calvert 2004
VANE SIGNAL. Calvert employs this term as a general term for early Signals
that displayed geometric shapes. The term is akin to Board Signals and also to
Signal Boards. In fact, B & M and Calvert both use some of the same illustrations.
This compiler adapted Board Signal for the same Signals which may have less to
recommend it than Signal Boards. Calvert also suggests Target Signals as an
alternative to Vane Signals. Target Signals indicate full-use Signals rather than
Targets for switches.
Reference: Calvert 2004
3C1 b) Specific Board Terms
PEFORATED BOARDIPERFORATED BOARD SIGNAL. Two sources include
a Signal by this name. The first term is semi-circular in shape. The source for the
second term notes that it is operated by manipulation of a handle that pivots the
Signal.
References: Blythe 1951 (lst term), B & M 1981 (2nd term)
PIVOT BOARDIPIVOTING BOARD SIGNAL. Two sources include these
terms. Both are historic references. The second term may be a variant term or it
may be a description of signal action rather than a formal name.
References: Mashour 1974 (lst term), Blythe 1951 (both terms)
QUARTER-ROTATING CHEQUER-BOARD/CHESSBOARD. The first term
refers to a Signal Board form in France. Nock refers to the same Signal as a
Chessboard.
References: Ellis 1958 (lst term), Nock 1978
REVOLVING BOARD. This term is referred to by only a few surveyed sources.
Mashour refers to a post-1830 Signal that revolves. Blythe 1951 also makes a
historical reference that may possibly refer to Pivot Boards.
References: Mashour 1974, Blythe 1951
267
REVOLVING BOARDS & LAMPS. Most references to this fonn of Signal omit
mention of a lamp. One surveyed source includes the tenn. Many Board
Signals/Signal Boards presumably included a night aspect.
Reference: Blythe 1951
3C2 Disc Signals
General Note. Signal Boards contain sphere-shaped Signals that can be tenned
Discs. That fonn of Signal, however, is part of an assemblage of Signals that can
be of a variety of shapes. There are many other sphere-shaped Signals that appear
only in spherical or disc-shapes. A variety of systems are often labelled simply
Disc Signals. It may create an illusion to speak of schools of Disc Signals types
since variations are frequent and many were employed only in restricted areas.
Yet in a rough way one can speak of types, or even eras, ofDisc Signals.
Disc I can refer to early fonns mostly in the UK. These include exposed
fonns with double discs and half-often discs.
Disc II includes Signals found mostly in the US. This fonn was often of an
enclosed nature and a major Signal fonn until the Semaphore became dominant.
Disc III are tenned Banner Signals and often were a US fonn co-existing
with enclosed Disc Signals. They are somewhat like Switch Targets both by
design and because the banner or disc was exposed. Their use faded out along
with the Enclosed Disc Signals. These Signals were sometimes tenned Clockwork
Signals.
Disc IV are somewhat current Signals -- often of a dwarf nature -- and
found in UK and UK-influenced systems especially in Australia. They are often
switchboard/point indicators; some are also in shunt form. In some fonns only the
target moves while in other fonns the entire apparatus revolves.
Disc V is tenned a Banner Repeater Signal and found in UK. It has the
shape of a disc with glass front and a small arm contained within. The arm has a
somewhat semaphore manner of operation.
Classification: #5230s/5240s
Type of Aid: Partially-lighted Railway Signal
Operation: Discs of various fonns accompanied by lights present messages
268
according to agreed-upon pattern
Comments: The Classification includes a complex arrangement of terms and
meanings. The precision falls short of the intent. The Database lists basic forms of
Discs with less precision but more coherence. The numbers here included are only
partial.
3C2 a) Disc Signals Containing the Word Disc
AUTOMATIC ENCLOSED DISC SIGNALIENCLOSED DISC SIGNAL. A
Signal invented by T.S. Hall in 1869. A two-aspect device often employed for
automatic block service. This usage predates Semaphores. The second term is a
shorter form of the basic term.
Reference: Solomon 2003
ENCLOSED DISCIENCLOSED DISK SIGNAL. RSD notes that the Disk Signal
is often restricted to Enclosed Disk Signal. Banners and Clockwork Signals, by
contrast, are explosed forms and often considered apart from Disk Signals.
Enclosed DisclDisk is thereby a more explicit term for Disc enclosed within a
housing.
Reference: RSD 1911, B & M 1981
BANJO. Term applied to Enclosed Disc Signal. Physically it resembled a banjo.
See also: Enclosed Disc Signal.
Reference: King 1921, Solomon 2003
BRACKETED DISC. The form of attachment becomes part of this term. Disc on
bracket is attached to a post or wall.
Reference: M & H
C.l. PILLAR DISC. This form displays a "Flap Target." C.l. = Cast Iron. See
Also: Signal Box.
Reference: M & H
COMPOUND GROUND DISC. This term refers to two adjoining discs; one high,
one low. Both can be viewed by a train crew simultaneously because of the
269
elevation difference.
Reference: M & H
DISCIDISC SIGNAL. This term is a historic term under two forms. All the refer-
ences are to historic forms. One ofwhich is from the 1840s with discs 4' in
diameter. The terms can be applied to more modem Signals yet more modem
terms nearly always attach other words.
References: B & M 1981, Simmons 1986, Lavallee 1953, Adam-Smith 1973
DISC & CROSSBARIDISC & CROSSBAR SIGNALIDISC-&-CROSSBAR
SIGNAL. This Signal has targets both for danger and clear as well as lamps.
Apparatus can be turned 90 degrees. This Signal is a stage beyond the early Disc
which displayed a blind-edge for clear indications. Simmons has Disc & Crossbar
(with double disc) that survived into the 20th c. Blythe includes bar and disc with
openings that reduce any possibility ofwind misaligning the Signals and creating
false messages. Allen includes a version (GWR) that could be as high as 60'.
Lavalle speaks of a Bar & Disc that may be a description rather than a precise
name. The hyphenated version is from Hammond and Mashour. The Simmons
version is apparently called a Double Disc though without a bar.
References: Allen 1952, Blythe 1951, Simmons 1986, Lavallee 1953, Hammond
1964
DISK SIGNAL. A variant spelling that is sometimes employed by US sources.
This specific usage refers to 19th c. Signals.
Reference: Raymond 1917, RSD 1911
DOUBLE DISCIDOUBLE DISC SIGNALIDOUBLE-DISC SIGNAL. This is a
19th c. Signal employing two discs attached with horizontal bar. The edge-on
position denoted clear. At times this form performed as a Distant Signal while a
Semaphore served as Home Signal.
Reference: Blythe 1951
DOUBLE DISC & CROSSBAR SIGNAL. Dempsey and Simmons includes a
Signal with two Discs & Crossbars; Dempsey includes this Signal with branch
line operations.
270
References: Dempsey 1855, Simmons 1986
DWARF SIGNAL/THREE-POSITION DWARF/TWO-POSITION DWARF
SIGNAL. For Victoria Railways and Western Australia Railways these are Disc
Signals. The "target revolves vertically" rather than the entire mechanism.
Though in another place Victoria Railways seems to differentiate between Dwarf
and Disc Signals.
References: Wooley 1958-2, Western Australia Railways 1974
EXPOSED DISC CLOCKWORK TYPE SIGNAL. A historic form from the
1880s. At least one vane of the Signal is of obround shape and the frame is topped
by a lamp. There is some resemblance to a current target/lamp though this Signal
was a mainline Signal.
Reference ARSPAP-H 1953
FLOODLIT GROUND DISCI FLOOD LIT DISC/FLOOD-LIT DISC. These are
ground-based Signals that are flood-lighted at night. The lamp is attached to the
apparatus. Color lamps are not required.
References: Queensland Railway FS 1965, K & W 1963, Vanns 1997
GALLOWS TYPE OF SIGNAL (DISC). A historic term in US. It consisted of a
large sheet iron disc (with a red lens built into it) that denoted danger. Clear
indication was passive since the disc was "hidden" behind a shield.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
GROUND DISCIGROUND DISC SIGNAL. These specific forms are from M &
H, a historic source. The second form seemingly involves movement of entire
mechanism while the first form has a revolving target only. Each form has two
forms versions: one that works with points, one that works independently.
Reference: M & H
GROUND-LEVEL DWARF SIGNAL. This term frequently refers to Discs (with
45 degrees rotation); some forms are Miniature Semaphore Signals.
Reference: Allen 1952
271
HALF-OPEN DISC SIGNAL. This term is a more complex form of Disc Signal.
It displayed an oval with one-half of the disc open. The Signal could create four
messages: Clear half-disc on left indicated proceed for left track; if on right then
proceed is for right track. Both tracks closed was indicated by positioning the
open part of the disc on the bottom. An on-edge position denoted both tracks
open.
Reference: Blythe 1951
HALL DISC SIGNAL/HALL DISC/HALL'S ENCLOSED DISC/HALL
SIGNAL. A variety of terms employed by Solomon for the essentially same
Enclosed Disc Signal.
Reference: Solomon 2003
INDEPENDENT DISC. This Disc entirely revolves. Disc and Signal lever
connected by wire.
Reference: Q Rlwys SS 1965
MARTIN DISC SIGNAL. A 19th century Signal for one railway. It consisted of
of a board in a circular shape that contained a partially circular opening. The
Signal rotated on an axis both vertical and horizontal so that the Signal could
provide danger and clear messages for trains in both directions.
Reference: RONT 2001
MECHANICAL DISC. This form has a partial disc. The disc target moves in
contrast to mechanical revolving discs.
Reference: K & W 1963
MECHANICAL REVOLVING DISC SIGNAL. This term suggests that Disc
Signal can take on a generic meaning that indicates Signals of reduced stature that
carry out non-running/non-mainline functions. This NSW form does not display
disc targets but instead has a square target and triangle target.
Reference: NSW Railways Signalling
PATTERN GROUND DISC. A & W includes this term but with few details. The
272
Reference: A & W 1991
POWER-OPERATED DISC. Only the Target revolves with this form. Only
limited data on this Disc is available. Power presumably means electric power
rather than manual operations.
Reference: Queens Railways FS 1965
REVOLVING DISC SIGNALIREVOLVING DISC. The term refers to Discs in
which entire mechanism revolves. Disc face (target) and lamp unit is stationary.
Some versions may have target on one side only. It is English and Australian in
provenance.
References: K & W 1963, Blythe 1951, NWS Railways Signalling
TOMMY/TOMMY DODD. Colloquial terms for Ground Disc Signal.
Reference: Jackson 1992
U.Q. POWER WORKED DWARF SIGNALS. Dwarf Signals can encompass
several forms. This specific form consists of Disc Target in which the Target
revolves but not the entire mechanism.
Reference: NSW Railways Signalling
3C2 b) Banner Signals [Exposed Disc Signals Under Banner Signal name]
BANNER. Short form for Banner Signal. It refers to a later 19th c. form. See
Also: Banner Signal.
Reference: Solomon 2003
BANNER SIGNAL. This term covers several forms. It can refer to Banner
Repeater Signal. It can also refer to earlier 19th c. Signal which literally included
banners (sometimes termed a Banner Box Type Signal). The term can also refer to
a later 19th c. Signal. This last named form is also referred to as a Clockwork
Signal or an Exposed Disc Signal. This form had targets (akin to current forms)
and a lamp. It often displayed Discs but they were exposed discs.
References: ERS-H 1995, ARSPAP-H 1953, AAR-SM 1987
273
BANNER BOX SIGNAL. Tenn for an Enclosed Disc Signal. It is employed in
the Manual Block System.
Reference: B & 0 1927
BANNER BOX TYPE (IRELAND SIGNAL). A historic tenn accompanied by
few details. There are several other similar tenns and perhaps similar Signals.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
BANNER BOX TYPE SIGNAL. This tenn refers to an Enclosed Signal with
cloth banners. ARSPAP-H also refers to it simply as a Banner Signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
BANNER CLOCKWORK SIGNAL. B & M speaks of Enclosed Disc and Banner
Clockwork Signals. This seemingly represents two constitutive elements of
Signals for the time before Semaphore Signals became significant. Details are not
given. Banner Signal and Clockwork Signal sometime function as synonyms.
References: B & M 1981, ARSPAP-H 1953
BANNER CLOCKWORK TYPE. Tenn from Solomon that seemingly refers to
the Banner Clockwork Signal.
Reference: Solomon 2003
BANNER REPEATER SIGNAL. This Signal repeats messages ofthe primary
Signal. The UK version consists of a glass-fronted housing and bar representing a
semaphore arm. ERS-H includes this Signal and describes versions on the
continent ofEurope.
References: K & W 1963, ERS-H 1995
BANNER TYPE SIGNALIBANNER-TYPE SIGNAL. These tenns are
seemingly similar to Banner Repeater Signal. Signal Box offers a hyphenated
version. Solomon includes second tenn as a descriptive fonn of a latter 19th c.
Banner Signal.
References: UK Military 1955, Signal Box 1999, Solomon 2003
274
BANNER TYPE TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. Historic term from the 1890s. Few
details on Signal are given other than it was operated by hand.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
BOX TYPE TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. This is a Banner Signal despite omission
of that word. It is a historic term consisting of a wood housing and displaying
banners of red cloth.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
CLOCKWORK EXPOSED DISC SIGNAL. A historic term. No details save that
it was "a modification of the Gasset & Fisher Signal." It was presumably a
Banner Signal since it displayed an exposed disc.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
CLOCKWORK SIGNAL. This term can encompass a variety of terms that
describes Signals under the heading ofBanner Signal. ARSPAP-H seemingly
uses the term as a synonym. It also employs the term for a specific Signal
installed in 1879 that displayed an exposed disc operated by "weight- driven
clockwork."
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953, B & 01927
EXPOSED BANNER CLOCKWORK TYPE SIGNAL. A variant title for the
Gasset and Fisher Clockwork Exposed Signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
IRELAND BANNER BOX TYPE SIGNAL. A historic term. No details given.
See Also: Banner Box Signal (Ireland).
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
REVOLVING BANNER SIGNAL/ROTATING BANNER SIGNAL. These
terms are both historical references. The first term is from 1880; the second from
1862. They are possibly similar Signals since revolving and rotating can be very
similar in meaning.
References: B & M 1981, ARSPAP-H 1953
275
TOP-OF-MAST EXPOSED BANNER SIGNAL. In this term mechanism is
presumably at the top of the mast rather than at the base. Location of mechanism
becomes part of the title of the Signal. Top of Mast and Bottom of Mast terms are
attached to some forms of Semaphore Signals as well.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953
3C3 Morphological-Related Terms
General Note. These terms combine physical and morphological terms. Some
terms are substantially physical in nature while the morphological is stronger in
others. Entries in 3C3 are frequently brief since terms are engaged more fully in
respective morphology and physical segments.
3C3 a) Switch Terms
DODSON SWITCH & SIGNAL LAMP. This type oflamp was a long-burning
apparatus. It consisted of a large pot, small flames, and reflections magnified the
light.
Reference: Camp 1903
ELECTRIC SWITCH LAMP/ELECTRIC-LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT. Foster adds
power source to switch lamp title; electricity for this form; oil for the second
form. See Also: Switch Lamp, Switch Light, Electric Switch Lights. The second
term from REMC is a slightly more explicit form.
Reference: Foster 1983, REMC 1948
ELECTRIC SWITCH LIGHT. According to Camp, Switch Lamps as such burn
oil or kerosene. However, those running on electricity include the power source in
the title. That may possibly indicate the early state of electrical switch lights since
early Signal forms often include the mean of propulsion in the title while
established forms may not do so. Some manufacturers offer alternate energy
source and may add energy source to distinguish forms of energy.
Reference: Camp 1903
KEROSENE SWITCH LAMP. Term includes the form of energy in title.
276
I
!
,
I
Reference: REMC 1948
LAMP, SWITCH; ELECTRIC. The curious practice of ARSPAP-D to begin with
a general term then move to the particular is mirrored in this term as well. This
Signal is rotated mechanically and is a supplement to target.
Reference ARSPAP-D 1965
OIL-BURNING SWITCH LAMPS. A variant version of the basic form.
Reference: REMC 1948
OIL-LAMP. Term is either a shorter form, or a reference to lamps employed as
Switch Lamps.
Reference: REMC 1948
OIL-LIGHTED SWITCH LAMP. A variant term for the basic term and one that
is slightly more precise.
Reference: REMC 1948
OIL SWITCH LAMP. Older forms often omitted source of energy since many
were oil-burning. Foster adds the energy source of oil since they also marketed
electric forms. This is a more recent Lamp.
Reference: Foster 1983
REFLECTING SWITCH LAMP/REFLEX SWITCH LAMPIREFLEX LENS
SWITCH LAMP. Terms refers to reflector used in lieu of lenses and energy
sources.
Reference: REMC 1948
SWITCH DWARF SIGNAL. This term from UN 1954 (Viet-nam Railways)
offers few details. Switch Signals are often partially-lighted.
Reference: UN 1954
SWITCH INDICATOR. For ANR this term refers to a switch with lamps and
target. It is a low or dwarfunit. See Also: Switch Stand.
Reference: ANR 1947, King 1921
277
SWITCH LAMP. This tenn refers to a fonn of Railway Signal rather than merely
a lamp employed in Switch Signals. It denotes the position of a switch and
whether a given track is open or closed. Switch Stand Targets are frequently
found with Switch Lamps (or vice versa). Camp employs Switch Light which is
seemingly a synonym. There are both all-lighted and partly-lighted fonns.
Reference: Adams and Westlake, Jia-lin 1981, REMC 1948
SWITCH LIGHT. Camp employs this tenn of place of Switch Lamp. That source
also includes the word Lamp. Lamp is apparently included as a physical apparatus
rather than as a Signal in itself. See Also: Switch Lamp, Electric Switch Lamp.
Reference: Camp 1903
SWITCH SIGNAL. This tenn may suggest a general use function. But for Camp
it specifically refers to a Semaphore Signal employed in a switch situation. It can
also refer to all-lighted versions.
Reference: Camp 1903
SWITCH STANDS. Core meaning of this tenn refers to the stand attached to the
switch. It is not a safety aid in itself. However, at least one railway system, ANR,
employs the tenn with the meaning of targets and lamp and, therefore, as a safety
aid. This fonn can be regarded as a high stand. For ANR the form tenned Switch
Indicator is a low or dwarf fonn.
Reference: ANR 1947, Bethlehem 1955, 1981
3C3 b) Point Indicators
CATCH POINT DISCIPOINTS DISC. These are tenns from Queens Railways.
Physical appearance is that ofMechanical Point Indicator-Disc Type ofNSW.
Reference: Queensland Railway FS
CATCH POINT INDICATOR. This tenn has two fonns. One version has square
targets while the second version has discs on one side and horizontal bands on a
second side.
Reference: Western Australia Railways 1974
278
GROUND INDICATOR. A term seemingly provided by a single source. It
resembles a Disc Indicator that partially revolves. Other names for the Indicator
includes Shunting Disc, Shunting Signal, Dwarf Signal and Pot Signal which see.
Reference: Calvert 2004
MECHANICAL POINTS INDICATOR: ARROW TYPE; DISC TYPE. These
Indicators revolve. They are employed for points, catch-points, siding derails.
There are two forms:
ARROW TYPE: Rectangular targets, arrows (left or right).
DISC TYPE: One direction operations only. No form has reversed points.
They are lighted at night.
Reference: NWS Railways Signalling
POINTS INDICATOR. A term that can include a variety of designs. This form is
partly-lighted and similar in design to Catch Point Indicator with disc and band
targets.
Reference: Western Australia Railways 1974
POINTS INDICATOR - ARROW TYPE. This Indicator has square targets in
white and red with illuminated arrow. The mechanism seemingly revolves.
Reference: Queensland Railways FS 1965
3C3 c) Route Indicators
MECHANICAL ROUTE INDICATOR. This term is possibly similar to the
Australian moving slide in which mechanical methods places letters/number in
glass-fronted case denoting appropriate messages.
Reference: K & W 1963, A & W 1991
MORSE & BERRY TYPE ROUTE INDICATOR. Little information is available.
It is possibly a mechanical form using letters/numbers.
Reference: Nock 1962
MOVING SLIDE TYPE -- ROUTE INDICATOR. Term describes a mechanical
279
device that positions (or removes) appropriate letters/numbers for a given route.
Reference: NSW Railways Signalling
3C3 d) Other Forms
CLOCKWORK AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNAL. This term combines physical
and morphological functions of the Signal in question.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
CLOCKWORK ENCLOSED DISC TYPE ELECTRICAL AUTOMATIC
SIGNAL Though this is a clockwork Signal (which very often are Banner
Signals) it is apparently an Enclosed Disc Signal rather than an Exposed Banner
Signal. The term is partly morphological.
Reference: B & M 1981
CLOCKWORK SIGNAL EXPOSED DISC FORM & AUTOMATIC BLOCK
SIGNAL. A weight-driven clockwork is the principle of operations for this
Signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
GASSETT & FISHER CLOCKWORK EXPOSED BANNER TYPE OF
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNAL. Is this an actual term or more of a descriptive
term combining manufacturer and Signal name?
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
DISC SHUNT. This term incorporates the physical with the morphological
dimension.
Reference: Pakistan Railways
DISC SHUNTING SIGNAL. The morphological dimension is included in title.
This Signal has both ground and bracket forms.
Reference: Western Australia Railways 1974
FLOODLIT DISC SHUNTING SIGNAL. This term includes the morphological
aspect in the title. Lighting is provided by a small floodlight that illuminates the
280
disc face. This specific form was displayed on Signal bridges. Apparatus differs
little from floodlight Ground Discs and Floodlit Disc (which are ground-based
with floodlight); colored-lamps not required.
Reference: K & W 1963
HOME & DISTANT BANJO TYPE OF DISC SIGNAL. A historic term but little
information is available. It is morphological-related but includes the physical
apparatus.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
3C4 Other Forms
Comment: Neither Crossbar Signals ofFlag Signals are represented in the
Classiification. Any further revision needs to include those forms.
a) Crossbar Signals
CROSS BAR & LAMP SIGNAL. Term for an early railway Signal. It consisted
of lamp and target; on-edge position of target indicated clear message.
Reference: ARSPAP-H
CROSSBAR SIGNALS. Basic term for this form of Signal. It displayed red or
green lights. The entire mechanism revolved.
Reference: Signalbox 1999
DOUBLE DISCS & CROSS BAR. This term appears in Dempsey though not in
Blythe (the later source often represents a comprehensive source for older UK
terms). Double discs and white light indicates clear, and double cross-bar (and
double red light) equals stop. This was employed for branch line on one railway.
Discs for clear and for cross bars for stop indications seemingly do not appear
elsewhere.
Reference: Dempsey 1855
FLAP SIGNAL. Term for revolving Disc Signal alternative Flap (painted red)
drops into position for danger warnings. For clear message a green lens positioned
281
itself across the lamp.
Reference: Signalbox 1999
TILTING CROSSBAR SIGNAL/TILTING (CROSSBAR) SIGNAL. Term for a
grade crossing term consisting of two balls and two lamps.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
WOODEN CROSSBAR. This Signal corresponds to the Crossbar and Lamp
Signal.
Reference: B & M 1981
b) Flag Signals
AUTOMATIC FLAGMAN. This term is another name for the Wig-Wag Signal at
railway crossings.
Reference: B & M 1981
FANTAIL SIGNAL. Alternative title for Brunel's Flag Signal.
Reference: Blythe 1951
KITE SIGNAL. Alternate title for BruneI's Flag Signal.
Reference: Blythe 1951
FLAG SIGNAL.
General Note. This term may have have several meanings. They can include
"human-operated" flags, and a simple flag attached to a post. The former is not
part of this study while the later is. Flag Signal may also be placed in a frame
which Mashour has labelled a Pivoted Flag.
The term also includes a Signal by Brunel consisting of cloth shutters, one red,
one green. When both shutters are pulled up the message is clear. Dropping of
green shutter indicates caution while dropping of the red shutter denotes danger.
This Signal is better described as a Fantail or Kite Signal.
Reference: Blythe 1951
282
PIVOTED FLAG. This refers to a flag placed in a frame which is capable of
being pivoted. "Passive clear" (on-edge) constitutes a clear indication. When it is
visible the flag denotes stop. Mashour refers to it as a Pivoted Flag while Blythe
names it simply as a Flag Signal which see.
References: Mashour 1974, Blythe 1951
c) Lighted Signs & Boards
General Note. A variety of Signs and Boards contains -- or are augmented -- by
lights. To a substantial degree they are part ofthat category yet they are also a
partly-lighted aid. Signs and Boards which have a lighted dimension are included
here. Chapter 4 contains the primary entries.
Classification: #5250
Type of Device: Partially-lighted Railway Sign
Operation: Alphanumeric Signs and Boards aided by lights given messages
according to a pre-arranged pattern.
Comments: The Classification includes Lighted Signs only. That needs to be
augmented by Boards.
CAUTION BOARDS
END OF SHUNT SIGN
INDICATION BOARD
LINESIDE BOARD
MARKS & MARKERS FOR lAPAN [Selected Entries]
SHUNTING LIMITS BOARD
TEMPORARY SPEED-REDUCTION BOARD
TRAIN-ORDER BOARD
d) Track Indicators
General Note. This Indicator frequently employs miniature semaphore arms or
graphic symbols which indicate whether or not a train is approaching the location
ofthe Indicator. These devices were employed on selected US railroads and other
nations including Australia. They were primarily for the benefit of train crews
working on the track or maintaining switches for divergent lines. They found
283
more use in the past than in the present. Part F and underlying sources include
coverage of fonns and messages; Kanner 1992 augments that coverage. Fonns
include:
Classification: #5235
Type of Aid: Partially-Lighted Railway Signal
Operation: Symbols display messages and may include light and sound devices.
Comments: The Classification describes this fonn as Miniature Graphic Symbol
Indicators.
BLOCK INDICATORS
MOTOR CAR INDICATORS
SWITCH INDICATORS
TRACK CAR INDICATORS
TRACK OCCUPANCY INDICATORS
TRACK INDICATORS
TRACK SIDE WARNING INDICATORS
TRAIN APPROACH INDICATORS
References: Part F, Kanner 1992
e) Miscellaneous Fonns
BALL SIGNAL. This Signal was short-lived in UK though more popular and
longer lasting in the US. Some Ball Signals were in use in New England into the
1930s. A ball positioned at top indicates clear while at bottom it denotes danger.
A different version was employed by B & M: white ball at top denoted train on
time while black at top indicated train late or disabled. Lamps might be attached
to balls with hooks or attached to signal pole. B & M used "bell-shaped peach
baskets" giving the appearance of balls; that tenn was to become the name of the
Signal.
References: Blythe 1951, Allen 1952, B & M 1981, Lavallee 1953, FRA-3 1979,
Fisher 1976
BALL SIGNAL: STATION SIGNALS, JUNCTION SIGNALS, CROSSING
SIGNALS, DRAWBRIDGE SIGNALS. Calvert includes a variety of specialized
284
Signals under the category of Ball Signals. Few sources include these specific
forms.
Reference: Calvert 2004
BASKET SIGNAL. Some early UK railways employed a basket instead of a ball.
Hence the variant name.
Reference: Blythe 1951
BEZER ROTATING SIGNALS. Term for a 19th c. patented device consisting of
a rotating Semaphore arm and lamp. It was a two-aspect Signal indicating either
stop or proceed. It apparently underwent field trials but seemingly never achieved
regular service.
Reference: Calvert 2004
GATE SIGNAL. An early form of Grade Crossing Signal. However, it was
placed across the tracks instead of across the roadway.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
GROUND SIGNAL. This could be an overarching term for Disc Signal though it
includes Semaphore as well. Term refers to Subsidiary Signals including
Semaphore and Disc forms.
References: K & W 1963, ERS-H 1995, Keyboard ... 1984, Nock 1962, UK
Military 1955
HIGHBALL SIGNALIHIGH-BALL SIGNAL. The name of this Signal comes
from one ofthe Signal's indication rather than Signal in itself. Highball refers to
the top position which indicates clear.
References: Allen 1982, Henry 1942
INDICATOR LANTERN. Term for German Shunt Signal under an English-
language name.
Reference: Nock 1962
LAMP. This is something ofa marginal term. It refers to the lamp appearance in
itself without interaction with the switch or other railway appurtenances. The
285
lamp is a key element of a railway safety aid but the lamp is not specifically and
precisely a safety aid.
Reference: Camp 1903
POT SIGNAL. This is a US term. It refers to a Revolving Signal that was
originally oil-burning. It consisted of Switch Stand, Lamp Target. RSD speaks of
two versions: a Switch Target with four lenses, and a Dwarf with two lamps for
low-speed operations. Switch Target often means Target without lamps. However,
RSD employs Switch Target with lighted components as a synonym.
References: RSD 1911, Fishers 1976
RAILROAD GRADE CROSSING TARGETS. A historic device for trains
crossing tracks rather than roadways. It consisted of lamps and cross arms whose
position indicated when conditions were safe and when dangerous.
Reference: B & 0 1953
SMASH/SMASHBOARD SIGNAL. This refers to a Signal that incorporates an
obstacle (consisting of a long horizontal Semaphore arm, or Disc). If Signal is
ignored when in danger position then the train would strike the object.
References: Lavallee 1953, RSD 1911
TRIP'S IMPROVED RAILWAY SIGNAL. A historic term. It consisted of a
Semaphore with clock. Information limited on Signal.
Reference: B & M 1981
TWO-COLOUR OIL LAMP. Is this term a component of a Signal or a Signal in
itself? While it would appear to be the former the matter is not clear.
Reference: UN 1954 (Philippines)
286
CHAPTER FOUR
UNLIGHTED, AUDIO & RADIO SIGNS, SIGNALS, MARKERS,
MOVABLE & TIME INTERVAL & TRAIN ORDER FORMS
4A Indexes: Categories and Alphabetical
4Al Categories Index
Unlighted Fixed Forms with Constant Messages (4B)
General Note I, II, III, IV
Overarching Terms (4B1)
Fixed Indicator
Fixed Sign
Instructional Sign
Lineside Sign
Sign
Signs & Markers
Signpost
Track-Signs
Trackside Indicator
Trackside Signs
Location Signs (4B2)
Location Signs
Corporate or Other Political Subdivision Sign
Mile Post Sign
Standard Right of Way Sign
Subdivision Sign
Tresspass Sign
Tresspass--Right of Way Sign/Tresspass-Bridge Sign/Tresspass-Crossing
Sign
Railroad Property - Tresspassing Forbidden Under Penalty
Danger Do Not Tresspass on the Railroad
Valuation Section Sign
Transportation Signs (4B3)
Speed Control Signs (4B3 a))
287
Speed Contol & Restriction Signs
General Notes I, II
Advance-Warning Sign/Advance Warning Sign
Reduced Speed Sign
Resume Speed Sign
Retro-Reflective (Road Traffic Type) PSR Sign
Speed Control Signs - Temporary & Permanent
Speed Limit - Permanent Sign/Speed Limit - Temporary Signs
Speed
Slow
Resume Speed
Temporary Reduce Signs/Slow Signs/Resume Signs
Reduce Speed Sign
Slow Sign
Resume Speed Sign
DAR Speed Signals (=Signs)
General
Speed Restriction Sign
Start of Speed Restriction Signal
End of Speed Restriction Signal
Speed Restriction Warning Signal
Speed Zone Signs
Speed Zone Sign
Restricting Sign
Resume Speed Sign
Indicator
Fixed Indicator
Sign for Day Running
Warning Sign/Commencement Sign/Termination Sign
Arrows
Line Indicator
Line Speed Indicator
Temporary Speed Restriction Indicator
Temporary Speed Restrictions
Commencement Indicator
288
Special Speed Restriction Board
Spate Indicator
Term Indicator
"Z" Board/"R" Board
Speed Restriction Signs - Temporary
Speed Restriction Signs
Senal Indicadora de Velocidad Limitada/De Fin Sena!
Indicadora de Velocidad
Other Speed Signs:
Curve Speed Sign
Permanent Slow Speed Sign
Temporary Slow & Release Sign
Proceed Prepared to Stop Sign
Zone Speed Sign
Location Signs (4B3 (b) 1) )
Advance Location Signs (4B3 b) 1) )
Advance Location Signs
General Note
Railway Grade Crossing Signs
Drawbridge Signs
Tunnel Signs
Junction Signs
Rock Slide Signs
Snow Slide Signs
Station Signs
Station Name Sign (DAR)
Limit & Location Signs (4B3 b) 2) )
General Note
Yard Limit Signs
Switching Limit Signs
Signal Territory Limit Signs
Station Location Signs
Derail Location Signs
Track Capacities Signs
Water Station Limit Signs
289
Fuel Station Limit Signs
Cinder Station Limit Signs
Blind Siding Signs
Cut Section Signs
Territory Limits Signs (4B3 b) 3))
General Note
Begin CTC Sign/End CTC Sign
CTC
Begin
End
Begin Cab Signal TerritorylEnd Cab Signal Territory
Begin TCS Sign/End TCS Sign
End of Signal Territory
End of Block Sign/Block-Limit Sign
End of Track Circuit Sign
Automatic Block Signs
Start Automatic Block
End Automatic Block
Remote Control signs
Begin Remote Control Signs
End Remote Control Signs
Double Track Signs
Beginning of Double Track Signs
End of Double Track Sign/Double
Track BeginslDouble Track Ends
Begin Rules 400-406/End Rules 450-453
Begin Rules 450-453IEnd Rules 450-453
Approach Block Limit Sign!ABL Sign
Maintenance of Way Signs (4B4)
General Note
Alinement Sign or Markers
Bridge Sign/Bridge Number Sign
Curve & Elevation Sign
Elevation Markers
End of Shunt Sign
290
Flanger Sign
Maintenance Limits Sign
Roadway Structures Sign
Snowplow Sign
Raise Snowplow Sign
Lower Snowplow Sign
Token Block Working
Wing Marker
Safety Signs (4B5)
General Note
Electrical Hazard Sign
Fire Hazard Sign
Highway Grade Crossing Sign
Barricade Sign
Highway & Barricade Sign
Power-Operated Switch Sign
Restricted Clearance Sign
Warning No Clearance For Man on Side or Top of Car Sign
Marks & Markers (4B6)
Markers
Marker (Board)
Alinement Marker
Auxiliary Marker
"c" Markersf'S" Markers
General Note
"c" Markers
"s" Markers
Clearance Mark
Diamond Shaped Marker
Distance Markers
Elevation Markers
Fixed Markers
Landmark
Lineside Marker
Marks & Markers for Japan
291
General Note
Repeater Signal
Train Stop Sign Marker/Car Stop Marker
Shunting Signal Marker & Shunting Sign Marker
Switch Target
Sudden Release Shunting Sign Mark
Trolley Wire Dead Section Indicator
Trolley Wire Electric Source Sign Marker
Route Electric Source Sign Marker
Once Stop Sign Marker
Clearance Post
Whistle Sign Marker
Buffer Stop Indicator
Marks:
Route Identification Mark
Station Approach Mark
Slow Speed Release Mark
Tablet Carrying Mark
Signal Aspect Confirmation Position Mark
Signal Alann Mark
Power Drive Mark
Coasting Mark --- AC & DC
Train Stop Position Mark
Electric Train Section Mark
Monument Marker
Reflective Marker Board
High Speed Marker Board
Section Entrance Marker
Signal Marker Board
Spring Switch Marker/Spring Switch Sign
Wayside Marker
Wing Markers
Boards & Posts (4B7)
General Note
Board
292
Baak
Boundary Marker/Boundary Post/Boundary Stone
Caution Board
Countdown Board
Countdown Marker Board
Distant Warning Board
Fixed Signal Board
Flag BoardlMetal Flags
Indicating Board
Indication Board
Lineside Board
Marker Board
Mile Board
Name Board
Notice-Board
Number Board
Order Board
Permanent Speed Restriction Board/Permanent Speed-Restriction Board
Permanent Warning Board
"R" Board/"Z" Board
Radio Channel Change BoardlRadio Channel Indicator
Reflectorized Distant Board/Distant Board/Fixed Board
Resume-Speed Board (Permanent)/Resume-Speed Board (Permanent)/
Advance Warning Board
Shunting Limits Board
Signal Board
Slow Board
Speed Board
Start of Section BoarcllEnd of Section Board
End of Section Marker Board
Sighting Board
Signal Warning Board
Starting Signal Notice Board
Station Limit Board
Train Clear of Passing Loop Indicator/Advanced Starting Loop Clear
293
Signal
AWS Cancelling Indicator
End of Token Section Proceed ifPlatform Clear Board
Temporary Warning Board
Temporary Outer Speed Board/Temporary Inner Speed Board/All Trains
Train Order Board
Terminating Board
Stop Board
Stop Indicator
Temporary Speed-Reduction Board
Warning Board
Watering Board
Whistle Board
Yard Limit Board
"Y" Board
Block Posts
Clearance Post
Curve & Elevation (Post)
Elevation Posts/Full Elevation Posts/Zero Elevation Posts
Gradient Board
Gradient Posts
Mile Posts
Permanent Whistle Post/Temporary Whistle Post
Property Line Post/Property Posts
Section Post/Sub-section Posts
Signposts
Whistle Posts
Plates & Flags Forms (4B8)
"A" Plate
Alias Plate
Car Stop Plate
"F" Plate/Nf Plate
Identification Plate
Identifying Plate
Track Circuits
294
Fireman's Call Plunger Plate
Telephone Plate
Identity Plate
Letter Plate
Marker Plate
Name Plate/Plate, Name
Plate, NumberlNumber Plate
Rule 55 Exempt Indicator Plate
Signal Background Plate
Signal Identification Plate
Signal Mounted Signs
Signal Number Plate
Station Nameplate
"T" Plate
Flags
General Note
Flagboards
Metal Flags
Flag Signals
Blue Flag Devices
Portable Blue Flag
Blue Flag Detail
Derail Blue Flag
Chock Flag
Other Forms (4B8)
Overarching Terms (4B8 a) )
General Note
Trackside Signs
Lineside Signs
Fixed Sign
Roadway Sign
Sign
Signpost
Blue Flag Forms (4B8 b) )
General Note
295
Derail
Stop
Stop (Portable)
Camp Cars
Alto
Stop Tank Car Connected
Danger Men Working on this Track
Danger Tank Car Connected
Electric Traction Signs (4D8 c) )
General Note
Miscellaneous Signs (4B8 c) )
Approach Sign
Checquered Sign
Number Plate
Signal-Not-In-Use Sign
Targets (4BIO)
General Notes I, II, III, IV, V
Overarching Terms (4BIO a))
Target
Switch Stand Target
Switch Target
Illuminated Switch Target
Morphological-Related Terms (4BIO b) )
General Note
Shape (4BlOb) 1) )
General Note
Arrow-shaped Vanes (9 Forms)
Obround-shaped Vanes (3 Forms)
Rectangle-shaped Vanes (4 Forms)
Obround Vanes (4 Forms)
Other Shapes (6 Forms)
Color & Position (4BIO b) 2))
General Note
Terms Related to Railroad Functions (4B lOb) 3) )
Blind Target
296
Main Track Switch Target
Siding Yard Switch Target
Siding Derail Target/Siding Derail Switch Target
Yard Switch Stand
Other Terms (4BIO c))
Day Targets
Main Line Switch Stands
Target Stands
Switch Target Reflector TypelReflectorized Switch TargetlReflector
Target
.Targets whose titles refer to Height
Low Target
Low Revolving Target
Intermediate Target
High Switch Target
High Target
Switch Stands Forms (4BIO d) )
General Note
Automatic Safety Lock Switch Stand
Automatic Safety Switch Stand
Automatic Stand
Automatic Switch Stands
Column-Throw Stand
Derail Switch Stand
Double Stand
Dwarf Stand
Enclosed Geared Type Parallel Throw Switch Stand
Gearless Switch Stand
Ground Throw Stand
Ground-Throw Switch Stand/Ground Throw Switch Stand
Hasty Triple Stand
High Banner Two Tie Switch Stand/Low Banner Two Tie Switch Stand
High Switch Stand
Hub Switch Stand
Intermediate Stand
297
Low Stand
Low Switch Stand
Main Line Safety Switch Stand/Mainline Safety Switch Stand
Main Line Switch Stand
Parallel-Throw Switch Stand
Pony Stand
Positive-Action Switch Stand
Steelton Switch Stand
Stone Drum Switch Stand
Switch Stand, Parallel Throw
Three-In-One Automatic Switch Stand
Yard Switch Stand
Acoustical and Radio Forms (4C)
General Note
Overarching Terms (4Cl a) )
Acoustic or Audible Signal
Audible Danger Signal
Audible Signalling Devices
Audible Warning Systems
Railway Sound Signals/Rail Sound Signals
Explosive Signals (4C2 b) )
All-Weather Fuzees
Audible Signal
Banger/Cracker
Clayton's Automatic Detonator Placer
Clayton Fogging Machine
Detonating Fog Signal
Detonating Signal
Detonator
Detonator Container
Detonator BoxlDetonator CaselDetonator Holder/Detonator Tin
Detonator Machines
Detonator Placer
Detonator Signal
298
Duplex Fog Signal
Flag
Fog
Fog Detonator
Fog Signal
Fogger
Fogging Lever Frames
Fogging Machines
Fusees
Non-optical Signals
Torpedo
Torpedo Signal
Tube Detonator/Open Section Detonator
Level/Grade Crossing Sound Signals (4C2 c) )
Audible Automatic Warning Devices
Audible-Pedestrian Crossing
Automatic Bell
Bell
Bell, Gong
Bell, Single Stroke
Bell, Vibrating
Crossing Alarms
Crossing Bells
Double Gong Highway Crossing Bell
Electric Flagman
Electronic Bell/Electronic Warning Bell
Enclosed Crossing Bells
Iron Case, Enclosed Crossing Bell
Enclosed Water Tight, Low & High Voltage Highway Crossing Bell
Enclosed Type Gong
Grade Crossing Alarm
Highway Crossing Bell/Bell, Highway Crossing
Highway Crossing Bell-ElectroniclHighway Crossing Bell-Electro
Mechanical
Highway Crossing Signal
299
Hoeschen Crossing SignalfHoeschen Bell System
Locomotive Type Crossing Bell
Road Crossing Signal
Skeleton Bell
Sound-Bell/Sound Bell
Vibrating BelllBell Vibrating
Cab & Train Control Sound Signals (4C2 d) )
Cab Signal, Audible
Cab Signal-Sound
Audible Cab Signalling/Audible-Cab Signalling
Audible Cab IndicatorlIndicator, Cab; Audible
Audible Indicator
Audible Signal
Bell & Siren Unit
Cab Alarm
Cab Indicator
Cab Whistle
Code Continuous Cab Signal with Whistle & Acknowledger
Indicator, Cab; Audible
Klaxon
Reliostop
Warning Hooter
Warning Whistle/Whistle
Whistle Signals
Other Forsm (4C2 e)
Bell
Fog Gong
Fog Repeater
StaffWarning Systems
Movable Automatic Warning Devices
Train Operated Warning System (TOWS)
Inductive Loop Warning System (ILSW)
Track Crew Warning Signals
Track Indicators
Radio Signal Terms (4C3)
300
BeaconiEuro-balise Beacon
Electronic Signalling
Electronic Token
Electronic Token System
Euro-Radio
GPSINAVSTAR GPS/GPS Technology
Radio-Based Token System
Radio Block
Radio Block System
Radio Electronic Token Block (RETB)
Radio Signalling
Radio Token Block
Radio Token Equipment
Radio-Shunting
Radio Token Block System
Radio Token System
Radio Tokenless Block
Raliophone
RETB System
Sat-Guidance System/Sat-Based Guidance System
Token Block
Transponder
Wireless Signal System
Staff & Ticket, Tablet, Token, Train Order & Time Interval Forms (4D)
General Note
Staff Forms (4Dl)
Absolute Staff System/Absolute Staff Instrument
Annett's Key
Automatic Electric Staff Instrument
Automatic Staff Exchanging ApparatuslAutomate Exchange Equipment!
Automatic Tablet Exchange
Electric Staff
Electric Train Staff
Electric Staff Instrument
301
Electric Staff Block System
Electric Staff System
Electric Staff Working
Electric Train Staff & Ticket System
Electric Train Staff System
Intermediate Siding Junction Instrument
Large Electric Staff
O.E.S. Staff
One Train Working
Permissive Staff/Permissive Attachment
Pusher Attachment
Single Line Staff
Single Line StaffBox
Single Line Ticket
Single Staff System Equipment
Staff
Staff Working
Staff Catcher
Staff Crane/Crane, Staff
StaffManual Block System
Staff Pouches
Staff System
Subsidiary Electric Staff Working
Train Staff/Train-Staff
Train Staff System/Train-Staff System
Webb & Thompson Electric Staff
W & T Electric Staff System
Webb & Thompson Electric Staff Instrument
Wooden Staff/Wooden Train Staff
Staff & Ticket Forms (4D2)
Paper Ticket Method
Staff & Ticket/Staff-&-Ticket
Staff & Ticket System
Ticket System
Train Staff & Ticket
302
Train Staff System/Train-Staff System
Wooden Train Staff & Paper Ticket Method
Token Forms (4D3)
Automatic Token Exchange
Ball TokeniBall-Token
Ball Token Type
Block Token
Long Section Token
Section Token
Electric Token
Electric Token Apparatus
Electric Token Block Equipment
Electric Token Instrument
Electric Token Methods
Electric Token System
Electric Token SystemlElectric Token Block
Key Token (I), (II)
Key Token Block System
Key Token Transfer System
Key Token Balancer
Key Token Instrument
Key Token System
Neale's Ball Token Instrument
Neale's Single Line Combined Ball Token & Block Instrument
No Signalman Remote Key Token WorkinglNo-Signalman Remote Key
Token Working
No Signalman Key Token
No Signalman Token Block
No Signalman Token System Equipment
One Train Working
Signalman-to-Signalman Token Working
Signalman to Automatic Operated Token Working
Single Line Token Instrument
Token
Token Block System
303
-----_.__._..._... ----------
Token Signalling
Electric Single-Line Token System
Token Type Block Instrument
Token-Forms
Token Forms-II
Main Section (Unidirectional) Token
Engineering Token
Test Token
Special Token
Tyer's Key Token Instrument
Van Schaar Train Token System
Tablet & Tablet & Token Forms (4D4)
Ball Tablet Token Instrument
Electric TabletlElectric Train Token
Electric Tablet Instrument
Electric Tablet System
Electric Train Tablet Method
Single Line Tablet
Tablet
Tablet Block Systems
Tablet Block Train Operation
Tablet Catcher
Tablet Instrument
Tablet Pouch
Tablet Machine
Tablet System
Tablet System of Working
Tyer's Electric Train Tablet
Tyer #7 Tablet Instrument
#6 Tyer's Tablet Machine
Tyer's Tablet Instrument
Tyer's Electric Tablet SystemlTyer's Tablet System
Tokenless Forms (4D5)
General Note
Scottish Region Tokenless Block
304
Tokenless Block
Tokenless Block Equipment
Tokenless Block Working/Tokenless Block System
Tokenless Block Instrument
Tokenless Block Working
Train Order Forms (4D6)
Balloon Train Order
Banner Type Train Order Signal
Boot-Jack Type Train Order Signal
Box Type Train Order
Center-Pivoted, 2-Position Train Order Signal
Double-Arm UQ Train Order Signal
Electric Enclosed Disc Train Order Signal
Electro-Mechanical Train Order Signal
Nineteen Order
Slow Order
Telegraph Train-Order Signal
Telephone Train Order Sign
Thirty One Order
Timetable & Train Order (T & O)/Time Table & Train Order System
Train Order Boards
Train Order/Train-Order
Train-Order Lineside Signal
Train Order Signal/Train-Order Signal
Train Order Signals of the Color Light Type
Train-Order System
Train-Order Working
Written Train Orders
Yarrington Type of Train Order Signal
Time Interval Forms (4D7)
Telegraph Block or Time-Interval System
Time Interval System/Time Interval-System
Time Interval Method
Time Interval/Time-Interval
Time Interval System of Working/Time-Interval System of Safeworking
305
Time System
Other Forms
Direct Traffic Control (DTC)
Space Interval Method
Telegraph & Ticket Method
Telegraph Block System
Telegraph Message System
Telegraphic Order Method of Train Working
Telegraphic Orders
Ticket & Section Order System
Time-Code System
Timetables/Time-Tables
Time-Table Operation
Train Warrant Control (TWC)
Level/Grade Crossings Signs, Signals, Gates, Barriers & Related Devices (4E)
General Note
Integrative LC/GC Terms (4El)
General Note
Active Warning Devices
Automatic Devices
Automatic Protection
Automatic Safety Installations for Level Crossing
Automatic Waming Devices
Automatically Controlled Level-Crossing (Grade Crossing) Protection
Automatic Level Crossing Protection
Conventional Track Circuit-Operated Level Crossing Warning System
Crossing Device
Crossing Protection
Crossing Warning Device
Crossing Warning System
Electric Flagman
Grade Crossing Warning Device
Grade Crossing Waming Systems
Highway Crossing Alarm
Highway Crossing Protection/Highway Grade Crossing Protection
306
Highway Crossing Signal
Highway Crossing Warnings & Controls
Highway Grade Crossing Warning Devicess
Highway Grade Crossing Warning System
Level-Crossing Protection
Level Crossing Traffic Warning System
Luminous Signal
Passive Warning Devices
Protective Crossings
Protective Device
Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Protection
Train-Activated Warning Devices
Warning Devices
Warning Systems
Lighted Level & Grade Crossing Signals (4E2 a) )
Advance Warning Signal (Highway Crossing)
AGA Two-Color Highway Danger Signal!AGA Highway Danger Signal
Automatic Signal Devices
Barrow Crossing Warning Indicator
Cantilever Signal
Color-Light Highway Signal
Crossing Signal
Flashing Lights
Flashing Light Highway Crossing Signals
Flashing Light Signals/Flashing-Light Signals
Flashing Light Type
Flashlights/Flashlight Signals
Grade Crossing Signal
Grade Crossing Signaling
Highway Grade-Crossing Protective Signals
Highway Approach Signal
Highway Crossing Signal/Signal, Highway Crossing
Railroad-Railroad Grade Crossing Signal
LED Highway Crossing Lamp
LEX-C Highway Grade Crossing Flashing Light Units
307
Level Crossing Signals
Level Crossing with Flashing Light Signals
Level Crossing with a Signal System To Give Warning ofthe Approach
of Trains
Miniature Warning Lights MWL)lMiniature RIG Warning Lights
Signal, Flashing Light
Signals for Tramway Level Crossing
Pre-Warning Signals
Tram Crossing Signals
Visible Warning Signals
Wig-Wag Signal
Wig Wag/Wig Wag Type/Wig Wag Crossing Signal
Lighted Crossing Signals Attached to Other Devices (4E2 b) )
General Note
Automatic Crossing Gates & Flashing Light-Signals
Flashing Lights & Gates
Level Crossing Gates, Barriers & Warning Signals
Signal Lights & Other Grade Crossing Warning Equipment
Barriers & Gates (4E3)
General Note
Overarching Terms (4E3 a) )
Barriers
Level Crossing Barrier
Barriers, Full Barriers, & Gates (4E3 b) )
General Note
Full Barrier
Automatic Barriers (4E3 b) 1) )
General Note
Automatic Gates
Level Automatic Barriers
Level Crossing with Automatic Barriers
Automatic Barrier Crossing Locally Monitored
Automatic Gates
Automatic Lifting Barriers
Barrier Gates
308
Crossing Gates
Electrically Operated Lifting Barriers
Gated Level Crossing
Level Crossing Barrier
Level Crossing Gates
Level Crossing with Full Barrier
Lifting Barriers
Lifting Barriers Level Crossing
Boom Gates
Electro-Hydraulic Pedestrian Barriers
On Call Barriere Crossing (OCB)
Lifting Barrier Level Crossing
Robot Barrier Gates
Short-Arm Gates
Wicket Gate
"Manned" and Manually Operated Barriers (4E b) 2)
Manned Gated Crossing
Manner Barriers
Manned Barriers Crossing
MCB/Local//MCB/Remote//MCB/CCTV//TOB
Manned Level Crossing
Locally Controlled Manned Level Crossing
Remotely Controlled Manned Level Crossing
CCTV Monitored Remote Barrier Crossing
Manually Controlled Gate
Manually Controlled
Manually Controlled Barrier Protected by Closed Circuit Television
(MCB/CCTV)
Manually Controlled Barriers (MCB)
Power-Worked MCB
Audible Warning Devices
Traffic Lights
Barriers
TMO (Trainman Operated [Barrier])
Trainman-Operated Barrier (TOB)
309
Half Barriers & Gates (4E3 b) )
Half-Barrier
Automatic Half Arm Barrier Installation
Automatic Half Barrier
Automatic Half Barrier Crossing (AHB)
Automatic Half-Barrier Crossing
Automatic Half Barrier Locally Monitored (ABCL)
Automatic Level Crossing & Half Gate
Crossings with Automatic Operated Half Barrier
Double Half Barrier & Full Barrier Crossing
Level Automatic: Half Barriers
Level Crossing Half Barriers
ARB Crossings
Automatic Barrier Crossing
Automatic Level Crossing & Half Gate
Electric Level Crossing with Half Barriers & Signals
Gates & Automatic Half-Barriers
Double Half Barrier
Single Half Barrier
Open Crossings (4E4)
General Note
Accomodation Crossing
Automatic Open Crossing
Automatic Open Crossing Locally Monitored (AOCL)
Automatic Open Crossing Remotely Monitored (AOCR)
Automatic Open Level Crossings
Level Automatic Open Level
Ungated Barrier Level Crossing
Open Crossing (OC)
Open Level Crossing
Uncontrolled Open Crossings/Open Crossing with No Controls
Sound Signals (4E5)
Audible Automatic Warning Devices
Audible-Pedestrian Crossings
Automatic Bell
310
Bell
Bell, Gong, Audible Warnings
Crossing Alarms
Crossing Bell
Double Gong Highway Crossing Bell
Electronic BelllElectronic Warning Bells
Enclosed Crossing Bells
Enclosed Type Gong
Grade Crossing Alarm
Locomotive Type Crossing Bell
Highway Crossing Alarm
Highway Crossing Bell
Highway Crossing Bell-Electronic/Highway Crossing Bell-Mechanical
Highway Grade Crossing Warning Device
Hoeschen Crossing SignallHoeschen Bell System
Road Crossing Signal
Skeleton Bell
Sound-Bell/Sound Bell
Vibrating Bell/Bell, Vibrating
Signs (4E5)
Auxiliary Sign
Barricade Sign
Close Up Road Warning Sign [& with Flashinglight]
Crossing Signs
Crossbuck Sign
Distant Road Warning Sign
Distant Warning Sign
Gates Not Working Sign
Highway & Barricades Sign
Highway Crossing Sign/Highway Grade Crossing Sign
Illuminated Sign
Level Crossing Halt Board
SignBoard
Railroad Crossing Sign
At the Crossing
311
Advance Warning Sign (& with Flashing Light)
Reflector Buttons
Road Signs & Signals at Level Crossing
St Andrew's Cross
St George's Advance Warning Board
Second Train Coming Sign
Signs (Crossing)
Warning Signs for Level Crossing
Other Forms (4E7)
General Note
Accomodation Crossing/Accomodation Level Crossing
Barrier Type Protection
Occupation Level Crossing
Pedestrian Crossing
Public Roadway Level Crossing
Road User Operated Level Crossing
Seismic Based Train Actuated Approach Warning at Level Crossing
The Orion - 300 Level Crossing Approach Warning System
Train Crew Operated Level Crossing
User-Worked Crossings
User-Worked Crossing Protected by Miniature Warning Lights
User-Worked Crossing with Telephone
Footpath Crossing
Bridle Path
312
4A2 Index: Alphabetical
"A" Plates
Absolute Staff System!Absolute Staff Instrument
391Accomodation Crossing/Accomodation Level Crossing
Acoustical & Radio Signals
Acoustical or Audible Signal
Acoustical Signal
Active Warning Devices
Advance Warning Board: Resume Speed Board
Advance Location Signs
Advance-Warning Sign/Advance Warning Sign
Advance Warning Signal (Highway Crossing)
AGA Highway Danger Signal/AGA Two-Color Highway
Danger Signal
AHB Crossings
Alias Plate
Alinement Marker
Alinement Signs or Markers
All Trains Stop Board: Temporary Outer
All-Weather Fusees
Alto Sign
Annett's Key
Approach Block Limit Sign/ABL Sign
Approach Sign
Arrow
Arrow-Shaped Vanes
Audible Automatic Warning Devices
Audible Cab IndicatorlIndicator, Cab, Audible
Audible Cab Signalling/Audible-Cab Signalling
Audible Danger Signal
Audible Indicator
Audible-Pedestrian-Crossings
Audible Signal
Audible Signal/Audible Fog Signal
313
366
393
432
378
378
378
414
361
347
343
418
418
427
366
354
351
363
379
370
393
350
370
345
373
382,428
387-88
386
378
388
383,428
379,387
378
Audible Signalling Devices
Audible Warning Systems
Automatic Barriers
Automatic Barrier Crossing
Automatic Barrier Crossing Locally Monitored
Automatic Bell
Automatic Block Sign
Start Automatic Block Sign
End Automatic Block Sign
Automatic Controlled Level-Crossing (Grade Crossing)
Protection
Automatic Crossing Gates & Flashing Light-Signals
Automatic Device
Automatic Electric Staff Instrument
Automatic Gates
Automatic Half Arm Barrier Installation
Automatic Half Barrier
Automatic Half Barrier Crossing (ARB)
Automatic Half-Barrier Crossing
Automatic Half Barrier Locally Monitored (ABCL)
Automatic Level Crossing & Half Gate
Automatic Level Crossing Protection
Automatic Lifting Barriers
Automatic Open Crossing
Automatic Open Crossing Locally Monitored (AOCL)
Automatic Open Crossing Remotely Monitored (AOCR)
Automatic Open Level Crossing
Automatic Protection
Automatic Safety Installations for Level Crossings
Automatic Safety Lock Switch Stand
Automatic Safety Switch Stand
Automatic Staff Exchanging Apparatus/Automatic Exchange
Equipment/Automatic Tablet Exchange
Automatic Stand
Automatic Switch Stand
314
378
378
423,424
427
424
383,428
349-50
415
422
414
393
424
427
427
427
427
427
427
415
424
428
428
428
428
414-
415
376
376
393
376
376
Automatic Token Exchange
Automatic Warning Devices
Autonomous Units
Auxiliary Marker
Auxiliary Sign
AWS Cancelling Indicator
Baak
Ball Tablet Token Instrument
Ball TokenlBall-Token
Ball Token Type
Balloon Train Order
Banger /Cracker
Banner Type Train Order
Barricade Sign
Barriers
Barriers & Gates
Barrier Gates
Barriers, Full Barriers, & Gates
Barrier Type Protection
Barrow Crossing Warning Indicator
BeaconlEuro-Balise Token
Begin Cab Signal Territory/End Cab Signal Territory
Begin CTSlEnd CTC Sign
Begin Rules, 400-406/End Rilles, 450-453
Begin Rules, 450-4531End Rules 450-453
Begin TCS EndlEnd TCS Sign
Bell
Bell & Siren Unit
Bell, Gong
Bell, Gong, Audible Warning
Bell, Single Stroke
Bell (Switch Indicator)
Bell, Vibrating
Blind Siding Sign
315
399
415
418
354
429
363
357
404
399
400
467
379
408
352-353, 429
423
423
424
423
432
418
389
349
349
350
350
349
383,386,428
388
383
428
383
412
383
348
Blind Target
Block Posts
Block Token
Long Section Token Section
Section Token
Blue Flag Devices
Blue Flag Derail
Blue Flags
Derail
Stop
Stop (Portable)
Camp Cars
Alto
Danger Men Working on This Track
Danger Tank Car Connected
Boards
Boards & Posts
Boom Gates
Boundary Marker/Boundary Post/Boundary Stone
Boot-Jack Type Train Order Signal
Box Type Train Order
Bridge Sign/Bridge Number Sign
Buffer Stop Indicators
Cab Alarm
Cab & Train Control Sound Signal
Cab Indicator
Cab Signal, Audible
Cab Signals-Sound
Cab Whistle
Cantilever Signals
"C" Markerl"S" Marker
Camp Cars Flag
Car Stop Plate
CCTV Monitored Remote Barrier Crossing
Caution Board
316
374-75
364
369
369
369
369
357
358-59
424
358
408
408
351
356
388
386
388
386
386
388
419
354
370
366
426
358
Center-Pivoted, 2-Position Train Order Signal
Checquered Sign
Clayton's Automatic Detonator Placer
Clayton's Fogging Machine
Clearance Mark
Clearance Post
Code Continuous Cab Signal with Whistle & Acknowledger
Chock Flag
Cinder Station Limits Sign
Close Up Road Warning Sign
Coasting Mark -- AC & DC
Color & Position
Color-Light Highway Signal
Column-Throw Stand
Conventional Track Circuit-Operated Level Crossing Approach
Warning System
Corporate or Other Political Subdivision Sign
Countdown Board
Countdown Marker Board
Crossbuck Sign
Crossing Alarm
Crossing Bell
Crossing Devices
Crossing Gates
Crossing Protection
Crossing Signs
Crossing Signals
Crossing Warning Devices
Crossing Warning System
Crossing with Automatic-Operated Half Barrier
CTC Sign
Begin
End
Curve & Elevation Sign
Curve Speed Sign
317
408
370
379
379
354
365
388
369
348
429
356
374
419
376
415
341
358
358
429-30
383
384,428
415
424
415
429
419
416
416
349,427
351,365
347
Cut Systems
Danger Do Not Tresspass on the Railroad
Danger Men Working on This Track
Danger Tank Car Connected
Day Target
Derail Blue Flag
Derail Location Signs
Derail
Derail Sign
Derail Switch Stand
Derail Stand
Detonating Fog Signal
Detonating Signal
Detonator
Detonator Container
Detonator BoxlDetonator CaselDetonator Holder/
Detonator Tin
Detonator Machine
Detonator Placer
Detonator Signal
Diagonal Arrow & Mask Vane
Diamond/Single Vane
Diamond Shaped Marker
Direct Traffic Control (DTC)
Distance Marker
Distance Road Warning Signs
Distance Warning Board
Distant Warning Sign
Double-Arm UQ Train Order Signal
Double Gong Highway Bell
Double Gong Highway Crossing Bell
Double Half Barrier
Double Half Barrier & Full Barrier Crossing
Double Stand
318
348
340
370
370
375
369
348
370
370
376
376
379
380
380
380
380
380-381
381
373
374
354
412
354
430
358
430
408
384
428
427
427
377
Double Track Sign
Beginning of Double Track
End of Double Track
Drawbridge Sign
Duplex Detonator
Duplex Fog Signal
Dwarf Stand
Electric Enclosed Disc Train Order Signal
Electric Flagman
Electric Level Crossing with Half Barriers & Signals
Electrically Operated Lifting Barriers
Electric Single-Line Token System
Electric Staff
Electric Staff Block System
Electric Staff Instrument
Electric Staff System
Electric TabletlElectric Train Token
Electric Tablet Instrument
Electric Token
Electric Table System
Electric Token Apparatus
Electric Token Block Equipment
Electric Token Instrument
Electric Token Methods
Electric Token System
Electric Token SystemlElectric Token Block
Electric Traction Signs
Electric Train Staff
Electric Train Staff & Ticket System
Electric Train Staff System
Electric Train Tablet Method
Electro-Hydraulic Pedestrian Barriers
Electro-Mechanical Train Order Signal
Electronic Bell/Electronic Warning Bell
319
350
348
381
381
377
408
384,416
427
424
403
393
394
394
394
404
404
399
404
399
399
399-400
400
400
400
370
394
394
394
404
424
408
384
Electronic Signalling
Electronic Token
Electronic Token Systems
Electric Traction Sign
Electric Train Section Mark
Electric Train Staff System
Electric Train Tablet Method
Electric Train Token: Electric Tablet
Electrical Hazard Sign
Electronic Bell/Electronic Warning Bell
Elevation Markers
Elevation Posts/Full Elevation Posts/Zero Elevation Posts
Enclosed Crossing Bell
Enclosed Type Gong
Enclosed Water Tight, Low & High Voltage Highway
Crossing Bell
Enclosed Geared Type Parallel Throw Switch Stand
End of Block Sign/Block-Limit Sign
End of Shunt Signal
End of Section Marker Board
End of Signal Territory
End of Token Section Proceed if Platform Clear Board
End of Track Circuit Sign
Euro-Radio
Explosive Signal
"F" PlatelNf Plate
Fire-Hazard Sign
Fixed Indicator
Fixed Marker
Fixed Sign
Fixed Signal Board
Flag
Flag Signal
Flagboard
320.
389
389
390
370
356
394
404
404
352
384
351
365
384,428
384,428
384
377
349
350
360
349
363
349
390
379
367
352
340,345
355
340
358
369
369
369
Flag Board/Metal Flag
Flanger Sign
Flare
FlashlightslFlashlight Signals
Flashing Light
Flashing Lights & Gates
Flashing Light Highway Crossing Signals
Flashing Light SignallFlashing-Light Signal
Flashing Light Type
Fog
Fog Detonator
Fog Gong
Fog Repeater
Fog Signal
Fogger
Fogging Lever Frame
Fogging Machine
Fuel Station Limit Signs
Full Barrier
Fusees
Gates & Automatic Half-Barriers
Gates Not Working Signal
Gated Level Crossing
Gearless Switch Stand
GPSlNavstar GPS/GPS Technology
Grade Crossing Alarm
Grade Crossing Signal
Grade Crossing Signaling
Grade Crossing Warning Device
Grade Crossing Warning System
Gradient Board
Gradient Posts
Ground Throw Stand
Ground Throw Switch Stand/Ground-Throw Switch Stand
321
359
351
381
419
419
422
419
419
419
381
381
388
388
381
381
381-82
382
348
423
382
427
430
424
378
390
384,428
420
420
416
416
365
365
377
377
Half Barriers & Gates
Half-Barriers
Hasty Triple Stand
High Banner Two Tie Switch Stand/Low Banner Two
Tie Switch Stand
Highway Crossing Alarm
Highway Crossing Bell
Highway Crossing Signal/Signal, Highway Crossing
High Speed Marker Board
High Switch Stand
High Target
High Switch Target
Highway Approach Signal
Highway & Barricade Sign
Highway Crossing Alarm
Highway Crossing BelllBell, Highway Crossing
Highway Crossing Bell-ElectroniclHighway Crossing Bell-
Electro-Mechanical
Highway Crossing ProtectionlHighway Grade Crossing
Protection
Highway Crossing SignlHighway Grade Crossing Sign
Highway Crossing Signal
Highway Grade-Crossing Protective Signals
Highway Grade Crossing Warning System
Highway Grade Crossing Sign
Highway Grade Crossing Warning Device
Highway Crossing Warning & Controls
Hoeschen Crossing SignalslHoeschen Bell System
Hub Safety Automatic Switch Stand
Indicating Board
Indication Board
Identification Plate
Identifying Plate
322
426-27
426-27
377
377
429
429
420
356
376
376
376
420
353,430
419
385
385,429
416
430
385,416
420
417
352
417,429
416
385,429
377
359
359
367
367
Track Circuits
Fireman's Call Plunger Plate
Telephone Plate
Identity Plate
Illuminated Sign
Illumination Switch Target
Indicator·
Indicator, Cab; Audible
Indicating Board
Indication Board
Instructional Sign
Integrative LC/GC Terms
Intermediate Siding Junction Indicator
Intermediate Stand
Intermediate Target
Iron Case, Enclosed Crossing Bell: Enclosed
Junction Signs
Key Token (I)
Key Token (II)
Key Token Balancer
Key Token Block System
Key Token Instrument
Key Token System
Key Token Transfer System
Klaxon
Landmark
Large Electric Staff
LED Highway Crossing Lamp
Letter Plate
Level Automatic Barrier
Level Automatic: Half Barrier
Level Automatic Open Crossing
323
367
372,430
372
345
388
359
359
340
414
394
377
376
384
348
400
401
401
401
401
401
401
388
355
394-96
420
367
424
427
428
Level Crossing Half Barrier
Level & Grade Crossing Signs, Signals, Gates, Barriers
& Related Accoutrements
Level Crossing Barriers
Level Crossing Gates
Level Crossing with Flashing Light Signals
Level Crossing Gates, Barriers & Warning Signals
Level Crossing Halt Board
Level Crossing Half Barrier
Level Crossing Protection
Level Crossing Signals
Level Crossing with Automatic Barrier
Level Crossing with Full Barrier
Level Crossing with Flashing Light Signals
Level Crossing with a Signal Systems to Give Warning of the
Approach of Trains
Level Crossing Traffic Warning System
Level/Grade Crossing Sound Signals
LEX-C Highway Grade Crossing Flashing Light Units
Lifting Barrier
Lifting Barrier Level Crossing
Lighted Crossing Signals Attached to Other Devices
Lighted Level & Grade Crossing Signals
Limit & Location Signs
Line Indicator
Line Speed Indicator
Lineside Board
Lineside Marker
Lineside Sign
Location Signs
Locomotive Type Crossing Bell
Low Revolving Target
Low Stand
Low Switch Stand
Low Target
324
427
414
423-24
424
421
422
430
427
417
421
424
424
421
421
417
382
420
424
424,425
422
418
348
346
346
359
355
340
341,347
385,429
376
377
377
376
Luminous Signal
Main Line Safety Switch Stand/Mainline Safety Switch Stand
Main Line Switch Stands
Main Track Switch Targets
Maintenance Limits Signs
Maintenance of Way Signs
"Manned" Barrier
Manned Barrier Crossing
Manually Controlled Barriers
Manually Control Gates
Manually Controlled Gates Barriers
Manually Controlled Barriers Protected by Closed Circuit
Television (MCB CCTV)
Manually Operated Barriers
Manned Gate Crossing
MCB/Local
MCBlRemote
MCB/CCTV
TOB
Manned Level Crossing
Locally Controlled Manned Level Crossing
Remotely Controlled Manned Level Crossing
Marks & Markers
Marks & Markers for Japan
Route Identifiction Mark
Station Approach Mark
Slow Speed Release Mark
Tablet Carrying Mark
Signal Aspect Confirmation Position Mark
Signal Alarm Mark
Power Drive Mark
Coasting Mark - AC & DC
Train Stop Position Mark
Electric Train Section Mark
Markers
325
417
377
375,377
375
351
350
425
425
426
426
426
426
425?
425
425-26
353
355-56
353
Marker Board
Marker (Board)
Marker Plate
Metal Flags
Mile Boards
Mile Post
Mile Post Sign
Miniature RIG Warning Lights: Miniature
Miniature Warning Lights (MWL)/Miniature RIG Warning
Light
Miscellaneous Signs
Monument Marker
Morphological-Related Terms
Name Board
Name Plate/Plate, Name
Neale's Ball Token Instrument
Neale's Single Line Combined Bell Token & Block Instrument
Nineteen Order
Non-Optical Signals
No Signalman Key Token
No Signalman Remote Key Token Working/No-Signalman
Remote Key Token Working
No Signalman Token Block
No Signalman Token System Equipment
Notice-Board
Number Boards
Number Plate: Plate, Number
Obround-Shaped Vanes
Obround Vane
Occupation Level Crossing
Octagon/Single Vane
O.E.S. Staff
On Call Barrier Crossing (OCB)
326
359
353
369
369
359
365
341-43
421
421
370
356
372
359
367
401
401
409
382
401
402
402
401
359
359
368
373
374
432
374
395
425
Once Stop Sign Marker
One Train Working
Open Crossing (OC)
Open Crossing with No Controls: Uncontrolled
Open Level Crossing
Order Boards
Other Forms
Other Shapes
Other Speed Signs
Curve Speed Signs
Permanent Slow Speed Signs
Proceed Prepared to Stop Signs
Temporary Slow & Release Sign
Zone Speed Sign
Other Terms
Overarching Terms
Paper Ticket Method
Parallel-Throw Switch Stand
Passive Warning Devices
Pedestrian Crossing
Permanent Slow Speed Sign
Permanent Speed Restriction BoardlPermanent Speed-
Restrictive Board
Permissive StaffIPermissive Attachment
Permanent Warning Board
Permanent Whistle Post/Temporary Whistle Post
Plate, NumberlNumber Plate
Plates, & Flag Forms
Pony Stand
Portable Blue Flag
Positive-Active Switch Stand
Power Drive Mark
Power-Operated Switch Sign
327
355
395,402
428
428
428
360
369,412,432
374
347
375
340,371,378,
423
398
377
417
432
347
360
395
360
366
368
368
377
369-70
377
356
353
Power-Working MCB
Audible Warning Devices
Traffic Lights
Barriers
Pre-Warning Signals
Proceed Prepared to Stop Sign
Property Line Post/Property Post
Protective Crossings
Protective Devices
Public Roadway Level Crossing
Pusher Attachment
"R" Board/"Z" Board
Radio-Based Token System
Radio Block
Radio Block System
Radio Channel Change BoardlRadio Channel Indicator
Radio Electronic Token Block (RETB)
Radio-Shunting
Radio Signal Terms
Radio Signalling
Radio Token Block
Radio Token Block System
Radio Token Equipment
Radio Token System
Radio Tokenless Block
Raliophone
Railroad Crossing Signs: Highway, at the Crossing, Advance
Warning Sign (and with Flashing Lights)
Railroad Grade Crossing Signs
Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Protection
Railroad Property- Tresspassing Forbidden Under Penalty
Railway Sound Signals/Rail Sound Signals
Railroad-Railroad Grade Crossing Signal
Rectangle-Shaped Vane
328
426
420
347
366
417
417
432
395
360
390
390
390
360
390
391
389
390
390
391
391
391
391
392
430-31
348
417
342
379
421
373
Reduced Speed Sign
Reflective Marker Board
Reflector Buttons
Reflectorized Distant BoardlDistant Board/Fixed Board
Reliostop
Remote Control Signs
Begin Remote Control Signs
End Remote Control Signs
Repeater Signal
Restricted Clearance Sign
Restricting Sign: Speed Zone Signs
Resume-Speed Board (Permanent)/Resume-Speed Board
(Temporary)/Advance Warning Board
Resume Speed Sign
RETB System
Retro-Reflective (Road Traffic Type) PSR Sign
Road Crossing Signal
Road Signs and Signals at Level Crossing
Road User Operated Level Crossing
Roadway Structures Sign
Route Identification Mark
Robot Barrier Gates
Rock Slide Signs
Route Electric Source Sign Marker
Rule 55 Excempt Indicator Plate
Safety Signs
Saint Andrew's Cross
Saint George's Advance Warning Board
Sat-Guidance/Sat-Based Guidance System
Scottish Region Tokenless Block
Second Train Coming Sign
Section Entrance Marker
Section Posts/Sub-section Posts
Seismic Based Train Actuated Approach Warning at Level
329
343
356
431
360
388
350
355
353
345
361
343
392
343
385,429
431
432
351
356
425
348
355
368
352
431
431
392
406
429
354
364
Crossing
Senal ...
Shape Forms
Short Arm Gate
Shunting Limits Board
Shunting Signal Marker & Shunting Sign Marker
Skeleton Bell
Siding & Yard Switch Target
Siding Derail Target/Siding Derail Switch Target
Single Half Barrier
Sighting Board
Sign
Signs (Crossing)
Sign for Day Running
Signs & Markers
SignBoard
Sign Marker
Signal-Not-In-Use Sign
Signal Board
Signpost
Signal
Signal Alarm Mark
Signal Aspect Confirmation Position Mark
Signal Background Plate
Signal, Flashing Light
Signal Identification Plate
Signal Lights & Other Grade Crossing Warning Equipment
Signal Mounted Signs
Signal Warning Board
Signalman-to Automatic Operational Token Working
Signalman-to-Signalman Token Working
Signal Marker Board
Signal Number Plate
Signals for Tramway Level Crossing
Signal Territory Limit Signs
330
432-33
347
372-73
425
361
355
385-86,429
375
375
427
362
340,429
431
345
341
430
357
371
361
340,366
344
356
356
368
421
368
423
368
362
402
402
357
368
421
348
Single Line Token Instrument
Single Staff System Equipment
Single Line Tablet
Single Line Staff
Single Line Staff Box
Single Line Ticket
Skeleton Bell
Slow Board
Slow Order
Slow Speed Release Mark
Snow Slide Signs
Snowplow Signs
Raise Snowplow Sign
Lower Snowplow Sign
Sound-Bell/Sound Bell
Sound Signals
Space Interval Method
Speed Board
Speed Control & Restriction Signs
Speed Control & Speed Restriction Sign
Speed Control Signs
Speed Control-Temporary & Permanent
Speed Limit-Permanent Sign/Speed Limit-Temporary Sign
Speed
Slow
Resume Speed
Speed Restriction Sign
Speed Restrictions Sign-Temporary
Speed Zone Signs
Speed Zone Sign
Restricting Sign
Resume Speed Sign
Spring Switch Marker/Spring Switch Sign
Standard Right of Way Sign
Staff
331
402
395
404
395
395
395
385-86,429
361
409
356
348
352
386,429
428
412
36'1
342
342-43
342
344
344
347
344
345
344-345
357
342
395-96
StaffForms
Staff & Ticket/Staff-&-Ticket
Staff Ticket, Tablet, Train Order & Time Interval Forms
Staff & Ticket Forms
Staff& Ticket System
Staff & Ticket Working
Staff & Working
Staff Catcher
Staff Crane/Crane Staff
StaffManual Block System
StaffPouches
Staff System
Staff Warning System
Movable Automatic Warning Device
Train Operated Warning System (TOWS)
Inductive Loop Warning System (ILWS)
Start of Section BoardlEnd of Section Board
Starting Signal Notice Board
Station Approach Mark
Station Limit Board
Station Location Signs
Station Narne Board
Station Narne Plate
Station Narne Sign
Station Signs
Steelton Switch Stand
Stone Drum Switch Stand
Stop Board
Stop Indicator
Stop (Portable)
Stop Tank Car Converted
Subdivision Signs
Subsidiary Electric Staff Working
Sudden Release Shunting Sign Mark
Switch Stand, Parallel Throw
332
393
398
393
397
398
396
396
396
396
396
396
396
389
361-62
362
356
362
348
362
369
348
348
377
377
363-64
364
370
370
342
397
355
377
Switch Stand Forms
Switch Stand Target
Switch Target
Switch Target Reflector Type/Reflectorized Switch Target!
Reflector Target
Switching Limit Signs
"T" Plate
Tablet
Tablet & Tablet & Token Forms
Tablet Carrying Mark
Tablet Catcher
Tablet Instrument
Tablet Machine
Tablet Pouch
Tablet Block System
Tablet Block Train Operations
Tablet System
Tablet System of Working
Targets
Target Stand
Telegraph Block or Time-Interval System
Telegraph Block System
Telegraph Message System
Telegraphic Order Method of Train Working
Telegraph & Ticket Method
Telegraph Train-Order Signal
Telegraph Train-Order System
Telegraphic Orders
Telephone Train-Order Signal
Temporary Outer Speed Board/Temporary Inner Speed Board/
All Trains Stop Board
Temporary Slow & Release Sign
Temporary Reduce, Slow, Resume Signs
Reduce Speed Sign
333
376
372
355,372
376
348
369
405
404
356
405
405
405
405
405
405
405
405
371-73,376
376
411
408
412
413
412
409
409
413
409
363
347
344
Slow Sign
Resume Speed Sign
Temporary Speed-Reduction Board
Temporary Speed Restriction Indicator
Temporary Speed Restrictions
Commencement Indicator
Special Speed Restriction Board
Spate Indicator
Termination Indicator
Temporary Warning Board
Terminating Boards
Terms (Target) Related to Railroad-Functions
Territory Limits Sign
The Orion- 300 Level Crossing Approach Warning System
Thirty One Order
Three-In-One Automatic Switch Stand
Ticket System
Ticket & Section Order System
Time-Code System
Time Interval Forms
Time Interval/Time-Interval
Time Interval Method
Time Interval System/Time-Internal System
Time-Interval System of Working/Time Interval System of
Safeworking
Time Systems
Timetables/Time-Tables
Time-Tables & Train Operations (T & TO)/Time Table
& Train Order System
Time-Table Operation
TMO (Trainman Operated [Barrier])
Token
Token Block
Token Block System
Token Block Working
334
362
346
346-47
363
363
374
349
433
409
377
398
413
413
411
411-12
411
411
412
412
413
409
413
426
402
392
402
352
Token Forms
Token Forms II
Main Section (Unidirectional) Token
Engineering Token
Test Token
Special Token
Token Signalling
Token Type Block Instrument
Tokenless Block
Tokenless Block Equipment
Tokenless Block Instrument
Tokenless Block System Equipment
Tokenless Block Working/Tokenless Block System
Tokenless Block Working
Tokenless Forms
Torpedo
Torpedo Signal
Track Capacities Signs
Track Crew Warning Signals
Track Indicators
Trackside Indicators
Track-Signs
Trackside Sign
Train-Activated Warning Devices
Train Clear of Passing Loop Indicator/Advanced Starting Loop
Clear Signal
Train Crew Operated Level Crossing
Trainman Operated Barrier (TOB)
TMO= Trainman Operated [Barrier]
Train Order Forms
Train Order/Train-Order
Train Order Board
Train Order Signal/Train-Order Signal
Train-Order System
Train Order Signal of the Color Light Type
335
403
403
403
406-07
407
408
408
408
408
408
407
380
382
348
389
389
341
341
341
418
362
433
426
426
407
410
363,409
410
410
410
Train-Order Working
Train-Over Lineside Signal
Train Staff/Train-Staff
Train Staff & Ticket
Train Staff & Ticket System
Train Staff System/Train-Staff System
Train Stop Position Mark
Train Stop Sign Marker/Car Stop Marker
Train Warrant Control (TWC)
Tram Crossing Signals
Transponder
Transportation Sign
Tresspass-Right-of-Way Sign/Tresspass-Bridge SignlTresspass-
Crossing Sign [2 sub terms]
Tresspass Sign
Trolley Wire Dead Section Indication
Trolley Electric Source Sign Marker
Tube Detonator/Open Section Detonator
Tunnel Sign
Tyer's Electric Tablet System/Tyer's Tablet System
Tyer's Electric Train Tablet
Tyer's Key Token Instrument
Tyer's Tablet Instrument
Tyer's #7 Tablet Instrument
#6 Tyer's Tablet Instrument
UAR Speed Signals (=Signs)
Speed Restriction
Start .
End .
Speed Restriction Sign
Uncontrolled Open Crossing/Open Crosssing with No Crossings
Ungated Barrier Level Crossing
Unlighted Fixed Forms
User-Worked Crossings
336
410-411
410
397
398
398
397
356
355
413
422
352
342
342
342
355
355
382
348
406
406
403
406
406
406
344-45
428
428
339
433
User-Worked Crossing Protected by Miniature Warning
Lights (UWC-MWL)
User-Worked Crossing with Telephone
Footpath Crossing
Bridle Path
Valuation Section Sign 342
Van Schoor Train Token System 403
Vibrating Bell 429
Vibrating BelllBell, Vibrating 386
Visible Warning Signals 422
W & T Electric Staff System 397
Warning Board 364
Warning Devices 418
Warning Hooter 388
Warning No Clearance for Man on Side or Top Car Sign 353
Warning Sign/Commencement Sign/Termination Sign 345
Warning Signs for Level Crossings 431
Warning Systems 418
Warning Whistle/Whistle 358
Watering Station Limit Sign 348
Watering Board 364
Wayside Marker 357
Webb & Thomas Electric Staff. 397
Webb & Thomas Electric StaffInstrument 397
Whistle Board 364
Whistle Post 366
Whistle Sign Marker 388
Whistle Signals 388
Wicket Gate 425
Wig Wag/Wig Wag Type/Wig Wag Crossing Signal 422
Wig-Wag Signal 422
Wing Marker 352
Wireless Signal Systems 392
337
Wooden Staff/Wooden Train Staff
Wooden Train Staff & Paper Ticket Method
Written Train Order
"y" Board
Yard Limit Board
Yard Switch Stand
Yarrington Type of Train Order Signal
"z" Board/"R" Board
Zone Speed Sign
338
397
398
411
364
348,364
375,377
411
346
347
4B Unlighted Fixed Forms
General Note I. Unlighted Fixed Forms are not entirely unlighted. Certain types
of Signs can be lighted. This is also true of Targets. Yet the essential form is not
lighted nor does it require lighting. Some cross-references are needed for
unlighted devices that can include a lighted dimension.
General Note II. The first edition separated Targets from Signs and allied forms.
That appeared to be a sound decision since Signs have constant messages while
Targets have changeable message; Targets are in some sense Signals. Yet both are
often unlighted. In the first edition non-lighted Signal forms were placed together
whether visual, acoustical or radio. This placement of diverse Signals together
was not entirely satisfactory. Acoustical and radio forms are now together but
without the visual. This remains a less than fully adequate solution since some
acoustical and visual Signals are unified. Nonetheless, having those forms
together illustrates an important non-visual T-M form. Cross-references indicate
where Signals forms are been separated.
General Note III. Unlighted Fixed Forms with Constant Messages need to be
examined as a group. They include all forms ofrailroad/railway safety aids:
Signs, Marks, Markers, Boards, Posts, Plates, Flags. While these forms are
overshadowed by Signals they remain an important element.
General Note IV. The Classification for Unlighted Fixed Forms goes back to 1990
and 1991. That Classification, which appears in International Railway Signals,
Part F, was transmitted largely intact to the General Classification (part H 19941
2003) It is at variance with the schema for Unlighted forms in the Database.
Where the Classification has nine segments within two major headings the
Database has just four major segments (one of which has further differentiation).
The Database has four other segments for other Unlighted Forms which in some
cases contain Signs under other names. The Classification has two such groups.
The Classification needs to be reformulated along the lines of the Database
constructs. Hence, there are no classification entries in this study. The fmal
segment of Unlighted forms, that of Targets, does include classifications.
339
4B1 Overarching Terms
General Note. Most railroad Signs are of a specific character. Overarching terms
are employed by only a few sources. And even some of these refer to specific
Sign forms. Overaching terms are often employed without definitions and they
may be interchangeable with companion terms.
FIXED INDICATOR. This is employed is seemingly interchangeable with Fixed
Signs and similar terms by ERS.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
FIXED SIGN. This and other terms are often employed with little description.
ERS-H employs this term for non-Signal devices that are in place near tracks.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
INSTRUCTIONAL SIGN. Term for Sign that gives directions or orders. RONT
includes this general term which stems from OED. It has a very inclusive usage.
Reference: RONT 2001
LINESIDE SIGN. A term that is seemingly interchangeable with Fixed and
Trackside Signs.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
SIGN. A few surveyed sources employ this term. It extends well beyond railway
use but can be applied when linked to rail safety.
References: FRA-3 1979, tTIC Code
SIGNPOST. Fisher views this term as a general use term that is nterchangeable at
least in some instances with Boards. Signpost means Sign as well as a post for
attaching a Sign to it.
Reference: Fisher 1976
SIGNS & MARKERS. For RONT this category includes posts, notices and other
unspecified means which convey information. This excludes Signals.
Reference: RONT 2001
340
TRACKSIDE INDICATORS. The word Indicator is employed for Board, Plate,
Sign terms. It seemingly does not constitute a category. This specific term
includes mostly speed related Signs; it also includes a shunt-related Sign and
Marker Board. It is not a general overarching term.
Reference: RONT 2001
TRACKSIDE SIGNS. A term that refers to Signs near railway operations. It is
seemingly interchangeable with a variety of other overarching terms.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
TRACK-SIGNS. Alaska Railroads includes this term in their website for Signs
and some non-Sign forms.
Reference: Alaska Railroads
4B3 Location Signs
LOCATION SIGNS. Older editions of AREA spoke of "Signs for the Information
of Passengers and Employees Other Than Trainmen, Though Incidentally Used
by Them." Newer editions employ the much shorter term of Location Signs. The
meaning of these Signs is similar with both titles. This term serves as an
overarching term for this segment. There is some possibility of confusion of these
signs with a separate group of Location Signs within the Transportation Signs
category. Transportation Signs refer to train operation signs in a direct sense
rather than an indirect one. The former group can be termed Location I Signs and
the latter group as Location II Signs.
Reference: AREA 1929, 1987-1988
CORPORATE OR OTHER POLITICAL SUBDIVISION SIGNS. This term
includes a wide variety of Signs. These Signs are not directly tied to train
operations. They are rectangular in shape (horizontal emphasis) with rounded
comers. The color scheme may be a white ground with black letters.
Reference: AREA 1929
MILE POST SIGN. This term may be more Post than Sign but it is classified
under the heading of Signs. It is more of a cross-reference than a full entry.
341
Reference: AREA 1987-1988
STANDARD RIGHT OF WAY SIGN. AREA includes Standard Right of Way
Sign and Monument Marker as one unit. The Sign denotes limits for right ofway.
The role ofMonument Marker is not explained further. Cross Reference:
Monument Marker.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
SUBDIVISION SIGNS. AREA 1929 lists the Section Sign by itself as well as in
Section with Subdivision Signs. There is no subdivision by itself. AREA
illustrates the combined Signs and indicates where they are stationed. But no
description ofthe function is given. Newer editions do not include this Sign(s).
Reference: AREA 1929, AREA 1987-88
TRESPASS SIGN. Newer editions ofAREA speak ofNo Trespassing Signs
while the 1929 edition has Trespassing Signs. Presumably it means a Sign
denoting limits of areas where intrusion would constitute tresspass.
References: AREA 1929, AREA 1987-88
TRESSPASS--RIGHT-OF-WAY SIGN/TRESSPASS--BRIDGE SIGNI
TRESSPASS-CROSSING SIGN. AREA 1929 provides details on three forms (or
uses) of Tresspass Signs. The Signs are rectangular in shape with horizontal
emphasis and placed at the commencement of what would consitute tresspass.
Samples of these Signs include: RAILROAD PROPERTY - TRESSPASSING
FORBIDDEN UNDER PENALTY and DANGER DO NOT TRESPASS ON
THE RAILROAD. The specific wording suggest rather than requires compliance.
Reference: AREA 1929
VALUATION SECTION SIGN. This term from AREA 1929 displays a rectangle
with horizontal emphasis. Few details are available.
Reference: AREA 1929
4B3 Transportation Signs
a) Speed Control Signs
342
SPEED CONTROL & SPEED RESTRICTION SIGNS.
General Note I. These are the basic terms for Signs relating to speed regulations.
Speed Control is more common in the US while Speed Restriction is preferred in
Europe. Many European Signs refer to speed. If a Signal code has only a few
references to Signs they are likely to be related to speed. Speed Signs are placed
within the Transportation Sign category of AREA. Signals can manifest
considerable variation and often tend toward the local. This is much more true
with Signs: they are markedly decentralized and fragmented. Terms and
descriptions are therefore tentative and provisional. Foley supplied this compiler
excerpts from various unnamed US railroad Signal codes. That collection of Signs
is a major resource for railroad Signs. Frequently those Signs are in groups and
are so treated.
General Note II. ERS views Speed Restriction Signs as qualifiers of Signal
indications. AREA often speaks of Signs as definers of limits including limits for
slow orders and train stop locations.
General Note III. Terminology can be confusing: Signs may appear under
Indicator (ERS) and even under Signal (UAR, French language terms). Other
Signs are listed as Boards. In some cases Boards can be a non-sign entity while it
can serve as a near-synonym for Sign in other situations.
ADVANCE-WARNING SIGN/ADVANCE WARl\TING SIGN. Terms for Speed
Signs that are somewhat related to Restricting Signs. This Sign indicates
upcoming speed change. The Sign is rectangular but at a diagonal slant with one
side cut off at a slant. Reduced speed limit information is given. [Note: This sign
and the next two are a set in the Foley collection of Signs; name of railroad is not
given].
REDUCED SPEED SIGN. This Sign is of square shape with cropped corners;
numbers are displayed in black numbers on yellow ground.
RESUME SPEED SIGN. This Sign is rectangular-shaped with vertical emphasis.
Green in color; almost a Marker in form.
RETRO-REFLECTIVE (ROAD TRAFFIC TYPE) PSR SIGN [PSR= Permanent
Speed Restriction]. Sign displays a circle with black border and numbers; ground
343
Reference: ERS-H 1995
LINE INDICATOR. This Indicator displays speeds in 1/10 of speed numerals. A
triangular shaped Sign in green with point up; numbers are in white.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
LINE SPEED INDICATOR. Term from Belgium practice as given in ERS. Sign
has form oftriangle with point up; white on green ground. Speed given as 1/1aof
km/h.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
TEMPORARY SPEED RESTRICTION INDICATOR. Spanish Sign as given in
ERS. It is square in shape and black on white ground. Actual speed given.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
TEMPORARY SPEED RESTRICTIONS. Messages give warning indicating
temporary regulations for advance, commencement, termination indications.
COMMENCEMENT INDICATOR. This is a speed indicator.
SPECIAL SPEED RESTRICTION BORD. Board gives message
with flashing chevron. The temporary speed restriction message occurs after the
issuing of weekly notices.
SPATE INDICATOR. Indicator added to temporary Warning Board
which indicates rule not in use.
TERMINATION INDICATOR. Sign at end of restriction.
Reference: RONT 2001
"z" BOARDI"R" BOARD. Terms from France via ERS. "z" designates
beginning of speed restriction. It is listed as fixed Sign. "R" Board has meaning of
ending restriction.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
SPEED RESTRICTION SIGNS - TEMPORARY. A general heading for ERS.
The term Indicator is also employed here. Many systems in Europe include lights
with these Signs.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
344
Sign consists of a yellow disc.
Reference: UAR 1983
SPEED ZONE SIGNS. There are three Signs in this group.
SPEED ZONE SIGN. This Sign presents maximum speed allowed. It is a
rectangular-shaped Sign with horizontal emphasis and cropped comers.
RESTRICTING SIGN. Signs denotes beginning of speed restriction (e.g.
Speed Sign one mile after this Sign). Is this "Sign" a Sign? It displays diagonal
stripes and no alphanumeric symbols. It may constitute a form of Marker.
Rectangular-shaped with vertical emphasis.
RESUME SPEED SIGN. This Sign displays letter "R". It is rectangular-
shaped with vertical emphasis.
Reference: Foley 1975
INDICATOR. Common expression by ERS for Speed Restriction Sign. This may
not be a formal name. Indicator can apply to a variety of safety aids. It is situated
at braking distance to Speed Sign restriction. This speed is represented by a
numeral (e.g., 10 x # = speed, or in ERS, speed divided by 10 so that 50 km/h is
represented by 5; some systems employ speed limit figure).
Reference: ERS-P 1995, Oxford-Duden 1980
FIXED INDICATORS. For Oxford-Duden this is seemingly a description more
than a formal name. It refers to permanent speed restrictions.
Reference: Oxford-Duden 1980
SIGN FOR DAY RUNNING. This is more a descriptive name than a formal
name. It refers to permanent speed restrictions.
Reference: Oxford-Duden 1980
WARNING SIGN/COMMENCEMENT SIGN/TERMINATION SIGN. For
British Rail this is a common pattern for noting upcoming speed changes (which
includes changing the speed, and then ending that change).
Reference: ERS-H 1995
ARROWS. Device that denotes diverging lines which speed restrictions refer to.
345
Reference: ERS-H 1995
LINE INDICATOR. This Indicator displays speeds in 1/1aof speed numerals. A
triangular shaped Sign in green with point up; numbers are in white.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
LINE SPEED INDICATOR. Term from Belgium practice as given in ERS. Sign
has form of triangle with point up; white on green ground. Speed given as 1/10 of
km/h.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
TEMPORARY SPEED RESTRICTION INDICATOR. Spanish Sign as given in
ERS. It is square in shape and black on white ground. Actual speed given.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
TEMPORARY SPEED RESTRICTIONS. Messages give warning indicating
temporary regulations for advance, commencement, termination indications.
COMMENCEMENT INDICATOR. This is a speed indicator.
SPECIAL SPEED RESTRICTION BORD. Board gives message
with flashing chevron. The temporary speed restriction message occurs after the
issuing of weekly notices.
SPATE INDICATOR. Indicator added to temporary Warning Board
which indicates rule not in use.
TERMINATION INDICATOR. Sign at end of restriction.
Reference: RONT 2001
"Z" BOARD/"R" BOARD. Terms from France via ERS. "Z" designates
beginning of speed restriction. It is listed as fixed Sign. "R" Board has meaning of
ending restriction.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
SPEED RESTRICTION SIGNS - TEMPORARY. A general heading for ERS.
The term Indicator is also employed here. Many systems in Europe include lights
with these Signs.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
346
SPEED RESTRICTION SIGNS. Category for ERS lacks specific names. Speed
change marked by a) Sign with similar data or b) "common cipher" such as a "z"
in France or by triangle (small, yellow ground in Norway). End of speed
restriction carried out by a) Sign with new maximum (with line speed or added
restriction) or b) by cipher ("R" in France, Luxembourg).
Reference: ERS-H 1995
SENAL INDICADORA DE VELOCIDAD LIMITADA/DE FIN SENAL
INDICADORA DE VELOCIDAD. The first Sign is diamond-shaped and black
on white with speed in km/h. The second Sign is square and w/o alphanumeric
symbols. Black symbols on white ground.
Reference: Colombia
Other Speed Signs:
Chicago, Rock Island and Pacific Railroad (CRIP) offers several Signs:
CURVE SPEED SIGN.
PERMANENT SLOW SPEED SIGN.
TEMPORARY SLOW & RELEASE SIGN.
PROCEED PREPARED TO STOP SIGN.
ZONE SPEED SIGN.
Reference: CRIP 1977
b) Location Signs
1) Advance Location Signs
ADVANCE LOCATION SIGNS.
General Note. AREA 1987-88 seemingly has two forms of Location Signs within
Transportation Signs: "Advance Locations of ...." and "Also used to ...." The
later form often defines limits of yards, etc. while the former denotes advance
location. Following AREA practice these Signs defining locations are referred to
as "defining limits."
347
These Signs include:
RAILWAY GRADE CROSSING SIGNS
DRAWBRIDGE SIGNS
TUNNEL SIGNS
JUNCTION SIGNS
ROCK SLIDE SIGNS
SNOW SLIDE SIGNS
STATION SIGNS
STATION NAME SIGN (DAR)
2) Limit & Location Signs
LIMIT & LOCATION SIGNS.
General Note. This is a category of Location Signs for AREA Signs not involved
directly with train operations. This is in addition to the Advance Location Sign
segment within the Transportation category. There is also a segment adjoining the
Advance Location Signs that deal with limits and locations of an immediate
nature.
These include:
YARD LIMIT SIGNS
SWITCHING LIMIT SIGNS
SIGNAL TERRITORY LIMIT SIGNS
STATION LOCATION SIGNS
DERAIL LOCATIONS SIGNS
TRACK CAPACITIES SIGNS
WATER STATION LIMIT SIGNS
FUEL STATION LIMIT SIGNS
CINDER STATION LIMIT SIGNS
BLIND SIDING SIGNS
CUT SECTION SIGN (B & 0)
3) Territory Limits Signs
348
TERRITORY LIMIT SIGNS.
General Note. AREA includes a Signal Territory Limits category. This section of
the study both alters and expands that segment. It includes all Signs marking the
beginning and ending of Signals, systems and other situations affecting train
operations. Many of these Signs are self-explanatory requiring brief entries are
brief except where more lengthly explanations are needed.
BEGIN CTC SIGNIEND CTC SIGN. Signs are rectangular-shaped though barely
(the Sign is 17 by 18 inches). Black letters on white ground. A second version has
cropped comers.
Reference: Foley
CTC SIGN.
BEGIN.
END.
These Signs are black on white with cropped comers.
Reference: Foley
BEGIN CAB SIGNAL TERRITORYIEND CAB SIGNAL TERRITORY.
Reference: CRIP 1977
BEGIN TCS SIGN/END TCS SIGN. This Sign refers to track circuit sections.
Reference: Foley
END OF SIGNAL TERRITORY.
Reference: Fisher 1976
END OF BLOCK SIGN/BLOCK-LIMIT SIGN.
Reference: AREA 1929, and CRIP 1977 (1), Penn Central 1973 (2)
END OF TRACK CIRCUIT SIGN.
Reference: B & 0 1953
AUTOMATIC BLOCK SIGNS.
349
START AUTOMATIC BLOCK
END AUTOMATIC BLOCK
Start Sign is an inverted triangle while the End sign is verted. Ground is probably
black on white. It denotes the beginning and ending of Automatic Block System.
Reference: Foley
REMOTE CONTROL SIGNS
BEGIN REMOTE CONTROL SIGN
END REMOTE CONTROL SIGN
Sign displays rectangular-shaped Sign with horizontal emphasis with black letters
on white ground. It denotes beginning and ending of Remote Control System.
Reference: Foley
DOUBLE TRACK SIGN. Signs are rectangular-shaped with horizontal emphasis,
curved ends, black on white. There are two forms:
BEGINNING OF DOUBLE TRACK SIGN
END OF DOUBLE TRACK SIGN
The names of the two forms indicate the messages.
Reference: Foley
BEGIN RULES 400-406/END RULES 400-406. CRIP Sign indicating
jurisdiction of these rules for CTC Rules.
Reference: CRIP 1977
BEGIN RULES 450-453/END RULES 450-453. CRIP Sign has special messages
for CTC Rules for train movement in the same direction under Block Signals.
Reference: CRIP 1977
APPROACH BLOCK LIMIT SIGN/ABL SIGN. ABL Sign from Foley. Signs are
rectangular with vertical emphasis; black letters on yellow ground.
Reference: Foley
4B4 Maintenance of Way Signs.
General Note. These Signs deal with railroad track property and the maintaining
of same. They are a category for AREA. Many of the component Signs may be
350
found only in the US.
ALINEMENT SIGNS OR MARKERS. These terms refer to "easement spirals
and curves" locations and limits
Reference: AREA 1987-88
BRIDGE SIGNIBRIDGE NUMBER SIGN. These Signs identify bridges by
providing number designations. The Sign is octagon-shaped and black on white.
One Sign but two slightly different names.
Reference: AREA 1929
CURVE & ELEVATION SIGN. This Sign is in post form. Only limited
information is available. See Also: Elevation Marker, Post.
Reference: AREA 1929
ELEVATION MARKERS. Terms indicate elevation of rail top and maxium
elevation of tracks under which grade separations can be raised.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
END OF SHUNT SIGN. Sign displays red fixed lights. Details are limited.
Reference: Leach 1991
FLANGER SIGNS. Sign appears within Snowplow Signs for AREA. It indicates
that flanges should be lifted.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
MAINTENANCE LIMIT SIGNS. These Signs are concerned with the defining
the limits for ownership of track and maintenance (railroad-industry, railroad-
railroad).
Reference: AREA 1987-88
ROADWAY STRUCTURES SIGN. These Signs define location or give the
location of structures such as bridges, trestles, tunnels, culverts. The distinctions
between some of these Signs and Transportation Signs are seemingly narrow and
uncertain.
351
Reference: AREA 1987-88
SNOWPLOW SIGNS
RAISE SNOWPLOW SIGN
LOWER SNOWPLOW SIGN
AREA defmes the first Sign as marking placement of snowplow equipment. The
next Signs are from Oxford-Duden and refer to German practice.
Reference: AREA 1987-88, Oxford-Duden 1980
TOKEN BLOCK WORKING. Sign employed in Scotland and is accompanied by
arrows. The Sign is a rectangle (vertical emphasis) and black on white. It is a
Limit Sign though not by name.
Reference: A & W 1991
WING MARKER. This Marker is associated with the Snow Plow Sign. The name
Marker may be employed because of the non-sign character (e.g. lack of
alphanumeric characters). It indicates snowplow wings should be closed. Flanger
and wing are one Sign when necessary.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
4B5 Safety Signs
General Note. A category ofAREA. Three of these Signs are Cross Reference
entries and belong to Level Crossing/Grade Crossing. Two Signs of the group are
found in some form in other sources: Restricted Clearance and Power-Operated
Switch Signs. A number of the Signs include non-train crew users.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD SIGN. Sign denotes presence of electrical high voltage
lines (termed "carriers" in AREA) whether overhead or "subgrades."
Reference: AREA 1987-88
FIRE HAZARD SIGN. Sign provides warning of storage of flammable materials
and what are termed "subgrade carriers."
Reference: AREA 1987-88
HIGHWAY GRADE CROSSING SIGN. Term refers to Sign marking crossing.
352
Reference: AREA 1987-88
BARRICADE SIGN. Sign denotes construction, repair work at crossing for road
users.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
HIGHWAY & BARRICADE SIGN. A grade crossing Sign for road users.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
POWER-OPERATED SWITCH SIGN. This Sign provides warning to
pedestrians especially for pedestrian passageway are near such switches.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
RESTRICTED CLEARANCE SIGN. This term identifies restricted clearance
whether horizontal and/or vertical: Sitltations includes turnout, buildings,
platforms, "other structures."
Reference: AREA 1987-88
WARNING NO CLEARANCE FOR MAN ON SIDE OR TOP OF CAR SIGN.
Term from one railroad. Few details but meaning is self-explanatory.
Reference: CRIP 1977
4B6 Marks and Markers
MARKERS. A general term referring to a variety of safety aids with limited
symbols, often vertical, near ground leveL The terms Marker, Board and even
Sign are used interchangeably at times. Marker can sometimes be applied to a
specific function. (e.g. Marker sometimes refers to Reflective Marker Board). It
has also been used for Lineside Signal or vice versa. See Also terms including the
word Marker.
Reference: ERS-P 1995
MARKER (BOARD). Alternate name for Countdown Marker Board. Term is
listed in both Marker and Board.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
353
ALINEMENT MARKER. AREA refers to Alinement Signs or Markers.
However, no explanation of the relationship between Sign and Marker is given.
Marker can be viewed as smaller, closer to the ground, with fewer symbols, and
more vertical than for Signs. However, the criteria for AREA is unknown.
Reference: AREA 1987
AUXILIARY MARKER. This term refers to Diamond Shaped Markers and
Round Speed Limit Markers which see. Auxiliary Marker means it is auxiliary to
lighted Signals to which these Markers are affixed.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
"c" MARKERS/"S" MARKERS.
General Note. These Markers indicate of sections and are lined up with catenary
masts. Savarrzeix speaks of "reflecting line side plaques." [plaque=Board].
Reference: Savarrzeiz 1981
"s" MARKERS. These Markers denote points and crossings at stopping
locations. They are the equivalent of Semaphore Signals. They give indication of
Permissive Stop Signal.
"c" MARKERS. These Markers denotes points and crossings. The
indication is that of an Absolute Signal.
CLEARANCE MARK. This Mark marks the safe edge of points and crossings for
trains (beyond the safe edge fouling may occur).
Reference: SA TWA 1964
DIAMOND SHAPED MARKER. This may be more in the nature of a descriptive
name than a formal name. Possibly the single word Marker is the name. It
displays the letter S (S=Siding), P (P=Permanent), G (G=Grade).
Reference: FRA-3 1979
DISTANCE MARKER. Variant name for Countdown Marker Board.
Reference: UN 1954
ELEVATION MARKER. This Marker gives elevation of rails at specified
354
locations. It is listed within Sign Classification.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
FIXED MARKER. This term has a specific meaning though it can appear as an
overarching term. This Marker marks the beginning of "track-circuited block
section."
Reference: Allen 1983
LANDMARKS. This term substitutes for Distant Signal in situations where a
caution indication (when approaching a Signal) is always needed. One form has a
lighted dimension while other forms have retroreflective material. The Landmark
displays a black or yellow hollow triangle on post.
Reference: NSW Signalling
LINESIDE MARKER. This term refers specifically to the NF plate which see.
However, the term gives the appearance of a more general term. It can be used as
an overarching term for Markers (or Signs with limited messages). Savarzeix
states that Nf denotes "ends of a block section" (SNCF seemingly contradicts
that).
Reference: Savarzeix 1981
MARKS AND MARKERS FOR JAPAN.
General Note. For Japan all-lighted Shunting Signals are under a heading of Sign
(and Block Signal Marker).
Under Sign Markers are found:
REPEATER SIGNAL (All-lighted)
TRAIN STOP SIGNAL MARKERJCAR STOP MARKER (Possibly
lighted)
SHUNTING SIGNAL MARKER & SHUNTING SIGN MARKER
(Both Lighted)
SWITCH TARGET (Vane for daylight use)
SUDDEN RELEASE SHUNTING SIGN MARK (All-lighted)
TROLLEY WIRE DEAD SECTION INDICATOR (Lamp or Reflector)
TROLLEY WIRE ELECTRIC SOURCE SIGN MARKER (Lighted)
ROUTE ELECTRIC SOURCE SIGN MARKER (Lighted)
355
ONCE STOP SIGN MARKER (Sign form)
CLEARANCE POST
WHISTLE SIGN MARKER
BUFFER STOP INDICATOR (Possibly lighted)
All but main and subsidiary Signals are under the above headings. In addition
there is a section of Marks. Details are limited. Black symbols on yellow ground
are common though not universal.
Marks:
ROUTE IDENTIFICATION MARK
STATION APPROACH MARK
SLOW SPEED RELEASE MARK
TABLET CARRYING MARK
SIGNAL ASPECT CONFIRMATION POSITION MARK
SIGNAL ALARM MARK
POWER DRIVE MARK
COASTING MARK -- AC AND DC
TRAIN STOP POSITION MARK
ELECTRIC TRAIN SECTION MARK
Reference: Japan Railways RS
MONUMENT MARKERS. This term is combined with a Standard Right of Way
Sign in AREA. It is unclear how Sign and Marker are combined. The Sign defmes
limits of Right of Way. Markers may reinforce location of limits.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
REFLECTIVE MARKER BOARD. Marker Board bears resemblance to Markers
on TVG lines and indicates boundaries of block section similar to TVG Line
Markers.
Reference: ERS-V 1995, Soph. Cab Sign. 1994
HIGH SPEED MARKER BOARDS. These Boards are "fictive block signals"
which divide high speed lines into blocks. Scotland employs Marker Boards on
RETB sections.
Reference: ERS-V 1995
356
SECTION ENTRANCE MARKER. This term is a synonym for Fixed Marker. It
marks section entrances on high speed lines. It is an informal descriptive term
rather than a formal name.
Reference: Allen 1983
SIGN MARKER. Overarching Term in Japan for Shunting Signals as well as
Lighted Devices and Unlighted Devices. Marks & Markers are under that title.
Reference: Japan Railways NS
SIGNAL MARKER BOARD. Term has meaning similar to that of Countdown
Board.
Reference: UIC-CST 1972
SPRING SWITCH MARKER/SPRING SWITCH SIGN. These two terms have
the same meaning. They consist of a white disc with black letters. They denote
Spring Switch locations that refer to the clearance point near track.
Reference: Foley, REMC 1948
WAYSIDE MARKER. This refers to a Lighted Aid. It is a Cab Signal receiving
data from "wayside marker units." But term also has overarching implications.
Reference: FRA-2 1979
4B7 Boards and Posts
General Notes. Boards and Posts are employed in a variety of systems and
regions. Posts are less common than Boards. Most entries are from the US
organization AREA. Semantics may be at work since not only Boards, but Marks,
and Markers may be similar to Posts.
BOARDS.
General Note. Boards may be literally boards with simple messages (solid colors,
stripes, bands). But Boards are sometimes a synonym for Signs (containing
alphanumeric messages, positioned well above ground, etc.). Board I=boards with
graphic designs and possibly simple alphanumeric messages. Board II=a synonym
357
for Signs.
Fischer uses Board as a general purpose term. This is the case not only for
Signposts (with the meaning of Signs) but also for all kinds of Signals messages
and even for the call board (work assignments for train crews). It is also used as a
short form for longer and more precise terms (e.g. Countdown Marker Boards
(ERS) are termed Boards.
References: Fisher 1976, ERS-H 1995
BAAK. Term refers for Countdown Marker Board (The Netherlands). Beacon in
English at least partially represents Baak.
Reference: Nock 1962
BOUNDARY MARKERIBOUNDARY POSTIBOUNDARY STONE. The basic
term refers to post/notices denoting property limits. Post is of metal or concrete.
Stone is self-explanatory.
Reference: RONT 2001
CAUTION BOARD. This specific term includes lights. It is retained because of
its board character.
References: Western Australia 1974,
COUNTDOWN BOARD. Short form for Countdown Marker Board. The
unadorned terms Board and Marker sometimes designates Countdown Marker
Board.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
COUNTDOWN MARKER BOARD. This term is employed by several European
railways. Frequently three boards are lined up in "rear of stop signals" (250/300m,
175/200m, 100m). Boards often have black diagonal stripes. Italy employs
diagonal and horizontal stripes; this is also true of The Netherlands.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
DrSTANT WARNING BOARD. It displays Markings of stripes or bars that warn
of approach ofDistant Signals.
358
Reference: RONT 2001
FIXED SIGNAL BOARDS. This term is not a Signal as the presence of "Fixed"
indicates. It includes Distant Warning Board, Stop Board, Stop Indicator. See
Also: Signal Board.
Reference: RONT 2001
FLAG BOARDS/METAL FLAGS. Terms refer to a form of Stopboard. A white
painted board is designed for displaying metal flags. Metal flags display red one
one side and green on the other side with white disc insert. Marker lamp may be
added.
Reference: UK Military 1955
INDICATING BOARD. This term refers to a lighted Signal. Retained because of
board character and as cross-reference.
Reference: UN 1954
INDICATION BOARD. Term from Bulgaria. Few details are available. Since
Bulgaria is influenced by UIC it may be akin to Signs and Boards employed
which suggests speed and countdown boards.
Reference: Bulgaria 1986
LINESIDE BOARD. An equivalent term for Lineside Signs. A partly-lighted
device in UK.
Reference: K & W 1963
MARKER BOARD. Overarching term for UK BR. These Boards include Station
Limits Board and End of Section Board.
Reference: A & W 1991
MILE BOARD. CRIP employed this term rather than Mile Posts. It is rectangular
in shape with vertical emphasis. Black on white, and attached to a slender post.
Reference: CRIP 1977
NAME BOARD. Term refers to Station Name Sign that is affixed to the station
359
building.
Reference: Simmons 1986
NOTICE-BOARD. A general appearing term though confmed to a single message
for A & W: it requests train crew to telephone for instructions and -- if telephone
unaswered -- to proceed cautiously.
Reference: A & W 1991
NUMBER BOARD. Term for level/grade crossings. Signs attached to signal mast
indicate the number of tracks. White symbols on black ground and word track
may be added. DOT-AAR RR-Highway Cross Inventory System also listed on
Sign. Alphanumeric symbols (but not words) may have influenced the use of the
word board.
References: AREA 1978
ORDER BOARD. A historic term. Rectangular in shape with horizontal emphasis
and rounded ends. Bracket included for orders for train crews. Unit attached to
train station.
Reference: Ball 1985
PERMANENT SPEED-RESTRICTION BOARD/PERMANENT SPEED
RESTRICION BOARD. The meaning is clear from title. Hyphenated form is
rectangular-shaped with horizontal emphasis and pointed ends. SA-TWA has fIrst
form while second form is from UK-Mil. That form is rectangular-shaped with
horizontal emphasis and black on white ground.
Reference: SA TWR 1962 , UK Military 1955
PERMANENT WARNING BOARD. This is one of three forms of Fixed Signals
for UAR. It seemingly includes all permanent Signs (speed, whistle, token, etc.)
known as Signals. Signals/Signals Boards are reflectorized or lighted.
Reference: UAR 1983
"R" BOARD/"Z" BOARD. Both terms are ofa Sign format and described in Ch.
4B2, Speed Control Signals.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
360
RADIO CHANNEL CHANGE BOARDIRADIO CHANNEL INDICATOR.
Board announces changes in radio channel in RETB territory. It displays a black
oval with white diamond on rectangle (vertical emphasis). Second term consists
of black lozenge-shaped boad with white diamond and number
Reference: A & W 1991, Leach 1991
REFLECTORIZED DISTANT BOARDIDISTANT BOARDIFIXED BOARD.
These are replacement for Distant Signal. Emblem of Distant Signal is embossed
on rectangular-shaped board with white ground. Leach has second term; Vanns
the third.
Reference: A & W 1991, Leach 1991, Vanns 1997
RESUME-SPEED BOARD (PERMANENT)/RESUME-SPEED BOARD
(TEMPORARY)/SPEED RESTRICTION BOARD (PERMANENT)/ADVANCE
WARNING BOARD. These safety aids can be regarded as Signs (and Restriction
and Resume-Speed are so regarded). One unnamed railroad in Foley substitutes
Board for Sign. Y Board and Slow Board are in this set but listed separately. They
display limited alphanumeric symbols and hae a limited Sign character.
Reference: Foley
SHUNTING LIMITS BOARD. This form of Board is usually lighted at night. A
cross-reference entry.
Reference: NSW Signalling
SIGNAL BOARD. This is in a Sign format rather than a Signal form. It is
attached to a Signal mast. It indicates that freight trains can pass stop signal by
displaying letter ""T" (=Throughput).
Reference: Kharlanovich 1980
SLOW BOARD. This is a Board Type II. It has character of Sign. The device
displays an inverted triangle, black on white; denotes upcoming speed restriction.
Reference: ANR, King 1921
SPEED BOARD. Board II form with character of Sign. SAF form consists of
361
rectangles, black on white. This is also the case with ANR.
References: ANR, SAP GA
START OF SECTION BOARD/END OF SECTION BOARD. These Boards
replace Home and Start Signals on No Signalman Token Boards.
Reference: Vanns 1997
END OF SECTION MARKER BOARD. Board is comparable to Starting Signal
(Semaphore) in RETB territory. See also previous entry.
Reference: A & W 1991
SIGHTING BOARD. A term from Indian Railways. It indicates approach of
Distant and Home Signals.
Reference: Chandriki 1998
SIGNAL WARNING BOARD. Jackson includes term as a pointer to Warning
Board which see.
Reference: Jackson 1991
STARTING SIGNAL NOTICE BOARD. This Board consists of a rectangle
(vertical emphasis). It displays a red circle and the message, "Stop, obtain token,
and permission to proceed."
Reference: Leach 1991
STATION LIMIT BOARD. This term has several forms: square with white
ground, and black diamond with letters SL (UK Mil). A second form from A & W
consists of a rectangle (vertical) with white ground and blue diagonal stripes. It is
positioned 200-300 yards beyond End of Section Board.
Reference: UK Military 1955, A & W 1991
STATION-NANIE BOARD. A nearly self-explanatory term of diverse designs.
Reference: Robbins 1967
TRAIN CLEAR OF PASSING LOOP INDICATOR!ADVANCED STARTING
LOOP CLEAR SIGNAL. A board term that denotes train is clear of Passing Loop
362
Indicator; crew is to so infonn signal box. Rectangular in shape (vertical) with
white ground and three diagonal blue stripes. Second tenn has alternative
wording.
Reference: Leach 1991
AWS CANCELLING INDICATOR. This Indicator displays a square board in
blue with a white St. Andrew's Cross. It provides a reminder to train crew that
passing AWS mechanism for the opposite track does not pertain to that train.
Reference: Leach 1991
END OF TOKEN SECTION PROCEED IF PLATFORM CLEAR BOARD. A
simplified fonn of older Platfonn Signal. It consists of a square board with black
letter on white ground.
Reference: Leach 1991
TEMPORARY WARNING BOARDS. There are few details available for this
tenn. Though there is a reference to this category of Board.
Reference: UAR 1983
TEMPORARY OUTER SPEED BOARD/TEMPORARY INNER SPEED
BOARD/ALL TRAINS STOP BOARD. These "Boards" from NZ are in a Sign-
mode. The outer fonn is a rectangle with lower comers cropped, yellow ground,
and black alphanumeric symbols. The Inner Board is diamond-shaped, black on
white.
Reference: NZ Railways
TRAIN ORDER BOARD. Board is square in shape. Messages include red (=stop
for train order) and yellow (=slow). It is partly-lighted. Cross-reference.
Reference: B & 0 1953
TERMINATING BOARDS. This Board denotes tennination of warning and
caution boards. It has a yellow ground with yellow disc.
Reference: Western Australia Railways
STOP BOARD. This tenn has character of a Sign. It can take on diverse
363
appearances for various railways. For ANR it is a Board II type. The NSW form
is lighted. UK Mil form is a square on two posts, white ground, red "stop";
marker lamp may be added. The German form is a Sign by form with rectangular-
shape and vertical emphasis. It includes a black "H" on white ground or white
"H" on black ground. It indicates a place where a train is to stop for RONT.
Reference: Al\TR, NSW Signalling, UK Military 1955, GFR 1981, RONT 2001
STOP INDICATOR. This is included with Fixed Signal Boards. The Indicator
displays the word Stop.
Reference: RONT 2001
TEMPORARY SPEED-REDUCTION BOARD. This Board denotes temporary
speed reduction. It is rectangular in shape (with horizontal emphasis), pointed and
fish-tailed. This specific form is lighted.
Reference: SA TWR 1962
WARNING BOARD. Term denotes approach (2400' distance from specific
point) of facing points, halt station or token station. It is rectangular in shape with
horizontal emphasis and displays white ground and black border. Some forms are
lighted. The WA form is diamond-shaped with yellow ground and black band. For
Jackson it denotes approach of Distant Signal. A second board follows that is an
illuminated yellow board for indicating temporary speed restriction.
References: SA TWR 1962, K & W 1963, Western Australia 1974, UK Military
1955, Jackson 1992
WATERING BOARD. A term for a board indicating nearness of water tank,
column. It is of a diamon shape with white ground, black border. It is mounted on
a single post and located 2400' from tank, column.
Reference: SA TWR 1962
WHISTLE BOARD. An alternate or variant name for Whistle Post. In South
Africa it is a black "w" on white "disc." Disc is more in the shape of an elipse.
Whistle is sounded at Whistle Board at approaches to level crossing.
Reference: SA TWR 1962
364
YARD LIMIT BOARD. This too has character of Sign, Board II. It has two
forms: elipse and rectangle mounted on wood construction. Black on white.
Reference: ANR 1947
"Y" BOARD. One Railroad in the Foley collection employs Board instead of the
more expected usage of Sign.
Reference: Foley
BLOCK POSTS. Delineates boundaries of blocks where Signals are not present.
Reference: 100 Years to Bendigo 1964, A & W 1991
CLEARANCE POSTS. Japan provides visual images but not explanations of
various for a variety of safety aids including this form.
Reference: JNR
CURVE & ELEVATION SIGN. AREA 1929 speaks of Elevation Posts 'and also
of Curve and Elevation Signs. Both appear to be Elevation Posts. See also next
entry.
Reference: AREA 1929
ELEVATION POSTS/FULL ELEVATION POSTS/ZERO ELEVATION
POSTS. Elevation Posts are placed on inside of curves. Posts are white for the
upper portion and black for the lower. Alphanumeric symbols are black. The
second and third terms are versions of the basic device.
Reference: AREA 1929
GRADIENT BOARD. It has form of Lineside Board. Gradient placed on board.
Reference: RONT 2001
GRADIENT POSTS. Posts denote whether gradient is level, up or down. It also
gives "measure/indication" (rise, decline, feet per one foot of rise, decline).
However, Jackson speaks of this Post as a Lineside Sign.
Reference: Jackson 1992
MILE POSTS. This Post is a vertical and narrow object, painted, and displaying
365
numbers. This can be part of the Sign category. In TCD terms Posts are
sometimes classified as Signs and sometimes as Markers.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
PERMANENT WHISTLE POST/TEMPORARY WHISTLE POST. At least one
railroad (B & 0) distinguishes between long-term posts and temporary forms for
special purposes.
Reference: B & 0 1953
PROPERTY LINE POSTIPROPERTY POST. Posts are set up at corners of
property. Tall, narrow posts display words: name of railroad and property line.
Reference: AREA 1987-88
SECTION POST/SUB-SECTION POST. Both terms have a nearly Sign form.
The first has an obround form while the second has a rectangular-shape with
horizontal emphasis. Post designates boundaries of section or block. Numbers are
displayed on both. Information limited as to meaning.
Reference: AREA 1929
SIGNPOSTS. A Signpost is more than a post to which Signs are affixed; they are
~igns as well (see TCD DB). Fisher is the only surveyed source that employs the
term. Fisher employs signpost and board interchangeably.
Reference: Fisher 1976
WHISTLE POSTS. This object is often classified as a Board or Sign. Whistle
Posts indicate points where whistle should be sounded: stations, level/grade
crossings.
Reference: AREA 1929 and 1987-88, Foley, ANR
4B8 Plate & Flag Forms
"A" PLATES. Plate indicates that the accompanying Signal is automatic. The
Plate is circular with black letter on white ground.
Reference: Queensland Railway SS-E 1977
366
ALIAS PLATE. Plate indicating radio identification number for Signal when
Signal number is different.
Reference: RONT 200 I
CAR STOP PLATE. A platform Sign indicating position of train stop.
Reference: RONT 200 I
"F" PLATEINf PLATE.. Plates differentiate between Semaphore Signals (which
can be an all lighted Signal) and Stop Signals. Nf designate a Stop Signal which
has two red lights. Semaphore Signals have one red light and are marked by "F".
Nfmeans stop while F means there are situations when the Signal can be passed.
SNCF appears to employs Tablet (Tableu=Board) while ERS uses Board. But in
translations SNCF employs Plate.
Reference: SNCF 1985
IDENTIFICATION PLATE. This Plate has a white ground with black horizontal
band. L in white in black. It denotes the type of system whether up or down, and
distance from a given starting point.
Reference: A & W 1991
IDENTIFYING PLATE. The Signalbox website includes several forms of Plates:
TRACK CIRCUITS PLATE. A "diamond-shape" [ed] plate (though it
appears to be more of a hexagonal). It is blue in color and denotes presence of
Track Circuits.
FIREMAN'S CALL PLUNGER PLATE. This plate displays a "D"-
shaped plate indicating that a plunger is attached to the Signal.
TELEPHONE PLATE. This plate is a square with diagonal lines. It
indicates that a phone is available.
Reference: Signalbox website
IDENTITY PLATE. This plate is the equivalent of number plate. The meaning is
seemingly the same.
Reference: ERS-A 1995 (RENFE)
LETTER PLATE. This plate qualifies Signal indications. For Canada, "A"
367
indicates Automatic Signals. "G" for Grade, and SPS for Station Protection
Signal.
Reference: Canada 1962, FRA-RAR 1984
MARKER PLATE. FRA-RAR distinguishes Marker Plate from Name Plate and
Letter Plate but without offering explanation of differentiation.
Reference: FRA-RAR 1984
NAME PLATEIPLATE, NANLE. ARSPAP-D gives the general before the
particular (their usual practice). This is not an Identification Plate. Instead, it gives
the name of the manufacturer and other data.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
PLATE, NUMBERJNUMBER PLATE. Plate employed as identification and
affixed to Signal mast. ARSPAP-D reverses order of words while -SM has a more
straightforward approach. ERS adds a small plate for identifying Signal which is
related to distance or other factors. Queensland may include letters, identification
for automatic or semi-automatic Signals.
References: AAR-SM 1987, ARSPAP-D 1965; ERS-A 1995, Queenslands
Railways FS
RULE 55 EXEMPT INDICATOR PLATE. Plate displays white, diamond-shape.
The Plate indicates that Rule 55 can be ignored.
Reference: RONT 2001
SIGNAL BACKGROUND PLATE. Term does not refer to a direct safety aid but
rather a plate (or background or baffle) that helps the lights to be more easily
seen.
Reference: UIC COST 1972
SIGNAL IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Variant term for Number Plate. Plate gives
location and signal identification. RONT includes Number Plate within term.
Reference: UIC COST 1972, RONT 2001
SIGNAL MOUNTED SIGNS. RONT includes several forms of Plates within this
368
term. No definition is given. The term does suggest Plate because oflocation. It
includes Rule 55 Exempt Indicator Plate, Signal Identification Plate, Alias Plate,
Signal Number.
Reference: RaNT 2001
SIGNAL NUMBER PLATE. A variant name for Number Plate. It is within
Signal Identification Plate for RaNT.
Reference: Queensland Railways FS, RaNT 2001
STATION NAME PLATE. A self-explanatory term. It is a horizontal rectangle
with black letters on white ground.
Reference: A & W 1991
"T" PLATE. Term refers to Plate for Tonnage.
Reference: QR FS
FLAGS.
General Note. Human-held flags are part of railroad operations but not included in
this study ofFixed Signals. Flags were also part of some early railroad Signals.
Many flags belong to Blue Flag Devices (and may not be of fabric but rather of
metal). This section serves primarily as a Cross-Reference.
FLAGBOARDS, UK Mil - See Boards
METAL FLAGS, UK Mil - See Boards
FLAG SIGNALS, Blythe 1951 -See Blue Flag
BLUE FLAG DEVICES, Hayes -See Blue Flag
PORTABLE BLUE FLAG, Hayes -See Blue Flag
BLUE FLAG DERAIL, Hayes -See Blue Flag
DERAIL BLUE FLAG, ATT * -See Blue Flag
CHOCK FLAG, ATT* -Yellow Indicator Flag
* Atlantic Track and Turnout
4B9 Other Forms
a) Blue Flags
369
---------_._--_._-------------------- -
General Note. Blue Flags are a category of Signs indicating presence of train
crews and/or hazardous cars on tracks. If "blue flags" were originally flags they
are now generally of metal though they remain blue.
Signs forms include:
PORTABLE BLUE FLAGS. Overarching term for all forms of Hayes Blue Flag
forms.
DERAIL. White on blue disc attached by blue mast to derail device attached to
rail.
STOP. Format as above.
STOP (PORTABLE). Preesumably synonym for above Sign.
CAMP CARS. Same format as above.
ALTO. Spanish language Stop Sign; same format as above
STOP TANK CAR CONNECTED. Rectangular shape with horizontal emphasis.
DANGER MEN WORKING ON THIS TRACK. Above format.
DANGER TANK CAR CONNECTED. Previous format.
Reference: Hayes Track Application Co.
b) Electric Traction Signs
General Note. These Signs, in contrast to many railroad Signs, are a coherent and
organized body. The shapes are frequently diamond-shaped. Color patterns are
often blue and white. They present graphic designs that correlate with the Sign
shape. Alternate color patterns include yellow and black, black and white, red,
yellow and blue. Directional arrows are frequently added. Messages denote areas
of traction services, permissable and closed areas, specific tracks of usage and
related concerns.
Reference: Part F (which was influenced by European Signal codes).
c) Miscellaneous Signs
APPROACH SIGN. This is akin to Distant Boards which see.
Reference: Oxford-D.uden 1980
CHEQUERED SIGN. A Sign deenoting an atypical location for Signal.
370
Reference: Oxford-Duden 1980
SIGNAL-NOT-IN-USE SIGN. A self-explanatory term.
Reference: UIC-COST 1972
4BlO Targets
General Note I. The Target is an unlighted Signal consisting of distinctly shaped
and colored segments of sheet metal. They are attached to the mast (also known
as staff or spindle) of a Switch Signal. There is no central authority (or regional)
for this form of safety aid. They are a mainstay of US railroads and employed by
other systems including Canada, Philippines, Australia (SA-ANR), Japan. Camp
1903 offers an extensive coverage ofTargets. Since Targets have changed little
over the years that coverage remains valid.
General Note II. Targets are often combined with Switch Lamps and can therefore
be deemed a partly-lighted Signal. However, Targets are often independent units;
they are a separate unit even with Switch Lamps. The coverage will be primarily
centered here in an unlighted setting.
General Note III. Many references are made simply to the term Target. That tends
to belie the complexity of Targets. They come in many and diverse forms
including positions, color, shapes, color-shapes, blind.
General Note IV. Targets are of two forms. The larger version can exist separately
from a lamp. However, some Switch Lamps display a small target that is integral
to the lamp. This target is a small circular disc that fits around the lens of the color
of the lens. This form is a partly-lighted device. Both forms have the same name.
The smaller version is sometimes termed a Day Target.
a) Overarching Terms
TARGET. The Target has been extensively reviewed in General Notes. The term
is overarching in nature. Switch Target is an alternate term. A Switch Target
Stand is a possible second variant form. Target can refer to a Signal form and also
371
to the metal'pieces that make up the physical aspect. The pieces are more
precisely known as a Vane and attached to a mast (or staff or spindle). This, is
turn, connected to a Switch Stand (a separate, non-T-M mechanism but closely
connected to Target).
Classification: #531
Type of Device: Unlighted Railway Signal
Operation: Messages conveyed through graphic symbols that include color and
position dimensions.
Comments: Classification includes Targets and Track Indicators under this one
three-digit designation. They need to be separated. The second term is more
appopriately considered as partially-lighted. Targets are accompanied oft times by
a Switch Lamp. But that is a separate apparatus and is not essential for a Target.
Reference: Camp 1903, AREA 1987-88
SWITCH STAND TARGET. A more precise term from REMC indicating what
Targets are attached to.
Reference: REMC 1948
SWITCH TARGET. A more precise term though Target is more commonly
employed. It can be activated either by Switch Stand or switch points. It indicates
how switches are set.
References: ARSPAP-D, AAR SM 1983, UN 1954 (Philippines)
ILLUMINATED SWITCH TARGET. This term resembles a Ch. 3C entry; it is
included here as a cross-reference.
Reference: REMC 1948
b) Morphological-related Terms
General Note. This coverage includes not only terms whose function is included
in the title but also physical aspects directly pertainig to function: the shape of
Targets as well as the color and position of Targets.
1) Shape
372
General Note. Shapes are somewhat localized but there are some recurring
patterns. For example, Prism and Mask (US, ANR): prism suggests proceed, and
masks suggest stop (from a main line perspective). A Blind Target indicates
safety and proceed since the single vane is parallel to the tracks. Arrows ("fish-
tails") denote the track that the switch is thrown for.
Major Shapes for Targets include:
Mask & Obround/Obrotund-shaped Vane
Mask & Mask-shaped Vane
Mask & Prism-shaped Vane
Part F has further permutations. A former maker of Targets, BetWehem Steel,
offers many details, forms.
Arrow-Shaped Vanes
Double Arrow & "H"-shaped Vane
Double Arrow & Circle Vane
Single Arrow/Single Vane
Single Arrow & Circle Vane
Single Arrow & Obround Vane
Single Arrow & Diamond Vane
Single Arrow Over Diamond Vane
Diagonal Arrow & Mask Vane
Arrow-Shaped Target
Obround-Shaped Vanes
Obround & Mask Vane
Obround & Single Arrow
Obround & Square Vane
Note: Many forms of targets are not described by shape. Formerly this compiler
employed terms such as lozenge (as in cough drops) and oval. However, it is more
accurate to speak of Obround and Obrotunds. An Obrotund is nearly spherical
save for one diameter slightly larger than the other diameter in the entity.
Obround is a rectangular-shaped object with hemispherical ends. A chart
373
beginning with obrounds can evolve into Obrotunds yet they remain separate
shapes. Lozenge is a diamond-shaped object (though elongated ovals are also seen
as lozenges).
Rectangle-Shaped Vanes
Rectangle/Single Vane
Rectangle & Chevron Vane
Rectangle & Oval Vane
Rectangle with Fish-Tail End & Circle Vane
Obround Vane
Obround Vane & Mask
ObroundiSingle Vane
ObroundIDouble Vane
Obround (Elongated)
Other Shapes
Circle & Square
Circle & Chevron
Diamond/Single Vane
Triangle (Truncated) & Oval
Octagon/Single Vane
Square & Square
2) Color & Position
General Note. There is some correlation between Target usage and established
patterns of color usage. White is sometimes a clear indication (possibly reflecting
old patterns of colors and meanings: white was employed for Lighted Signals as
well as Targets). Color meaning is fromthe perspective of main line. Purple is
employed at times for derail messages. Frequently a single vane target is
employed so that position is the only dominant element. Yet color and shape are
also position types though that is not primary. Single vane Target or Blind Target
"shows it edge for safety" and Camp sees that as a Position Target.
374
3) Terms Related to Railroad Functions
BLIND TARGET. This is a single vane Target. It is similar to some older Signals
in that the safety indication is "blind." That is, when the Target is parallel to the
main track it denotes safety and thereby the train may proceed. Only the thin edge
ofthe Target can possibly be seen from an approaching train.
Reference: Camp 1903
MAIN TRACK SWITCH TARGET. Main Track is denoted by prism target
(diagonal rectangle with pointed ends) in green. When diverging route open then
a mask-shaped Target is viewed from main track. This is in red. The second form
(see GN IV) of Target/lamp (day target) may also be employed.
Reference: B & 0 1953
SIDING & YARD SWITCH TARGET. This term has only the second and
smaller form.
Reference: B & 0 1953
SIDING DERAIL TARGET/SIDING DERAIL SWITCH TARGET. Messages
include purple for derail while yellow denotes non-derail position.
Reference: B & 0 1953
YARD SWITCH STAND. Yellow disc employed for passing siding White
square indicates freight line open from passenger siding. It is partly lighted.
Cross-reference with d)
Reference: ANR
c) Other Terms
DAY TARGETS. This term seemingly refers to small Targets attached to a
Switch Lamp. Color of Target matches lens color.
References: Foster 1983, Bethe1em 1981
MAIN LINE SWITCH STANDS. Despite the name this is a Switch Target/Lamp
assemblage. It has a diagonal shaped rectangular vane with notched tail. Green for
375
main lines; a yellow mask for siding. There is also a third form: a red mask
indicating open to "freight line or dead end."
Reference: SAR (ANR) 1947
TARGET STAND. This refers to a Target mounted on mast and stand without a
Switch Stand. The stand is connected by rod to the Switch Stand. It is employed
in situations where a separate assemblage is needed. It is also employed with
derails.
Reference: BetWehem 1981, Hayes 1971
SWITCH TARGET REFLECTOR TYPEIREFLECTORIZED SWITCH
TARGETIREFLECTOR TARGET. All three terms include some form of
reflectorized material. This may be in the form of circular reflectors ofprismatic
material or of a second form employing modules that display reflective material.
References: BetWehem, Fosters
There are several other Targets whose titles refer to Height:
LOW TARGET
LOW REVOLVING TARGET
INTERMEDIATE TARGET
HIGH SWITCH TARGET
HIGH TARGET
d) Switch Stand Forms
General Note. A Switch Stand is a mechanism through which points can be
moved thereby opening or closing a desired section of track. The housing
includes, gear works, throwing level, top cover, mast as well as connecting rod to
points. While not all Switch Stands have Targets many do. Hence the inclusion of
this infrastructure for Targets.
A list of Switch Stands includes:
AUTOMATIC SAFETY LOCK SWITCH STAND, Camp 1903
376
AUTOMATIC SAFETY SWITCH STAND, REMC 1948
AUTOMATIC STAND, Camp 1903
AUTOMATIC SWITCH STANDS, Cleveland F & F
COLUMN-THROW STAND, REMC1948
DERAIL SWITCH STAND, ANR 1947
DOUBLE STAND, Bethlehem 1955
DWARF STAND Camp 1903
ENCLOSED GEARED TYPE PARALLEL THROW SWITCH STAND, Nelson
1971
GEARLESS SWITCH STAND, REMC 1948
GROUND THROW STAND, Camp 1903
GROUND THROW SWITCH STAND/GROUND-THROW SWITCH
STAND, Camp 1903 (both)
HASTY TRIPLE STAND Camp 1903
HIGH BANNER TWO TIE SWITCH STANDILOW BANNER TWO TIE
SWITCH STAND, Nelson 1971, (both)
HIGH SWITCH STAND, Southern Pacific
HUB SAFETY AUTOMATIC SWITCH STAND, REMC 1948
INTERMEDIATE STAND, Camp 1903, Rail Products
LOW STAND, Camp 1903
LOW SWITCH STAND, Camp 1903
MAIN LINE SAFETY SWITCH STAND/MAINLINE SAFETY SWTICH
STAND, REMC 1948 (both)
MAIN LINE SWITCH STAND, Camp 1903, Bird
PARALLEL-THROW SWITCH STAND, Bethlehem 1955
PONY STAND, Camp 1903
POSITIVE-ACTION SWITCH STAND, Bethlehem 1955
STONE DRUM SWITCH STAND, Camp 1903
SWITCH STAND, PARALLEL THROW, Foster 1983
STEELTON SWITCH STAND, Camp 1903
THREE-IN-ONE AUTOMATIC SWITCH STAND, REMC, 1948
YARD SWITCH STAND, ANR 1947
377
4C Acoustical and Radio Signals
4C1 Acoustical Signals
General Note. This segment encompasses a broad and disparate range of material:
all types of railroad safety aids that emit some form of sound messages. it
includes Bells and Gongs at level/grade crossings; explosive devices applied to
tracks, and locomotive-based Signals for cab and various kinds of train control
apparatus. Many of these Signals are also referred to in other segments of the
Database since many Sound Signals are attached to other forms of Signals.
a) Overarching Terms
ACOUSTIC OR AUDIBLE SIGNAL. For UAR this is a very broad overarching
term encompassing all forms of acoustical communication: station master's
whistle, locomotive whistles, and Detonators.
Reference: UAR 1983
AUDIBLE DANGER SIGNAL. Phrase refers to message indication: sound and
danger rather than a type of Signal.
Reference: Rolt 1982
AUDIBLE SIGNAL/AUDIBLE FOG SIGNAL. RaNT employs the former term
as a general term that includes various explosive devices but also the Audible Fog
Signal. That device is not a general term but instead employed for a Signal
alerting the driver to Distant Signal Aspect or Temporary Speed Restriction.
Reference: RaNT 2001
AUDIBLE SIGNALLING DEVICES. A descriptive phrase in Rolt rather than a
formal title.
Reference: Rolt 1982
AUDIBLE WARNING SYSTEMS. Seemingly a very general term. Yet it
apparently focusses on Sound Signals associated with train stops.
Reference: Barwell 1983
378
RAILWAY SOUND SIGNALSIRAIL SOUND SIGNALS. A term from the
Classification that includes Detonators and Track Crew Warning Signals. A
separate term, Multi-Message Railway Aids, includes the audible dimension of
Cab Signals and Level/Grade Crossings. A single segment that includes all Sound
Signals whether exclusively acoustical or not might be considered for the Classifi-
cation. Fusees need to be included. Second term is a variant form in Part J.
Reference: Part H, General Classification 2003, Part J, 2002
b) Explosive Signals
ALL-WEATHER FUSEES. Is "All-weather" part of the title or simply a
description? That is, a Fusee usable in all kinds of weather.?
Reference: Hollingsworth 1983
AUDIBLE SIGNAL. For Corbin this refers to a Detonator. Blythe uses it more
broadly for a variety of forms. Philipps refers to Cab Signal by this term. Rolt ties
term to Automatic Train Control.
Reference: Corbin 1922, Blythe 1951, Philipps 1942, Rolt 1982
BANGERICRACKER. Colloquial term for Detonator according to Jackson while
RONT refers to it as slang. While Cracker is colloquial for RONT.
Reference: Jackson 1992
CLAYTON'S AUTOMATIC DETONATOR PLACER. Vanns provides full title
that explains the works of the Placer.
Reference: Vanns 1997
CLAYTON'S FOGGING MACHINE. A "brand name" for one form of Fogging
Machine.
Reference: Corbin 1922
DETONATING FOG SIGNAL. Alternate name for Detonator or Torpedo. The
device was invented by E.A. Cowper. It is made up ofa small case with metal
"ears" that can be attached to the rail; gunpowder is placed in case.
Reference: B & M 1981
379
DETONATING SIGNAL. Another variant name for Detonators or Torpedoes.
Dempsey notes it has meaning of a danger signal.
Reference: Dempsey 1855
DETONATOR. According to Hollingsworth, this is "English English" for
Torpedoes. The term has a variety ofmeanings:
DAR: driver to approach cautiously for a minimum of 1500 feet.
TWR: the meaning is: one detonator: slow down and be prepared to stop;
two detonators: stop; three: stop and do not move until Signal removed and
proceed authorization given.
RG New Systems: one detonator'means stops; two mean caution.
According to Corbin it consists of percussion cap and gunpowder.
Classification: #5400
Type of Aid: Acoustical Railway Signal
Operation: Explosive device placed on tracked and exploded by passing train.
One or more messages were possible.
Comments: Detonator common name for device though Explosive can be used.
Reference: Hollingsworth 1983, DAR 1983, SA TWR 1964, Corbin 1922, New
Systems 1984 RG
DETONATOR CONTAINER. Rather obviously, this container holds detonators.
Therre are several related terms that can be included:
DETONATOR BOX. A case or box with at least six detonators.
DETONATOR CASE. Cylindrical case for Detonator.
DETONATOR HOLDER. Same meaning as above.
DETONATOR TIN. A cylindrical container of metal
Reference: RONT 2001
DETONATOR MACHINES. Are these akin to a Fogging Machine (ca. 1915)?
Reference: Rolt 1982
DETONATOR PLACER. Mechanism (apparatus) that places at least one
Detonator on rail. Lever operated device activated from lineside or sigalbox.
380
See Also: Fogging Lever Frame.
Reference: UIC-COST 1972, RONT 2001
DETONATOR SIGNAL. TWA employs this variant of the basic term. It clarifies
the basic term. SA also uses the shorter Detonator form as well.
Reference: SA TWR 1962
DUPLEX DETONATOR. According to RONT this is one detonator with 2
explosive sets.
Reference: Jackson 1992
DUPLEX FOG SIGNAL. Term for a Detonator containing two units of
explosives according to Jackson. This constitutes two Fog Signals. A Fog Signal
is not a detonator mechanism but each package of explosives.
Reference: Jackson 1992
FLARE. Term for what is called a Fusee in the US. It is available in red, green,
yellow colors. See Also: Fusee.
Reference: Calvert 2004
FOG. Jackson includes this as a term for Detonators albeit a very brief one.
Reference: Jackson 1992
FOG DETONATOR. A more precise form of the basic term of detonator. It is
placed on the line at Distant Signals displaying caution.
Reference: Blythe 1951
FOG SIGNAL. Not an overarching term despite its appearance. Corbin employs it
as a synonym for Detonator.
Reference: Corbin 1922
FOGGER. Jackson employs this term for Fog Repeater.
Reference: Jackson 1992
FOGGING LEVER FRAME. This is an audible Fog Signal. It consists oflever
381
-------- -- --------
frame which is employed for installing detonator on rail head.
Reference: RONT 2001
FOGGING MACHINES. A mechanism that automatically places Detonator on
track, removes spent detonators and then adds a fresh Detonator.
Reference: Corbin 1922
FUSEES. RSD descibes this device as a "Chemical fIre light, like a Roman candle
giving a bright light ...." It served as a stop or slow indication. It displayed red,
green, or yellow color.
Reference: RSD 1911
NON-OPTICAL SIGNALS. This appears to be a very broad term for any Signals
not visual. However, Mashour employs it as a Sound Signal denoting Fog
Signalling Detonators.
Reference: Mashour 1974
TORPEDO. An explosive device affixed to the rail. It would explode when a train
ran over it.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1985
TORPEDO SIGNAL. Signal is added to core term thereby reducing ambiguity in
meaning of Torpedo.
Reference: New System 1884 RG
TUBE DETONATOR/OPEN SECTION DETONATOR. RONT includes these
terms without defInitions.
Reference: RONT 2001
c) Level/Grade Crossing Sound Signals
AUDIBLE AUTOMATIC WARNING DEVICES. This term refers to Sound
Signals at grade crossings.
Reference: Philipps 1942
382
AUDIBLE-PEDESTRIAN CROSSING. Terms refers to German practice. No
formal name as such is attached to this device.
Reference: ERS-M 1995
AUTOMATIC BELL. Seemingly the word automatic has been added to indicate
bells and other grade crossing safety aids that are not controlled and operated
manually. Train crews direct traffic if automatic systems activated during
frequency movements when train is standing on track circuit.
Reference: B & 0 1927
BELL. A very general term though AAR SM gives it a specific meaning: an
acoustical device at grade crossing that emits a warning upon approach of a train.
Classification: #5611
Type of Device: Acoustical Level/Grade Crossing Signal
Operation: Bell sounds in conjunction with other devices (Lighted Signals,
possible barriers/gates).
Comments: Classification alludes to Crossing Bell which is a rare term. Bell in
context of crossing can represent this range of Acoustical Signals.
Reference: AAR SM 1987
BELL, GONG. Luxembourg in ERS distinguished between Bell and Gong forms.
RSD frequently viewed a gong as a part of a bell though it also included units
termed gongs.
References: RSD 1911, ERS-M 1995
BELL, SINGLE STROKE. A signal indication generated by a single stroke.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
BELL, VIBRATING. ARSPAP describes this as an audible signal that operates
automatically "until the circuit is opened."
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
CROSSING ALARM. Advertisement form American Railway Signal Company
in 1911. No details available.
383
Reference: RSD 1911
CROSSING BELL. Shorter name for Highway Crossing Bell.
Reference: RSD 1911
DOUBLE GONG HIGHWAY CROSSING BELL. This is a single unit with two
gong units. Note: Gong and bell are separate in marine A/Ns. Gong means the
hollowed spherical unit struck by a striker buoy gong has a similar shape to the
railroad gone but larger.
Reference: RSD 1911
ELECTRIC FLAGMAN. A 19th century Electric Signal that was patented but
perhaps not employed. It included a mechanical flag and bell. Was it a Crossing
Signal?
Reference: Calvert 2004
ELECTRONIC BELLIELECTRONIC WARNING BELL. No details on either
form; presumably it refers to electronic mechanism rather than an electro-
mechanical mechanism.
Reference: ERS-M 1995
ENCLOSED CROSSING BELL. RSD refers to Bells, whose mechanism
(movements) is within a metal housing, and to Bells whose mechanism is
uncovered. Some forms are a single unit containing cover, mechanism, striker.
Others have the mechanism in a unit separate from Bell and striker.
Variant types and names include:
IRON CASE, ENCLOSED CROSSING BELL
ENCLOSED WATER TIGHT, LOW & HIGH VOLTAGE HIGHWAY
CROSSING BELL
Reference: RSD 1911
ENCLOSED TYPE GONG. A gong whose mechanism is within a metal housing.
See also: Enclosed Bell.
Reference: RSD 1911
384
GRADE CROSSING ALARM. This term is from Japan. It is presumably in a bell
form though few details are given.
Reference: Japan Association 1975
HIGHWAY CROSSING BELL/BELL, HIGHWAY CROSSING. This is
probably the basic term (US) encompassing various forms at grade crossings. It is
integrated with Lighted Signals, signs, possibly barriers. Its function is to warn of
approaching trains. ARSPAP-D reverses word order.
Reference: RSD 1911, ARSPAP-D 1965
HIGHWAY CROSSING BELL-ELECTRONICIHIGHWAY CROSSING BELL-
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL. The fIrst form has an electronic means of operation
while the second has traditional mechanism including magnetic coil, armature,
traditional gong and a striking arm.
Reference: WBS (Australia)
HIGHWAY CROSSING SIGNAL. RSD includes one Signal, presumably a bell,
under the heading of Chicago Highway Crossing (RR Supply Co). In most
instancess signal in this context means a Lighted Signal rather than a Sound
Signal.
Reference: RSD 1911
HOESCHEN CROSSING SIGNALIHOESCHEN BELL SYSTEM. Historic term
from early 20th century. Bell powered by magneto-generator that is activated by
levers activated by train passing over interconnected rail.
Reference: King 1921
LOCOMOTIVE TYPE CROSSING BELL. A locomotive bell adapted to a grade
crossing function.
Reference: RSD 1911
ROAD CROSSING SIGNAL. Signals of double flashing character at a crossing.
Reference: Calvert 2000
SKELETON BELL. According to RSD a Skeleton Bell is one whose mechanism
385
is uncovered.
Reference: RSD 1911
SOUND-BELL/SOUND BELL. Netherland's term for a level crossing safety aid.
Reference: Alkmaar.
VIBRATING BELL/BELL, VIBRATING. Bell terms that are presumably
employed at grade crossings. Vibrating Bells activated when electric circuit is
closed. They continue until circuit becomes open.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
d) Cab & Train Control Sound Signals
CAB SIGNAL - SOUND.
General Note. Much of the Cab Signal coverage for this study is in Ch. 2 (as well
as Systems in Ch 1). There is some mention of sound in that chapter. And Sound
Signals are also part of other signals without specific mention in the title. This
segment provides a specific focus on Cab and related Sound Signals.
Classification: #5610
Type of Device: Acoustical Railway Signal component
Operation: Sound Signal operates in conjunction with visual Signals.
Comments: This term represents all of Sound Signals for Cab Signal activity.
CAB SIGNAL, AUDIBLE. Cab-based device that emits sound under
programmed situations. See Also 2D5,
Reference: AAR SM 1987
AUDIBLE CAB SIGNALLING/AUDIBLE-CAB SIGNALLING. This refers to
GWR 1906 form. It is an informal descriptive term; indicator meant.
Reference: Nock 1978, Ellis 1966, Barwell 1983
AUDIBLE CAB INDICATORIINDICATOR, CAB, AUDIBLE. This sound
device is an air whistle. Whistle sounds when a change occurs in Cab Signal.
Whistle continues to sound until acknowledged.
386
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
AUDIBLE INDICATOR. Term for sound dimension for Cab Signals.
Reference: FRA-RAR 1984
AUDIBLE SIGNAL. For Breen this is an indication not an indicator. For the
second source it has appearance of overarching Signal yet specific use may belie
that view. See also: Explosive Signals.
Reference: Breen 1980, Skabballonovich 1984
BELL & SIREN UNIT. Refers to physical apparatus for ATC. Siren denoted
presence of Distant SignaL Bell denoted clear indication. No visual signals but
Barwell places this discussions under the heading of Automatic Warning Systems
-- Cab Signalling.
Reference: Barwell 1983
CAB ALARM. A brief entry in source; no details are given as to nature of Alarm.
Reference: Japan Assn. 1975
CAB INDICATOR. According to Philipps, Cab Signal gives visual indications
while Cab Indicator gives sound warnings.
Reference: Philipps 1942
CAB WHISTLE. Refers to Whistle which sounds completion to more restrictive
indicator. See also next entry.
Reference: GRS 1954
CODE CONTINUOUS CAB SIGNAL WITH WHISTLE & ACKNOW-
LEDGER. A Sound Signal that is an integral part of the Cab Signal assembly. See
also 2D5.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
INDICATOR, CAB; AUDIBLE. A Sound Signal that is an integral part of the
Cab Signal assembly. See also 2D5.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
387
KLAXON. Taylor speaks of Kaxon for proceed indication (on) for GWR ATC.
Bell sounds for danger (off) indication. Barwell speaks of Siren.
Reference: Taylor 1949, Barwell 1983
RELIOSTOP. A fonn of Train Stop. Apparatus is partly on tracks, in locomotive.
Apparatus activates siren, whistle in locomotive when signals approached. If
action not taken the brakes arer activated.
Reference: Blythe 1951
WARNING HOOTER. This is part of the Strowger-Hudd ATC System. Brief
blast if Signal clear; on-going blast if at danger until brakes on or mechanism
reset.
Reference: Vanns 1997, Taylor 1949
WARNING WHISTLE/WHISTLE. Acoustical aid that sounds off when signal
indication become more restrictive.
Reference: GRS 1954
WHISTLE SIGNAL. This is a Sign for DAR. Appearance belies reality. Cross-
reference.
Reference: DAR 1983
e) Other Fonns
BELL. A Switch Indicator Bell that alerted crew when train approaching switch
The bell was part of ABS.
Reference: King 1921
FOG GONG. Electric gong affixed to Visual Signals as a warning in foggy
weather especially when in danger position.
Reference: Jackson 1992
FOG REPEATER. Devices is visual not audible in nature. It is a Colour-Light
exhibited in low visibility and which repeats indication of next regular Signal but
388
in advance.
Reference: Jackson 1991
STAFF WARNING SYSTEMS. Term refers to systems that warn track crews of
approaching trains. Systems can be visual and/or audible. They include
MOVABLE AUTOMATIC WARNING DEVICE. ERS-H speaks of
acoustical Signal without describing the form.
TRAIN OPERATED WARNING SYSTEM (TOWS). Description mentions
an alarm sound but without giving its form.
INDUCTIVE LOOP WARNING SYSTEM (ILWS). A variant form of
TOWS. Train crew has a "portable warning issuing device (PWID) that picks up
Signals
Reference: ERS-H 1995
TRACK CREW WARNING SIGNALS. Term in Classification that can
encompass all forms of Signals for track crew safety.
Reference: Part H, General Classification
TRACK INDICATORS. Term for largely obsolete visual and/or sound Signals
that provided warnings for track crews. It was largely a visual signal but some
forms included bells.
References: Hall Signal, Part F
4C2 Radio Signal Terms
BEACON/EURO-BALISE BEACON. Component ofETCS, creates shared
transmission standard. Euro-Balise provides interface with track Signal apparatus
and cab-based module.
Reference: ETCS ... IJR 9-93
ELECTRONIC SIGNALLING. An overarching term in this form of Signal.
Reference: NS Samples ... 1983
ELECTRONIC TOKEN. This Token is a radio transmission to train from control
center. Radio Token constitutes a token since only one train receives data for a
389
section or block. Barwell notes that Electronic Token is a system.
Reference: Barwell 1983
ELECTRONIC TOKEN SYSTEM. Alternate name for Radio Electronic Token
Block (RETB).
Reference: Challenge 1983
EURO-RADIO. This is part of the ETCS System. It transmits ATP, ATC data.
Reference: ETCS... DR 9-93
GPSINAVSTAR GPS/GPS TECHNOLOGY. GPS, originally a marine and aero
aid, is increasingly applied to railroad operations. GPS may provide multiple uses
for railroads including guidance of trains for purpose of avoiding collisions.
References: Railways Need ... 1994, Welty 5-88 RA, Carley-WSJ, RN Plan 1998
RADIO-BASED TOKEN SYSTEM. This term is seemingly akin to other
Electronic Token Arrangements though explanation not fully clear. It refers to
Spoornet in South Africa.
Reference: Railways Need ... 1994
RADIO BLOCK. A shorter form of the basic Radio Block System term.
References: Whitehouse 1985, Brown 1984
RADIO BLOCK SYSTEM. This term is interchangeable with the Radio Token
System. It lacks mention of Token but at the same time it is more specific by
adding block to term.
Reference: Whitehouse 1985
RADIO ELECTRONIC TOKEN BLOCK (RETB). It refers to exchange is of
Electronic Tokens rather than physical tokens. Token is a visual message on
locomotive screen.
Reference: ERS-V 1995
RADIO SIGNALLING. Seemingly a term covering all aspects of Signalling and
controlling in ETCS.
390
Reference: ETCS 1983
RADIO TOKEN BLOCK. A basic term for this form of safety aid. Specific terms
refers to form in Angola that is "knit" together with microwave communication
links.
Reference: Railways Need ... 1994
RADIO TOKEN EQUIPMENT. This term seemingly refers to the physical
appearance of Radio Token System.
Reference: ERS-H 1995
RADIO-SHUNTING. Seemingly this term refers to radio transmission between
control and train. It is probably not a Signal situation since it consists ofvoice
communication only.
Reference: Jia-lin 1981
RADIO TOKEN BLOCK SYSTEM. A longer, more precise version of the basic
token.
Reference: Telecoms Expands ... 1995
RADIO TOKEN SYSTEM. This system replaces current token system with an
electronic token. It involves human speech but also includes "electronic token
data" via a display unit in cab.
Classification: #5550
Type of Device: Electronic Railway Signal
Operation: Tokens in an electronic form replace physical tokens. Radio
communication transmissits tokens according to an agreed upon pattern.
Comments: Radio Token represents all electronic token forms and systems in this
study.
Reference: Whitehouse 1985
RADIO TOKENLESS BLOCK. This term is interchangeable with the Electronic
Token System.
Reference: Challenge 1983
391
RALIOPHONE. This term refers to inductive apparatus based on passage of
electrical current. It involves telephone communication and Cab Signal
operations. Seemingly, it is not a radio aid though closely related.
Reference: Blythe 1951
RETB SYSTEM. Acronym for Radio Electronic Token System.
Reference: A & W 1991
SAT-GUIDANCE SYSTEM/SAT-BASED GUIDANCE SYSTEM. Informal,
descriptive terms for GPS System,
Reference: Carley, WSJ 1998
TOKEN BLOCK. This refers to a shorter version ofRadio Token Block. No
physical tokens are involved.
Reference: Railways Need ... 1994
TRANSPONDER. Trackside equipment that electronically transmit data to
passing train.
Reference: RONT 2001
WIRELESS SIGNAL SYSTEM. This does not refer to radio but instead to
Robinson's wire-less track circuit activated Signal System.
Reference: B & M 1981
392
4D Staff, Ticket, Token, Tablet, Train Order & Time Interval Terms
General Note. This sub-chapter includes diverse offerings. Many of the devices
employ objects that are passed to a train crew while in a given section. Other
forms include Tokenless methods and Time Interval processes. What they have in
common is a lack of Lineside Signals though Signals at stations are present in
some instances.
4D1 Staff Forms
ABSOLUTE STAFF SYSTEM/ABSOLUTE STAFF INSTRUMENT. A form of
Train Staffthat permits a single train in a section at a time. The Instrument is the
physical apparatus dimension.
Reference: King 1921
ANNETT'S KEY. Key and lock device for seldom used sidings. On single lines it
is part of Train Staff operations.
Reference: A & W 1991
AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC STAFF INSTRUMENT. An instrument that allows
crews to receive staff while maintaining speed.
Reference: Queenslands SS 1965
AUTOMATIC STAFF EXCHANGING APPARATUS/AUTOMATIC
EXCHANGE EQUIPMENT/AUTOMATIC TABLET EXCHANGE
EQUIPMENT. Terms refer to apparatus for exchanging staffor other form of
token. They are partly located on locomotive, partly next to track at signal box.
See also: Automatic Token Exchange.
Reference: VGR 1932, K & W 1963, Vanns 1997
ELECTRIC STAFF. According to Hammond this is another name for Tablet. It is
also a component for Electric Token Methods.
Classification: 537.7.70.701
393
Type of Device: Movable Railway Signal
Operation: Instrument-released Staff required for entrance into block.
Comments: See Also Staff entry
References: Hammond 1964, Corbin 1922, Fraser 1919
ELECTRIC TRAIN STAFF. No details from VGR but presumably a variant of
Electric Staff.
Reference: VGR 1932
ELECTRIC STAFF INSTRUMENT. Mechanism for releasing, retaining staff for
a given section or block.
Reference: Shackleton 1976
ELECTRIC STAFF BLOCK SYSTEM. This term is from Canada. In this form
train superiority is susperseded by possession of staff.
Reference: Canada UCOR 1961
ELECTRIC STAFF SYSTEM. Seemingly, it refers to the working of electric
staff. It includes staff, instrument and operation of admitting and blocking of
trains in a section by train crews.
Reference: Bird 1972
ELECTRIC TRAIN STAFF & TICKET SYSTEM. System similar to basic form
save for using metal rather than paper tickets.
Reference: Taylor 1949
ELECTRIC TRAIN STAFF SYSTEM. This refers to a means for regulating train
movements on single lines.
References: Bird 1972, RSD 1911, Starkey 1944
INTERMEDIATE SIDING JUNCTION INSTRUMENT. This is a special staff
machine that allows access to sidings, junctions.
Reference: King 1921
LARGE ELECTRIC STAFF. One form ofthe Key Token Instrument which see.
394
It is made of steel and designed to be fitted into the correct machine only.
Reference: K & W 1963
O.E.S. STAFF. One Engine in Steam refers to the wood staff system which see.
Term means that just one engine up and running on a line at a time.
Reference: K & W 1963
ONE TRAIN WORKING. This method employs a Staff. There is to be no other
train in the block. Seemingly it is akin to O.E.S.
Reference: Leach 1991, A & W 1991
PERMISSIVE STAFFIPERMISSIVE ATTACHMENT. This is an adjunct to
Absolute Staff System which see. This allows more than one train in a block at a
time.
Reference: King 1921
PUSHER ATTACHMENT. This Attachment to Train Staff system allows
movement of pusher engines.
Reference: King 1921
SINGLE LINE STAFF. A baton of wood or metal controls train movements.
Reference: RONT 2001
SINGLE LINE STAFF BOX. Container for Staff.
Reference: RONT 2001
SINGLE LINE TICKET. Supplemental ticked allowing second train to travel in
direction of previous train with staff.
Reference: RONT 2001
SINGLE STAFF SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. Equipment for "One engine in steam"
or "staff and ticket operations.
Reference: RONT 2001
STAFF. Refers to a staff or rod given to train crews for a specific section of track.
395
Entrance to the section requires staff. It is surrendered when leaving section. It is
employed on single lines. Staff could be segmented into two or three pieces with
,each piece given to a train crew.
Classification: #537.7.70.700
Type of Device: Movable Railway Signal
Operation: Authority to entry a block dictated by possession of staff.
Comments: Classification omitted Movable Signals, 537 but included in Notes.
Term ofMovable Signals refers to those devices not fixed in place. Classification
referred to Manual Staff. Probably inaccurate. Intended to set basic form apart
from Electric Staff and other forms.
Reference: Corbin 1922. Hammond 1964
STAFF & WORKING. This is equivalent to Staff and Ticket systems. It refers to
equipment and process of that form of train operations.
Reference: Varms 1997
STAFF CATCHER. A device for delivering and retrieving Staffs.
Reference: King 1921
STAFF CRANE/CRANE, STAFF. A post and bars that supports a staff. It is
placed near the tracks so staff could be reached from moving train.
Reference: RSD 1911
STAFF MANUAL BLOCK SYSTEM. This system is employed where no
Signals are in service. It follows the basic token system format.
Reference: AAR-USSR 1960
STAFF POUCHES. Terms refers to sleeve within which Staff is positioned.
Reference: King 1921
STAFF SYSTEM. Term refers to system of controlling traffic on single line by
requiring trains entering a section to have a staff (supplied by signal person at
beginning ofblock). Sinunons speaks of staff or tablet system. Seemingly they are
interchangeable terms.
396
References: Blythe 1951, Simmons 1986
SUBSIDIARY ELECTRIC STAFF WORKING. The term suggests electric staff
employed as a secondary or subsidiary system with lighted and other signals as
pnmary.
Reference: Bird 1972
TRAIN STAFF/TRAIN-STAFF. Hammond employs this as synonym for staff. It
is a more explicit version of the basic term. Hyphenated form is from Barwell.
References: Hammond 1964, Barwell 1963
TRAIN STAFF SYSTEM/TRAIN-STAFF SYSTEM. Staff and Staff Systems are
core terms and common terms. "Train" adds a degree of precision. Ellis offers a
hyphenated form; the single source so doing so. Ellis speaks of staff or baton.
References: Hammond 1964, ARSPAP-D 1965, Ellis 1958
W & T ELECTRIC STAFF SYSTEM. System character of device made clear by
adding that term. Commonly employed aid until largely superseded by Key Token
Working.
Reference: Bianculli 2003
WEBB & THOMPSON ELECTRIC STAFF INSTRUMENT. According to VR it
replaced Tyer Table Instruments.
Reference: Wooley 1958-1 (VR)
WEBB & THOMPSON ELECTRIC STAFF. A "brand name" for electric staff.
Reference: Starkey 1944
WOODEN STAFF/WOODEN TRAIN STAFF. K & Wis specific about the
nature of this staff. This is the most elementary form ofthe system and is intended
for lightly travelled lines. G.A. adds train to basic term.
Reference: K & W 1963, SA GA 1947
4D2 Staff & Ticket Forms
397
PAPER TICKET METHOD. This method links Wooden Train Staff and Paper
Ticket. Paper Ticket given to each of a group of train crews with only the last one
receiving the staff.
Reference: SA GA 1947
STAFF & TICKET/STAFF-&-TICKET. Term has same meaning as Staff &
Ticket System which see.
Reference: K & W 1963
STAFF & TICKET SYSTEM. Term refers to section where multiple trains are
present. Staff displayed -- but not given -- to succeeding train crews. Instead, a
ticket (paper) is given. The last train receives the staff. Ellis adds hyphenated
form.
Classification: 537.7.70.701
Type of Device: Movable Railway Signal
Operation: Authority for presence in block required ticket.
Comments: General comments on Movable Signals given with Staff entry
References: Corbin 1922, Fraser 1919, Shackleton 1976
TICKET SYSTEM. Blythe employs this term in lieu ofmore common and
complete Staff & Ticket System terms. A second version included a staff that
could be segmented into two or three pieces.
Reference: Blythe 1951
TRAIN STAFF & TICKET. A more precise version of the basic term, Staff &
Ticket.
Reference: VGR 1932
TRAIN STAFF & TICKET SYSTEM. A variant form of the basic term of Staff
& Ticket System.
Reference: Starkey 1944
WOODEN TRAIN STAFF & PAPER TICKET METHOD. The terms form a unit
in SA railway operations. They are the equivalent of Staff & Ticket System.
398
Reference: SA GA 1947
3 Token Forms
AUTOMATIC TOKEN EXCHANGES. A method for exchanging token while
train remains at speed.
Reference: K & W 1963
BALL TOKEN/BALL-TOKEN. These tokens represent one form/shape of
movable objects used in Token System.
Reference: UN 1954, Westinghouse Saxby
BLOCK TOKEN. Employed as part of single line operations in Electric Token
Block System.
LONG SECTION TOKEN. Controls train movements on more than one
section. Intermediate signalbox not on or in RETB area.
SECTION TOKEN. Controls train movements on single line. Token
required to enter section.
Reference: RaNT 2001
ELECTRIC TOKEN. Tokens are a part ofthe system consisting of machines at
opposite ends of blocks that are electrically connected. Withdrawal of one token
blocks a withdrawal from other end until token replaced.
Reference: ERS-V 1995
ELECTRIC TOKEN APPARATUS. This is seemingly equivalent to Electric
Token Instrument.
Reference: A & W 1991
ELECTRIC TOKEN BLOCK EQUIPMENT. No definitions given. The term
includes types of tokens, catchers, machines, other equipment.
Reference: RaNT 2001
ELECTRIC TOKEN INSTRUMENT. This Instrument refers to the apparatus,
. mechanism including tokens, etc., interlocking mechanism (removal of token
399
from a machine block, removal of token from other machine), magazine and
related features. Three forms of instrument: Large Electric Staff, Key Token,
Tablet which see.
Reference: K & W 1963
ELECTRIC TOKEN NIETHODS. Overarching term for severeal single-line
working methods. Electric staff or tablets are employed.
Reference: Hammond 1964
ELECTRIC TOKEN SYSTEMS. This term is similar in meaning to Electric
Token Methods.
Reference: Hammond 1964
BALL TOKEN TYPE. This may refer to Neale's Ball Token and Block
Instrument which see. Westinghouse Saxby Farmer was once a UK firm but it is
now a Calcutta concern.
Reference: UN 1954
ELECTRIC TOKEN SYSTEMIELECTRIC TOKEN BLOCK. Term refers to
machine handling token that are interlocked between opposite ends of section
which is carried out electrically. Several forms of the system omit reference to
electrical character.
Reference: ERS-V 1995
KEY TOKEN (I). A metal token with key attached. Key designed to fit specific
machine. Key token may take one of several forms including staff and ticket.
References: K & W 1963, Nock 1980, Shackleton 1976, Allen 1952
Classification: # 535.7.70.702
Type of Device: Movable Railway Signal
Operation: Possession of Electrically-related Token required for entrance into
block.
Comments: See Also: Electric Token System, Token
Reference: ERS-V 1995
400
KEY TOKEN (II). For ERS-V this refers to BR block system for single lines.
Reference: ERS-V 1995
KEY TOKEN BLOCK SYSTEM. Basic term with addition of Block. Key Token
is predicated on blocks but it is often not included in terms.
Reference: DAR 1983
KEY TOKEN TRANSFER SYSTEM. An attachment that serves as a Key Token
Balancer when train operations become out of balance.
Reference: Tyer & Co.
KEY TOKEN BALANCER. See Key Token Transfer System.
KEY TOKEN INSTRUMENT. Mechanism consisting of ball signals, indications,
tokens, magazines.
References: Sig. Eq. Review 1981, Tyer & Co.
KEY TOKEN SYSTEM. Terms refers to Tyer Key Token Instruments controlling
and regulating traffic by releasing and "freezing" tokens for a section of track as
required.
Reference: Sig. Eq. Rev. 1981
NEALE'S BALL TOKEN INSTRUMENT. Short form of next term.
Reference: Westinghouse Saxby Farmer
NEALE'S SINGLE LINE COMBINED BALL TOKEN & BLOCK.
Single line system involving tokens, releasing mechanisms, telephone hand sets
for coordinating release of token and trains.
Reference: Westinghouse Saxby Farmer
NO SIGNALMAN KEY TOKEN. Train crew operated single line Token not
signal crew.
Reference: RaNT 2001
NO SIGNALMAN REMOTE KEY TOKEN WORKINGINO-SIGNALMAN
401
REMOTE KEY TOKEN WORKING. Refers to instruments handled by train
crews with remote supervision.
Reference: ERS-H 1995, Leach 1991
NO SIGNALMAN TOKEN BLOCK. Equivalent ofNo Signalman Token
Working.
Reference: Leach 1991
NO SIGNALMAN TOKEN SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. RONT often adds
"Equipment" to terms including here.
Reference: RONT 2001
ONE TRAIN WORKING. New term for O.E.S.
References: A & W 1991, Leach 1991
SIGNALMAN-TO-SIGNALMAN TOKEN WORKING. This form is employed
for single lines.
Reference: Leach 1991
SIGNALMAN TO AUTOMATIC OPERATED TOKEN WORKING. This form
employed for terminal branch operations and multiple trains.
Reference: Leach 1991
SINGLE LINE TOKEN INSTRUMENT. An overarching term for apparatus
employed in Token systems and maintained atsignal boxes.
Reference: Vanns 1991
TOKEN. Short form of key token which see. It can be noted that Key Token
sometimes has meaning of block system for single lines employing tokens. See
also Token System.
References: Allen 1952, Ellis 1966
TOKEN BLOCK SYSTEM. Variation of basic term; this version adds block to
title.
Reference: UN 1954 (Japan)
402
TOKEN SIGNALLING. This provides a convenient heading for the various
components. Hollingsworth speaks of token as having several forms: staffkey,
tablet, ball. Simple systems contain the one token so one train only can pass
through.
Reference: Hollingsworth 1983
ELECTRIC SINGLE-LINE TOKEN SYSTEM. This system allowed trains to
safety travel either direction since tokens are at both ends, and tokens and Signals
are interconnected.
Reference: Hollingsworth 1983
TOKEN TYPE BLOCK INSTRUMENT. Ball Token moved from train to train
without a passage through to block instruments.
Reference: UN 1954 (Japan)
TOKEN-FORMS. Hollingsworth notes they can be one of several forms: Ball,
Staff, Tablet, Key. Tyer & Co. has several distinct forms and colors: Round key in
red, Square key in green, Triangle in yellow, and Diamond in blue. Rectangle are
for special requests.
References: Hollingsworth 1983, Tyer & Co (Field & Grant).
TOKEN FORMS-II. Leach provides a classification by function rather than by
physical shape:
MAIN SECTION (UNIDIRECTIONAL) TOKEN
ENGINEERING TOKEN
TEST TOKEN
SPECIAL TOKEN
Reference: Leach 1991
TYER'S KEY TOKEN INSTRUMENT. Maker's name is attached to basic term.
Reference: Kenya Railways
VAN SCHOOR TRAIN TOKEN SYSTEM. A system that includes both crossing
tablets and absolute tablets.
403
Reference: SA TWR 1964
4D4 Tablet & Tablet & Token Fonns
BALL TABLET TOKEN INSTRUMENT. Tenn included in a listing of
manufacturers' products in Jane's. Specific entry is that of Westinghouse Saxby.
This instrument is a mechanism through which tokens held, released, and train
operations are conducted.
Reference: Jane's 1988-89
ELECTRIC TABLETIELECTRIC TRAIN TOKEN. Object are dispensed to train
when entering block. Second tenn may be a variant tenn or fonn of the basic
tenn.
Classification: #537.7.70.704
Type of Device: Movable Railway Signal
Operation: Electrically-released Tablet discs pennits entrance of train into block.
Reference: Fraser 1919
ELECTRIC TABLET INSTRUMENT. This is presumably an apparatus
dispensing metal tablet discs when line is clear, and which freezes tablets when
line occupied.
Reference: VGR 1932
ELECTRIC TABLET SYSTEM. An Electric Token method using Tablets (discs
about six inches in diameter). The instruments are electrically interlocked.
Reference: Hammond 1964
ELECTRIC TRAIN TABLET METHOD. SA train operation method employing
Tyer's Tablet Method.
Reference: SA GA 1947
SINGLE LINE TABLETS. This tenn is a synonym for Tablets in general.
Reference: Vanns 1997
404
TABLET BLOCK SYSTEM. A block operation based on exchange of tablets.
Reference: UN 1954
TABLET BLOCK TRAIN OPERATraNS. Term probably describes the use of
Tablet Blocks in train operation and control situations.
Reference: UN 1954
TABLET INSTRUMENT. This is a reference to a traditional form but in a
revamped version involving radio interconnections and long-distance operations.
Reference: Brown 1984
TABLET SYSTEM. A system based on a machine that dispenses tablets or
tokens. Removal of one token locks machine at far end of section thereby
blocking entrance of a second train into a section until first train has left section.
Variations allowed more than one train in section under prescribed procedures.
Reference: Blythe 1951
TABLETS. Small pieces of metal employed in interlocked instruments that
control train movements.
References: Allen 1952, Corbin 1922
TABLET CATCHER. Mechanical device for catching (or receiving) a tablet to/
from a train.
Reference: RaNT 2001
TABLET POUCH. Device attached to loop employed for transferring single line
tablets between train crew and signal staff.
Reference: RaNT 2001
TABLET MACHINE. Signalbox instrument that includes single line Tablets
employed for control of single lines.
Reference: RaNT 2001
TABLET SYSTEM OF WORKING. Train opeeration based on tablets and tablet
instruments.
405
-----------------
Reference: Starkey 1944
TYER'S ELECTRIC TRAIN TABLET. More explicit version of the basic Tablet
term.
Reference: Kenya Railways
TYER'S #7 TABLET INSTRUMENT. This device displays three indications:
"Line Closed"; Train Approach (up or down), Train on Line (up or down). Two
tablets slides (Top: in/Bottom: out), switch plunger and bell plunger
Reference: Hammond 1964
#6 TYER'S TABLET MACHINE. Term is seemingly a synonym for Instrument.
Reference: A & W 1991
TYER'S TABLET INSTRUMENT. Term for the mechanism controlling tablet
operations. It releases and holds tablet as required thereby maintains safe train
operations.
Reference: Starkey 1944
TYER'S ELECTRIC TABLET SYSTEMITYER'S TABLET SYSTEM. This
model was patented in 1878. It replaced older, simpler arrangement and was more
fool-proof since electrical connections interlocked respective instruments.
Reference: Ellis 1958, Vanns 1997
5 Tokenless Forms
General Note. Segment can be viewed as a portion of IE though elements closely
related to Token Systems. Some systems employ Tokens of some forms.
SCOTTISH REGION TOKENLESS BLOCK. This system simulates traditional
token working. There are no physical tokens though pulses are transmitted.
This Token is not referred to as Electronic Tokens by Leach.
Reference: Leach 1991
TOKENLESS BLOCK. This term refers to Radio Electronic Token System which
406
see.
Reference: Challenge' 1983
TOKENLESS BLOCK EQUIPMENT. This term refers to Radio Electronic
Systems. Tokenless Block can also refer to visual, non-radio forms.
Reference: KNR 1985
. TOKENLESS BLOCK SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. RONT often adds "Equipment"
to term s including Tokenless Block System.
Reference: RONT 2001
TOKENLESS BLOCK WORKINGITOKENLESS BLOCK SYSTEM. This is
similar to Token Working but no tangible token is given out. Signal crews and
machines colloaborate closely and admit trains only to clear section. The second
term seems to be a close approximation of Working.
References: Hammond 1964, UN 1954, Japan Assn. ca. 1975
TOKENLESS BLOCK INSTRUMENT. Device for interlocking and employed
for both single and double lines. UN notes that Tokenless Block Instrument are
from F.S. (SABIB) Type; Siemens and Halse (Germany), and SNCF Type
(France), Sykes (UK).
References: Alkmaar, UN 1954
TOKENLESS BLOCK WORKING. A system bearing some resemblance to lock
and block operations in which Signal not released in block until train has passed
the Signal. It is an electrical system and without tockens.
Classification: #537.7.70.705
Type of Device: Movable Railway Signal
Operation: A system that electrically controls signal in blocks without tokens.
Reference: UN 1954
4D6 Train Order Forms
BALLOON TRAIN ORDER. This is a historical term (1864). It consisted of a
407
"Balloon-shaped container" hung from gallows. The container blocked view of
lantern. The lamp could be lowered which denoted train was to stop for orders.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
BANNER TYPE TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. This T.O. followed the Banner form
of Signal. It employed a rope for raising, and lowering signal indications.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
BOOT-JACK TYPE TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. This Signal employed a rack and
pinion device. An elevator cage moved the red lantern in and out ofposition. This
was activated by controls that could be altered by train crews through a
mechanical process.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
BOX TYPE TRAIN ORDER. Modified form ofBanner Box Block Signal.
Removal of red cloth banner denoted proceed.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
CENTER-PIVOTED, 2-POSITION TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. This is more of a
description of a Signal rather than a formal name.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
DOUBLE-ARM UQ TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. Term for Train-order that
incorporates physical appearance of the Signal.
Reference: King 1921
ELECTRIC ENCLOSED DISC TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. The name Stewart-
Hall can be added to the term. This Signal resembled a Banjo Signal which see.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. This form was for a
modem version (1906) in contrast to earlier forms which were entirely of a
mechanical nature.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
408
NINETEEN ORDER. Train order message: Delivered without train stopping.
Signature was not required.
Reference: A & W 1991
SLOW ORDER. A written order for speed reduction at a specific location in the
Train Order System.
Reference: A & W 1991
TELEGRAPH TRAIN-ORDER SYSTEM. Term describing a common means of
train operations and regulation in mid-19th century.
Classification: 537.7.71.710
Type of Device: Partial Movable Railway Signal
Operation: Train orders in conjunctions with Signals give operational instructions.
Reference: Ellis 1958
TELEPHONE TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. Signals mounted on regular Signal
mast indicate -- when red -- if train crew should stop and receive orders or go to
siding.
Reference: UN 1954
THIRTY ONE ORDER. Term within Train Order system. Signature required on
order which means train must stop.
Reference: A & W 1991
TIMETABLE & TRAIN ORDER (T & O)/TIME TABLE & TRAIN ORDER
SYSTEM. Term refers to a method based on time tables and train orders. UN (for
US) indicates TT for scheduled trains while non-scheduled trains requires
instruction by TO. Calvert adds System to the basic term.
Reference: Armstrong 1978, UN 1954, Calvert 2004
TRAIN ORDER BOARDS. Term for Boards that give Signals in Train Order
system. Found at stations.
Reference: King 1921
409
TRAIN ORDER/TRAIN-ORDER. A method of train operation by issuing of
orders; may not included fixed Signals.
References: Hollingsworth 1983, Ellis 1958
TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL/TRAIN-ORDER SIGNAL. A variety of sources give
altered versions of the meaning of this Signal. A sampling includes:
AAR SM: A Signal indicating whether or not the train has an order to
pick up.
RSD: A Signal at a station (telephone or telegraph) indicating train to stop
for orders (relating to its presence on the track).
ANRISA: Double arm Semaphore: red arm/black arm. Messages: Both
arms horizontal: Stop (red light). Red arm 45 degrees: "slow for orders". Yellow
lamp: caution. Red arm vertical: "station open, no orders". Green Light: clear.
Both arms vertical: yellow disc. Green and yellow light: station closed.
ARSPAP-SS: Train Order Signal is a Two-Way Single Lamp Signal as in
ANR.
References: ARSPAP-SS 1948, ANR, RSD 1911, AAR SM 1983
TRAIN ORDER SIGNALS OF THE COLOR LIGHT TYPE. In this form no
indication is given until train activates Signals. Ifred, stop for orders; if green,
proceed.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
TRAIN-ORDER SYSTEM. This is little different in meaning from Train Order
term. It constitutes a Train Operation method.
Classification: 537.7.70.711.
Type ofDevice: Partial Movable Railway Signal
Operation: Signals and physical print form orders direct train operatons.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
TRAIN-ORDER WORKING. Term is equivalent to system. British-influenced
410
operations often employ working.
Reference: Cunliffe 1968
WRITTEN TRAIN ORDERS. An older form oftrain operation that continues in
use as an signal/control system.
Reference: FRA-2 1979
YARRINGTON TYPE OF TRAIN ORDER SIGNAL. This Signal consisted of
four discs (3 red, 1 white) each facing a different direction. Discs attached to
horizontal arms which, in turn, are attached to a vertical pipe.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
4D7 Time Interval Forms
TELEGRAPH BLOCK OR TIME-INTERVAL SYSTEM. Seemingly these are
interchangeable terms for Northen Pacific Railroad.
Reference: K & T 1988
TIME INTERVAL SYSTEMITIME-INTERVAL SYSTEM. RSD, which
employs the hyphenated form, notes it employed where block system is lacking.
Torpedoes and fusees are a part of this method of spacing. ARSPAP-H version
omits hyphen. See Also: Torpedoes, Fusees.
References: RSD 1911, K & W 1963, ARSPAP-H 1953
TIME INTERVAL METHOD. Meaning of this system is probably little different
from Time Interval or Time Interval System. It consists of control of train
movement by time-tables, train orders, train schedules.
References: ARSPAP-H 1953
TIME INTERVAL/TIME-INTERVAL. This is not a Signal form in a direct
sense. It refers to method of spacing trains by time.
Classification: 537.7.70.712
Type of Device: Time spacing system which may include acoustical devices.
Operation: A time-based system.
411
Comments: See Also: Time Interval System
References: K & W 1963, Allen 1982, ARSPAP-H 1953
TIME-INTERVAL SYSTEM OF WORKING/TIME INTERVAL SYSTEM OF
SAFEWORKING. A method of operation by spacing trains by time differences.
Blythe has a slight variant that substitutes safeworking for simple worrking.
References: K & W 1963, Blythe 1951
TIME SYSTEMS. Seemingly a variant of Time Interval which see.
Reference: B & M 1981
4D8 Other Forms
DIRECT TRAFFIC CONTROL (DTC). Train movement operations under
direction of train dispatcher.
Reference: Kanner 1992
SPACE INTERVAL METHOD. A method based on sections or blocks which are
considered in Chapter 1.
Reference: FRA-3 1979
TELEGRAPH & TICKET METHOD. Ticket issued to train after line clear. This
is determined through telegraphic communication.
Reference: UN 1954 (Thailand)
TELEGRAPH BLOCK SYSTEM. A telegraph communication relays instructions
for train operation. Also an alternate for Manual Block System.
Classification: 537.7.70.713
Type ofDevice: A non-fixed communication for train operations.
Operation: A telegraphic system for train instructions.
Comments: See Also Telegraph Block in lEI.
Reference: Part H 2003, Tratman 2003
TELEGRAPH MESSAGE SYSTEM. Presumably train control exclusively by
412
telegraph. HDS speaks of"T.O. or Telegraph Message System." In US Train
Order is via telegraph.
Reference: Starkey 1944
TELEGRAPHIC ORDER METHOD OF TRAIN WORKING. A train operation
system worked through a passage oftelegraph messages.
References: SA Instruction 1962
TELEGRAPHIC ORDERS. These are written orders to train crews via telegraph.
Reference: Nock 1978
TICKET & SECTION ORDER SYSTEM. This term is found in a single source.
Few details are included.
Reference: VGR 1932
TIME-CODE SYSTEM. Only limited information is available for this apparently
unique term.
Reference: B & M 1981
TIMETABLES/TIME-TABLES. The term is employed as a means of Train
Control. They are possibly employed in conjunction with TO. In some instances
TO exists apart from Timetables.
References: FRA-2 1979, Hollingsworth 1983
TIME-TABLE OPERATION. This variant form gives a clearer view of the Time
Table as an operational method.
Reference: Henry 1942
TRAIN WARRANT CONTROL (TWC). This approach to train operations is
variously described as employing timetables or verbal directions. Train Orders
and Train Warrant are parallel approaches and possibly overlap. A case can be
made for placing this in Chapter IE though it is also very much part of this
segment.
Reference: Signalbox website, Kanner 1992, Railways Need 1994 IRJ
413
4E Level and Grade Crossing Signs, Signals, Gates, Barriers and Related
Accoutrements
General Note 1. The Level and Grade Crossing entity is unique since it also
appears in the TCD portion of the Database. Entries in the TCD study are from
the view of road transportation. The railway study has a somewhat similar
approach though a focus on railway activities is also present. TCD and Rail
coverage significantly overlaps within the T-M studies yet it remains distinct
within the two fields. Some components ofL/G Crossings are considered in other
segments of this study. This is especially the case with sound forms. The TCD
part of the Database can also be consulted. In the first edition this sub-chapter
drew together these safety aids by means of a category index/word list format.
More entries are found in this edition though the original format partially remains.
Terms are batched when appropriate. The first segment includes general terms for
safety devices as well as terms that specifically include components of a crossing
installation. Other segments include barriers (or gates) in various configurations.
Lighted, unlighted, and sound dimensions are included in separate segments.
4E1 Integrative Level and Grade Crossing Terms
General Note. This category includes terms that encompass a variety of safety
aids at crossings. Rarely would any of the terms refer to a single device. The
category can also constitute a general term for crossing safety. Many or most of
the terms in the category end in Protection, System or Devices.
ACTIVE WARNING DEVICES. These devices include Lighted Signals, Gates,
Bells.
Reference: Miller 1989
AUTOMATIC DEVICES. Term not defined. Presumably it refers to active
devices that include Flashing Lights, Gates, Bells.
Reference: Malone 1986
AUTOMATIC PROTECTION. Undefined but presumably it refers to active
414
safety devices.
Reference: Malone 1986
AUTOMATIC SAFETY INSTALLATIONS FOR LEVEL CROSSINGS. It is an
automatic flashing-light installation including bells and half-arm barrier. Barrier
can include lights. White flashing message signifies crossing ok while red
indicates danger.
Reference: Alkmaar.
AUTOMATIC WARNING DEVICES. No description given. It probably includes
active devices such as Signal Lights and other active equipment.
Reference: Malone 1986
AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED LEVEL-CROSSING (GRADE
CROSSING) PROTECTION. This term includes Bells, Flashing Lights and half-
barriers.
Reference: Cunliffe 1968
AUTOMATIC LEVEL CROSSING PROTECTION. An overarching term though
some specific uses may refer only to Road Traffic Signals. It is operated by a train
approaching crossing.
Reference: RONT 2001, Cunliffe 1968
CONVENTIONAL TRACK CIRCUIT-OPERATED LEVEL CROSSING
APPROACH WARNING SYSTEM. A system in which train activates track
circuit which causes audio-visual devices to operate.
Reference: Chandrika 1998
CROSSING DEVICE. An overarching term. No details given.
Reference: K & T 1988
CROSSING PROTECTION. Arrangement of Signals or interlocking equipment
so designed to elimate crossing collisions.
Reference: King 1921.
415
CROSSING WARNING DEVICES. Term refers to Highway Grade Crossing
Signal and Highway Grade Crossing Warning Device.
Reference: AAR SM 1983
CROSSING WARNING SYSTEM. No details given. Audible as well as Visual?
Reference: C & S RA 1996
ELECTRIC FLAGMAN. A system that alerted track crews of an approaching
trains. The device was later developed into a Level Crossing Traffic Warning
System.
Reference: LC 1991
GRADE CROSSING WARNING DEVICE. Term not described. Possibly audible
as well as visual.
Reference: China ... RA 1986
GRADE CROSSING WARNING SYSTEM. A possible overarching term. Brief
mention in a general description of railway safety systems.
Reference: FRA-1 1978
HIGHWAY CROSSING ALARM. A historic Hall Signal device. It displayed a
disc that warned of danger when red. Alarm suggests a sound dimension.
Reference: RSD 1911
HIGHWAY CROSSING PROTECTIONIHIGHWAY GRADE CROSSING
PROTECTION. B & 0 includes Automatic Bells, FlasWight, Gates, Wig-Wag
Under the first term.
Reference: RHGCP 1951 (2), King 1921 (1), Phillips 1942 (1), B & 0 (1)
HIGHWAY CROSSING SIGNAL. Perhaps this should be moved to Signals.
Though B & M includes Crossing Signs, Locomotive Type of Bell, and Wigwag
Signals under the term.
Reference: B & M 1981
HIGHWAY CROSSING WARNINGS & CONTROLS. A general term for gates,
416
lamps, cantilever signals, controls and related elements.
Reference: Safetrans
HIGHWAY GRADE CROSSING WARNING DEVICE. Term for a Warning
System that includes bells, gates, and signals.
Reference: AAR SM 1983
HIGHWAY GRADE CROSSING WARNING SYSTEM. Interconnected Devices
and Controls indicating a train's approach or presence at a grade crossing.
Reference: AAR SM 1983
LEVEL CROSSING PROTECTION. The various means of promoting safety at
crossings. It includes manual barriers, open crossings with signals, automatic half
and full barriers.
Reference: UIC-M
LEVEL CROSSING TRAFFIC WARNING SYSTEM. A system employed
sensors linked by radio. Detection of train activates sirens and flashing lights..
Based on Electric Flagman.
Reference: LC 1991
LUMINOUS SIGNAL. Meaning unclear. Reference refers to Flashing Lights or
Luminous Signals. Possibly a reflectorized device?
Reference: Jane's 1987-88
PASSIVE WARNING DEVICES. Term includes Crossbucks "and other passive
devices." Contrast this term with Active Warning Devices which see.
Reference: Miller 1989.
PROTECTIVE CROSSINGS. No definition. Presumably it refers to crossings
protected by safety devices.
Reference: Malone 1986
PROTECTIVE DEVICES. An overarching term though undefined.
Reference: Malone 1986
417
RAILROAD-HIGHWAY GRADE CROSSING PROTECTION. A general term
encompassing safety features and devices.
Reference: RHGCP 1953
TRAIN-ACTIVATED WARNING DEVICES. Undefined but probably an
overarching term.
Reference: Malone RA 1986
WARNING DEVICES. Possibly a shortened form of Active Warning Devices.
Reference: Malone 1986
WARNING SYSTEMS. Not defined. It may be similar to Active Warning
Devices. Term workable within context of railroad operations.
Reference: Miller 1989
4E2 Lighted Level & Grade Crossing Signals
a) Free-Standing Signals
ADVANCE WARNING SIGNAL (HIGHWAY CROSSING). A device
consisting of a flashing yellow light (and Sign) linked to railroad crossing SignaL
Provides advance warning of approaching train.
Reference: Safetrans (Raco publication)
AGA HIGHWAY DANGER SIGNALS/AGA TWO-COLOR HIGHWAY
DANGER SIGNAL These are acetylene-powered devices with flashing letters
upon approach of train. Second form gives off green flashes (when no train is
approaching) as well as red flashes when train is nearby.
Reference: King 1921
BARROW CROSSING WARNING INDICATOR. This term from A & W does
not include a description of the Indicator. RONT describes Barrow Crossing as
one tht is employed only by the station staff. It is located at the end of a station
418
platform.
Reference: A & W 1997, RONT 2001
CANTILEVER SIGNAL. Signal mounted on cantilever structure above roadway.
Reference: Safetrans
COLOR-LIGHT HIGHWAY SIGNAL. Term specifically refers to earlier 20th c.
Signal. It displayed two lights. Termed a Type K.
Reference: GRS 1925
CROSSING SIGNAL Seemingly the term refers to Lighted Signals. Employed in
close proximity to Audible Signal in older source.
Reference: REMC 1948, Malone 1986
FLASHING LIGHTS. Common term for Flashing Signals at Grade Crossing. See
Also: Flashing Light Signal.
References: Jane's 1987-88, Miller 1989
FLASHING LIGHT HIGHWAY CROSSING SIGNALS. A more extensive
version of a basic term. It appears in a study of Flashing Lights.
Reference: Cox 1971
FLASHING LIGHT SIGNAL/FLASHING-LIGHT SIGNAL. A general term for
Signals. It refers to crossing usage when in that context. Two flashing lamps in
red conforms to AAR specificiations.
Reference: RHGP 1953, REMC 1948
FLASHING LIGHT TYPE. One of two forms ofVisual Warning Signals. The
form is that of Wig-Wag Type Signals. They appear in an older study.
Reference: REMC 1948
FLASHLIGHTS/FLASHLIGHT SIGNALS. South African term for Crossing
Signals.
Reference: Starkey 1944
419
GRADE CROSSING SIGNAL. Signal employed at crossing. Functioned together
with Highway Approach Signal which see.
Reference: King 1921.
GRADE CROSSING SIGNALING. Undefined term though meaning is clear: the
system of Signals and presumably other safety devices at crossings.
Reference: Malone RA 1997
HIGHWAY APPROACH SIGNAL. An advance Signal 300 feet from crossing.
An earlier 20th c. form. Employed with Grade Crossing Signal which see.
Reference: King 1921
HIGHWAY GRADE-CROSSING PROTECTIVE SIGNALS. Variant term for
Signals providing protection at crossings.
Reference: Welty 2-1988
HIGHWAY CROSSING SIGNALS/SIGNAL, HIGHWAY CROSSING.
Terms for electric-powered Signals providing road traffic protection at railroad-
highway grade crossings. AAR favors the second form ofthe term. King 1921
refers to Signals of that time: Union Three-Aspect Automatic Flagman and
Wigwag Crossing Signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965, King 1921
LED HIGHWAY CROSSING LAMP. BNSF proposed lamp with longer life and
longer range.
Reference" C & S PR 1986
LEX-C HIGHWAY GRADE CROSSING FLASHING LIGHT UNITS.
Redesigned equipment with fewer parts and less weights.
Reference: Armstrong RA 1982
PRE-WARNING SIGNALS. Signal employed when side-roads and curves are
near a level-crossing. Term found in The Netherlands.
Reference: ERS-M 1995
420
LEVEL CROSSING SIGNALS. A category of Signals in UAR Code.
Reference: UAR 1983
LEVEL CROSSING WITH FLASHING LIGHT SIGNALS. This form lacks
barriers but has Flas1).ing Lights. Bells may be present in some locales.
Reference: UIC 1972
LEVEL CROSSING WITH A SIGNAL SYSTEM TO GIVE WARNING OF
THE APPROACH OF TRAINS. A category within level crossing segment of
UARCode.
Reference: UAR 1983
MINIATURE WARNING LIGHTS (MWL)/NlINIATURE RIG WARNING
LIGHTS. Lights for pedestrians crossings and also minor roads. Red indicates
stop, geen denotes clear and unlighted lamps indicates Beware.
References: RONT 2001, A & W 1991, Leach 1991 (1)
RAILROAD-RAILROAD GRADE CROSSING SIGNAL. An overarching term
for Signals at crossings for railroads in the second half of the 19th c. Railroad-
Highway Crossing Signals in the 20th century refer to trains and road traffic.
Reference: ARSPAP-H 1953
SIGNAL, FLASHING LIGHT. Highway Crossing Signal term often given by two
flashing red lights in US. See also Flashing Light Signal.
Reference: ARSPAP-D 1965
421
SIGNALS FOR TRAMWAY LEVEL CROSSING. Tenn is within category of
Siding, Light Railway and Tramway Signals for M & H in early 20th c.
Reference: M & H
TRAM CROSSING SIGNALS. Refers to tram operations crossing rail lines. Not
a road-rail intersection situation.
Reference: SA TWR 1964
VISIBLE WARNING SIGNALS. Tenn includes Flashing Light Signals and now
obsolete WigWag Signal for source employing tenn. Tenn works within railroad
context.
Reference: ARSPAP RHGCP 1953
WIG-WAG SIGNAL. A two-phase Signal consisting of a "moving banner in
daylight. And Light at night which could be either flashing or moving. Variant
tenns may also have variations on the core description.
Reference: RHGCP 1953
WIG WAG/WIG WAG TYPE/WIG WAG CROSSING SIGNAL. First tenn is a
commonly used short fonn. Second tenn is a variant fonn. Third can be seen as
fuller version of the basic tenn.
References: Jackson 1992 (1), REMC 1948 (2), King 1921 (3)
4E2 c) Lighted Crossing Signals Attached to other Devices
General Note. Lighted Signals are often listed with Gates and other Devices. They
are listed here with needed notes. Gates and Barriers are considered more
extensively in 4E3 and subdivisions. Overarching tenns that do not list
components in the title are in 4El.
AUTOMATIC CROSSING GATES & FLASHING LIGHT-SIGNALS.
Reference: USSR-AAR 1960
FLASHING LIGHTS & GATES.
Reference: Miller 1989
422
GRADE-CROSSINGS WARNING DEVICES.
Reference: US&S 1986
LEVEL CROSSING GATES, BARRIERS & WARNING SIGNALS.
Reference: Jane's 1987-88
4E3 Barriers & Gates
General Note. This collection of terms includes forms that can be called gates as
well as some which approximate mobile garden fences. Lights and sound Signals
are frequently included. Variant terms are often little different from basic terms..
Half-barriers are considered separately because of the variety of forms.
a) Overarching Terms
BARRIERS. Device for blocking access to crossing. It is a movable installation.
The term can include Full Barriers and Half Barriers.
Reference: UIC CST 1972
LEVEL CROSSING BARRIER. No defInition in RONT. It includes Automatic
Barriers, Half Barriers and Manually Controlled Barriers.
Reference: RONT 2001
b) Barriers, Full Barriers, & Gates
General Note. Terms includes Barriers that are indetermiate in description as well
as those explicitly full in scope. Gates are also included Form of operation is also
included.
FULL BARRIER. A Barrier that encompasses the entire width of the roadway.
Reference: UIC CST 1972
1) Automatic Barriers
423
General Notes. Automatic Barriers manifest a variety of terms. The core term
description may encompass all of the entries:
AUTOMATIC BARRIER. Automatic barriers are activated by approaching
trains. Reference: RONT 2001
Other similar terms include:
LEVEL AUTOMATIC BARRIERS, ERS-M 1995
LEVEL CROSSING WITH AUTOMATIC BARRIER, ERS-M 1995
Variant Terms That May Approximate the Core Terms:
AUTOMATIC BARRIER CROSSING LOCALLY MONITORED, RONT 2001
AUTOMATIC GATES, REMC 1948
AUTOMATIC LIFTING BARRIERS, Vanns 1997
BARRIER GATES, USSR-AAR 1960
CROSSING GATES, A & W 1991
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED LIFTING BARRIERS, Alkmaar
GATED LEVEL CROSSING, RONT 2001
LEVEL CROSSING BARRIER, Leach 1991
LEVEL CROSSING GATES, A & W 1991
LEVEL CROSSING WITH FULL BARRIER, UAR 1983
LIFTING BARRIERS, A & W 1991, Vanns 1997
LIFTING BARRIERS LEVEL CROSSING, RONT 2001
More specialized forms include:
BOOM GATES. Term for a barrier that resembled a gardent fence. It was placed
on rubber tires and positioned by electric motors. It was a form of full barier.
Reference: A & W 1991
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC PEDESTRIAN BARRIERS. Term that includes the
means of operation.
424
Reference WBS (Aus)
ON CALL BARRIER CROSSING (OCB). Call to signalbox resulted in raising of
gate. Eventually the gate would lower automatically. Audible alarm signalling
lowering of gate. No visual Signal.
Reference: Leach 1991
LIFTING BARRIER LEVEL CROSSING. Crossing with barrier that is raised in
order to permit passage.
Reference: RONT 2001
ROBOT BARRIER GATES. A product of Robot Industries. Involves vehicle
detection and closed circuit TV. Signal Eq. 1981
SHORT-ARM GATES. A partial gate that creates pathway for vehicles present
on the crossing.
Reference: REMC 1948
WICKET GATE. Level crossing gate that signalbox can lock when train
approaching. It is a p~destrian crossing.
Reference: Jackson 1992
2) "Manned" Barriers constitute a subdivision in UK as well as other nations.
Network Rail employs Manually Operated instead. There are several versions and
variant forms.
MANNED GATE CROSSING, A & W
MANNED BARRIERS, Leach
MANNED BARRIERS CROSSING, Leach
MCBILOCAL//MCB/REMOTE//MCBCTV(See Below)IITOB (See
Below)
MANNED LEVEL CROSSING
LOCALLY CONTROLLED MANNED LEVEL CROSSING. This form
of crossing has full barriers or gates. A "crossing keeper" or
"signalman" operated the installation.
425
REMOTELY CONTROLLED MANNED LEVEL CROSSING. No
defInition is given for this form.
Reference: RONT 2001
CCTV MONITORED REMOTE BARRIER CROSSING. A "manned" barrier
activated by trains approaching the crossing. A signalbox maintained surveillance
from a remote location.
Reference: Leach, 1991
Network Rail employs "Manually Controlled" in place of "Manned":
MANUALLY CONTROLLED GATE (MG)
MANUALLY CONTROLLED BARRIER (MCB)
MANUALLY CONTROLLED BARRIER PROTECTED BY CLOSED
CIRCUIT TELEVISION (MCB-CCTV)
Variant Forms Include:
MANUALLY CONTROLLED BARRIERS (MCB), Leach
POWER-WORKED MCB, A & W 1991
This includes:
AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICES
TRAFFIC LIGHTS
BARRIERS
A version of manual or "manned" systems:
TMO (=TRAINMAN OPERATED [BARRIER]), A & W 1991
TRAINMAN-OPERATED BARRIER (TOB), Leach 1991
c) Half Barriers & Gates
HALF-BARRIER. VIC describes this unit as a device that moves and extends
over half of the width of the road. Referred to as a gate in some nations. Signals
and bells may be present.
426
Reference: UIC COST 1972
Similar terms and references for Half-Barriers include:
AUTOMATIC HALF ARM BARRIER INSTALLATION, Alkmaar
AUTOMATIC HALF BARRIER, Cox (Holmes) 1971
AUTOMATIC HALF BARRIER CROSSING (ARB), Leach 1991
AUTOMATIC HALF-BARRIER CROSSING, RONT 2001
AUTOMATIC HALF BARRIER LOCALLY MONITORED (ABCL), Leach
1991
CROSSINGS WITH AUTOMATIC OPERATED HALF BARRIER, Nock 1962
LEVEL AUTOMATIC: HALF BARRIER, ERS-H 1995
LEVEL CROSSING HALF BARRIER, ERS-C 1995
Related terms include:
ARB CROSSINGS. UK acronym for Automatic Half Barrier. A & W 1997
AUTOMATIC BARRIER CROSSING. This is also a Half-Barrier. The specific
term specifically includes Traffic Signals. RONT 2001
AUTOMATIC LEVEL CROSSING & HALF GATE. Alkmaar
DOUBLE HALF BAR & FULL BARRIER CROSSING. ERS-M 1995
ELECTRIC LEVEL CROSSING WITH HALF BARRIERS & SIGNALS.
Jane's 1987-88
GATES & AUTOMATIC HALF-BARRIERS. Cox (Holmes) 1971
UIC includes more specialized terms:
DOUBLE HALF BARRIER. This is an installation with Half Barriers for each
half of the roadway.
SINGLE HALF BARRIER. How does this differ from half-barrier. UIC gives
both forms.
427
4E4 Open Crossings
General Note. Crossings without barriers are termed Open Crossings in UK and
other nations. Crossings may have no controls or only Signs. Others have Signals
and are frequently termed Automatic Open Crossings.
AUTOMATIC OPEN CROSSING. Displays Road Traffic Signals. No barriers.
Reference: RONT 2001
AUTOMATIC OPEN CROSSING LOCALLY MONITORED (AOCL), Leach
AUTOMATIC OPEN CROSSING REMOTELY MONITORED (AOCR), Leach
(Network Rail has comma after Crossing in previous two entries)
AUTOMATIC OPEN LEVEL CROSSINGS, A & W 1997
LEVEL AUTOMATIC OPEN CROSSINGS
UNGATED BARRIER LEVEL CROSSING. A form lacking physical barrier.
Reference: RONT 2001
OPEN CROSSING (OC). May display Signs only. But Flashing Lights may be
present.
Reference: Leach 1991 ,A & W 1997
OPEN LEVEL CROSSING. Marked by Signs only. RONT 2001
UNCONTROLLED OPEN CROSSINGS/OPEN CROSSING WITH NO
CONTROLS. Crossings with Signs only.
Reference: Leach 1991
4E5 Sound Signals
AUDIBLE AUTOMATIC WARNING DEVICES, Phillips 1942
AUDIBLE-PEDESTRIAN CROSSING, ERS-M 1995
AUTOMATIC BELL, AAR SM 1987
BELL, AAR SM 1987
BELL, GONG, AUDIBLE WARNING, UIC CST 1972
CROSSING ALARMS, RSD 1911
CROSSING BELL, RSD 1911
DOUBLE GONG HIGHWAY CROSSING BELL, RSD 1911
428
ELECTRONIC BELLIELECTRONIC WARNING BELL, ERS-M 1995
ENCLOSED CROSSING BELLS, RSD 1911
ENCLOSED TYPE GONG, RSD 1911
GRADE CROSSING ALARM, Japan Assn.
LOCOMOTIVE TYPE CROSSING BELL, RSD 1911
HIGHWAY CROSSING ALARM, RSD 1911
HIGHWAY CROSSING BELL, RHGCP 1953
HIGHWAY CROSSING BELL-ELECTRONIC/HIGHWAY CROSSING BELL-
MECHANICAL, WBS (Aus)
HOESCHEN CROSSING SIGNALIHOESCHEN BELL SYSTEM, King 1921
LOCOMOTIVE TYPE CROSSING BELL, RSD 1911
ROAD CROSSING SIGNAL, Calvert 2004
SKELETON BELL, RSD 1911
SOUND-BELL/SOUND BELL, Alkmaar
VIBRATING BELL/BELL, VIBRATING, ARSPAP-D 1965
4E6 Signs & Boards
AUXILIARY SIGN. Signs placed beneath Flashing Lights. They include Stop
Sign in vertical design, and Stop on Red Signal.
Reference: REMC 1948
BARRICADE SIGN. Sign indicates construction of grade crossing or repairs at
crossmg.
Reference: AREA 1987
CLOSE UP ROAD WARNING SIGN. South Africa term for Halt Sign.
Reference: SA SS 1936
CROSSING SIGNS. As known as Crossbuck Sign in SM. Short form of Highway
Crossing Sign in AREA.
References: AAR SM 1983, AREA 1982
CROSSBUCK SIGN. In Europe this is known as a St. Andrew's Cross. US Signs
429
often display the word Railroad on one arm, and Crossing on the other.
Reference: REMC 1948
DISTANT WARNING SIGN. Preceeds Halt Board which see. Displays cross
form. [Halt Board listed with Level Crossing before Halt Board].
Reference: Starkey 1944
DISTANT ROAD WARNING SIGN. Cross (US Crossbuck) at Level Crossing.
Sign made up of reflector beads ("reflector lenses).
Reference: SA SS
GATES NOT WORKING SIGN. Message of Sign presented in reflectorized
form.
Reference: AREA 1990
HIGHWAY AND BARRICADE SIGN. AREA refers to these form of Signs as
meeting federal standards. No other details are given. See also TCD studies and
US MUTCD publications.
Reference: AREA 1990
HIGH CROSSING SIGNIHIGHWAY GRADE CROSSING SIGN. Sign
indicates location of railway grade crossing.
Reference: AREA 1983 (l), AAR SM 1987 (2)
ILLUMINATED SIGN. Sign attached to Hoeschen Bell when in operation.
Reference: King 1921
LEVEL CROSSING HALT BOARD. Displays red reflectorized wordings.
Flashing Lights accompany Sign.
Reference: Starkey 1944
SIGN BOARD. Indicates position of Level Crossing.
Reference: Starkey 1944
RAILROAD CROSSING SIGN. Two Signs are under that heading: '
430
AT THE CROSSING which is the Crossbuck Sign with number oftrack
Sign.,
ADVANCE WARNING SIGN (& WITH FLASHING LIGHT) which is a
circular-shaped Sign with St George Cross and "RR" embossed on the
plate. The Sign has a yellow ground and black symbols.
Reference: AREA 1929
REFLECTOR BUTTONS. Term in REMC. They are metal crossbuck Signs
comprise of reflector buttons.
Reference: REMC 1948
ROAD SIGNS & SIGNALS AT LEVEL CROSSING. Overarching term for all
safety devices. Reference: UAR 1983
SAINT ANDREW'S CROSS. Included in coverage without details. Netherlands
employs a double cross sign.
Reference: ERS-M 1995
SAINT GEORGE'S ADVANCE WARNING BOARD. Displays a square with
white ground and black cross (or plus sign). Indicates to train crew that an AOCL
is 300-600 yards away. A second Sign combines St George and Speed Restriction
Sign some 100-300 yards away.
Reference: A & W 1991
SECOND TRAIN COMING SIGN. An illuminated Sign indicating second train .
after an earlier train had activated the barrier or gates.
Reference: Vanns 1997
SIGNS (CROSSING). REMC sometimes employs short form for Crossing Signs.
Sign sufficiently precise when in a context of Railroad publications.
Reference: REMC 1948
WARNING SIGNS FOR LEVEL CROSSING. Overarching term for these Signs
which includes the Crossbuck and Track # Signs.
Reference: WBS (Aus)
431
4E7 Other Forms
General Note. This segment includes references to crossings that mayor may not
include safety devices. Miscellaneous terms that do not fit previous categories are
also included.
ACCOMODATION CROSSING/ACCOMONDATION LEVEL CROSSING. A
private crossing.
Reference: Jackson 1992, RONT 2001
BARRIER TYPE PROTECTION.. This term refers to physical obstruction not a
gate or similar construction. It consisted of cables or a streel construction that is
either raised or lowered into position. Lamps, Signs, Signals could be present as
well.
Reference: REMC 1948
OCCUPATION LEVEL CROSSING. A private crossing.
Reference: RONT 2001
PEDESTRIAN CROSSING. Exclusive for pedestrian use. Uses include a public
path where bridge or underpass are lacking.
Reference: RONT 2001
PUBLIC ROADWAY LEVEL CROSSING. "A Level Crossing carrying a public
road across the railway."
Reference: RONT 2001
ROAD USER OPERATED LEVEL CROSSING. Road user operated "field type
gates."
Reference: RONT 2001
SEISMIC BASED TRAIN ACTUATED APPROACH WARNING AT
LEVEL CROSSING. Train activates "seismic transducer" therey activating
"audio-visual alarm." This is both visual and acoustical.
432
Reference: Chandrika 1998
THE ORION - 300 LEVEL CROSSING APPROACH WARNING SYSTEM.
Orion detects traffic circuit changes (caused by trains) thereby activating "audio-
visual alarm." This is both visual and acoustical.
Reference: Chandrika 1998
TRAIN CREW OPERATED LEVEL CROSSING. Crossing whose operatation is
under control of train crew rather than signal or other staff. Crossing included
barriers or gates.
Reference: RONT 2001
USER-WORKED CROSSINGS. Networkrail includes a category known as User-
Worked Crossings. They are private crossings. Some public use may be
authorized in some cases. They include:
USER-WORKED CROSSING PROTECTED BY MINIATURE
WARNING LIGHTS (UWC-MWL). The light units display
red and green lights. Gates may be user-operated; lifting barriers
may be in use.
USER-WORKED CROSSING WITH TELEPHONE. Similar installation
augmented by telephone link to signal staff.
FOOTPATH CROSSING. Pedestrian crossing primarily. Stiles or wicket
gates are employed. Miniature warning lights may be included.
BRIDLE PATH. Variant ofFootpath Crossing.
433
BIBLIOGRAPHY
i Books, Journals, Letters, Reports
A Century of Railway Signalling in New Zealand. 1964. Centennial News.
January 15.
Adams, B.B. & Hitt, Rodway, eds. 1911 The Railway Signal Dictionary.
(Railway Gazette).
Adam-Smith, Patsy. 1973. Romance ofAustralian Railways. Sydney: Rigby.
Advanced Communication Vehicle Control Method. (WO/2002/064415).
http://www.wipo int .... (6-23-08).
Akawaga, Kaoru. 1975. Shinkansen Signaling & Telecommunication Facilities
Between Shin-Oska and Hakata. Japanese Railway Engineering. Vol. 16,
#1.
Alkmaar: See Nederlandsee ... in Trade Literature.
Allen, D. & Woolstenholmes, C.J. 1991. A Pictorial Survey ofRailway SignaHng.
Sparksford (UK): Haynes Publishing Group.
Allen, Geoffrey Freeman. 1952. Railways the World Over. London: Ian Allen.
_. 1962. British Railways: Today & Tomorrow.
_.1982. Railways Past, Present & Future. New York: William Morrow.
_.1983. Railways ofthe 20th Century. New York: William Morrow.
_. (editor). 1988, 1989. Jane's World Railways. Coulsdon, Surney, UK: Jane's
Transport Data.
American Railway Engineering Association. 1929. Manual ofthe AREA for
Railway Erigineering. Chicago: AREA.
_.1990. Manualfor Railway Engineering. Washington, D.C.: AREA.
_.1987.1987-1988 Manualfor Railway Engineering. Washington, D.C.: AREA
Armseinen in Nederland, 1860-1965. 1985. Op de Rails. March & May. 2 parts.
Armstrong, John. 1957. All About Signals. Trains. June.
_. 1978. The Railroad--What it is, What it does: The Introduction to Railroading.
[edited by Marc Green]. Omaha: Simmons-Boardman Publishing.
_.1981. Signaling: Yesterday, Today & Tomorrow. Railway Age. Month???
_. 1982. GRS: Staying Young at 78 with Expanding R&D. Railway Age.
March 8.
_.1986. ATCS: The Chips are Down. RA. March.
434
_.1987. Letter to Compiler. March 9.
_.1988. NEC: The Rocky Road to ATC. RA. March.
Association of American Railroads (ARSPAP in: iii Signal Code Materials)
_.1960. Railroads ofthe USSR. Washington, D.C.: AAR.
ATCS Advances Slowly. 1991. RA. February.
ATCS: An Evolving Science. 1989. RA. June.
ATP, ATO & CTC Systems. 1996. IRJ. July.
Australian Railways. ud. Around Australia Program.
Bailey, Colin, General Editor. 1995. European Railway Signaling. London: A &
C. Black.
D. Hotchkiss. Railway Signaling Principles.
F. de Vilder. 1. Train Detector Systems. 2. Block Systems.
M. Vallez. Switch Operating & Proving Systems.
W. Bohm. Signals.
H. Lindenberg. Interlocking Cabins.
A. Fisher. Radio Systems in Signalling.
J. Pizarro. Internal & External Safety Conditions. (P-1)
J. Pore. High Speed Line Signalling System. (P-2)
A. Exer. Rail Traffic Management.
P. Middelraad. Level Crossing Protection.
J. Hammargren. Other Safety Programs
J. Catrain.. 1. ATP & C. 2. The Future.
Baltimore & Ohio. 1927. The Catalogue ofthe Centernary Exhibition ofthe
Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, 1827-1927. Baltimore: B & O.
Ball, Don. 1985. Railroads. New York: W.W. Norton.
Barwell, F.T. 1983. Automation & Control in Transport. Oxford (UK):
Pergamon.
Basic Building Blocks ofMechanical Signalling. 1974. South African Railways.
Belves, Pierre. 1980.100 ans D'Affiches des Chemins defer. Paris: La Vie du
Rail.
Bianculli, Anthony J. 2003. Trains & Technology: The American Railroad in the
the Nineteenth Century. Vol. 4. Bridges and Tunnels, Signals. Newark:
University ofDelaware Press.
Bin, N. Tao, T, Min, QK, Hai, G.C. 2006. CBTC (Computer-Based Train
Control): System & Development. (Computers in Railways & Proceedings of
435
----------
the 10th International Conference). Abstract. http://ntlsearch.bts. gov/trisl
record/tris/O 1034732.html.
Bird, Kim. 1972. South Coast Limited: A History ofthe Victor Harbour &
Milang Railway Lines in South Australia. Adelaide: Australian Railway
Historical Society (S.A. Division).
Bisset, Kendrick. 1990. Signaling for Efficiency. RA. February.
Blythe, Richard. 1951. Danger Ahead: The Dramatic Story ofRailway Signalling.
London: Newman Neame.
Breckenridge, F.C. 1967. Colors ofSignal Lights: Their Selection, Definition,
Measurement, Production, & Use. Washington, D.C.: National Bureau of
Standards.
_. 1955. Fifty Years ofSignal Lighting. New York: IES.
_. 1964. United States Standardsfor the Colors ofSignal Light. Washington,
D.C.: National Bureau of Standards.
Breen, Terry. 1980. The Rudiments of Control. Modern Railroad. January.
Brigano, Mary, and McCullough, Hax. 1981. The Searchfor Safety: A History of
Railroad Signals and the People Who Made Them. American Standards.
British Railway Signals. 2008. http://en.wikipedia.orglBritish railway signals.
April 7.
Brown, Vivian. 1984. Electronics Change the Face of Signaling. IRJ. August.
Bryan, Frank W. & McGonigal, Robert S. Railroad Signals: What they do, what
they mean. 2006. Trainsonline. http://www.trains.comlTRN/default.aspk? c=a
& id =191. May 1.
Cab Signalling. 1991.IRJ. September.
Calvert, James. 2004. Early Railway Signals.. www.du.edulcalvert.
=-' ud. Railways: History, Signaling, Engineering. www.du.eduljcalvert.
(6-10-08).
Camp, Walter Mason. 1903. Notes on Track. Chicago (Auburn Park): self-
published.
Cardani, A.A. 1979. Signalling: Moving Toward Automation.IRJ. June.
Carley, William M. 1998. Trainspotting: To Avoid Collisions Some Railraods
Test Satellite Positioning. Wall Street Journal. June 29.
C & S Advances Help Ease Congestion. 1996. Progressive Railroading. 30 June.
The Challenge ofNew Technology. 1983.IRJ. November.
Chandrika, Prasad. 1998. Indian Railway Signalling: Today & Tomorrow. R.l
436
June.
China Picks GRS as a Partner in Shanghai Signaling Venture. 1986. RA. January.
Clearman, Brian. 1981-2008 Transportation-Markings: A
Study in Communication Monograph Series.
Foundations, 5th ed., 2008
A First Study in T-M: The Us. 2nd ed., 1992.
International Marine Aids to Navigation, 2nd ed, 1988.
International Traffic Control Devices, 2nd ed., 2004.
International Railway Signals, 1992
International Aero Navigation Aids, 1994.
General Classification ofTransportation-Markings,
2nd ed., 2003.
T-M Database, 1st ed., 1997-2008
i Marine, 2nd ed., 2007
ii TCD, 2nd ed., 2008
iii Rail, 1st ed., 2009
iv Aero, 2001
v Composite Categories Classification & Index,
2006
Transportation-Markings: A Historical Survey,
1750-2000,2002.
Communications-Based Train Control Gains Favor. 1995. IRJ. September.
Communication-Based Train Control. 2008. Feb. 22. http://en.wikipedia.org/
wiki/Communication-based train control.
- -
Consolidated Rail Corp (Comail). 1985. Conrail Signal Aspects. Philadelphia.
Cooner, Scott A. 1995. Integration of Freight Railroad Operations in Advanced
Traffic Management Systems. In Graduate Student Papers on Advanced
Surface Transportation Systems. Colledge Station (TX): Texas
Transportation Institute, TAMU.
Corbin, T.W. 1926. The Romance ofModern Railways. Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Cosmos Solves the Problems of History. 1997. IRJ. March.
Cox, J.J. 1971. View of Railway Flashing Signals. In The Perception &
Application ofFlashing Lights. J.G. Holmes, Chair, Symposium.
Cunliffe, J.P. 1968. A Survey of Railway Signaling & Control. IEEE
Proceedings. April.
437
Daumas, Maurice. 1970. A History ofTechnology & Invention. Translated by
Eileen Hennessy. Volume III, The Expansion of Mechanization.
New York: Crown.
Dimetronic Has Been Awarded Contracts to Install ATP, ATO, & CTC Systems
.... 1996. IRJ. July,
Dempsey, G. Drysdale. 1855. The Practical Railway Engineer & Mechanical
Operations and Structures Which are Combined in the Formation ofRailways
for Public Traffic; Embracing an Account ofthe Principal Works Executed
in the Construction ofRailways to the Present Time; With Facts, Figures,
and Data. London: J. Weale.
Digital Processing Wayside Equipment. 1984. IRJ. August.
Drapa, 1. Ede, B., Polivka A. PTC Starts to Roll Out Across the USA. 2007.
Railway Gazette International (online). May l.http://www.railwaygazette.com/
news view/article ....
Driver Reminder Appliance. 1997. IRJ. December.
Eastern Railroad Discussion> cab-signals. 2008. May 27. http://www.
trainorders.com/discussion/read.php?2, 1679469. (6-08-08).
Easy Acess Lineside Signals. 1996. IRJ. January.
Electric Lights for Semaphores & Train Approach Indicators on the Rock Island.
1936. Railway Signaling. December.
Electronic Interlocking. 1984. IRJ. August.
Ellis, C. Hamilton. 1966. Railway History. London: Studio Vista, Ltd.
_.1958. The Development of Railway Engineering. InA History ofTechnology.
Charles Singer, et.al., editor. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Encyclopedia Britannica. 1910. Railways. VoL 22, 11th ed. New York: EB Co.
ETCS Should Aid Cross-Border Traffic. 1993. IRJ. September.
Europe Aims for Standardization. 1992. IRJ. July.
Excursion to Franford. 1965. Sydney: Australian Railway History Society.
(Victoria Division).
Farrington, S. Kip. 1946. Railroadingfrom the Rear End New York:
Coward-McCann.
Feagans, R.J. 1972. The Railroad That Ran by the Sea. Seattle: Howarth-North.
Federal Railroad Administration. 1979. Evaluation ofSignal/Control Systems
Equipment & Technology. Washington, D.C.: USDOT, FRA.
Task 1 Assessment of Signal/Control Technology & Literature
438
Review
Task 2 Status of Present Signal/Control Equipment
Task 3 Standardization, Signal Types, Titles
_. 1984. Rules & Regulations Governing Railroad Signal & Train Control
Systems. Omaha: Railway Educational Bureau.
Fisher, R.E. 1987. Letter to compiler. August 9.
_.1976. Vanishing Markers: Memories ofBoston & Maine Railroading 1946-
1952. Brattleboro (VT): The Stephen Greene Press.
Fixed Signals. ud. www.alaskarails.org/terminology/signs//track-signs.html.
(1-28-09).
Fraser, J. 1919. The Development ofthe New South Wales Railway System.
Sydney: Institute of Civil Engineers.
Frattassi, A. Russo. 1977. Combined System: A New System for Improving
the Problem of Signal Repetition on Locomotives. Rail International. April.
_. 1987. Letter to compiler. September 4.
Gaum, Manfred. 1992. Moving-Block Signalling. IRJ May.
GE Cites US&S as a Quality Supplier. 1992. RA. MONTH?
Geddis, J.B. 1987. CP Rail Moves Toward ATCS. RA. August.
GPS-Information. 1997. IRJ August.
Grafton, William. 1896. Railway Signaling. Bulletin of the University of
Wisconsin Engineering Series #6. Madison: University ofWisconsin.
Greenfield, Mark J. 1998. Signaling Change: New Ideas, Technologies Make
Their Mark. Progressive Railroading. September.
Grisda1e, B. 1977. Computer Aided Centralized Traffic Control on South
African Railways. Transactions: The SA Institute ofElectrical Engineers.
November.
Hammond, Rolt. 1964. Railways in the Air Age. London: Oxford University
Press.
Harrigan, Leo J. 1962. Victoria Railways to '62. Melbourne: Victoria Railways.
Henry, R.S. 1942. This Fascinating Railroad Business. Indianapolis: Bobbs-
Merrill.
Hollingsworth, Brian. 1983. The Pleasures ofRailways. London: Allen Lane.
Holmes, J.G. (Chairer, Symposium). 1971. The Perception and Application of
Flashing Lights: An International Symposium Held at Imperial College.
London: Adam Hilger.
439
Indusi (Part 1). ud. www.sh1org/eisenbahn/rindusi.htm. (l0-20-08).
Introduction of Electrical Signaling .... 1995. IRJ June.
Isaacs, V. & Whitehead, R. ca. 1967. The Rushworth Colbinabbin & Girgarre
Railway. Victoria Railways.
Jackson, Alan. A. 1992. The Railway Dictionary: An A-Z 0/Railway
Terminology. Phoenix Mill (UK): Alan Sutton Publishing.
Japan Association of Signal Industries. ca. 1975. Present Status o/Signal
Industry in Japan. Tokyo.
Jia-lin, Wang. 1981. New Interlocking System Built for Chinese Classification
Yards.IRJ August.
Joint Venture Buys American Standard Group. 1990. RA. April.
Kanner, Donald R. 1992. Red Doesn't Always Mean Stop. Chicago: Donald R.
Kanner & Sons.
Kaufman, John E. 1966. IES Lighting Handbook. New York: Illuminating
Society.
Keyboard Control in Milan. 1984. IRJ August.
Key Token Instruments. 1981. IRJ August.
Kharlanovich, LV. 1980. New Rules of Operating SZD. Rl September.
Killigrew, D.L. 1949. A Century of Signal Glass Developments. Railway
Signalling & Communications.
King, Everett E. 1921. Railway Signalling. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Co.
Kitchenside, G.M. and Williams, Alan. 1963. British Railway Signalling. 2nd ed.
London: Ian Allen, Publisher.
Knutton, Mike. 1995. Siemans & GEC-A: Will They Won't They? IRJ
September.
Kuebler, Bill and Tarbox, Gary. 1988. The Completion of the Mainline
Automatic Block Signaling in 1924. Mainstreeter. Fall.
Kuhlmann, Bernd. 1983-4-5. Signalebei anderen Bahnen gesehen. Eishhenbahn
Jahrbuch.
Laut, Agnes C. 1936. The Romance o/the Rails: The Story o/the American
Railroads. New York: Tudor Publishing Co.
Lavallee, Omer. 1953. The Story ofFixed Signals. Spanner. Two parts: May and
June.
Leach, Maurice, General Editor. 1991. Railway Control Systems. London:
A & C Black.
440
LED Junction Route Indicator. www.dorman.co.uk/rail/infrastructure/led-
junction-route-indicator/
Level Crossing Safety. 1991. IRJ. October.
Light Rail. ... 1984. IRJ. August.
Long Island Railroad Upgrades Signal System. 1991. RA. October.
Lundsten, Carsten S. 2000. North American Signaling: SP Single Track
Automatic Signaling Basics. September 25. http://www.lundsten.dk/us_
signaling/abs_st_sp/index.html.
_. Railroad Rules, Signaling, Operations: North American Signaling Basics.
1998. September 27. http://www.lundsten.dk/us_signaling/movement.html.
_.2002 ["new document link added August 2007"]. http://www.lundsten.dk/
us_signaling/
McKnight, Robert. 1990. Letters to writer.
Malone, F. 1986. Crisis at the Crossing. RA. February.
Mashour, M. 1974. Human Factors in Signalling Systems: Specific Applications
to Railway Signalling. Stockholm: Almquist & Wiksell.
Middleton, P. Harvey. 1941. Railways & the Equipment & Supply Industry.
2nd ed. rev. Chicago: Railway Business Association.
Midwest Steel Buys Switch Stand Business. 1990. RA. October.
Miller, Luther. 1989. Funding Needs Escalate. (Part II of Crossing Safety).
RA. November.
_.1997. Grade Crossing Safety: Lessons from Fox River Grove. RA. March.
"Motor Car Indicators". 1954. Railway Signaling & Communications. January.
Murray, Matthew. 1973. Memories: Being the Notes ofa Lecture Read by MJ.
Murray Before the Historical Society ofVictoria 25 June 1917. Vintage
Twain Publication.
New Lines for the Railway ofthe 21st Century. 1981. Rl December.
The New System ofTrain Signals. 1984. Railway Gazette. October.
Nock, O.S. 1978. Signalling & Traffic Marshalling. A History ofTechnology.
Volume XII. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
_. 1962. Fifty Years ofRailway Signalling. London: IRSE.
_. 1980. Railway Signalling: A Treatise on the Recent Practice ofBritish
Railways. London: Adam & Charles Black.
Notes. 1898. American Engineering & Railroad Journal. January.
NS Samples the Latest Technology. 1983. IJR. November.
441
O'Dea, William T. 1958. The Social History ofLighting. London: Routledge &
Kegan Paul.
Official Inauguration of CTC Centre elarwood. 1975. South African Railways.
Official Program. 1984. Washington, D.C.: XVI Pan American Railway
Congress.
One Hundred Years to Bendigo. ud. Sydney: Australian Railway History Society.
Op de Rails: See Armseinen ....
Otsuka, Kazuyuki. 1976. ATO of Teito Rapid Transit Authority in the 12th Year
of its Service Testing. Japan Railway Engineering. Volume 16, #3, #4.
Oxford-Duden Pictorial Dictionary ofthe German & English Languages. 1980.
Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Pan American Railway Congress. 1984. Glossary ofSelected Railroad Terms.
(XVI Pan American Railway Congress). Washington, D.C.: USDOT, FRA.
Panel Indicator. 1984. lRJ. August.
Penn Central Transportation Co. 1973. (Signal Code materials). Philadelphia:
Penn Central.
(Pennsylvania Railroad). 1889. Railroad Gazette. November 24.
Petit, Bill. 2007. Communications-Based Signaling (CBS) -Vital PTC. (Paper
at AREMA C & S Technical Conference). http://www.billpetit.comlPapers/
Petit 004. pdf.
Phillips, Edmund J. 1942. Railroad Operation & Railway Signaling. (2nd
Printing, 1953). New York: Simmons-Boardman Publishing Corp.
Philpot, Brian. 1985. Letter to compiler. March 1.
Positive Train Control. 2008. April 28. http://en.wikipedia.org/wikilPositive_
Train Control.
Pracht, M. 1992. Fixed Vs. Moving Block. lRJ. July.
PTC from Union Switch-Now, No Territory is Dark. http://www.switchptc.com/
subsystem.htm.
. RailroadData.Com Railroad: Signals. ud. http://www.railroaddata.com/
rrlinks/signals/.
Railway Engineering & Maintenance Cyclopedia. 1948. 7th ed. Chicago:
Simmons-Boardman Publishing Co.
Railways Need More Affordable Signalling. 1994. lRJ. December.
Railway Object Name Thesaurus. 2001. http://www.org.uk/pressoffice/
pressreleases/2002/thesaurus.asp
442
Railway Signal. 2005. Wikinfo. Feb. 23. http:www.wikinfo.org/index. php/
Railway_Signal.
Railway Signal Association. 1911. The Railway Signal Dictionary. (Adams,
Braman B & Hitt, Rodney, 1st ed; Cloud, A.D. & Simmons, RH., 2nd ed).
New York: Railway Age Gazette.
Railway Signaling: A Comprehensive Treatise on Modern Methods ofRailway
Signaling, Covering Principles ofOperation and Types ofApparatus. 1908.
The Electric Journal.
Rapid Advances in Technology. 1981. IRJ. August. [Series ofmini-articles within
a regular feature, "Signalling Equipment Review. Information supplied by
manufactureres. One article, on Key Tokens, listed independently].
Raymond, William G. 1917. The Elements ofRailroad Engineering. 3rd ed.
New York: John Wiley & Sons.
REB Adds Bookstore & Library. 1994. RA. July.
Robbins, Michael. 1967. Points & Signals: A Railway Historian at Work.
London: George Allen & Unwin, Ltd.
Rolt, Lionel T.e. 1982. Redfor Danger. 4th ed., rev. London: The Bodley Head.
Romania Raises Rail Capacity to Meet Traffic Growth. 1980. IRJ. December.
Rumsey, Alan F. Developing Standards for New Technology. Signal Systems for
Rail Transit Applications. 1998. (Paper Presented at 6th International
Conference on Computer Aided Design, Manufacture and Operation in the
Railway & Other Advanced Mass Transit Systems. Comprail 198). Lisbon,
Sept. 1998. http://www.tsd.org/papers/comp 198. doc.
Safe Enough Replaces Fail-Safe. 1984. RGI. November.
Safety Must Be The Driving Force. 1997. IRJ. November.
Savarzeiz, Rene. 1981. Signals in the Cab. RG. November.
Seinen Langs de Spoorbaan Vroeger En Nu. 1984. Utrecht: Het Nederlands
Spoorwegmuseum.
Seko, Iwao. 1979. Electric Facilities ofShinkansen. Japanese Railway
Engineering. Volume 19, #2.
Seminar-cum-Study Tour on Modernization ofRailway Signalling & Tele-
communications. 1982. Volume II, Technical Lecture & Country Papers.
Bangkok: ESCAP.
Shackleton, J.T. 1976. History ofRailways. London; Chartwell Books.
Shao-ming, Liang. 1979. Investing in More Modem Signalling. IRJ. November.
443
Shouji, Sigeo & Otsuki, Koukich. 1997. Cosmos Solves the Problem of History.
IRJ. March.
Siemens Builds R6m Signals Network for SA Railway. 1973. S.A. Engineer &
Electrical Review. August.
Signalbox. 2000. Signalling in the USA. Canadian Railway. British Railway
Signals. [Website: www.trainweb.comlsignalbox].
Signal Equipment Review. 1981. IRJ. August.
Signaling Systems ." . 1898. American Engineer & Railroad Journal. January.
Signalling Equipment Review. 1981. IRJ. August.
Signals & Safeworking. ud. Queensland Railway.
Siemens & GEC-A: Will They Won't They. 1995. IRJ. August.
(Signal Patterns). 1952. Eisenbahntecnische Roundscheau.
Signalling Control ... Will be Merged. 1997. IRJ. December.
Simmons, Jack. 1986. The Railways ofBritain. 3rd ed. London: Macmillan
London, Ltd.
Simplified Block Signalling. 1984. IRJ. August.
Skaballanovich, V.S. 1984. SZD Extends Cab Signalling to Cover High Speed
Running. RGI October.
Smith, W.R. (ORE-IUC). 1987. Letter to Compiler. July 10.
_.1988. Letter to Compiler. March 9.
Solomon, Brian. 2003. Railroad Signalling. St Paul (MN): MBI Publishing.
Sophisticated Cab Signalling. 1994. IRJ. Special Issue.
Starkey, S. 1944. The History & Development of Signalling on the Railways of
South Africa. Institution ofRailway Signal Engineers Proceedings, 1943.
Reading (UK): Greenslade and Co. (Above article with addition in SA Rail.
[Special Supplement], 1974).
Station Signalling Raises RAN Capacity. 1981. RGI October.
Sterner, B. J. 1978. Computerized Interlocking System-Multi-Dimensional
Structure in the Pursuit of Safety. Railway Engineer International. Nov-Dec.
_. ud. A Geographical Model for Computerized Interlocking and Dispatching.
Statens Jamvagar (Symposium on 'Railway Cybernetics').
Talbot, Frederick A. 1911. The Railway Conquest ofthe World. London:
William Heinemann.
Tansley, Brian W. 1985. Railway Visual Signals: Technologies Old & New.
(1985 Committee Reports & Technical Papers). Washington, D.C.: AAR.
444
Taylor, Maxwell. 1949. Railway Signalling. London: Sampson Low, Publisher.
Technical Regulations ofthe Union of German Railroad Administrations. 1873.
RG. September 20.
Telecom Expands Its Role in Railways. 1995. IRJ. September.
Thomas, J.M. 1993. Train Control & Development in Modern Railway
Transportation. (Proceedings International Conference ofRailways, ICE).
London: Thomas Telford.
Train Manager System Cuts Costs. 1997. IRJ. July.
Trainorders.com. 2008. Eastern Railroads Discussion>Cab-Signals? http://www.
trainorders.comldiscussion .... May 27.
Train Shed Cyclopedia. 1972. Signals & Signal Symbols from the 1911 Railway
Signaling Dictionary. Novato (CA): Newton K. Gregg, Publisher. Reprint.
Tratman, Edward E.R. 1908. Railway Track and Track Work 1908. 3rd ed.
The Engineering News Publishing Co.
Tuma, J. 1979. A Pictorial Encyclopedia ofTransport. London: Hamlyn.
Tumey, Drew. 2008. Issues of Control. April 15. http://www.railway-technology.
com/features/feature1871/.
Union Internationale des Chemins de fer. 1975. Lexique General des Terms
Ferroviares. Karlsruhe: Verlag MaIsch & Vogel.
_. 1961. Principles to be Observed in the Case of a Future International System
of Signaling. UIC. Code.
_. 1972. Collection ofSignalling Terms. Paris: Puble Par Ie Secretarial General
de L 'UIC.
_.1961. Speed & Directional Signalling. UIC. Code.
US&S: On the Move Again. 1986. RA. October.
US&S & RMS Form Signa1com Canada. 1986. RA. May.
USDOTIUSDOD. 1999. Federal Radio-Navigation Plan. Washington, D.C.:
USDOTIUSDOD.
United Nations Technical Assistance Administration for Asia & the Far East.
1954. Railway Operations & Signalling Techniques in Europe, Japan and
the US.A. New York: United Nations.
Vanns, Michael A. 1997. An Illustrated History ofSignalling. Shepperton,
Surrey (UK): Ian Allan.
Vantuono; W. 1993. Transit Signalling: The Next Generation. RA. October.
Victorian Government Railways. 1932. Sydney: Betterment & Publicity Board.
445
VR Helps to Establish New Baltic Railways. 1993. IRJ October.
Wayside Control: Microlok (r) II Wayside Control System. http://www.switch.
com/wayside/microlok.html.
Wayside Signals & Signs: Hows and Whys (#p493323). 2008. Jan. 17.
http://railroad.net/forums/ ....
Wayside Signals. ud. National Transportation Library TRT. http://ntlsearch.bts.
gov/tris/nt?/nhtsa/trhi.shtm? nn=Demtrysw. (Transportation Research
Thesaurus). (6-10-08).
Weber, Olivier. 1980. The SNCF Signalling System for Very High Speed & Its
Possibilities of Extension. Rl March.
Wehner, Ludwig. 1981. How Electronics Are Changing DB's Signals. RGI
December.
Welty, Gus. 1986. ATCS: A Management Tool. RA. October.
_.1988. BN & ARES: 'Control' in a New Dimension. RA. May.
_. 1988. FEC: Systems-wide with ATC. RA. February.
_.1988. For CSX at Savannah, A Signal Achievement. RA. February.
_.1997. Remote Control: Efficient, Safe--and Under Challenge. RA.
February.
Whitehouse, W.H. 1985. New Technology for Signalling & Telecommunication
Systems. Rl March.
With Fast-Track Design-Build CSX Upgrades Line in No Time. 1998.
ENR. August.
Xishi, Wang, & Bin, Ning. 1994. The Research on Safety Control Systems for
Chinese Railways. In Transportation Systems: Theory & Applications 0
Advanced Technology edited by Liu, B. & Blosservill, J.U. International
Federation ofAutomatic Control. London: Pergamon.
Yamonouchi, Shuichiro. 1979. Safety & ATC ofShinkansen. Japanese Railway
Engineering. Vol. 19, #2.
Yagi, Masao. 1978. Application of ATC to Busy Lines with Commuteer Train
Traffic. Japanese Railway Engineer. Volume 18, #3.
Yellow as a Color for Distant Signals NY, NH, & HRR. 1899. American
Engineering & Railroad Journal. January.
Yoshimura, Hiroshi. 1975. Matching Modem Signaling to Traffic
Requirements. Developing Railways.
Zoetardt, R. 1995. Combined SSI & ATC: The Solution for New Signalling
446
Projects. In Transportation Systems: Theory & Applications ofAdvanced
Technology edited by Liu, B. and Blosservill, lD. International Federation
ofAutomatic Control. London: Pergamon.
ii Trade Literature
Adams & Westlake Co. 1962. Adlake Electric Switch Lamps. Elkhart, Indiana.
_. 1952. No 1112 & 1112.5 Switch Lamp.
_. ud. No 1307 AAR Switch Lamp.
Alkmaar: See Nederlandse.
AllenRailroad.Com. www.allenrailroad.com.
Alsthom Atlantique. Railway Light Signals. Saint-Quen.
Alsthom Signalisation. ud. Signalling. Saint-Quen.
Atlantic Track & Turnout Co. 1987. Reference Catalog. Bloomfield, NJ.
Bethlehem Steel Corp. 1955, 1981. Bethlehem Switch Stands. Bethlehem, PA.
Cleveland Frog & Crossing Co. ud. Track Specialties. Cleveland.
DEP. (Advertisement). 1983. BronsonlRandall. RA. Qctober.
Dorman's Infrastructure Advantage. www.dorman.co.ukJrailinfrastructure/
Ericsson Signal Systems AB. 1981. Automatic Train Control. Stockholm.
_. ud. Automatic Train Control - ATC Advance Intermittent System.
_. 1982. Control & Supervision System for Railway Traffic.
_. 1981. Micro Computer Controlled Interlocking System.
_. ud. Railway Signalling.
_. 1981. Railway Signalling Systems.
_.1978. SJ's ATC-System.
Field & Grant Ltd/Tyer & Co. 1987. Tyer Equipmentfor Railway Signalling
Systems.
_. ud. Key Token Instrument TY30.
_. ud. Key Token Instrument Accessories.
Foster Rail Products. 1983. Trackwork: Frogs, Switches, Turnouts, Light
Trackwork Pittsburgh.
Ganz Villamossagi Muvek. ud Railway Signalling & Interlocking Equipment.
Budapest.
GE Transportation: See Incremental ....
GEC-General Signal, Ltd. 1972. Dartford Resignalling. Borehamwood, Hert.,
447
UK.
_.1979. Main Line & Urban Resignalling Eastern Region, British Rail.
_. 1974. West Coast Main Line Resignalling in Scotland.
General Railway Signal Co. ca. 1913. Electric Interlocking Handbook.
_. 1954. Elements ofRailway Signalling.
_.1925. GRS Color Light & Position Light Signals.
_. 1960. GRS Range Lanterns.
_.1961. Type SA Color-Light
Hall Switch & Signal Co. ca. 1913. General Catalogue: Telephone & Telegraph
Apparatus (Section 6).
Hayes Track Appliance Co. 1971. Catalog ofDerails, Bumping Posts, and
Wheel Stops. Richmond (IN): Hayes Track Appliance Co.
"Iflt's Exotic--We've Got It" (tm). 1993. (Advertisement). RA. October.
Incremental Train Control System (ITSC). 2008. GE Transportation.
www.getransportation.com/na/enitcs.html.
Integra Signum AG. ud. Safety - A Perfect Track Record. Wallisellen
(Switzerland).
Jeumont-Schneider. 1983. Products & Achievements.
Kopp Glass, Inc. ud. Kopp. Swissvale, PA.
_. 1987. L.A. Provenzano. Letter to Compiler. Date??
Kyosan Electric Manufacturing Co., Ltd. ud. Total Traffic Control System.
Tokyo.
McKensie and Holland, Ltd. 1900. (Catalogue). Worcester UK.
Nederlandse Machinebabriek "Alkmaar." ud. Railway Signalling & Interlocking
Equipment. Alkmaar, The Netherlands.
Nelson Iron Works. (Catalogue excerpts). Seattle.
Nippon Signal Co., Ltd. 1988. Railway & Road Traffic Signal Div. Tokyo.
Pettibone Proven. 1989. (Advertisement). RA. April.
Rac (Railroad Accessories Corp). (Product Information). Minneapolis (Safetrans).
Safetrans. ud. Signal & Communications Technology for Tomorrow.
Minneapolis.
_. 1988. You're Looking at a Single-lens Colorlight Signal Without a
Single Moving Part. (Advertisement). RA. January.
Tyer & Co.: See Field & Grant.
Westinghouse Brake & Signal Co. (Australia) Ltd. 1983. (Catalogue).
448
Chippenham, Wilt. UK.
_. ud. 2000 Signals.
_. (Signal Catalogue).
Westinghouse Saxby Farmer, Ltd. ud. Neale's Single Line Combined Ball Token
& Block Instrument. Calcutta.
Wherever Trains ... Siemens Signalling. ud. Braunschweig: Siemens AG.
Wunderlich, Wilhelm M. 1972. Safety Systems for Railway Signalling in
Germany. Braunschweig: Siemens AG.
iii Signal Code Materials
(Alphabetized by Nation)
Algeria. 1968. Reglement General de Securite (Titre I, Signaux). Algers:
Societe Nationale des Chemins de fer Algeriencs.
Argentina. 1958. Reglamento Interno Tecnico Operativo. Burenos Aires:
Empresa Ferrocarriles del Estado Argentina.
Australia, New South Wales. ud. Signal Indications. Sydney: Public Transport
Commission ofNSW, Signal & Communication Branch.
_. 1969. Signal Indication-Single Light.
_. ud. (Standardised Indications).
_. ud. Signalling.
Australia, Queensland. ud. Fixed Signals. Brisbane: Queensland Railways.
_.1965. Standard Signals.
_. 1977. Standard Signals-Electrical.
Australia, Victoria. Woolley, G.F. 1958-1. V.R. Signal Systems (1. Manual
Signalling). News Letter. August.
_. 1958-2. V.R. Signal Systems (2. Power Signalling). News Letter. September.
_. ud. Signals. Melbourne: Victoria Railways.
Australia, Western Australia. 1974. General Appendix to the Book ofRules &
to the Working Time Table. Perth: Western Australian Government Railways.
Austria. 1979. Signalvorshrift. Wein: Osterreichische Bundesbahnen.
Bangladesh, Habib Ahmed. 1989. Information on Signalling Railway System of
Bangladesh. Dhaka: Ministry of Communications, Railway Division.
Belgium. 1980. Reglement General de la Signalisation (Fascicule I - Signaux,
449
Titre I1I-Signauz Fixes). Bruxelles: Societe Nationale des Chemins de fer
Belges.
Bolivia. 1950. Reglamento de Operacion. La Paz: Ferrocarril de Antofagasta a
Bolivia.
Brazil. 1960. Codigo Brasileiro de Sinais Ferrorviarios. Instrucao de
Sinalizacao. Rio de Janeiro: Rede Ferroviaria Federal, S.A.
Bulgaria. 1986. Letter from Unions Scientifique et Technique de Bulgarie to
Compiler. October 16.
Canada. 1961. Uniform Code ojOperating Rules.. Ottawa: Board ofTransport
Commissioners for Canada.
_.1975. Rule Signal Instruction Aid. Montreal: Canadian National Railways.
_. ud. Blocking and Interlocking Signals. Montreal: Canadian Pacific Railways.
Chile. ud. Reglamento General de Movilizacion-Anexo A. Santiago Empressa
Ferrocarriles del Estado de Chile.
China, Guang Hu tong. 1989. Aspects & Meanings of Colour Light Signals &
Semaphore Signals in China. Xian: Xian Railway Signal Factory of China.
Colombia. 1987. Reglamento de Movilizacion de Trense. Bogota: Ferrocarriles
Nacionales de Columbia.
Czechoslovakia. ud. Railway Interlocking System.. Praha: Automatizace
zeleznicni Dopravy.
_. Brezna, Ludmila. 1986. Letter to Compiler. August 5.
Denmark. 1985. Signal Reglemnt. Kopenhagen: Danische Staatsbahnen.
Finland. 1984. Nykyisin Kaytossa Olevatopastimet Jan Nilla Annettavat
Opasteet. Helsinki: Valtionratatiet.
_.1976. Signals.
_. ud. (Signals).
France. 1985. (Illustrations). Paris: Societe Nationale des Chemins de fer
Francais.
_.1934. Code des Signaux de 1934.
_.1885. Rapport.
German Federal Republic. 1959. Signalbuch. Hannover: Deutsche Bundesbahn.
_. 1981. Signalbuch.
German Democratic Republic. 1971. Signalbuch. Berlin: Deutsche Reichsbahn.
_. 1984. Berichtigung Nr. 2, Signalbuch.
German Empire. 1875. Signal-Ordnungfur die Eisenbahnen Deutschlands.
450
Leipzig: Deutscher Eisenbahn-Verwaltungen.
Hungary. ud. (Signals). Budapest: Magyar Allamvasutak.
India. ud. (Signals). New Delhi: Railway Board, Indian Railways.
India. 1896. General Rules. Bombay: Great Indian Peninsula Railways.
Indonesia. 1971. Reglemen 3. Bandung: Perusahaan Negara Kereta Api.
Italy. 1947. Regolamento Sui Segnail. Roma: Ferrovie dello Stato.
_. 1983. Tabella dei Segnali. Roma: Azienda Autonoma delle Ferrovie dello
Stato.
Ivory Coast/Burkina-Faso. 1984. Reglement Signauz. Abidjan: Regie des
Chemins de fer Abidjan-Niger.
Japan Association of Signal Industries. ca. 1975. Present Status 0/Signal
Industry in Japan. Tokyo.
Japan National Railways. ud. Railway Signals. Tokyo: JNR.
Kenya. ud. (Signals). Nairobi: Kenya Railways.
Korea, Republic of. 1985. Railway Signalling System. Seoul: Korean National
Railroad.
Mexico. ud. Reglamento de Transportes y de la Normas de Construccion.
Mexico, D.F.: Ferrocarriles Nacionales de Mexico.
The Netherlands. 1975. Seinreglement. Utrecht: Nederlandse Spoorwegen.
New Zealand. 1989. Signal Rules. Wellington: New Zealand Railways.
Norway, ud. Sikkerhetenfram/or alt er jernbanens/orste bud. Oslo:
Norwegischen Staatsbahnen.
Pakistan. ud. Two Aspect Signals. Islamabad: Pakistan Railways.
_. ud. Multiple Aspect Colour Light Signals.
Poland. 1975. Przepisy Sygnalizacji na Poliskich Kolejach Panstwowychwych.
Warszawa: Polskie Koleje Panstowe.
Portugal. 1981. Regulamento Geral de Seguranca (II-Sinais). Lisboa: Caminhoa
de Ferro Portugueses.
_. 1984. Aditamento ao Regulamento Geral de Seguranca II Sinais.
_. 1986. Aditamento ao Regulamento Geral de Seguranca II Signais.
Rumania. ud. Semnale Mecanice, Seminale Luminoase. Bucuresti: Chemins de
fer roumains.
South Africa. 1974. Basic Building Blocks o/Mechanical Signalling.
Johannesburg: South African Railways.
_. 1949. Double Lines: Auxiliary Block Section Working (Circular No. X.41).
451
_.1947. General Appendix No.3 (Part 1).
_. ud. Multi-Aspect Signalling. [Seimens product via SAR].
_. 1962. Train Working Regulations for the Guidance ofOfficers
and Employees in the Service ofthe SAR Administration.
_. ud. Working ofContinuous Sections ofDouble Line Controlled by
Automatic & Semi-Automatic Colour-Light Signalling.
_. 1936. Signalling Standards/Sinjaal Standards.
Spain. 1978. Instruccion General No.1 Senales. Madrid: Red Nacional de los
Ferrocarriles Espanoles.
Sweden. 1979. Sakerhetsordning. Stockholm: Statens Jarnvager.
Switzerland. 1981. Signalbuch. Bern: Schweizerischen Bundesbahnen. (Also a
French-language edition).
_.1983. Schweizerische Bundesban - Signale.
Taiwan. Chen, H.M. 1989. Letter to compiler. Taipei: Taiwan Railway Admin.
Technical Regulations of the Union of German Railroad Administrations. 1873.
Railroad Gazette. September 20.
Turkey. ud. Signal Systems Used by the Turkish Railways. Ankara: Turkiye
Bilimsel ve Teknik Arastirmer Kurumu.
Union of African Railways, General Secretariat. 1983. Draft International
Signalling Prepared by the Working Group Meeting Held in Lusafrom
14 to 16 1983. Kinshasa.
United Kingdom, War Office. 1955. Military Engineering. Volume VIII-
Transportation. Part IV, Railway Operation, Supplement #1 - Military
Rule Book.
United Railway Organization/Organisation fur die Zusammenarbeit der
Eisenbahnen. 1962. Einheitliches Eisenbahn - Signalsystem der Osshd
Mitglidesbahnen. Warsawa.
USSR. 1979. (Railway Signal Code). Mokba.
United States. Association of American Railroads. American Railway Signaling
Principles & Practices.
Chapter I. History and Development ofRailway Signaling. 1953. Chicago.
Chapter II. Symbols, Aspects and Indications.
Chapter III. Principles and Economics ofSignaling. 1955. Chicago.
Chapter XII. Semaphore Signals. 1948. New York.
Chapter XIII. Light Signals and Light Signal Lamps. 1949. New York.
452
Chapter XIV. Definitions. 1965. Chicago.
Chapter XV. Block Signal Systems. 1955. Chicago.
Chapter XVI. Interlocking. 1952. Chicago.
Chapter XVII. Mechanical & Electro-Mechanical Interlocking. 1947.
New York.
Chapter XIX. Electric Interlocking. 1951. Chicago.
Chapter XXIII. Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Protection. 1953.
Chicago.
Chapter XXVI. Relay Interlocking. 1961. Chicago.
United States. Association of American Railroads. 1949-1965. American Railway
Signaling Principles & Practices. Chicago & New York: AAR.
Chapter 2. 1956. Symbols, Aspect & Indicatirm.
3. 1955. Principles & Economics ojSignaling.
12. 1948. Semaphore Signals.
13. 1949. Light Signals & Lighted Signal Lamps.
_. Foley, P.R. 1975. Letter and enclosures to compiler.
(Sample illustrations of Signs). Washington, D.C.
_. 1974. Specifications for Signal Roundels, Lenses, Discs, and Cones.
Signal Manual. Washington, D.C.
_.1965. The Standard Code ojOperating Rules. Chicago.
United States. Baltimore & Ohio Railroad. 1953. Rules & Regulations ojthe
Operating Department. Baltimore.
United States. 1967. Consolidated Code ojOperating Rules. [Incomplete
Bibliographic information: Code may be issued by individual participating
railways; that is the view of the librarian at California State Railway
Museum Library]. [Kanner includes three such codes; the edition he employs
is from 1945. Northwestern has a 1967 edition. That edition is from Northern
Pacific Railway, St Paul, MN; also Great Northern Railway].
_. Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad. 1977. Illinois Divsion Time Table
#9. Chicago: CRIP.
_. 1986. General Code ojOperating Rules. [Kanner lists a 1989 edition;
adopted by Atchison, Topeka & Sante Fe among other railways].
_. Penn Central Transportation Co. ud. Rule Book. Philadelphia.
_. Southern Pacific Transportation Co. Rule Book. San Francisco.
_.1968. Uniform Code ojOperating Rules. [Kanner includes 1968 edition
453
Chapter XIV. Definitions. 1965. Chicago.
Chapter XV. Block Signal Systems. 1955. Chicago.
Chapter XVI. Interlocking. 1952. Chicago.
Chapter XVII. Mechanical & Electro-Mechanical Interlocking. 1947.
New York.
Chapter XIX. Electric Interlocking. 1951. Chicago.
Chapter XXIII. Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Protection. 1953.
Chicago.
Chapter XXVI. Relay Interlocking. 1961. Chicago.
_. Foley, P.R. 1975. Letter and enclosures to compiler.
(Sample illustrations of Signs). Washington, D.C.
_. 1987. Signal Manual. Definitions for Technical Terms used in Railroad
Signals. Revised (part 1.1.1.). Washington, D.C.: AAR
_. 1974..Signal Manual. Specifications for Signal Roundels, Lenses, Discs, and
Cones. AAR: Washington, D.C.
_.1965. The Standard Code ofOperating Rules. Chicago.
United States. Baltimore & Ohio Railroad. 1953. Rules & Regulations ofthe
Operating Department. Baltimore.
United States. 1967. Consolidated Code ofOperating Rules. [Incomplete
Bibliographic information: Code may be issued by individual participating
railways; that is the view of the librarian at California State Railway
Museum Library]. [Kanner includes three such codes; the edition he employs
is from 1945. Northwestern has a 1967 edition. That edition is from Northern
Pacific Railway, St Paul, MN; also Great Northern Railway].
_. Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad. 1977. Illinois Divsion Time Table
#9. Chicago: CRIP.
_. 1986. General Code ofOperating Rules. [Kanner lists a 1989 edition;
adopted by Atchison, Topeka & Sante Fe among other railways].
_. Penn Central Transportation Co. ud. Rule Book. Philadelphia.
_. Southern Pacific Transportation Co. Rule Book. San Francisco.
_. 1968. Uniform Code ofOperating Rules. [Kanner includes 1968 edition
utilized by Rock Island Lines, Missouri Pacific Railroad and other Railway
systems].
Uruguay. ud. Signals. Montevideo: Ferrocarriles del Estado.
Yugoslavia. ud. Signani Pravlnik. Beograd: Zajednica Jugosovenskih
454
Transportation-Markings: ..
A Study In Communication Monograph Series.
Transportation-Markings: Any Device Which Aids A
Transportation Mode (Road, Rail, Aero, Marine) By
Giving Guidance, By Expressing Regulations Or By
Providing Warnings.
Transportation Markings: An Approved Library Of
Congress Subject Heading.
Transportation-Markings: Not A Synonym for Road!
Pavement/Traffic/Carriageway/Surface Markings.
Pavement & Other·Forms·OfMarkings Are
Components of Transportation-Markings.
Transportation Markings Has Become Transportation-
Markings To Better Indicate That T-M Represents A
Unified Perspective For All Safety Aids.
T-M:·A Historical, Semiotic, Communication &
Taxonomic Study In An Integrative, Systematic &
Holographic Framework.
978-0-918941-30-5